diff options
Diffstat (limited to '77886-0.txt')
| -rw-r--r-- | 77886-0.txt | 12810 |
1 files changed, 12810 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/77886-0.txt b/77886-0.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..221ead2 --- /dev/null +++ b/77886-0.txt @@ -0,0 +1,12810 @@ +*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK 77886 *** + + + + +Transcriber’s Note: Italic text is enclosed in _underscores_. +Superscript characters are preceded by ^. Small capital text has been +changed to all capital. Additional notes will be found near the end of +this eBook. + + + + + [Illustration: Map of Mexico and South America] + + + + + AN + HISTORICAL ACCOUNT + OF ALL THE + VOYAGES ROUND THE WORLD, + PERFORMED BY + ENGLISH NAVIGATORS; + INCLUDING THOSE LATELY UNDERTAKEN + By ORDER of his PRESENT MAJESTY. + + THE WHOLE + Faithfully Extracted from the JOURNALS of the + VOYAGERS. + + DRAKE, undertaken in 1577-80 + CAVENDISH, 1586-88 + COWLEY, 1683-86 + DAMPIER, 1689-96 + COOKE, 1708-11 + ROGERS, 1708-11 + CLIPPERTON and SHELVOCKE, 1719-22 + ANSON, 1740-44 + BYRON, 1764-66 + WALLIS, 1766-68 + CARTERET, 1766-69 + COOK, 1768-71 + + TOGETHER WITH + + That of SYDNEY PARKINSON, Draftsman to JOSEPH BANKS, Esq; who + circumnavigated the Globe with Capt. COOK, in his Majesty’s Ship the + ENDEAVOUR. + AND + + The Voyage of Mons. BOUGAINVILLE round the World, Performed by Order of + the French King. + + Illustrated with Maps, Charts, and Historical Prints. + + IN FOUR VOLUMES. + + To which is added, + + An APPENDIX. Containing the JOURNAL of a VOYAGE to the NORTH POLE, by + the Hon. Commodore PHIPPS, and Captain LUTWIDGE. + ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── + VOLUME THE FIRST. + ═════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ + LONDON: + Printed for F. NEWBERY, the Corner of St. Paul’s Church-Yard. + ──────────── + M DCC LXXIV. + + + + + PREFACE. + + +Perhaps there never was brought together, in so small a compass, in any +language, a more copious collection of rational entertainment, than will +be met with in the following sheets. To trace the progress of the +discoveries that have successively been made, in passing round the +globe, must fill the reader’s mind with such a variety of new objects, +as cannot fail to raise his wonder, and entertain him with infinite +delight. + +He will, in this work, be safely conducted through regions that were +once thought inaccessible, and be made acquainted with countries +altogether different from that in which he dwells. Every page he reads +will furnish him with novelties, and every Voyage will bring him nearer +to that unknown country, in search of which so many able commanders have +been sent in vain. + +The discovery of the western continent by Columbus, gave geographers +reason to believe, that a like continent existed somewhere in the south. +Without such an equipoise they could not conceive how the globe could +preserve its balance. + +Magellhaens, a Portuguese mariner, was the first who attempted to +immortalize his name by the discovery. He passed the Streights, that to +this day bear his name, and entered the Pacific Ocean, where no European +vessel had ever sailed before. He discovered the Ladrone and Phillippine +Isles, and returned by the Cape of Good Hope, having surrounded the +whole earth, and proved, to demonstration, the spherical figure of the +globe. + +He was followed by navigators of different nations, who, emulous of his +glory, sought to pursue the track, which he had pointed out, with better +success; but the dangers they encountered, and the disasters they met +with, rendered the difficulties that attended the prosecution +insurmountable; many perished, and those who survived were glad to +return home after a fruitless search. + +The ill success which attended these first attempts threw a damp upon +the enterprize, and it remained long unnoticed, except in the writings +of the learned. Some French geographers, fully persuaded of the reality +of such a continent, endeavoured, a few years ago, to revive in their +countrymen the spirit of enterprize, with a view to derive honour to +their country, by compleating the discovery; but the taste for great +navigations among the French seemed entirely extinct, and it was not +till the Dolphin and Tamar had sailed from England that they thought of +renewing it. + +We have been told that his Majesty, our most gracious Sovereign, very +early in life, formed the design of distinguishing himself by +patronizing the prosecution of new discoveries in the unknown regions of +the southern hemisphere; and that he declared his intention, soon after +he came to the crown, of appropriating a part of his revenue for that +particular purpose. Nothing can more endear a British monarch to his +maritime people, than a steady perseverance in this laudable resolution. + +The love of glory is a passion natural to Kings; the conquerors of the +world are placed before them as patterns, and they are encouraged by +example to seek occasions for war to acquire a name. But how much more +glorious is it to enlarge the earth with a new region, than to triumph +in the conquest of some rival state!--to extend protection to a remote, +and it may be, a defenceless people, than to boast of levelling +fortresses, and, by a general carnage of friends and foes, become master +of a few desolated towns, purchased at an expence, a thousand times +greater than what is necessary to insure the success of new discoveries. + +Can there be any comparison between the glory of a successful +enterprize, founded on the laudable motives of diffusing happiness +through regions, whose inhabitants, for ought we know, are yet immersed +in savage darkness; and that of engaging in a hazardous war, by which +millions of treasure must be expended, and thousands of lives +sacrificed? Is not the chance of succeeding in the first case much more +probable than that of conquering in the other? And does not success in +the discovery of the long sought region of the south, promise much +greater advantages to a trading nation, than the conquest of any part of +the earth on this side the globe? Did not the little Phœnician state +reap a more glorious harvest from the discoveries of its merchants, than +Alexander could boast from all his conquests? Was it not the +perseverance of the Princes Henry, John, and Emanuel, in supporting the +charges of prosecuting new discoveries in the fifteenth century, that +laid the foundation of the Portuguese greatness, whose territories in +Europe are of no considerable extent? + +If the glory of aggrandizing a state, and perpetuating a name to +posterity be the first object of human ambition, where, among all the +tyrants who have depopulated the earth, can be produced a conqueror, +whose name will be remembered, when that of Christopher Columbus is +forgotten? Or where shall we look for a monarch, who, after having +spread murder and desolation throughout the world, descended to the +grave with that heart-felt satisfaction that attended the Florentine +merchant Americus Vespucius, when he saw all Europe agreeing, with one +consent, to transfer his name to more than a third part of the +terrestrial globe? + +The success which has attended our gracious Monarch’s first essays in +the Voyages we are now about to relate, though it has yet produced no +solid advantages to compensate the sums expended in the prosecution of +them, yet it has been such as to open the way to new islands, from whose +inhabitants new arts may be learnt, and from whose productions new +acquisitions may be made, both to the vegetable and fossil kingdoms, by +which the regions of science may be enlarged, and the gardens of the +curious enriched and beautified. + +It is no small satisfaction to an inquisitive mind (were there no other +advantage to be gained from these Voyages) to be made acquainted with +the genius, the arts, the various pursuits, the customs, the manners, +the religious notions, the distinctions of rank, and the subordination +that is to be met with among the people of various islands and +countries, distinct from each other, and from us, in language, habits, +learning, and ways of living. Who is it that can read of the poverty and +misery of the wretched inhabitants of _Terra del Fuego_, who have +nothing but the skins of beasts loosely thrown over them, to defend them +from the severity of the cold, in a climate so dreadful, that two out of +twelve of the attendants of Mr. Banks and Dr. Solander, being overtaken +in a storm, in a clear evening, in the middle of summer, perished at the +foot of a mountain, though they had but two miles to go to receive +succour? Nor are they, in any respect, better provided with food than +with raiment. The woods that are three parts in four of the year +impenetrable on account of the snow, and the sea-coast and rivers that +are equally inaccessible, are their only resources. Who then, I say, can +read the story of these forlorn creatures, without lamenting the +condition of human beings, destitute, as these appear to be, of every +comfort and convenience, and exposed every moment to the piercing rigour +of the climate, and the still severer cravings of unsatisfied hunger! + +On the contrary, who can think of these, while, at the same time, he is +told of the pleasurable lives of the happy islanders in the +new-discovered countries, who abound in flesh, fish, and fruits, even to +profusion! without admiring the ways of Providence, that, for purposes +unknown to us, has so unequally bestowed its dispensations. + +When we read in these Voyages of men that eat men, not for hunger, but +from savage ferocity, we shudder to think of the depravity of our +nature, and are convinced of the necessity of bounding our passions by +wholesome laws, and of correcting the irregularities of our appetites by +the restraints of religion. + +But what can we think of those civilized Barbarians, of those polished +monsters, who, with all the advantages of religion and enlightened +education, could yet be so wantonly cruel, as to introduce a disease +among a happy people, odious in its nature, and, to them, more +pernicious than a pestilence in its effects; who could carry the +venereal taint between the tropics, and entail it as a curse upon those +by whom they were most highly favoured? + +Who but must regret the friendly hospitality of these honest, +unsuspecting islanders to strangers, the very best of whom but +ill-deserved their favours? But who can with-hold his indignation at the +ingratitude of the meaner sort, with which their benefactors were +requited? + +The variety of incidents that happened in the course of these Voyages, +when they come to be historically recited, unencumbered with the jargon +of sea-phrases, will afford a fund of entertainment, seldom to be met +with in the productions of the press. The many singular adventures, +unforeseen dangers, and providential escapes, that every ship +experienced in passing round the globe, can only be conceived by those +who read, and believed by those who have seen the wonders of the deep. + +Nothing can excite or gratify curiosity more than relations of +marvellous events that happen in succession, and in circumstances +equally critical and important. The moment a ship launches into the +ocean to proceed on new discoveries, every man on board demands his +share of attention as well as the commanding officer. The story of the +black, who, with his two companions, perished on the mountains of _Terra +del Fuego_, is no less affecting than that of the murder of the poor +Indians, who set the Endeavour at defiance, and bravely opposed the +landing of the crew. + +There is not an object that presents itself either by sea or land, but +affords some degree of use or speculation. The fish that swarm about the +ship, and the fowls that present themselves in the ocean, are +indications by which the skilful mariner avails himself, either to guard +against the storm, or to prepare for land; and the reader, as +circumstances arise, either shares his danger, or partakes of his +refreshment. + +When the Endeavour is encircled in the wide ocean with rocks of coral, +her sheathing beaten off, and her false keel floating by her side, a +hole in her bottom, and the men alternately fainting at the pumps, what +heart is so callous, as not to sympathize with the despairing crew, and, +anxious for their safety, drop a tear for their deliverance? + +And what must be the joy of every feeling heart, when, after sailing +many hundred leagues, and arriving safe at Batavia, it was found that +two of her planks next the keel, and part of a third in the ship’s +bottom, were, for six feet together, rubbed thinner, by her friction +against the rocks, than the ordinary sole of a man’s shoe! + +Who that shall interest himself in the fate of Toobaiah, an Indian +priest, who voluntarily offered himself as a guide against the attacks +of the neighbouring islanders, and of the Indian youth Tayota, who +accompanied him, but must regret the death of the last, and admire the +more than Christian friendship of the former, who could not long survive +the loss of his companion? + +It is to bring together a vast variety of interesting events, and to +relate them in a narrow compass, that the present work is undertaken. +The Writers of Voyages, having a more important object in view than mere +amusement, are under the necessity of interrupting the thread of their +narrations by the workings of the ship, the bearings and distances of +the capes and bays, the latitudes and longitudes of the various stations +in which their ships cast anchor, the variations of the needle, and the +soundings of the shores; matters, though of infinite concern to future +navigators, and without which the Voyages themselves would be useless, +yet are of no moment to the generality of readers, who are curious only +to know what dangers were encountered, what adventures were met with, +what lands discovered, what people possessed them, what novelties were +seen, what new arts were practised, what wars were carried on, what +weapons and utensils were in use, and, above all, by what laws, +religion, and forms of government, the various nations were +distinguished that lie scattered round the globe. + +These subjects of entertainment the reader will find amply reported in +the course of the Volumes now presented to his view. And as the +relations are authenticated by gentlemen of known veracity, who were +eye-witnesses, and bear testimony to the truth of the facts, the reader +will find uncommon pleasure in the perusal. + + + + + THE + INTRODUCTION. + + +Previous to our entering upon the detail of the discoveries and +adventures of the English navigators who have surrounded the globe, it +may, perhaps, afford some entertainment to the curious reader, to be +made acquainted with the first steps that led to so bold an undertaking, +and with the characters of those happy geniuses, who not only conceived +the plan, but contributed not a little by their example to facilitate +the execution. + +We are told that the shadow seen in the moon in the time of her eclipse, +first pointed out to the early navigators the true figure of the earth; +and that, from this simple observation, Columbus, by revolving it in his +mind, deduced the possibility of passing round its surface, or, to speak +with more precision, of sailing from one side of the continent to the +other; for as yet one great continent, and one great ocean, with their +appendages, were thought to compose the whole material world. + +Full of this idea, he was naturally led to conclude, that, by sailing in +a direct course from any given point of land on one side, he must of +necessity arrive at another point of land in the same parallel on the +opposite side, provided his provisions were proportioned to the voyage, +and no accident from tempests or shipwreck intervened to interrupt his +progress. It was on this obvious principle that Columbus founded the +certainty of his discovery, the infallibility of which served to support +his hopes, when absolute despair had seized the greatest part of his +followers. + +It is true, that, though the figure of the earth was in effect +conceived, yet its dimensions were wholly unknown: but as the road +over-land to the eastern coasts of the continent was no secret, Columbus +was persuaded that a passage by sea by a western course, if no +intermediate lands prevented, would assuredly bring him to the same +coasts. From his knowledge, therefore, of the position of those +countries, from whence the rich productions of the East were circulated +thro’ all the kingdoms of the West, he was led to steer, first, a +south-west, and then a direct west course, which brought him among those +broken fragments of the western continent, which he at first mistook for +the islands of the Indian Ocean, and to the richest of which he imagined +another voyage would certainly open a passage. + +The discovery being once made, the principle upon which it was grounded +could no longer be concealed. Those belonging to the naval department +about the Court of Spain, who had been most violent in opposing the +undertaking, as appearing to them in no better light than as the +visionary conceit of some crack-brained projector, now assumed another +tone, and affected to speak of it as a discovery that required no +extraordinary talents to accomplish; that it was not the result of +science, but a thing that must follow of course to the first adventurer; +and that it was fortunate for Columbus that he could prevail upon their +Majesties to furnish the means to undertake it, as with such +encouragement there were not wanting officers in the royal navy much +better qualified to have conducted the enterprize, tho’ by his +unparallelled assurance he had obtained the preference. In this slight +and contemptuous manner it was the humour at Court to speak of the new +discovery; and though Columbus, after his return, was for a while +caressed by the Royal Family, yet the frequent repetition of these +indignities could not fail in time to lessen the idea of the merit of a +man who had no advocate to support his credit but the evidence of his +own superior abilities. At a court-entertainment, however, to which he +was invited, an incident happened that contributed not a little to +heighten his character, and mortify his enemies. The conversation at +table turned, as was usual, upon the importance of the new discoveries; +and though all seemed to agree that the advantages would be immense that +must inevitably result to Spain, yet little they thought was due to the +first discoverer, because any ordinary seaman, by keeping his ship’s +head to the westward, must have fallen in with the same countries. +Columbus, without seeming to regard their discourse, when dinner was +over, and the table uncovered, called for an egg, and twirling it about +with his hand, as if by way of amusement, asked if any of the company +could make that egg stand upon its little end without additional +support. The company, after trying their skill, pronounced _the thing +impossible_; when Columbus, taking it again in his hand, and bruising +the shell a little at bottom with his nail, produced it upon the table +standing upright. The company all fell a-laughing, and one cried out, +that any fool could do as much as that. I doubt not, replied Columbus, +but any of you may do it, now you have seen it done; and so may any +miserable pilot in the navy sail to the Indies, now that I have pointed +out the track; but till the issue had shewn it practicable, addressing +himself to the naval gentlemen, that, too, you pronounced an _impossible +thing_. The King and his Royal Consort, particularly the latter, were +highly pleased when they were told this story, admiring the promptness +of a mind which, ever collected, neither malice nor envy could +disconcert. + +Other navigators, equally enterprizing, tho’ less sagacious, were now +inflamed with the desire of immortalizing their names by new +undertakings; so that it is no wonder that the business of discovery +went rapidly on for a succeeding century. + +It was in 1492 that Columbus made his first expedition to the Bahama +Islands; and in 1496, John Cabbot, in the service of England, discovered +the continent of North America. + +Columbus, in his first voyage, had not yet conceived the idea of a +double continent, but believed, as we have already noted, that he had +discovered a passage by sea to those islands in the East that were +already known by the name of the East Indies; in conformity to which he +gave to the islands that he discovered the appellation of the _West +Indies_, which they retain to this day. + +In 1493, having made a second voyage, and carried his discoveries +considerably farther to the South, it is said, he received some faint +notions of a sea beyond a great land, by which the islands he had first +discovered were bounded; but it was not till after his third voyage in +1497, that he attained a sight of that continent which Cabbot had +discovered the year before. + +It may seem, from what has just been said, that the eastern passage to +the Indian Ocean had been discovered by the Portuguese; and that the +East Indies were known to that people before this western discovery by +Columbus: but, though several journies by land had been made, with a +view to the opening an advantageous commerce with the eastern countries, +by Portuguese Ambassadors well instructed in the Arabian language, by +whose address some progress had been made in that business, yet it was +not till 1495 that Bartholomew Diaz doubled the Cape of Good Hope, nor +till the year 1497 (the same year that the American continent was +discovered by Cabbot), that Don Vasquez de Gama, by steering the nearest +course, passed the Cape which Diaz had discovered, and sailed into the +Indian Ocean, where he afterwards made considerable conquests, and by +his prudent management very suddenly diverted the current of Indian +commerce into an entire new channel. The notion, therefore, that +Columbus borrowed his idea of a western passage from the discoveries +made by the Portuguese towards the East, is ill founded. These last had, +indeed, made a considerable progress in their discoveries by land; but +the passages to the Eastern and Western Indies by sea were discovered +about the same time, without the least connection or intelligence +between the respective discoverers. And here we cannot help entering our +protest against the honour ascribed to Columbus by Mr. Campbell, and +other judicious naval historians, as being the first circumnavigator, +because, as Mr. Campbell observes, “it was his [Columbus’s] opinion, +that there was a passage from the North Sea into the South, and from +thence it might be very possible to sail to the East Indies.”----That it +was the opinion of Columbus, that there was a western passage to the +East Indies is readily granted; it was his original idea: but that there +was a passage from the East Indies to Europe, without returning the same +way he went, he could have no conception of, till after the passage by +the Cape of Good Hope was discovered by the Portuguese. Had he dreamt of +an eastern passage _by sea_ to the East Indies, he would most certainly +have preferred it to a western passage, because it might have been +performed without losing sight of land; and therefore, with much less +risque than by launching into an immense unknown ocean, of which no one +could tell the extent. But his notion was, that the earth, like a bowl, +inclosed the sea, and that it could only be traversed from side to side +by water, and then from shore to shore by land. Many irrefragable proofs +of his having no conception of _sailing_ round the globe might be +adduced; but that of his returning the same way back a second time, +without his _knowing_ for certainty, or _believing_ there was any other +sea to sail upon, or having even determined the extent of that sea on +which he had already ventured so far, may serve without farther proof to +convince the intelligent reader, that Columbus had never thought of but +one sea when he undertook his discovery, and that that sea was only to +be crossed from West to East, and _vice versâ_. + +But to proceed:--Soon after the eastern passage to the Indies was laid +open, the coast of Brazil, opposite to the Cape of Good Hope, was +discovered by Cabral, a Portuguese pilot, who was driven out of his +course by stress of weather. The same coast was likewise discovered the +same year by Yannez Pinçon, who commanded a carvel that accompanied +Columbus in his first expedition to the West Indies. This man contested +the honour of the first discovery with Columbus, and insisted that it +was through his perseverance alone that land was descried, the crew of +Columbus having absolutely determined to steer back before the discovery +took place. Be that as it may, this able mariner afterwards examined the +coast from the Bay of Mexico to the Equinoctial Line, and, in the year +1500, discovered the great river of Amazons, which it was thought would +have opened a passage to the South Sea. + +In 1502, Columbus made his fourth and last expedition, when he fully +satisfied himself that the islands he had discovered were totally +disconnected from those he went in quest of, and that another continent +existed besides that which was known to Europeans. He was still, +however, of opinion, that a western passage to the old continent from +the new would be practicable, whenever a way was found to the Great Sea +by which it was surrounded: and now it is not at all improbable but that +he might foretel what afterwards came to pass, that one day or other the +whole globe might be circumnavigated, though he did not live to see it +executed. + +In 1509, the Portuguese first found the way to Sumatra, and from thence +extended their discoveries to the Moluccas. + +About this time a contest arose between the Spaniards and Portuguese, +concerning the right of possessing countries, to which neither of them +had any other claim than that of being the first Europeans who happened +to land upon their coasts: a claim of the same kind his Otaheitean +Majesty may pretend to the western part of Europe, his subject Aotourou +being incontestibly the first Tropical inhabitant that ever set foot on +that continent. This contest, however, the Pope took upon him to decide; +and, to prevent the bloody consequences that might ensue between two +such powerful competitors, he published a bull, which, at that time of +blind obedience, was held decisive, decreeing, that whatever discoveries +were made to the westward should belong to Spain, and such as were made +to the eastward, to Portugal. This seemed for a while to content both +parties; but, in 1520, Ferdinand Magellan, or Magellhanes, as Mr. +Dalrymple affects to call him, having made his famous discovery to the +Molucca Islands by a new passage, the contest was again revived, and the +competitors claimed a second time the Pope’s interposition to settle the +limits of their respective claims by more precise and determinate +boundaries. The claims of the Spaniards were now extended to near three +parts of the globe; and those of the Portuguese, which by a false +representation had been much diminished, were now to be restored, or +rather regulated by a more exact standard. The two contending powers +were to divide the globe between them, by what was then stiled a line of +demarkacion. This _line_ was to cut the globe into two hemispheres, and +was to be acknowledged a _first_ meridian: all the discoveries in the +western hemisphere were to belong to Spain; and all in the eastern to +Portugal. But still there arose a dispute about the precise spot where +this meridian line should be fixed. By the Pope’s bull it had been +placed 100 leagues to the westward of St. Antonio, one of the islands of +Cape Verde; but, by this new regulation, it was removed 270 leagues +farther to the west. This alteration was intended to deprive Portugal of +the possession of the Moluccas; but the Portuguese pilots were not to be +thus deceived: they suffered the line of demarkacion to be fixed; but, +when it was finally determined, they insisted on their right to the +Moluccas, as still within their limits, and future observations have +since confirmed their claims. But, notwithstanding the justice of their +claims (if justice can at all be admitted to exist in cases of +usurpation), the Spaniards held the Moluccas till 1529, when the +Portuguese purchased an exclusive right of trading to them by a loan of +350,000 ducats.----But to return from this digression: + +We have already observed, that the coast of Brazil, and the river of +Amazons, was first discovered by Yannez Pinçon, in 1500; but it was not +till twelve years afterwards that John de Solis discovered the river +Plate. + +In 1513, Vasco Nunez de Bilboa got sight of the Great South Sea, from +the mountains of Pancas in the province of Panama and from that time +Ferdinand Magellan, a Portuguese officer, conceived the design of +surrounding the globe, by finding a passage by which he might enter that +sea. He now began to consider the earth as divided into two continents, +with their concomitant seas; and, as a promontory was found, by the +doubling of which one continent might be visited on both sides, he made +no doubt but that another promontory existed, by which the other might +be visited in like manner. Perhaps the idea of a strait might not at +first strike his mind, till the opening at Cape Virgin suggested it. His +original thought was to coast along to the southward, as the land +trended; and by perseverance, he persuaded himself, that a boundary +would be found, by which the land of the new continent would be +terminated, though he did not, nor could not then ascertain to what +height it might reach. He had in view a nearer way to the Moluccas than +that by the Cape of Good Hope; and he at first imparted his views to the +Ministers of his Court, who, probably suspecting that by such a passage +the right to the Moluccas might be brought in question by Spain, treated +his project with a contemptuous neglect. To a man full of the importance +of such a discovery, nothing could be more mortifying. He determined, +since he was so coolly received at home, to try his fortune abroad. For +this purpose he repaired to the Court of Spain, where, after making +himself known to the leading Minister, he undertook to prove the +Moluccas, and other rich islands then reputed in the East, to be within +the Spanish line of demarkacion to the West, and by a new passage to +them he engaged to confirm the truth of what he advanced incontestibly. + +These propositions, after being properly examined, and approved by the +ablest astronomers and geographers at that time in Spain, was eagerly +embraced by the Emperor Charles the Fifth, an enterprizing Prince, who +then held the kingdom, and who gave him audience in the council-chamber +at Saragossa, and conferred upon him, and his companion Ruy Falero, the +order of St. Jago, both of whom, his Imperial Majesty honoured with the +title of _his Captains_. + +This encouragement, and these honours, could not fail to alarm the Court +of Portugal; but all the interest and opposition which Alvaro de Acasio, +the Portuguese Ambassador, could make, had no effect; the preparations +for the voyage were prosecuted with more than ordinary diligence, and +five ships were soon got in readiness to put to sea. + +But, previous to their setting sail, a difference arose concerning the +necessary forms of command, which had well nigh ruined the voyage before +it was undertaken; the honour of carrying the royal standard was +contested by Ruy Falero, and some other indignities were offered to +Magellan on account of his country. These, however, were redressed by +the interposition of the imperial authority; Ruy Falero was persuaded to +suspend his departure on account of his health, and Magellan was +declared General of the squadron, which was now committed to his sole +direction. + +On the 10th of August, 1519, this little fleet, consisting of the +Admiral’s ship; the St. Antonio, Capt. Juan de Cartagena, Vice-Admiral; +the Victoria, Capt. Luys de Mendoça, Rear-Admiral; the St. Jago, Capt. +Juan Rodriguez Serrano; and the Conception, of which Gasper de Quezada +was Master; left Cadiz, and proceeded to Teneriff, from whence they took +their departure, on the 2d of September, and on the 13th of December +arrived at Rio de Janeiro, on the coast of Brazil, where they staid till +the 27th; and, after being plentifully supplied with all necessary +refreshments at a very moderate price, they weighed anchor, and +continued their voyage, in the course of which much discontent arose +concerning the track they were to steer; but on Easter evening they +entered St. Julian river, and were next day ordered on shore by the +General to hear mass. Three of the Captains refused to obey; namely, +Luys de Mendoça, Gasper de Quezado, and Juan de Cartagena, this last +being already in arrest for disrespect to his General. + +Their disobedience put Magellan on his guard. He perceived that the +majority both of officers and men were averse to the undertaking, and +that a general murmuring prevailed throughout the whole squadron. Only a +few trusty friends were ready to support their General, and willing to +follow wherever he should lead. The weather was now set in very severe, +and the Spaniards, unused to the rigour of such a climate, were hardly +to be restrained. They represented the inutility of proceeding, as they +were already in a climate too boisterous and inclement to be navigated +by Spaniards; that it could never be the Emperor’s intention to +sacrifice the lives of his subjects, without the least prospect of +advantage to the State; and that now it was manifest, though the +discovery were certain, the navigation would be impracticable, and +therefore useless. To these representations, and others more full of +asperity, Magellan coolly made answer, “that he was determined to die +rather than return back; that he should pass the winter where he then +was; and that neither provisions nor wine should be wanting to those who +would be contented with a moderate allowance; but that if any persisted +in spreading discontents, and encouraging disobedience, he knew how to +punish as well as to reward.” + +Barros says, that the three Captains _Cartagena_, _Quezada_, and +_Mendoça_, conspired together to kill Magellan, and to return and make +their report of the usage they had met with, and the hardships they had +endured in the voyage; but Magellan, considering the danger, and that in +certain circumstances _temerity_ is better than _caution_, ordered the +people of his own ship to arms; and, manning his boat with thirty trusty +friends, he clapt the Victoria aboard; and while Mendoça was reading a +letter directed to him from the General, the messenger that delivered it +stabbed him to the heart.--The moment the order was executed, the thirty +men entered to the assistance of the assassin, and quietly took +possession of the ship. This done a council of war was called, and a +conspiracy was detected, in which more than forty of the principal +people on board the several ships were found to be deeply concerned; but +Magellan, that he might not appear too sanguinary or vindictive, +sentenced _Quezada_ only to be executed, and _Cartagena_ to be left on +shore, accompanied by a French Priest; a punishment that probably was +worse than immediate death, as it subjected the criminals to hardships +which instant execution would have prevented. Mendoça and Quezada, he +ordered to be quartered as traitors, to strike the disaffected with the +greater terror. This put an end to all opposition for the present. + +When the winter months drew towards a conclusion, Magellan was vigilant +to hasten the departure of his fleet; and, as soon as the cold abated, +he dispatched Serrano to coast along the shore to make observations. +Serrano, at about twenty leagues distance, found a river a league broad +at the entrance, which he named St. Cruz, because he fell in with it on +that Saint’s day. In examining this river, and in fishing for seals, he +spent six days, at the end of which a furious storm arose, which split +his sails, and drove his ship on shore, where she bulged, and was beaten +to pieces. The crew, however, were saved, but reduced to the last +extremity for want of food. Two of the company undertook to travel over +land, to give the General notice of the miserable situation of their +fellow-sufferers; and, after 11 days fatigue, they at length surmounted +every difficulty, and accomplished their purpose. Magellan, pitying +their distresses, sent a vessel with provisions, which came seasonably +to their relief. + +The time for sailing being now come, and the ships in readiness, they +left the bay of St. Julian on the 24th of August, 1520, after setting +Juan de Cartagena, and Pedro Sanchez de Revora, the Priest, who was also +found deep in the plot, ashore on that desolate coast. They supplied +them plentifully with bread and wine; but as they were never afterwards +heard of, there can be no doubt of their perishing miserably. + +The squadron, consisting now of four ships, kept coasting along to the +southward, with imminent danger of shipwreck, till towards the latter +end of October, when they fell in with a promontory, which the General +named Cape Virgin, because it was discovered on St. Ursula’s-day. This +Cape opened an inlet, which Magellan judged favourable to his design. He +cast anchor at the entrance of the inlet, and ordered two ships to +examine its course. In five days these ships returned, and one of them +affirmed it was a strait, because the flood was greater than the ebb; +the other reported that they saw nothing but inlets and breakers. The +General, on these different relations, determined to sail into the +opening, in order to be more precisely informed. He accordingly weighed, +and came to an anchor in a commodious bay, where he first sent his skiff +with 10 men to reconnoitre the shore, and then the St. Antonio to trace +out the inlet to a certain distance. When the men returned from the +shore, they said, they had found a burying-place with more than 200 +graves, and had seen the skeleton of a whale in a cove upon the beach, +but had seen neither house nor inhabitant. The Captain of the St. +Antonio on his return gave a more flattering account. He said, he had +followed the inlet for more than 50 leagues; that its course was due +east and west; and that he made not the least doubt but that it was the +passage so much desired. This news was received with repeated +acclamations. A council was called of the chief officers and pilots, in +which a very warm debate arose, whether, in the circumstances the ships +were then in, it were better to return to Spain, having obtained the +main object of the voyage, or to proceed to complete what the General +had undertaken to perform, namely, to trace out a western passage to the +Molucca Islands. Estevan Gomez, the pilot of the St. Antonio, a man of +excellent parts and sound judgment, insisted on returning back, and +bringing another squadron to complete the discovery, alledging, that +they had still a great and unknown sea to pass, and that, if either +tempests or calms intervened to retard their passage over it, the whole +fleet must inevitably perish. His opinion was supported by the whole +council, Magellan only excepted, who declared, that, if he were sure to +be reduced to the necessity of eating the hides that covered the yards, +he would persevere in the discovery. He accordingly gave orders for +weighing anchor immediately; and, proceeding down the strait, sent the +Antonio to examine some inlets that promised a nearer passage to the +main ocean than that they were pursuing; but the pilot Gomez, and the +purser Guerra, seized and stabbed Alvara de Mesquita, the Commander, and +carried home the ship. In the mean time, Magellan supposing some +disaster had befallen her, went himself in pursuit of her; but after six +days fruitless search, he determined to continue his voyage; “and it +pleased God, says my author, that, at the end of twenty days, he entered +into the Great South Sea, and was the first who had found the passage so +much sought after, whereby the memory of this excellent Captain shall be +eternally celebrated.” + +Finding that the land trended northwards, Magellan directed his course +accordingly, that he might as soon as possible clear those cold and +dreary coasts that had caused so much murmuring among the mariners, and +so much caballing among the officers; but before he reached the Tropic +he met with most tempestuous weather, by which the three remaining ships +were very much shattered in their sails and rigging. In this passage +they discovered two uninhabited islands, St. Pedro and Tiburon, about +the situation of which mariners are still divided; and it has been +questioned, whether either of them have since been seen. + +As they approached the Line, they found the wind to stand fair. Magellan +then ordered the ships to change their course, and steer N. W. and +W. N. W. till he reached the Line. + +Harris takes notice that it was on the 28th of December when Magellan +entered the Great South Sea, and that in this wide ocean the ships that +accompanied him sailed three months and twenty days without seeing any +other land than the two islands just mentioned, which afforded them no +refreshment. At length, when they had undergone all the miseries that +human nature is capable of sustaining, from hunger, thirst, and +sickness, they fell in with the Ladrone islands, where they landed; but +where the inhabitants were such thieves that they were in fear lest +their ships should be pulled to pieces and carried away before their +faces, the crews not having strength enough left to defend either their +lives or their properties. They therefore shortened their stay among +these plunderers; and were more fortunate in their next attempt. + +On the 10th of March, landing on the island of Zamal, they found springs +of delicate water, which to them were more precious than fountains of +the choicest wines; fruit in abundance, that surpassed any they had till +then tasted; and inhabitants humane and civil, who, pitying their +distresses, brought their richest productions to relieve them. From this +island they continued to steer between the west and south-west, till +they arrived at Buthuan, or, as it has since been called, Buton, the +King of which gave them honourable entertainment. They visited several +other isles, and in all of them were well received; till at length +coming to the Isle of Mathan, they were attacked by an army of Indians, +against whom the General himself being engaged was shot with a poisoned +arrow, and afterwards pierced in the head with a lance; and thus ended +the life and actions of this gallant Commander, whose name will be +perpetuated with honour to latest posterity. After his death, a company +of his followers being invited to an entertainment on shore, were +treacherously murdered by a pretended friendly King, and only Don Juan +Serrano, of all who landed, was reserved alive, in order to procure a +large supply of fire-arms and ammunition by way of ransom; but those who +remained on board, fearful of being trepanned, would have no farther +intercourse with the perfidious infidels so that poor Serrano was left +to their mercy. Those on board the ships, 80 in number, directed their +course towards the Moluccas, and arrived at Teridore, one of the +principal of those islands, on the 8th of November, 1521. Here they were +hospitably received, and here they staid till the middle of January, +1522; and, being now come into well known seas, we shall accompany them +no farther; only remarking, that, of the whole squadron only one ship, +namely the Victoria, had the good fortune to return to Spain; and of 234 +officers and seamen, the complement at first setting out, if we except +those who returned in the St. Antonio, of whom we have no account, only +13 Spaniards survived to return to Seville. Their Commander John +Sebastian Cano was received with extraordinary marks of favour by the +Emperor, who gave him for arms the Terrestrial Globe, with this motto, +_Primus me circumdedistis_, and otherwise liberally rewarded him. The +voyage he lived to make took up three years and thirty-seven days, and +is, perhaps, the most remarkable that ever was performed. + +This voyage opened a new field for discovery; the Spaniards, who were +already settled on the western coasts of America, were very curious to +examine what countries might be situated along that vast space which +divided the new continent from the old; and accordingly Cortez, the +celebrated conqueror of Peru, fitted out two ships for the purpose, the +command of one of which he gave to Ferdinand Grijalva, the other to Don +Alvarado. + +Grijalva departed from Pageta, in 6 deg. N. lat. about the beginning of +April, 1537, and steered W. and S. W. into 29 deg. S. lat. where his +ship springing her mast, he stood again to the Line, in which tract a +mutiny happening among the crew, Grijalva and his nephew were both +assassinated; and the ship, after a passage of four months, was carried +to Papua, where falling to pieces, the crew, reduced by famine and +fatigue to seven men, took to their boat and coasted along the shore, +till being boarded by a number of Indians, it was sunk. The Spaniards, +however, were saved by the humanity of the captors, and sold for slaves. +This ship, it is affirmed, sailed 1000 leagues on both sides the Line +without seeing land. Among the islands, however, which they afterwards +fell in with before they came to Papua, was that called Isla de los +Pescadores, called in the late voyages BYRON’S ISLAND, and supposed to +be a new discovery. + +Alvarado was instructed to pursue his discoveries along the Line, +without deviating either to the right or left, farther than the most +advantageous method of navigating his ship required; and in that +direction he discovered the islands of Papua. He also discovered other +islands, named the Guelles, in 1 deg. N. lat. east and west from +Teronate, and 125 leagues from that of Moro, with Hamei, 170 leagues +from Tidore, and many others that have since been thought new +discoveries. After his return, he was again employed upon services of +the like kind, and was instrumental in establishing the trade of +Manilla. + +But of all the Spanish discoveries that have been made, or pretended to +have been made, in the South Seas, that of Juan Fernandez, who first +pointed out the way from Lima to Chili by sailing to the westward, _if +real_, is by far the most important. This pilot, (the same who +discovered the island which still bears his name) in the latitude of 40 +deg. S. was brought, as it is said, in courses between west and +south-west, upon the coast of a continent, from what he could judge, +very fertile and delightful, inhabited by white people, hospitable, and +well-disposed, of a middle stature, dressed in very fine cloaths, and so +peaceable and civil, that, in every way they could express, they +endeavoured to gratify the strangers, and to accommodate them with the +best things their country afforded, the fruits whereof were excellent +and abounding in the greatest profusion. It is added, that, being +over-joyed with having discovered the coast of that great continent so +much talked of, and so ardently sought after, he returned to Chili +intending to make a second voyage properly fitted out to improve this +fortunate discovery to his own and his country’s enrichment; but before +he could persuade his friends to give entire credit to his report, he +died, and the secret of the precise situation of his new continent +perished with him, for it has never since been found; though Mr. +Alexander Dalrymple, author of an Historical Collection of Voyages to +the South Pacific Ocean, whose opinion is of no small weight, is +persuaded that Fernandez did discover the SOUTHERN CONTINENT, and that, +whenever it is again visited, it will be no new discovery, but a +confirmation of the existence of that land which has already been found. + +But, besides this dubious discovery, there is still another, which has +not yet been clearly ascertained, and about which geographers are much +divided. This discovery is attributed to Alvaro Mendana, who, in 1567, +is said to have fallen in with a cluster of islands abounding with gold +and pearl, which were named by him the Isles of Salomon; and for the +settling of which an unsuccessful attempt was made by Mendana himself; +and a second strongly solicited by Pedro Fernandez de Quiros, the chief +pilot who accompanied that General, and who afterwards made a voyage +thither on his own account, in which he made many discoveries. + +It was in April, 1595, that Mendana left Callao, in Peru, to settle the +Salomon Isles. He had with him two large ships, a galleasta, and a +frigate, on board of which were embarked from Lima 400 followers, +including women and children. Of this embarkation Lope de la Vega, his +brother-in-law, was Admiral; Pedro Fernandez de Quiros, chief pilot; and +Pedro Merino Manriquez, Maitre de Campo. According to Figueroa, who +wrote an account of this voyage, the Admiral’s ship was named the St. +Isabella; Mendana’s ship, the St. Jerome; the galleasta, St. Philippe; +and the frigate, St. Catalina: of the two last the Commanders were Capt. +Philip Corço, and Lieut. Alonzo de Leyla. In this expedition Mendana was +accompanied by his Lady Donna Isabella Barretos, with her three +brothers; and, after parting company with the Admiral’s ship the very +night they came in sight of the island on which they settled, Mendana +cast anchor in a bay which he called _la Graciosa_, and the island he +named Santa Cruz. Here on the 8th of October, the Maitre de Campo, and +Thomas de Ampuero, were hanged, and Ensign Jean de Buy beheaded, for +mutinous behaviour; and here Mendana himself died the 18th of the same +month. Don Lorenzo, brother to Donna Isabella, who, by the loss of the +Admiral, had succeeded as Captain-General, died also on the 2d of +November; and, in less than seven days after, Father Antonio de Serra, +Chief Priest, and Juan de Espinosa, his Vicar. In short, from change of +climate, food, and customs; from labour, going in the sun, being wet +without having wherewithal to shift themselves, sleeping on the ground, +and from other disorders and sufferings, dangerous diseases attacked the +whole company; they began to die a-pace, it being lamentable to see them +in their distress creeping into huts, some delirious, and others at the +last gasp; some going to the ships to seek health; others shifting from +the ships to the shore; but no remedy, nor any physician to apply to for +relief. In this calamitous state things were, when Donna Isabella, on +the 18th of October, broke up the settlement; and embarking the few +people that remained alive, on board the St. Jerome, the frigate, and +the galleasta, they set sail, intending to pursue their course to +Manilla: but the frigate soon lost company, and, it is said, was +afterwards found on a desart coast with all her sails set, and the +people on board dead and rotten and the galleasta put into an island +near the coast of Mindanao. The St. Jerome, however, after suffering +unspeakable hardships, got to Manilla, where Donna Isabella married Don +Ferdinando de Castro, and returned in his ship to New Spain the very +next year. The Admiral’s ship was never heard of.--Thus ended this +unfortunate expedition. + +The island of Santa Cruz, in which this settlement was attempted, is +said to be 100 leagues in circumference, and to lie E. S. E. and +W. N. W. in lat. 10 deg. 20 min. S. distant from Lima 1800 leagues. They +cast anchor on the north side of it, in a harbour, to the north of which +is a volcano, or burning mountain, that from its top frequently casts +forth fire, and from the inside of which proceeds a noise sometimes +louder than thunder. To the west of it the harbour is a small island +about four leagues in compass, separated from the great island by sunken +rocks and banks of sand. The port is formed at the bottom of the bay by +a great river, and the country round it is fine and plentiful. A more +exact description than this, one would think, could not have been given. + +Quiros, who navigated Donna Isabella, first to Manilla, and afterwards +accompanied her to New Spain, was so charmed with the beautiful +appearance of these enchanting islands, that he continued for the space +of ten years incessantly to weary the Court of Spain with memorial after +memorial to renew the settlement of them; and at length he +prevailed.----Previous to his voyage, he spent several months in +building two ships and a zebra, the stoutest and best equipped with men, +provisions, and warlike stores, of any that had ever been fitted out in +New Spain. He was accompanied by six Franciscan Fathers, with whom he +took his departure on the 21st of December, 1605; and sailing without +any material incident till the 26th of January 1606, he on that day fell +in with an island to the south-west, just 1000 leagues from the coast of +Peru, in lat. 25 deg. S. which island he unluckily found uninhabited. +From this island he sailed on different courses, passing several +inaccessible islands, till the 10th of February, on which day a sailor +joyfully cried out, _Land a-head!_ Here, on their landing, they +surprized a woman, but so old in appearance, that it was matter of +astonishment that she could stand upright. In her youthful days it was +easy to perceive that she had been of a graceful mien, and she still +retained a dignity about her that shewed she was of quality. Being asked +by signs to go on board, she complied without hesitation; and when +there, she eat of whatever was given her, and received presents with a +becoming ease. After cloathing this lady very fine, they set her on +shore; and, on her landing, the people flocked about her, and among them +a tall, stout, well-made man, who had on his head a plume of feathers, +and by his deportment appeared to be a Chief. Him they endeavoured to +entice on board; but, when he came to the ship’s side, fearing +treachery, he refused to enter. Quiros directed that no force might be +used, made him some presents, and dismissed him. This island by +observation was in 17 deg. 40 min S. and was named by Quiros Sagitaria. +They left it on the 12th, after some skirmishes with the inhabitants, +and, passing by several other islands, in which they could procure no +refreshment, on the 2d of March they fell in with an island which +promised fair to supply their wants. Here on their attempting to land +they were accosted by about 100 Indians, the tallest, genteelest, +whitest, and strongest-made people they had ever yet seen; but, though +they shewed fair in countenance, they were in fact the cruelest enemies +they had to encounter in the whole voyage. One of them in a swift canoe +approached the ship singly, and, brandishing his lance, made those kind +of contortions with his face, arms, and legs, by which Parkinson has +remarked the South-Sea Indians provoke their enemies to battle; he even +mounted the balcony of the Admiral’s ship, and with his lance made a +thrust at one of the officers on the quarter-deck, with an intent to +kill him, and instantly leaping into his canoe rowed off at a great +rate. He repeated his visits and his insolence; but it was not long +before they shot him dead. While this was passing on board the Admiral, +the zebra, that had cast anchor near the shore, was still in a worse +situation, surrounded by a multitude of fierce barbarians, who, having +fastened a rope to her head, were endeavouring to drag her on shore; but +perceiving that the people on board were preparing to cut the rope, they +pushed a little off, and were fastening it to the cable, when a volley +of small arms was discharged among them, by which some were killed, some +wounded, and all terribly frightened: this, however, failed of the +desired effect; for neither kindness nor chastisement could prevail upon +them to furnish the ships with water or provisions; so that they were +obliged to set sail without a supply of either. This island lies north +and south, and was called by Quiros the Island of Handsome People. + +They now pursued their course for the island of Santa Cruz without +interruption till the 7th of April, when they discovered land bearing +W. N. W. high, and black like a volcano; but night coming on, they stood +off till next morning, and then sent the zebra to look out for a safe +harbour for the ships to cast anchor. On the 9th she returned, having +succeeded; and about noon the same day the ships were moored in 25 +fathom water, to the great joy of the desponding crew. The boats were +instantly dispatched to make peace with the natives; and before night, +they returned with water, plantains, cocoa-nuts, potatoes, palmetos, and +sugar-canes, than which the riches of Potosi could not have been more +welcome. They next day discovered a fort, constructed by art, the +materials of coral stone, in which were about 70 houses surrounded by +the sea, and designed as a refuge from enemies, whenever an invasion was +threatened by the warlike inhabitants of the adjoining country. To this +fort they made their next approach, and, lest they should meet with +opposition, they took care to be properly armed; but the inhabitants +were desirous of nothing so much as peace, and received them hospitably: +so different are the dispositions of people inhabiting the same climate, +and separated only by a portion of the sea. Here they were supplied at +an easy rate with wood and water, in the shipping of which they were +assisted by the friendly natives; and here they had plenty of the fruits +and provisions which the country produced; in return for which, the +grateful Spaniards seized four of the natives, with a view to carry them +off; but in spite of their vigilance three made their escape, and only +one continued with them, who, being a slave where he was, cared but +little what master he served in that capacity. + +At the end of seven days, the people being pretty well refreshed, Quiros +again set sail, and on the 21st of April passed an island in lat. 12 +degrees S. which the Indians called Tucopia. They now approached the +islands of which they were in quest; and on the 25th a consultation was +held on board the Admiral, to consider which of the lands in sight they +would chuse to settle, when it was concluded not to return to Santa +Cruz, but to stand to the southward in search of that great land, of +which they had heard so much. This they did, passing many islands, some +of considerable extent, some small but very populous, and all of them +exhibiting a most delightful prospect of woods, lawns, inclosures, and +water-falls, till at length in lat. 14 deg. 50 min. S. they came to a +land stretching from east to west, to the extent of which they could see +no end. On the zebra’s approaching this land, the people on board were +not a little surprized to see an Indian come down from the mountains, +and without invitation throw himself into the sea, and make towards the +ship. A boat was immediately hoisted out, in order to take him up; but +as he appeared spirited and strong, and made the usual contortions by +way of defiance, it was judged proper to confine him, by clapping a +chain upon his legs to prevent mischief. In this manner they purposed to +have carried him on board the Admiral, who wanted to get some native in +his power to use with kindness, in order to facilitate a peace; but, +perceiving their intent, and concluding that his imprisonment was a +prelude to his death, he seized in his passage a favourable opportunity, +and snapping his chains with his hands, leapt suddenly into the sea. +Night coming on, it was in vain to pursue him, and accordingly they +continued their course to acquaint the Admiral with what had happened. +They had scarce been an hour on board, when the watch on the forecastle +called out, _A voice!_ and knowing it to be that of a native, they +instantly handed him up, when, to the great surprize of the boat’s crew, +who had just come on board, they perceived, by the remains of the chain +about his leg, that it was the man who had made his escape. He was quite +exhausted with swimming, and chose rather to surrender to the strangers +than perish in the sea. He was kindly received, had wine and sweet-meats +given him, put to bed, and in the morning was richly cloathed in +taffety, and sent on shore: in return for which civilities, he caused a +number of hogs to be sent on board, with plantains and other fruits; but +at the same time he gave his benefactors to understand, that he was not +to be diverted from the defence of his country by the dissembled +kindness of pretended friends. When, therefore, the Spaniards attempted +to land, a few Indians, headed by this gallant Chief, appeared upon the +shore, and, feigning to conduct them to an open beach, led them along +the skirts of a wood, where a numerous body of natives lay concealed, +who watching their opportunity, let fly a volley of poisoned arrows, by +which, however, one Spaniard only was wounded in the face. The Spaniards +returned the compliment, by a discharge of musquetry; but the opposition +they expected from these _uncivilized barbarians_ (for so they are +called for defending their country) deterred them from prosecuting their +design. They returned to their ships without setting foot on shore; and +on their return, finding themselves mistaken, it was thought proper +again to put to sea, in search of that great country and that friendly +people, of whole happy situation they had heard so much. + +On the 30th of April, about three in the afternoon, steering south-west, +they discovered land right a-head, and before night came up with it. In +the morning the zebra was sent along shore to examine the soundings, and +after twelve hours absence returned, and made report, that they had +found a spacious bay, and had exchanged some trifles with a people of an +enormous size, who, nevertheless, appeared to be good natured, and +desirous of peace. This news gave universal satisfaction. The ships +followed their pilot; and it being the day of St. Philip and St. James +when they arrived, they called the bay by that name. Here they found a +most delightful port, situated between two noble rivers (the one they +named the Jordan, and the other Salvador); the people numerous and +friendly; the climate mild and serene; and the air so wholesome that in +a few days all the sick recovered. The soil they afterwards found +fruitful to a degree of luxuriance; the woods and plains abounding with +herds and beasts of various kinds, and the seas well stored with fish. +In short, nothing was wanting to complete their wishes, but a more +numerous company to secure possession. On their first landing the +Spaniards were hospitably received; but when it was perceived, by their +overtures for peace, that they intended to prolong their stay, a +jealousy arose that they came with no good design; and they were treated +afterwards as enemies and invaders. All friendly intercourse very soon +ceased; the market for provisions was stopt; and nothing was to be +obtained to subsist upon but by force or stratagem. While they were on +these terms, an incident happened that it was thought would at once have +put an end to their fears and their hopes. Among the vegetables which +grew wild, and on which they were obliged chiefly to live, they had +gathered some poisonous plants, of which the people in general had +eaten, and all who had eaten soon began to feel the direful effects. The +symptoms were the more alarming, as all parts of the flesh seemed to +partake of the noxious quality of the plants. The ships were like the +hospitals of a city infested with the plague, where the numbers of the +healthy were not sufficient to administer to the infirmities of the +sick. Nothing, in short, was to be heard but lamentations and +supplications; all expected to die without remedy. But their fears, as +it fell out, were greater than their danger; for, after a certain time, +the violence of the poison abated, and the sick were restored to a more +vigorous state of health than they enjoyed before. But they were scarce +relieved from this misfortune, when another succeeded. Despairing of +ever being able to reconcile themselves to the natives at this port, +they set sail, after having founded a city between the _Jordan_ and the +_Salvador_, to which they had given the name of _New Jerusalem_. +Coasting towards the south with a view to find a more fortunate +settlement, they were overtaken by a most dreadful storm, in which the +ships were separated. The Admiral was driven off the coast, and never +again returned; but the other ship, and the zebra, with difficulty +returned to port. What afterwards became of them we are not told. +Quiros, after attempting in vain to rejoin them, made the best of his +way to New Spain and on his arrival undertook a voyage to Old Spain, +where he continued to solicit the Court for a new embarkation; but he +died before he could obtain it. + +From this time the Spaniards seem to have given over all thoughts of a +settlement in those islands, to the true situation of which they appear +at this day to be strangers. Neither have other nations been more +successful in their attempts to discover them; for unless (as Mr. +Alexander Dalrymple has endeavoured to prove in his Historical +Collection of Voyages to the South Pacific Ocean) they are the same with +those which Dampier has dignified with the name of New Britain, no +others have yet been found that answer to their description. To Mr. +Dalrymple’s data there can be only one objection, and that is this: +Quiros, in his memorial to the Court of Spain, reporting the voyage of +Mendana, says, that, in prosecuting his discoveries, he fell in with +four islands [the Marquessas], inhabited by so good a people, that there +is no account of any other having ever been found equal to them; and +that these islands were 1000 leagues from Lima, 650 from the nearest +coast of New Spain, and 1000 leagues from New Guinea. Here the distance +from Lima to New Guinea is precisely fixed by Quiros; but at the same +time it is to be noted, that the distance from Lima to the isles in +question are as precisely fixed; and in the same memorial they are said +to be between the 7th and 12th degrees of south latitude, 1500 leagues +from the city of Lima. Thus they are placed by Quiros, precisely in the +midway between the Marquessas and New Guinea; whereas the isles called +New Britain are divided by Dampier from New Guinea to the eastward only +by a strait. + +But this by the bye.--We shall now proceed to relate what other material +discoveries have been made by other nations in the southern hemisphere, +particularly by the Dutch:--Le Maire and Schouten left the Texel on June +the 14th, 1615; and passing Strait Le Maire January 25, 1616, on the +10th of April the same year fell in with an island in latitude 15 deg. +12 min. S. 3700 miles from the coast of Peru, to which they gave the +name of DOG ISLAND. Pursuing their course to the isles of Salomon, on +the 16th they came to another island, in lat. 14 deg. 46 min. S. to +which they gave the name of WATERLAND, because in this island, tho’ +uninhabited, they found a supply of fresh water, and some herbs, of +which they gathered sackfuls to make pottage to refresh the men, who +were now much afflicted with the scurvy. + +On the 3d of May they saw many dolphins, the first they had seen in the +South Seas. + +On the 11th, after passing several uninhabited islots, they discovered +an island in lat. 16 deg. 10 min. S. where they had an engagement with +the natives, whom they found to be great thieves; they were, however, +very handsome; their limbs well-proportioned, of large stature, quite +naked, excellent swimmers, and very active. This island they called +Cocos Island, because they were here plentifully supplied with that +fruit. A league from it lay another, which they named Traitors Island, +because the inhabitants had formed a design to cut them off. + +On the 18th, having sailed near 5000 miles from the coast of Peru, +without discovering the least appearance of a southern land, or falling +in with the so much celebrated isles of Salomon, and being in lat. 16 +deg. 5 min. S. it was there considered in full council what course to +steer next; when it was determined to return home by the well known +track to the northward of New Guinea. + +In pursuit of this resolution they changed their course to the N. N. W. +and on the 22d, being in lat. 14 deg. 56 min. S. they fell in with an +island which, by its beautiful appearance, promised fair to afford +refreshment. Sending the shallop to sound, they found 50 fathom, sand +and shells, in a kind of bason over-against a small river issuing from a +valley edged with trees. This gave unspeakable pleasure to the whole +company. + + [Illustration: _Horn-Island._] + +On the 23d they moored the ship; and, while they were yet busy, they +were visited by whole troops of the natives, who expressed their +admiration a thousand different ways. At length, a venerable old man +approached the ship, and with great gravity made an oration, at the +conclusion of which, the people who surrounded him expressed their +approbation by general acclamations. A traffic for provisions now +commenced; and, after a pretty sharp skirmish, in which half a dozen +natives were killed by the musquetry, the same was continued till their +departure with great civility and honesty. The Chiefs of the island, +after an exchange of hostages, came on board, and were magnificently +entertained. They were given to understand, that the ships were in want +of water, and they made their people assist in supplying their wants. +They caused hogs, dogs, fowls, and fruits, to be sent in plenty, which +were exchanged for nails, beads, dolls, and looking-glasses. As a +present, when the Chiefs returned to shore, they sent to the Commander +two hogs ready drest; they had taken out the entrails, and put in the +place of them burning stones, to roast them in the inside, and sweet +herbs to make them savoury. In short, their manners, their desires, +their behaviour, their customs, their habitations, and their arts, so +exactly correspond with what has lately been reported of the inhabitants +of the supposed newly discovered islands in the South Seas, that there +does not remain a doubt, but that this island which the Dutch named +Hoorne Island, together with the adjoining island which they called the +Island of Good Hope, are two of those that lie between the 10th and 17th +degrees of south latitude, of which our late voyagers have given so +flattering an account. One particular reported by the Dutch is +strikingly characteristic: The men, say they, were valiant, and large in +stature, the tallest among them surpassing very much in height the +tallest of ours; _their women were not handsome, but so totally +destitute of shame, that what modesty requires to be done in privacy, +they performed with their men in public, by way of entertainment, before +their Kings_. In the new map accompanying Hawkesworth’s Voyages, King +George’s Island is placed in the latitude of 14 deg. 29 min. S. long. +148 deg. 50 min. W. In the Dutch maps Hoorne Island is placed in lat. 14 +deg. 56 min. S. long. 83 deg. 30 min. W. from Arica, on the coast of +Peru, which answers to long. 153 deg. 30 min. W. from London, being only +2 deg. 40 min. more to the west, and 27 min. more to the south than King +George’s Island; a difference very inconsiderable indeed! allowing for +the difference of time from 1616 to 1765, and for the improvement that +has been made in the instruments of navigation during that period, +particularly in those for ascertaining longitude. + +On the 1st of June, as has been already observed, they took their +departure from Hoorne Island, highly pleased with their kind reception, +and on the 25th came in sight of the coast of New Guinea. + +We should have mentioned, that Schouten was of opinion, that Hoorne +Island was one of the Salomon Isles, mentioned by Quiros, none other +they had met with having answered so well to the Spanish description of +them. + +The next remarkable voyage, undertaken professedly with a view to +discovery in the southern hemisphere, is that of Abel Jansan Tasman, +who, in 1642, sailed from Batavia in the East Indies, and touched at the +Isles of Mauritius, in latitude 20 deg. 20 min. South; long. 78 deg. 47 +min. East. On the 8th of October, the same year, he left the Mauritius, +and, keeping a southerly course, on the 24th of September fell in with +the land, to which he gave the name of Anthony Van Diemen’s land, in 42 +deg. 25 min. S. long. 163 deg. 50 min. E. Here they met with much bad +weather, which obliged them to steer eastward; and on the 1st of +December they anchored in lat. 43 deg. 10 min. S. long. 167 deg. 55 min. +E. in a bay to which they gave the name of Frederic Henry’s bay. Their +whole force consisted only of a small ship about 300 tons, named the +Hemskirk, and the Zee Haan pink for examining the coast. Here they +landed, but could discover no human being, though they had reason to +believe the country was inhabited. They gathered plenty of good +pot-herbs that grew wild, and saw trees full two fathom and an half in +the girt, and from 60 to 75 feet high, in which steps had been cut for +the purpose of climbing them, five feet distant from each other, and +from this circumstance they concluded that the inhabitants must be men +of gigantic stature. + +On the 5th of December, Tasman pursued his course in search of the +Salomon Isles, and on the 13th had sight of a very high and mountainous +country, now well known by the name of New Zealand. By its lofty +appearance, he judged it to be the southern continent and coasted it +along to the north eastward, till on the 18th of December, he came to a +spacious bay, three or four miles in breadth, in lat. 40 deg. 49 min. S. +long. 191 deg. 41 min. from whence he could discern on the shore men of +a strong robust make, partly clothed, and partly naked, to whom he made +signals, inviting them on board, but none of them would venture to +approach within the reach of a peteraro. It was therefore resolved to go +to them; but before that resolution could be carried into execution, the +barbarians made an attack upon the Zee Haan’s boat, and murdered most of +the crew, in the manner related in the course of the work. + +Not caring to sacrifice any more of his people against a barbarous race +of manslayers, he weighed anchor, and pursued his voyage along the coast +till he came to an island in latitude 34 deg. 25 min. S. which he named +THREE KINGS ISLAND, where some of his people landed, and where they saw +at a distance about 40 men of an uncommon stature, who called to them in +a very gruff tone of voice, and approached them hastily with prodigious +strides. The Dutchmen, being few in number, thought fit to retreat. +Their business being that of discovery, not of war, the Captain thought +fit to quit that inhospitable coast, and direct his course to the +islands of Cocos or Hoorne, where he was sure of refreshing his men, and +supplying their wants without danger of bloodshed, happy that he could +find a passage into an open sea. On this coast, however, he observed +many fair plantations, handsomely laid out, and to all appearance well +cultivated. + +On the 19th of January, 1643, he discovered three islands, to which he +gave names. The southernmost he called Pylstaart’s Island, the +middlemost Amsterdam, and the most northerly Middleburgh. This last lay +in lat. 21 deg. 20 min. S. long. 205 deg. 20 minutes. At these islands, +which seemed remote from any other land, they trafficked for provisions; +and the inhabitants, who were of a tawney complexion, and somewhat above +the common size, behaved very civilly, and shewed no signs of a hostile +disposition. Among the natives of these islands came a lusty man with a +St. Thomas’s arm, and a woman with a natural beard. A venerable old man +came also among the rest, and made an oration; after which a croud of +men and women, young and old, came on board with all kinds of +provisions. It is remarkable, that, among all the islands in the South +Seas, the only tame four-footed animals are hogs and dogs, and of these +the inhabitants here had plenty. They found another island at no great +distance, equally abounding in the usual productions, besides being +plentifully supplied with water. It appears strange to us, that the +people in those hot climates can subsist without fresh water; yet nature +seems in part to have supplied that defect by furnishing a fruit that +both allays thirst and assuages hunger, and that too without either art +or labour. By vegetables suited to their subsistence, it should seem +that the animals, indigenous to the climate, are nourished and made fat. +Indeed, where springs, brooks, and lakes are wanting, the forests have +few, if any, inhabitants; but if we may credit the relations of +voyagers, the people have hogs and dogs, where they have neither river, +well, or lake; for though in Amsterdam Island, the strangers might have +purchased 100 hogs a day for a few baubles, yet a can of fresh water was +not to be procured at any rate. In an island, called by the natives +Annamokka, but by the Dutch Rotterdam, water was found in plenty, yet it +was no better inhabited than the islands before mentioned, which seemed +to be wholly without. Rotterdam Island is placed in lat. 20 deg. 15 min. +S. long. 206 deg. 19 min. To this island they repaired to take in water, +and there they compleated their stock of fresh provisions, finding the +people courteous and civil, though somewhat inclined to be thievish. +Being now fully refreshed and provided, without making any further +discoveries worth relating, they returned to Java, by the way of New +Guinea. + +Jacob Roggewein was the next Dutchman who sailed professedly on the +business of discovery. He was furnished by their East-India Company with +three ships, namely, the Eagle, the Tienhoven, and the African Galley: +with these he set sail from Amsterdam, July the 16th, 1721, and towards +the latter end of November came in sight of the coast of Brazil. After a +few days stay in the neighbourhood of Rio de Janeiro, he weighed, and +went in quest of Hawkins’s Maidenland, which is said to lie in 30 deg. +S. but not being able to find it, he pursued his course towards the +straits, till on the 21st of December, in lat. 40 deg S. the ships met +with a violent storm, in which the Tienhoven lost company. About the +beginning of January, Roggewein discovered a large island 200 leagues in +circuit, in lat. 52 deg. S. long. 95 deg. W. about 80 leagues from the +coast of America. He named this island BELGIA AUSTRALIS, and it is the +same now known by the name of Falkland’s Island. Leaving this island to +windward, he passed the strait of Le Maire, and on the 24th of February +came in sight of Juan Fernandez, where he fortunately found the +Tienhoven, that island having been the place appointed to rendezvous in +case of separation. + +There the ship continued three weeks, and sailed from thence about the +middle of March, steering W. N. W. in search of Davis’s Land, which, +however, they could not find. Neither has that or Hawkins’s Maiden Land +ever been seen by any other navigator, except the first discoverers. +Being in lat. 28 deg. S. long. 268 deg. they saw many birds and other +tokens of high land, but to the astonishment of the Admiral came in +sight of none till they had sailed 12 leagues farther west. They then +discovered an island, which they called EASTER-ISLAND, because they came +in sight of it on Easter-day. They found this island well inhabited. The +first man that came on board was painted with various kinds of figures, +was of a brown complexion, with large ears, so long that they hung down +to his shoulders. He was tall, robust, active, of an agreeable +countenance, and lively disposition. They offered him wine, but he threw +it in his eyes. They gave him meat, cloathed him, and sent him on shore, +but afterwards killed him in a skirmish with his countrymen. On this +island they observed many idols, and saw one man quite white, whom they +took to be a priest. He had pendents in his ears a pound weight each. On +landing 150 in number, the natives crouded so close upon them, that they +were forced to fire upon them to keep them off. By this discharge +several were killed, and many wounded. These poor people, seeing their +friends bleed, and fall dead, filled the air with doleful cries and +lamentations; and brought offerings of fruits, roots, and fowls, to +appease the wrath of the invaders. To implore the bodies of their +murdered friends, they cast themselves on the earth, and made other +signs of supplication. They were indulged in their timidity, and it was +held a crime to approach a Dutchman without reverence; when they brought +them presents, they laid them at their feet. + +This country was full of inclosures, and seemed neatly cultivated. The +people had coverings of a manufacture that felt soft like silk. The +women in general were painted with a rouge far surpassing in brightness +any thing of that colour known in Europe; they were very obliging, and +enticed the strangers to every kind of familiarity both by their looks +and gestures. Their idols were chiefly of stone, well-proportioned, and +wrought with exquisite workmanship. While they lay at anchor at this +delightful island, a storm arose, which prevented the Admiral’s design +of extending his researches to the remoter parts of it, as it appeared +diversified with woods, forests, lawns, gardens, and cultivated fields; +and in every respect well supplied with necessaries for the refreshment +of ships bound to the southern lands; but the fury of the storm +increased so fast, that those on shore were glad to recover their ships. +They were scarce embarked when the billows rose to such a height as to +make it dangerous to hazzard their security to the anchors with which +they were moored; they, therefore, instantly weighed and put to sea, +and, as the wind blew fair, they proceeded at a great rate towards the +bad sea of Schouten, to which they were bound. After a run of 800 +leagues from _Easter-Island_, they got sight of an island in latitude 15 +deg. 45 min. S. which they took to be _Dog-Island_, discovered by +Schouten, and therefore did not stay to examine it. + +The trade-wind began now to shift, and to veer about to the south-west, +by which the ships in the night were driven among a cluster of islands, +and the African galley being a-head was jammed between the rocks, of +which a more particular account will be found in the course of the Work. + +These islands were situated between the 15th and 16th degrees of south +latitude; and Roggewein’s _Pernicious Island_ is no doubt the same with +that where Commodore Byron found the carved head of a rudder that had +belonged to a Dutch long-boat, and where he also found a piece of +hammered iron, a piece of brass, and some small iron tools, which the +ancestors of the present race of inhabitants had obtained from this ship +after her shipwreck. + +Here the crews of the remaining ships grew troublesome and unruly. They +had already been out ten months, and had experienced nothing but +hardships, without the least prospect of advantage, either to themselves +or country. A council was therefore called, and it was determined to +return home by way of the East Indies. On quitting Pernicious Island +they fell in with a small island, which they called Aurora, because it +was discovered at break of day and soon after with another small island, +which they called Vesper, because they came in sight of it in the +evening. About twenty-five leagues to the westward of Pernicious Island, +they found themselves entangled among a cluster of islands, which they +called the Labyrinth, because it was some time before they could +disengage the ships from the rocks and shoals with which they were +surrounded. Having providentially escaped this imminent danger, they +continued their course to the westward; and, after some days sail, fell +in with an island, which by its beautiful appearance promised some +refreshment. They saw many natives with lances and long pikes passing +and repassing along the shore, and they sent two boats well manned to +speak with them, and to encourage them to trade. Their endeavours, +however, were ineffectual, till, by killing some and dispersing the +rest, they made good their landing. When they had gained the shore, the +savages seemed more tractable; they even assisted them in gathering +herbs, and bringing them water; the women, in particular, appeared +enamoured with them, and by many alluring ways endeavoured to gain their +confidence; but they were to the last degree deceitful. Being decoyed +into an ambuscade the savages surrounded them on all sides and, +notwithstanding a brisk fire was kept up, which killed many, and wounded +more, not a Dutchman that fell into the snare escaped unwounded. After +this misfortune it was with reluctance that any one ventured ashore to +look for refreshments. This island they called Recreation, on account of +its salutary herbs, and it is placed in lat. 16 deg. S. and in long. 285 +deg. The natives were of the middle size, but strong and well-made, +lively, and of a bold undaunted spirit. Their bodies were painted, and +covered with a kind of net, which they wrapt about them decently enough; +The women were covered from head to foot with a very pretty stuff that +felt soft like silk; their complexion was dark, with shining black hair, +very white teeth, and brilliant eyes; and to sailors who had long been +at sea they were not a little inviting. The third day after they left +this island, they fell in with several islands at once, to which they +gave the name of Bauman’s Islands, where the inhabitants were altogether +as courteous and civil as those they had left had been treacherous and +cruel. They came and trafficked with great good-nature and honesty, and +were to appearance as fair and beautiful as those in the most celebrated +parts of Europe. They now thought themselves near the islands which +Dampier has named New Britain; but it was many days sail before they +came in sight of them, in which interval the scurvy made dreadful +havock. The sailors were very desirous of staying in these islands to +refresh, and to recover their strength; but the Commander, who had other +views, pursued his course to the East Indies with all imaginable +dispatch. + +Thus, all this grand expedition, by which the expectations of the +Commander in Chief and his employers had been raised to a very high +pitch, came to nothing. The men were dissatisfied with their officers +for going so far, and the officers with their Commander for not going +farther. The existence of a southern continent still remained as +doubtful as ever; and so it continues at this period, June 22, 1774. + +Since the above was written, the Adventure, who accompanied Capt. Cook +in the Resolution on a new voyage, is arrived, and reports, that they +had sailed between the 55th and 67th degrees of south latitude, but had +found no land; so that if any land lies farther to the southward, it +must be uninhabitable. + + [Illustration: Decorative Image.] + + + + + LIST + OF + SUBSCRIBERS. + + + A. + + Mr. Thomas Adams, Tower + Ralph Adye, Esq; Swallow-street + Roger Ap-Williams, Esq; ditto + Mr. Luke Adlington + Mr. Michael Angelo + Mr. John Ainsworth + Mr. Aldwinckle + Mr. Anderson + John Ayscough, Esq; + Mr. Francis Armstrong, Bow + Mr. Matth. Akenside, Kensington + Mr. Peter Ambler + Mr. Jeremiah Alcock + Mr. Ralph Andrews, Holborn + Mr. Christopher Appleby + Mr. John Atkinson + Mr. Allen + + B. + + Sir George Booth + Mr. Bristow, Lewes + Mr. John Bruckshaw, Royal Exchange + Mr. James Blackburn, ditto + Mr. Wm. Benson, Teddington + Mr. Denham Berry, Victualling-office + Mr. Richard Barwick + Mr. Banks + Mr. Thomas Buchanan + William Blackwell, Esq; + Thomas Broxholm, Esq; + Mr. Wm. Brooke, St. John’s lane + Mr. Richard Butler + Mr. Wm. Barnes, Nightingale-lane + Mr. James Bicknell, Hackney + Mr. Andrew Brocklesby + Mr. Philip Bristow + Mr. Richard Bennet, West Smithfield + Mr. Nicholas Bond, Lambeth Marsh + Mr. Robert Birchall + + C. + + Mr. Cobby, Lewes + Mr. Joseph Cox, Chelsea + Mr. Edw. Chandler, Knightsbridge + Mr. Coulston, Cavendish-squ. + Mr. Cadell + Capt. Cookson, Crown-street + Mr. John Coventry, Red Cross-street + Mr. John Collinson, Gravel-lane + Mr. Coleman, Clare-market + Mr. Wm. Curtis, Hogsdon + Mr. Anth. Clarke, Shoreditch + Mr. Ezekiel Clements + Mr. Stephen Cameron + Mr. Cooke + Mr. Collyer + Mr. Cockshute + + D. + + Mr. Bon. Dobree, East Cheap + Mr. Thos. Draper, Westmin. + Mr. Jos. Dowglass, Long-Acre + Mr. Edw. Dobson, Old-street + Mr. John Davis, John-street + Mr. Davis, Castle-court + Mr. John Day, Castle lane + Mr. David Davies + Mr. Josias Dugdale, Little-Britain + Mr. John Dobson + Mr. Dobson, Oxford-road + Mr. Drinkwater, ditto + Mr. James Dupont + Mr. Henry Dyson + Mr. De Jersey + + E. + + Mr. James Evans + Mr. Evans + Mr. Thomas Edwards, Friday-street + Mr. Elston, Wapping + Mr. Michael Eglington + Mr. Jarvis Erwas + Mr. Stephen Emery + Mr. Stukely Emerson + Mr. John Entick + Mr. Thomas Eversham + Mr. Edwards + Mr. Ellis + + F. + + Mr. James Fog, Moorfields + Mr. William Fog + Mr. Edward Fly + Mr. Joseph Foreman + Mr. Peter Fenwick + Mr. Henry Freeman + Mr. Charles Featherstone + Mr. Flint, Swallow-street + + G. + + Mr. James Gadge, North Pickenham + Mr. John Greenwell, Red-lion-street + Mr. Stephen Gamidge + Mr. Timothy Green + Mr. John George Giles + Mr. Francis Greatree + Mr. Abraham Gunston + Mr. Gwin, Long-Acre + Mr. Geo. Gilson, New-street + Mr. Isaac Greenway + Mr. Daniel Greaves + Mr. Caleb Glover + Mr. William Griffiths + Mr. Goring + Mr. Groombridge + Mr. Goodwin + + H. + + Capt. Rich. Hinchcliffe, York + Mr. Howes, jun. Northleech + Mr. John Howe, Wycombe + Mr. Wm. Hawkins, Crane-court + Mr. Haxby, at the Archbishop of Canterbury’s + Mr. Wm. Hart, Cecil-street + Mr. Hughes, Fleet-street + Mr. Henry Haggard + Mr. Richard Haynes + Mr. John Harvest + Mr. James Harsh, Temple + Mr. Thos. Harrison, St. John’s street + Mr. Hatton, Salisbury-court + Capt. Robert Hinde, Bruton-street + Mr. Thos. Hatford, Wapping + Mr. John Hemsted + Mr. Hutton + Mr. Horne + Mr. Hincks + + I. + + Mr. Jones, Silver-street, Golden-square + Mr. James Innes, Cheney-row, Chelsea + Judah Jacobs, Esq; + Mr. Joseph Jackson, Shoe-lane + Mr. David Jefferies + Mr. William Jenkinson + Mr. Arthur Jameson + Mr. John Jones + Mr. Joseph Isaacs + + K. + + Mr. Kennedy, at Litcham + Mr. Christopher Kay, Silver-street + Mr. Charles Kingman, New-street + Mr. Stephen Kent, Charles-street + Mr. William Kenworthy + Mr. Thomas Kirkman + Mr. James Kempson + Mr. William Kirkland + + L. + + Mr. Manvel Lima, Abchurch-lane + Mr. Lewis, jun. Wrexham + Mr. William Lewis, Bow + Mr. Sampson Luker, Newington + Mr. Geoffrey Larkworthy, Clerkenwell + Theophilus Lane, Esq; + Mr. Thomas Lancaster + Rev. Mr. Long, Spixworth, Norfolk + Mrs. Eliz. Levi, Portsmouth + Mr. Lewellin, Dartmouth-str. + Capt. Lawson, Temple + Mr. Isaac Lamb + Mr. Stephen Lumley + Mr. Miles Largess + Mr. Peter Laughton, Wapping + Mr. Richard Leviston + Mr. Lambert + Mr. Leach + Dr. Lowther + + M. + + Mr. Robert Main, Swaffham + Mr. George Mytton + Mr. Thomas Milner + Mr. Henry Martyn + Mr. Charles Merryman + Mr. John Miers + Mr. Jonas Moxon + Mr. Andrew M‘Ewer + Mr. Jonathan Manning + Mr. William Markham + Mr. Thomas Mackintosh + Mr. John Moody + Mr. Malie + Mr. Molineux + Mr. Maude + Mr. Mayne + + N. + + John Norton, Esq; Golden-square + ──── Nicol, Esq; Argyle-street + Mr. Marmaduke Newby, Southmolton-street + Mr. Nevill Noble + Mr. Nicholas Nugent + Mr. Philip Noble + Mr. Peter Norris + Mr. John Newbolt + Mr. William Newcome + + O. + + Mr. Ogilvie, Swallow-street + Mr. William Overton + Mr. Peter Oxenford, Stratford + Mr. John Jones Owen + Mr. Charles Ogilvie + Mr. Humphry Orton + Mr. William Oxlade + + P. + + Mr. Rich. Privat, Petty-France + Mr. Perrot, Purser of the Culloden + Mr. John Penn + Mr. Thomas Perkins + Mr. Benjamin Pell + Mr. Robert Preston + Mr. William Primrose + Mr. Charles Paget + Mr. Samuel Pickering + Mr. Joseph Phillips, Rose-street + Mr. Henry Pullon, Broad-court + Mr. John Proper, Long-lane + Mr. Robert Price, Belton-street + Mr. Pinegar + Mr. Price + Mr. Piggot + + R. + + Mr. Joseph Richards, Lambeth-marsh + Mr. Sa. Ravensworth, Chelsea + Mr. Peter Rooker, Islington + Mr. William Robinson + Mr. Samuel Richardson + Mr. Richard Rowe + Mr. Joseph Roper, Bow + Mr. John Robertson + Mr. Isaac Robley + Mr. Stephen Rivers + Mr. James Rickards + Mr. Alexander Reid + Mr. Reid + Mr. Richards + + S. + + Mr. Henry Schutz, Rose-street + James Spencer, Esq; Warwick-street + Lieut. John Staunton + Mr. John Severn + Mr. Sparks, Maddox-street + Mr. William Simmonds + Mr. Henry Stewart + Mr. John Arthur Smith, Victualling-office + Mr. William St. John + Mr. Charles William Stevenson + Mr. Charles Stanhope + Mr. Edward Spoor, Bow + Mr. Wm. Suxspeck, Radcliffe + Mr. Barker Simson, jun. Salisbury-court + Mr. Senhouse, Piccadilly + Mr. Sovard, Oxford-road + Mr. Jeremiah Smith + Mr. William Henry Sibthorpe + Mr. Samuel Parker Southwell + Mr. William Stockham, Wardour-street + Mr. Edward Stone + Mr. John Simpson + Mr. Frederick Stark + Mr. Philip Sergeant + Mr. Moses Strickland + Mr. Edmund Smith, Swallow-street + Mr. Smith + Mr. Smith, Swan-lane + Mr. Strahan + + T. + + Rev. Mr. Trancker + Mr. Edward Terry, Victualling-office + Mr. Thomas Thrilwind + Mr. Francis Thomson + Mr. Charles Timbrel + Mr. James Thistlethwayte + Mr. Henry Thoroughgood + Mr. Philip Turton + Mr. James Thatcher, Wapping + Mr. Thompson, Plumtree-str. + + U. + + Mr. James Thomas Upton, Wapping + Mr. Francis Unwin, ditto + + W. + + Mr. Edward Warner, Royal-Exchange + Mr. John Wilson + ──── Walters, Esq; Curzon-street + Mrs. Williams, Fleet-street + Mr. William Warburton + Mr. John Whitworth + Mr. Isaac Wentworth + Mr. Charles Walker + Mr. Welch, Oldford + John Wood, Esq; Old Belton-street + James Wall, Esq; Stratford + Mr. Robert Wight + Mr. Charles Williams + Mr. Michael Wentworth + Mr. John Wenman + Mr. Alexander Wareham + Mr. Temple Wharton + Mr. West + Mr. Westgarth + Mr. Weale + Mr. Woodward + Mr. Wells + + Y. + + Mr. Joseph Young + Mr. William Yeraway + Mr. John Yeats + Mr. George York + + + + + Directions _to the_ Bookbinder _for placing the_ Plates: + + + In VOL. I. + Map of Mexico and South America to be placed at the beginning. + Horn Island ──── (_Introduction_) _to face page_ xxxviii + Head of Sir Francis Drake 1 + Drake going off to sea on a raft 41 + Beheading of Capt. Doughty 88 + Drake engaging the Cacafuego, a rich Spanish ship 113 + Drake conveying away the Spanish Judges and criminal savages 118 + Drake receiving the Crown from the Hioh of New Albion 123 + Cavendish plundering and burning Paita 191 + The King of Java’s Wives destroying themselves 226 + Cavendish’s crew in great distress, &c. 250 + Capt. Davis’s men taken off a rock 304 + Dampier’s men seizing oxen, mules, &c. at a farm-house 340 + Capt. Swan entertained by Rajah Laut 370 + Dampier and his companions overtaken by a storm 412 + Cowley and his men taking in provisions at Juan Fernandez 440 + + In VOL. II. + Alexander Selkirk making his cats and kids dance 24 + Miscellaneous Plate of fish, trees, &c. 48 + Mr. Hatley and crew whipped 89 + Distressed situation of the Success 120 + Sea-lion, sea-lioness, and seals 181 + Californian Woman habited in a deer’s skin 229 + Californian Man returned from fishing, and another in his bark-log 230 + Lawn where Commodore Anson pitched his tent at Juan Fernandez 289 + + In VOL. III. + The three Charts of the tracks of the Dolphin, Tamar, Swallow, + Endeavour, and M. Bougainville, to be accurately joined, and + placed at the beginning + Comm. Byron conversing with a Patagonian woman _to face page_ 11 + The wolf-fox of Falkland’s Islands 18 + Straits of Magellan 22 + The Queen of Otaheite taking leave of Capt. Wallis 99 + View of a town in the island of Terra del Fuego 196 + Musical youth in the new-discovered islands 218 + Mr. Banks receiving a visit from the King of the D. of York’s + Island 238 + A Morai, or burial-place 257 + A woman and a boy of the new-discovered islands 270 + A Priest of the new-discovered islands in the habit of his order 287 + Representation of a dance in the island of Ulietea 299 + View of a perforated rock in Tolaga-bay 326 + Head of a New Zealand Chief curiously tattooed 327 + View of an arched rock on the coast of New Zealand 371 + War-canoe, and a branch of the bread fruit tree 396 + New Zealand warrior in the dress of his country 398 + Warriors of Otaheite and New Zealand defying their enemies 399 + + In VOL. IV. + The hooded serpent, and an ape of Java 85 + M. Bougainville crossing St. Lucia river in a canoe drawn by + horses 126 + Bougainville hoisting the French colours in the straits of + Magellan 194 + Prospective view of the great cascade in Cascade-bay 201 + + In the VOYAGE to the NORTH POLE. + Map of the Icy Sea ──── (_Introduction_) i. + Chart of Spitzbergen, or New Greenland 33 + View of the Whale Fishery 40 + + + + + [Illustration: _S^R. FRANCIS DRAKE._ _J. June Sculp._] + + + + + SIR FRANCIS DRAKE’S + VOYAGES, + PARTICULARLY THAT + ROUND THE WORLD, + In 1577, 1578, 1579, and 1580. + + +Before we proceed to the relation of the particular Voyages that +characterize the navigators who first surrounded the globe, and who +immortalized their names by their skill and their courage, it may be +expected that we should give some account of their families and first +setting out, the distinguishing marks of genius that led them to prefer +the fatigues and dangers of a sea-faring life to learned ease, or the +calm pursuit of less hazardous employments; and that we should trace the +steps by which they rose to eminence by their bravery and their conduct. + +The bare narration of the incidents recorded in a single voyage, however +memorable, would convey but a very imperfect knowledge of the general +character of those renowned heroes, who carried the glory of their +country to the remotest regions of the earth. We shall, therefore, +endeavour to follow them as they advance to fame, and accompany them +from their highest elevation to that period when all distinctions are +levelled. + +The celebrated mariner, of whom we are now to give an account, was son +to Edmund Drake, a gentleman of Tavistoke, in Devonshire, who, being +inclined to the doctrine of the Protestants, at that time much opposed +by Q. Mary, was obliged to quit his place of residence, and retire to +Medway, in Kent; where, after that Queen’s death, he was first appointed +Chaplain in the royal navy, and afterwards Vicar of Upnor. In these +employments, his appointments being small, and his family large, he owed +the education of several of his children to the kindness of his +relations, and that, in particular, of Francis, the eldest of twelve, to +Sir John Hawkins; under whom, as it appears, he very early distinguished +himself, and laid the foundation both of his fame and his fortune. + +The learned Camden, indeed, informs us, that he was put apprentice to +the master of a small trading vessel, in whose service he behaved so +well, that his master, dying a batchelor, left him his vessel as a +reward for his diligence: but Stowe, who seems better informed, +represents him in a superior light; tells us, that Francis Russel, +afterwards Duke of Bedford, was his godfather; and that Sir John Hawkins +was his near relation. What Camden relates of Francis may, however, be +true of his brother; for there were no less than four who were bred to +the sea. + +Be this as it may, the first enterprize of consequence, in which we find +him engaged, was in a voyage to the West-Indies, as Captain of the +Judith, under his relation already mentioned. Those islands, having but +lately been discovered, and very little frequented by the English, were +thought so much to abound in wealth, that no voyager thither could fail +of being recompensed with great advantages. Nothing was talked of among +the mercantile or adventurous part of mankind but the beauty and riches +of the new world. Fresh discoveries were frequently made; new countries +and nations, never heard of before, were daily described; and it may +easily be concluded, that the relators did not lessen the merit of their +discoveries, by suppressing or diminishing any circumstance that might +produce wonder, or excite curiosity. + +This was the age of enterprize and discovery; and her Majesty encouraged +the ardour of her subjects by furnishing ships and commissions to such +officers of distinction in her royal navy as were willing to engage in +hazardous pursuits. + +The projects, however, that were formed, were not always successfully +carried into execution; they were frequently defeated by the ignorance +of the adventurers, but more often by the malice of the Spaniards, who, +from the first discovery of America, considered every other nation that +attempted to follow them, as invaders of their rights, and incroachers +on _their_ territories. At that time, however, as now, it was no +uncommon thing for those who went in search of new discoveries, to carry +on a kind of contraband trade with the new settlers; which, though +prohibited by the Crown of Spain, was yet countenanced by the Viceroys +and Governors: but even these would sometimes take advantage of the +power lodged in their hands, and make prize of the profits of the +voyage, under pretence of an illicit trade. + +Among those who suffered most by the injustice of the Viceroys, was Sir +John Hawkins; who, having struck out a new trade, highly advantageous to +the parties concerned, though disgraceful to humanity, supplied the +Mexican Spaniards with slaves from Africa, and received from them, in +return, large remittances in gold and silver. This was connived at, +though we do not find that it was absolutely tolerated, by the Spanish +court. + +It was, however, after one of those successful voyages, in which we find +two of the Queen’s ships engaged (namely, the Jesus, commanded by +Hawkins, as Admiral; and the Minion, of which Captain John Hampton was +Commander; with four other armed trading ships, among which was the +Judith, Captain Drake), that, being driven by stress of weather into the +port of St. John d’Ulloa, in the bay of Mexico, they were there waiting +for a supply of provisions, when the Spanish fleet from Europe arrived, +consisting of 12 sail, richly laden with European merchandize, and on +board of which was a new Viceroy. + +As the port was then absolutely in the power of the English, it was +debated, among the principal officers, whether the Spanish fleet should +be suffered to enter; as their Admiral suspected, that, if they were +admitted, they would contrive some means of distressing him; and if they +were not, they must perish at sea; an event that would certainly bring +on a war,--a consequence he could by no means justify. + +Upon mature deliberation, it was, therefore, judged safest to propose an +agreement with the Viceroy, to which he consented, and by which it was +stipulated, that the English should hold one side of the harbour, and +the Spaniards the other; and that hostages should be given on both +sides, that no injury should be done to either. But it was soon +discovered, that, though on the part of the English, six gentlemen were +sent, yet, on that of the Spaniards, the hostages were only common men, +finely dressed. This gave cause of distrust; yet the English, naturally +honest, were not sufficiently on their guard. + +The Spaniards for some weeks behaved with seeming cordiality; mutual +civilities passed between the officers of both nations; and the English, +having supplied their wants, were preparing to depart, when, all of a +sudden, at a signal given, the Spaniards assaulted their ships as the +officers were at dinner, boarded the Minion by a concealed ambuscade, +which, however, was repulsed with loss, and then a general massacre +ensued. The English who were on shore were all put to death; three of +the four trading ships were presently sunk; and the Minion and Jesus +were so embarrassed by their moorings, that it was almost a whole hour +before they could be placed in a posture of defence; which, however, was +at last effected. They then returned the attack with so much fury, that +the Spanish Vice-Admiral was soon blown up, and in her perished 300 men; +and not long after the Spanish Admiral himself was sunk. The Spaniards, +in revenge, set two of their ships on fire to burn the Minion and Jesus, +the first of which set sail and escaped; but the Jesus, after shifting +her crew on board the Judith, fell a victim with the rest to Spanish +treachery. + +In the night, the Judith having made her escape, endeavoured, but in +vain, to join the Minion; and being only a bark of 50 tons, alone, on a +hostile coast, crouded with men, and having only provisions on board for +her own slender crew, a mutiny arose among the mariners, and by far the +greatest number insisted on being put on shore, chusing rather to take +their chance among the savages, than to remain on board to starve at +sea, or again to fall into the power of the merciless Spaniards. + +Accordingly, Captain Hawkins, gave every man his choice, either to land +on the continent, or sail with him, and share his fate. About 100 of the +stoutest seamen chose the former; of whom five only lived to return to +England. These gave an account, that, on their landing, the natives, +mistaking them for Spaniards, fell upon them suddenly, and killed eight +of their number; that, after they were known to be enemies to the +Spaniards, they were used with kindness; that, however, being tired of +living among savages, they agreed to part, and seek the means of +returning home; some directed their course to the northward, and watched +the opportunity of seizing a small vessel, and, crossing the Gulph, +traversed an immense tract of land, till they arrived at a French +settlement in the North; of those who travelled westward, which was by +far the greatest part, sixty-five fell into the hands of the Spaniards, +and suffered various torments from the Inquisition, three were burnt +alive, and two only survived to reach their own country. Of those who +followed the other course, five found means, after enduring incredible +hardships, to get to Nova Scotia, of whom three were brought safe to +England in French merchants ships. + +It was in the above engagement that Capt. Drake first distinguished +himself; and to his judicious conduct, that those who escaped from the +Jesus owed their preservation. The Judith had the good fortune to arrive +safe in England, having purchased some provisions on the Island of Cuba; +but what became of the Minion we have not been able to learn. + +In this expedition Sir John Hawkins lost an immense sum. It was in vain +to make complaint to his sovereign of the infraction of the peace. The +Spanish minister vindicated the injustice of the Viceroy and the Queen, +tho’ she secretly resented the loss of her ships, could not openly abett +the illicit trade carried on by her servants. + +Drake, who shared in the misfortune of his relation, possessed both his +spirit and his industry. He did not sit down to lament the loss he had +sustained; but, having acquired some degree of credit by his gallant +behaviour, and some knowledge of the weakness and wealth of his enemies, +he determined to profit by his losses, and to make reprisals whenever a +fair opportunity should offer. + +It was no difficult matter to engage new adventurers in new projects in +those early days of Mexican commerce, and Drake was not long before he +raised a fund to begin trade on a new footing. In 1570 he made his first +expedition, chiefly on his own account, with two ships, the Dragon and +the Swan; and the next year in the Swan alone; in both which voyages he +enlarged his experience, but it does not appear that he repaired his +loss. + +In 1572 he found means, however, to fit out a much greater force, in +order to carry into execution an enterprise which he had meditated, not +only to reinstate his fortune, but to revenge the treachery of his +enemies. + +About this time war was agitating between England and Spain, to which it +must be confessed the illicit trade carried on to the Spanish +settlements not a little contributed. He, therefore, set sail from +Plymouth in the Pascha, a letter of marque ship, of 70 tons, accompanied +by the Swan, of 50 tons, the command of which he entrusted to his +brother John; in both which ships he had embarked 73 choice men, with a +year’s provisions and such warlike stores and ammunition as he judged +necessary for the enterprize he had in view. He had, likewise, the +precaution to take with him the frames of two or three small pinnaces, +that, if any accident should befal either of his larger ships, he might +have it in his power to preserve the crew without being driven to the +necessity of leaving any of them behind; a precaution which experience +had taught him in the unfortunate voyage of his kinsman Sir John. But +this was not the only use for which he foresaw these small vessels would +be wanted, as will appear in the sequel. + +With this warlike force, inconsiderable as it may now appear, he cleared +the land of England on the 12th of May, 1572; and, the weather +continuing fair, and the wind favourable, on the 29th of June he passed +between Dominica and Guadaloupe, and on the 6th of July came in sight of +the high land of Santa Martha; then continuing his course to the +southward, on the 15th of the same month both ships arrived at Port +Pheasant, which lay at a convenient distance from Nombre de Dios, the +place of their destination. + +Here he proposed to build his pinnaces, and was going a-shore with a few +men unarmed; when, discovering a smoke at a distance, he made the signal +for another boat to follow him with an armed force. Being joined by this +reinforcement, he marched towards the fire, where he found a plate of +lead nailed to a tree, with an inscription engraven upon it by one +Garret, an Englishman, who had left that place a day or two before, and +had taken that method of informing him that the Spaniards had been +advertised of his intended visit, and of his rendezvous at that port; +and that, therefore, it would be prudent for him to make but a very +short stay. + +Drake, surprized, no doubt, at the news, but at the same time knowing +how convenient this place was for his designs, and considering that the +hazard, and waste of time, which could not be avoided in seeking another +station, was equivalent to any other danger which was to be apprehended +from the Spaniards, determined to follow his first resolution; only, for +his greater security, he ordered a kind of palissade or fortification to +be made, by felling a number of large trees, and laying the trunks and +branches one across another, on an elevated spot that commanded the +river. This done, he set the carpenters to work; and while they were +employed in putting the frames of the pinnaces together, one Captain +Rause happened to touch at the same port, with a bark of 50 men. To +Rause Drake imparted his design; and, when the pinnaces were ready, both +set sail together, shaping their course to Nombre de Dios. They touched +at the Island of Pines, where they were informed, by the negroes they +found there, that the inhabitants of that place were in daily +expectation of some soldiers, which the Governor of Panama had promised +to send, to defend them from the Symerons, or fugitive negroes, who, +having escaped from the tyranny of their masters, had settled themselves +under two kings, or leaders, on each side of the passage between Nombre +de Dios and Panama; and not only asserted their natural right to liberty +and independance, but endeavoured to revenge the cruelties they had +suffered, and had lately put the inhabitants of Nombre de Dios into the +utmost consternation. These negroes the Captain set on shore on the main +land, so that they might, by joining the Symerons, recover their +liberty, or at least might not have it in their power to give the people +of Nombre de Dios any speedy information of his intention to invade +them. Then, selecting 53 men from his own company, and 20 from the crew +of his new associate Captain Rause, he embarked with them in his new +pinnaces, and set sail for Nombre de Dios. + +On July the 28th, at night, he approached the town undiscovered, and +dropt his anchors under the shore, intending, after his men were +refreshed, to begin the attack; but, finding that they were terrifying +each other with formidable accounts of the strength of the place, and +the multitude of the inhabitants, he determined to hinder the panic from +spreading farther, by leading them immediately to action; and, +therefore, ordering them to their oars, he landed without any +opposition, there being only one gunner upon the key, though it was +fortified by six brass cannon of the largest size. But the gunner, while +they were employed in throwing the cannon from their carriages, alarmed +the town, as they soon discovered by the bells, the drums, and the noise +of the people. + +Drake, leaving twelve men to guard the pinnaces, marched into the town +with little or no opposition. After a short skirmish, the forces that +the alarm had hastily drawn together were soon dispersed, except a few +whom he detained as prisoners, in order to shew him the Governor’s +house, and also the store-house, where the mules that bring the silver +from Panama were unloaded. + +Being now in full possession of the town, he posted the main of his +small body, under the command of his brother, in the market-place; and +then followed the guides, with the rest, to the store-house; where, +forcing the door, and entering the room where the silver was deposited, +they found it heaped up in bars, in such quantities as almost exceed +belief, the pile being, as they conjectured, seventy feet in length, ten +in breadth, and twelve in height, each bar weighing between thirty and +forty-five pounds. It is easy to imagine, that, at the sight of this +treasure, nothing was thought of, by the English sailors, but by what +means it might best be conveyed to their boats, and, doubtless, it was +not easy for Drake (who, considering their distance from the shore, and +the number of their enemies, was afraid of being intercepted in their +retreat) to hinder his men from encumbering themselves with so much +silver as might have retarded their march, and obstructed the use of +their weapons: however, by promising to lead them to the King’s +treasury, where there were gold and jewels to a far greater value, and +where the plunder was not only more portable, but nearer the shore, he +persuaded them to follow him (not, however, without every man his bar), +and rejoin the main body in the market-place. Here he found his little +troop much discouraged by the apprehension that, if they stayed any +longer, the enemy might gain possession of their pinnaces, and that they +should then, without any means of safety, be left to stand alone against +the whole force of that country. Drake, not indeed easily terrified, but +sufficiently cautious, sent to the harbour to examine the ground of +their fears, and to learn if the same panic had taken possession of the +men whom he had left to guard his boats; but, finding no foundation for +these dreadful apprehensions, he persisted in his first design, and led +the troop forward to the royal treasury. In their way there fell a +violent shower of rain, which wet some of their bow-strings, and +extinguished many of their matches (spring-locks for muskets not being +then invented); a misfortune which might soon have been repaired, and +which, perhaps, the enemy might suffer in common with them; but which, +however, on this occasion, very much embarrassed them, as the delay +produced by it repressed that ardour which, sometimes, is only to be +kept up by continued action. + +It was in vain for Drake to expostulate, or to represent the disgrace of +returning in rags, after having the chief treasure of the world within +their power; he therefore reproached their cowardice, set before their +eyes the imminent danger to which they would inevitably be exposed, if +they failed to behave like men anxious for glory, and zealous for the +honour of their country. Animated by these incentives, they resumed +their former spirit, and, pushing briskly forward, the whole company +followed till they arrived at the treasury, which they instantly forced. +Having thus far succeeded, Drake committed the care of the riches to his +brother, and Oxenham, of Plymouth[1], (a man known afterwards for his +bold adventures in the same parts) while he, with the main body, should +again return and reconnoitre the market-place, and disperse any parties +of the Spaniards that might be forming into a body to oppose their +progress. With this view, as he was advancing, his strength suddenly +failed him, and he fell down speechless. + + [1] This man made himself remarkable by one of the boldest + undertakings that ever was devised. As soon as he arrived in England, + with the prize-money acquired in this expedition, he purchased a bark + of 140 tons, and manned it with 70 brave seamen; with these he sailed + to the Isthmus of Darien, and, laying his bark up in a creek, marched + cross the neck of land which separates the North Sea from the great + Pacific Ocean, where he arrived, with his companions, without being + discovered; and, having there seized a ship for their purpose, they + ranged the coast, and made themselves masters of an immense treasure; + but, falling out among themselves, they separated; and, thus weakened, + they became an easy prey to the Spaniards, who recovered their + treasure; and Oxenham being taken, with those that continued with him, + and having no commission to produce, both he and his companions were + executed as pirates. When they parted, they had in their possession + two ships laden with gold, to the amount of half a million sterling. + +Then it was that his companions perceived a wound in his leg, that he +received in the first encounter, but hitherto concealed, lest his men, +easily discouraged, should make their concern for his life a pretence +for returning to their boats. Such, however, had been his loss of blood, +as was discovered upon nearer observation, that it had filled the prints +of his foot-steps; and it appeared scarce credible, that, after such an +effusion, life should remain. The bravest were now willing to retire; +neither desire of honour, or of riches, was thought to prevail in any +man over his regard for his leader. + +Drake, whom cordials soon restored to his senses, was the only man who +could not be prevailed on to leave the enterprize unfinished. It was to +no purpose that they advised him to submit to go on board to have his +wound dressed, and promised to return with him to compleat their design. +He well knew how impracticable it was to regain the opportunity when it +was once lost, and could easily foresee that a respite of but a few +hours would enable the Spaniards to recover from their consternation, to +assemble their forces, refit their batteries, and remove their treasure. +What he had undergone so much danger to obtain, was now in his hands, +and the thoughts of leaving it untouched was too mortifying to be +patiently borne; however, as there was little time for consultation, and +the same danger attended their stay in that perplexity and confusion, as +their return, they bound up his wound with his scarf, and, partly by +force, partly by intreaty, they carried him back to the boats, in which, +with what treasure they were able to bring off, they all embarked by +break of day. Then taking with them, out of the harbour, a sloop laden +with wines, they went to the Bastimento’s, an island about a league from +the town, where they staid two days, to recover the wounded men who had +been hurt in the first rencounter, and to regale themselves with the +wines they had taken, and with the fruits that grew in great plenty in +the gardens of that island. + +During their stay here, there came over to that island a Spanish +gentleman, sent by the Governor with instructions to inquire whether the +Captain was that Drake who had before been on their coast; whether the +arrows with which many of their men were wounded were not poisoned; and +whether they wanted provisions or other necessaries? The messenger, +likewise, extolled their courage with the highest encomiums, and +expressed his admiration of their daring undertaking. Drake, though he +knew the civilities of an enemy are always to be suspected, and that the +messenger, amidst all his professions of regard, was no other than a +spy, yet knowing that he had nothing to apprehend, treated him with the +highest honours that his condition admitted of. In answer to his +inquiries, he assured him, that he was the same Drake with whose +character they were before acquainted; that he was a rigid observer of +the laws of war, and that he never permitted the arrows discharged by +his followers to be poisoned. He dismissed him with considerable +presents and told him, that, though he had in part failed in this +attempt, he would never desist from his design of revenging the +treachery of the Viceroy of Mexico, till he had shared with Spain the +treasures of America. + +He then resolved to return to the Isle of Pines, where they had left +their ships, and to consult about the measures they were now to take; +and, having arrived on the 1st of August at their former station, they +dismissed Captain Rause, who, judging it unsafe to stay any longer on +the coast, desired to be no farther engaged in their designs. But Drake, +not to be diverted from his purpose, after being cured of his wound, +inquired of a negroe, whom he took on board at Nombre de Dios, the most +wealthy settlements, and weakest parts of the coast, who advised the +attack of Carthagena. This the Admiral seemed to approve; and, setting +sail without loss of time, came to anchor, Aug. 13, between Charecha and +St. Barnard’s, two islands at a little distance from the harbour of +Carthagena. Then passing with his boats round the island, he entered the +harbour, and in the mouth of it found a frigate with only an old man in +it, who voluntarily informed him, that, about an hour before a pinnace +had passed by, with sails and oars, and all the appearance of expedition +and importance; that, as she passed, the crew on board her bid him take +care of himself; and that, as soon as she touched the shore, he heard +the noise of cannon, fired as a warning, and saw the shipping of the +port drawn up under the guns of the castle. The Captain, who had himself +heard the discharge of the artillery, was soon convinced that he was +discovered; and that, therefore, nothing could be attempted there with +any probability of success. He therefore contented himself with taking a +ship of Seville, of 240 tons (which the relator of this voyage mentions +as a very large ship), and two small frigates, in which he found letters +of advice from Nombre de Dios, intended to alarm that part of the coast. + +Drake, now finding his pinnaces of great use, and not having a +sufficient number of sailors for all his vessels, was desirous of +destroying the Swan, the ship commanded by his brother, that the others +might be better manned. This, necessary as it was, could not easily be +done without disgusting his company; who, having made several prosperous +voyages in that vessel, would naturally be averse to her destruction. + +Drake knew that nothing but the love of their leaders could animate his +followers to encounter such hardships as he was about to expose them to; +and, therefore, rather chose to bring his designs to pass by artifice +than by authority. He sent for the carpenter of the Swan, took him into +his cabin, and, having first engaged him to secrecy, ordered him in the +middle of the night, to go down into the well, and bore three holes +through the bottom, laying something against them that might hinder the +bubbling of the water from being heard. To this the carpenter, after +some expostulation, consented, and the next night performed his promise. +In the morning, August the 15th, Drake, going out with his pinnace +a-fishing, rowed up to the Swan; and, having invited his brother to +partake of his diversion, inquired, with a negligent air, why the Swan +was so deep in the water? Upon which, his brother, being alarmed, sent +down his steward to learn the cause, who returned immediately, with an +account that the ship was leaky, and in danger of sinking in a very +little time. They had instantly recourse to the pump; but, having +laboured for five hours, and gained very little upon the water, they +willingly, according to Drake’s advice, set the vessel on fire, and went +on board the Pascha. + +Finding it now necessary to lie concealed for some time, till the +Spaniards should forget their danger, and remit their vigilance, they +set sail for the Sound of Darien, and, without approaching the coast, +that their course might not be observed, they arrived there in six days. + +This being a convenient place for their reception, both on account of +privacy, it being out of the road of all trade, and as it was well +supplied with wood, water, wild-fowl, hogs, deer, and all kind of +provisions, he stayed here fifteen days, to careen his vessels, and +refresh his men, who worked interchangeably, on one day the one half, +and on the next day the other half. + +On the 5th of September, Drake left his brother with the ship at Darien, +and set out with two small vessels towards the Rio Grand, which they +reached in three days, and on the 9th of the same month were discovered +by a Spaniard from the land, who, believing them to be his countrymen, +made a signal for them to come on shore, with which they very readily +complied; but he, soon finding his mistake abandoned his plantation, +where they found great plenty of provisions, with which having laden +their vessels, they departed. + +In the mean time, his brother, Captain John Drake, went, according to +the directions that had been left him, in search of the Symerons, or +fugitive negroes, from whose assistance they now entertained hopes of +completing the success of their voyage: and, touching upon the main +land, by means of the negroes whom they had taken from Nombre de Dios, +engaged two of the Symerons to come on board his ship, leaving two of +his own men as hostages for their safe return. Those men, having assured +him of the affection of their nation, appointed an interview between +Drake and their leaders. With this appointment Drake being made +acquainted, he immediately quitted Port Plenty, so named by the English +from the great store of provisions they had amassed at that place, and +came, by the direction of the Symerons, into a secret bay, among +beautiful islands covered with trees, which concealed their ships from +observation, and where the channel was so narrow and rocky that it was +impossible to enter it by night; so that there was no danger of a sudden +surprize. Here they met, and entered into engagements, which common +enemies and common dangers preserved from violation. But the first +conversation informed the English that their expectations were not +immediately to be gratified: for, upon their enquiries after the most +probable means of acquiring gold and silver, the Symerons told them, +that, had they known sooner the chief end of their expedition, they +could easily have gratified them; but that during the rainy season, +which was now begun, they could not recover the treasure, which they had +taken from the Spaniards, out of the rivers in which they had concealed +it. Drake, therefore, proposing to wait in this place till the rains +were passed, built with the assistance of the Symerons, a fort of earth +and timber; and, leaving his brother and part of his company with the +Symerons, set out with three pinnaces towards Rio de la Hacha, being of +a spirit too active to lie still patiently, even in a state of plenty +and security, and with the most probable expectations of immense riches. + +In their way thither, they anchored within sight of Carthagena without +landing, and on the 17th of October took a Spanish bark, with which they +entered the harbour in disguise; but were soon accosted by a Spanish +gentleman whom they had sometime before taken and set at liberty; who +coming to them in a boat, as he pretended, without the knowledge of the +Governor, made them great promises of friendship, and professions of +esteem. But Drake, having waited till next morning without receiving the +information he had been encouraged to expect, found that all this +pretended kindness was no more than a stratagem to amuse him, while the +Governor was raising forces for his destruction. + +This appeared more clearly on the 20th, when two frigates, well armed +and manned, came out in the night with a view to surprize the pinnaces, +and make prisoner of Drake: but these being discovered, and their design +frustrated, Drake, when day-light approached, leapt intrepidly ashore +single, in defiance of their troops, which hovered at a distance in the +woods and on the hills, without ever venturing to advance within reach +of the shot from the pinnaces. To leap, however, upon an enemy’s coast, +in sight of a superior force, only to shew how little they were feared, +was an act that in these times would meet with little applause: but +motives of policy might influence the conduct of Drake, and make that +necessary then which now appears a ridiculous bravado. Finding the whole +country advertised of his attempts, and in arms to oppose him, he might +make a feint only of landing to increase their fears, and encourage +their alarms, that they might keep together till he should assault them +in their deserted posts; a stratagem which there is reason to think he +put in practice, as he continued upon the coast till one of his vessels +had only a gammon of bacon and a small quantity of bread on board for +seventeen men, and till there was on board his own vessel even a greater +scarcity. But resolution and success reciprocally produce each other. +They had not sailed more than three leagues on their return to their +ships before they fell in with and attacked a coasting vessel, which +after some resistance they took, and happily found it laden with +excellent provisions. He now determined to return to the Symerons, with +whom, as has been said, he left his brother, and part of his force; and +to attempt, by their assistance and direction, to make his way over, and +invade the Spaniards in the inland parts, where they would probably +never dream of an enemy. + +When they arrived at Port Diego, so named from the negroe who had +procured them their intercourse with the Symerons, they found Captain +John Drake and one of his company dead, being killed in attempting, +almost unarmed, to board a frigate well provided with all things +necessary for its defence. The Captain was unwilling to make the attack, +and represented to his company the madness of their proposal; but, being +over-borne by their clamours and importunities, to avoid the imputation +of cowardice, complied to his destruction. + +But this was not the only misfortune that befel this little company; for +soon after many of them fell ill of the calenture, a malignant fever, +very frequent in the hot climates, which carried off, among several +others, Joseph Drake, another brother of the Commander. + +While Drake was employed in the recovery of the sick, the Symerons, who +ranged the country for intelligence, brought him an account that the +Spanish fleet was arrived at Nombre de Dios, the truth of which was +confirmed by a pinnace which he sent out to make observations. This, +therefore, was the time for their journey, when the treasures of the +American mines were to be transported from Panama, over land, to Nombre +de Dios. He, therefore, by the direction of the Symerons, furnished +himself with all things necessary; and, on the third of February in the +following year, set out from Port Diego. Having lost already twenty +eight of his company, and being under the necessity of leaving some to +guard his ship, he took with him only 18 English and 30 Symerons, who +not only served as guards to shew the way, but as purveyors to procure +provisions. + +They carried with them arrows for war, and arrows for hunting and +fowling, the heads of which are proportioned in size to the game they +are pursuing. For oxen, stags, or wild boars, they have arrows or +javelins with heads weighing a pound and half, which they discharge near +hand, and which scarcely ever fail of being mortal. Their second sort +are about half as heavy as the other, and are generally shot from their +bows; these are intended for smaller beasts. With the third sort, of +which the heads are an ounce in weight, they kill birds. As this nation +is in a state which does not set them above continual cares for the +immediate necessaries of life, he that can temper iron best is among +them most esteemed; and, perhaps, it would be happy for every nation, if +honours and applauses were as justly distributed, and he were most +distinguished whose talents were most useful to society. + +Every day by sun-rising they began to march, and having travelled till +ten, rested near some river till twelve; then travelling again till +four, they reposed all night in huts, or wigwams, which the Symerons had +either left standing in their former marches, or very readily erected +for them, by setting up three or four posts in the ground, and laying +poles from one to another, in the form of a roof, which they covered +with palmetto boughs and plantain leaves. In the vallies, where they +were sheltered from the winds, they left three or four feet next the +ground open; but, on the hills, where they were more exposed to the +chill blasts of the night, they thatched them close to the ground, +leaving only a door for entrance, and a vent a-top in the middle for the +smoke of the fire to escape. + +In their march, they met not only with plenty of fruits upon the banks +of the rivers, but with wild swine in abundance, of which the Symerons +without difficulty killed, for the most part, as many as were wanted. +One day, however, they found only an otter, and were about to dress it; +at which Drake expressing his wonder, was asked by Pedro, the chief +Symeron, “Are you a man of war, and in want, and yet doubt whether this +be meat that hath blood in it?” For which Drake in private rebuked him, +says the relator; whether justly or not, it is not very important to +determine; only it shews the genius of the times when superstition +prevailed, and when the greatest men were not wholly exempt from its +influences. + +On the third day of their march, and the 6th of February, they came to a +town of the Symerons, situated on the side of a hill, and encompassed +with a ditch and a mud wall, to secure it from any sudden surprize. Here +they lived with great neatness, and in plenty; and with some observation +of religion, paying great reverence to the cross; a practice which, the +relator says, Drake prevailed upon them to change for the use of the +Lord’s Prayer; which, however, in so short a stay, is very unlikely. +Indeed, it is added, that here they strongly importuned Drake to prolong +his abode, promising to double his force; but he, either thinking +greater numbers unnecessary, or fearing, that, if any difference should +arise between them and his own men, he should be overborne by numbers, +he prudently declined their invitation, and their offer of additional +assistance, and that in such terms as expressed his eagerness to engage, +and his confidence of success from the bravery of his followers. + +The Symerons continued to conduct him on his journey, and led him +through rural shades and lofty woods, which sheltered his people so +effectually from the sun, that their march was less toilsome than if +they had travelled in England during the heat of summer. Four of the +Symerons that were acquainted with the way, went about a mile before the +main body, and cut off branches as marks to direct them, for there was +no beaten track; then followed twelve Symerons, after whom came the +English, with the two leaders; and the other Symerons closed the rear. +In this order, on the 11th of February, they arrived at the top of a +very high hill, on the summit of which grew a tree of a wonderful height +and magnitude, in which they had cut steps for the more easy ascent to +the top, where there was a kind of alcove, to which they invited Drake, +and from thence shewed him not only the North Sea, from whence they +came, but the great Pacific Ocean, on which no English vessel had ever +yet sailed. This prospect exciting his natural curiosity and ardour for +adventures and discoveries, he lifted up his hands to God, and implored +his blessing upon the resolution which he that instant formed of sailing +in an English ship on that immense sea. + +From this stupendous mountain they descended, after having feasted their +eyes with the grandest prospect the earth can furnish; and in two days +came into an open level country, where their march was incommoded with +the grass, which is of a peculiar kind, consisting of a stalk like that +of a bull-rush, and a blade on which the oxen and other cattle feed till +it grows too high for them to reach: then it is that the natives set the +whole on fire; and it is no uncommon thing to behold vallies of immense +extent in a blaze at once; from whence the cattle fly in the utmost +terror, and many perish by the sudden conflagration. It might be +supposed, that this burning of the soil, would, in a hot climate, check +the powers of vegetation, and that it would be years before the earth +could recover its fertility; but it is just the contrary; the ashes of +the reeds are hardly extinguished before a new verdure begins to appear; +and before a month is elapsed, the whole valley, beheld at a distance, +looks as green as ever; so astonishingly wonderful are the powers of +Nature on this happy soil! + +When they had arrived within a convenient distance of the road from +Panama, they posted themselves in a grove or wood, near which the +treasure was to be conveyed from thence to Nombre de Dios. They then +dispatched a trusty Symeron, in the habit of a slave, properly +instructed, to learn on what day the mules, on whose backs the treasure +is carried, were to set out. The man was so well qualified for the +service, and so industrious in the prosecution of it, that he soon +returned with an account, that the treasurer of Lima, intending to +embark for Europe, would pass the night following with eight mules laden +with gold, and one with jewels; that it was their custom to travel by +night, and to rest in the day, to avoid the heat; and that Venta Cruz +was to be their first stage. + +On this intelligence, they changed their situation, and immediately +directed their march towards Venta Cruz, sending, for security, two +Symerons, habited as before, to examine the way, who, as they passed +along, perceived, by the scent of a match, that some Spaniard was before +them and creeping silently forward, surprized a soldier asleep upon the +ground. They bound him, without offering any other violence, and brought +him to Drake, who, upon enquiry, found that their spy had not deceived +them in his intelligence. The soldier, having informed himself of the +Captain’s name, conceived such a confidence in his well-known clemency, +that, after having made an ample discovery of the treasure that was now +at hand, cautioned them likewise against being deceived by the recoes, +or carriers, from Nombre de Dios, who met the others by the way, and who +were hourly expected, with merchandize and provisions, but without any +gold. He closed his examination with an humble petition to Drake, that, +when the expected treasure should fall into his hands, he would be +graciously pleased to allow him as much of it as would maintain himself +and his children during the remainder of their lives, since there would +abundantly more arrive than he and his company could carry away. Drake +agreed to his request, upon condition that he led him to a place of +secrecy, where he could conceal his men till the time of action, and +where there was no danger of the mules passing by without being +perceived. This the man did; and Drake placed his ambush accordingly. + +Before the time expected, the men were properly refreshed and +instructed. Oxenham was appointed to head the Symerons, assisted by +Pedro their leader; and Drake was to command the English. The parties +were then divided; the English took the right of the way in front, and +the Symerons the left at a small distance in the rear. In this manner +they were posted, that one company might be in readiness to seize the +hindmost mule at the same time that the other had seized the foremost; +for the mules, it seems, being tied together, travel in a line, and are +all guided by leading the first. + +Every thing being now as well concerted as human prudence could direct, +and the critical moment of action soon expected, they lay down and +covered themselves in the grass, at about eighty or ninety paces +distance from the road, that the noise of their breathing might not be +heard by the guard that conveyed the treasure. + +They had not been more than an hour in this situation, when the bells of +the mules on the left, coming from Venta Cruz, began to be heard: but +previous orders having been given to meddle only with those from Panama, +those from Venta Cruz were suffered to pass unmolested. Unfortunately, +however, it happened, that one Robert Pike, being heated with liquor, +prevailed upon the man that was next him to creep forward with him, in +order to be in readiness to signalize themselves, by being the first to +seize the mules from Panama. At that instant, an officer, who +accompanied the recoes from Venta Cruz, perceiving something white +moving in the grass (for Drake had ordered all his company to put their +shirts over their clothes, to distinguish them in the night), took the +alarm, and, from a walk, was observed to push his horse forward on a +smart trot; and, before he had passed the hindmost ambuscade, he was +heard to ride along in a full gallop; but neither Drake, who commanded +the English, nor Oxenham, who headed the Symerons, being apprized of the +reason, had any thought of taking measures to intercept his journey. + +It was not, however, long before the recoes from Panama came up, and +were eagerly seized by the English in front, and secured by the +Symerons, as had been agreed upon, in the rear but, to their great +mortification, they found two of them only loaded with silver, and the +rest with provisions, six of those from Panama, which carried the +valuable burdens of gold and jewels, being ordered back, and the like +number that came from Venta Cruz sent forward in their room. The drivers +were brought immediately to the Captain, and examined, who informed him, +that a horseman who met them riding in haste had talked with the +treasurer, and advised him to send back his gold and jewels, and suffer +those only to proceed that were now in his [Drake’s] power, that he +might, by that cheap experiment, discover whether there was any ambush +in the way. + +That Drake was not less enraged than his followers at this +disappointment cannot be doubted; but there was now no time to be spent +in complaints. The whole country, he knew, would soon be alarmed, and +all the force of the Spaniards assembled to overwhelm him; he had no +fortress to retire to; every man was his enemy; and every road better +known to the Spaniards than to himself. This was an occasion that +demanded all the qualities of an hero, an intrepidity never to be +shaken, and a judgment never to be perplexed. He immediately considered +all the circumstances of his present situation, and found that it +afforded him only the choice of marching back by the same way through +which he came, or forcing his passage through Venta Cruz. He foresaw +many difficulties in marching back, besides the hazard of having his +ships seized before his return; he, therefore, determined to pass +forwards to Venta Cruz, before the enemy could be prepared to oppose +him. He asked Pedro, the leader of the Symerons, whether he was resolved +to follow him? and, having received from him the strongest assurance +that nothing should separate them, commanded his men to refresh +themselves, and prepare to set forwards. When they came to the gates of +the town, they dismissed the mules they had made use of to carry their +prize, and continued their march with as little noise as possible; yet +they discovered that the alarm had been spread, and the forces of the +town hastily drawn together, to oppose their entrance. Drake, who was +not unacquainted with the behaviour of that kind of military, received +their first onset, and then breaking in upon them, drove them before him +without farther opposition, and was seconded by the Symerons, who could +not be restrained from making plunder of the town: but Drake hastened in +person to the Spanish ladies, and assured them that no injuries should +be offered to them; so inseparable is humanity from true courage. + +Having thus broken the spirits, and scattered the forces of the +Spaniards, he continued his march to the ships without any apprehension +of danger, yet with great speed, being very solicitous about the state +of the crew; so that he allowed his men, harrassed as they were, but +little time for sleep or refreshment; but by kind exhortations, gentle +authority, and a chearful participation of all their hardships, +prevailed upon them to bear without murmur, not only the toil of +travelling, but, on some days, the pain of hunger. In this march, he +owed much of his expedition to the assistance of the Symerons, who, +being accustomed to the climate, and naturally robust, when any of the +English fainted by the way, two of them would carry him between them for +miles together. Nor was their valour less than their humanity, after +they had learned from their English companions to dispise the fire-arms +of the Spaniards. + +When they were within five leagues of the ships, they found a town built +in their absence by the Symerons, at which Drake consented to halt, +sending a Symeron to the ships with his gold toothpick as a token, +which, though the master knew it, was not sufficient to gain the +messenger credit, till, upon examination, he found that the Captain, +having ordered him to regard no message without his hand-writing, had +engraven his name upon it with the point of his knife; he then sent the +pinnace up the river, which they met, and afterwards sent to the town +for those whose weariness had made them unable to march farther. + +On February the 23d, the whole company was re-united and Drake, whose +good or ill success never prevailed over his piety, celebrated their +meeting with thanks to God. + +Drake, not yet discouraged, soon turned his thoughts to new projects; +and, without languishing in melancholy reflections upon past +miscarriages, employed himself in forming schemes for repairing them. +Eager of action, and acquainted with man’s nature, he never suffered +idleness to infect his followers with cowardice; but kept them from +sinking under any disappointment, by directing their attention to some +new enterprize. + +Upon consultation with his own men, and the Symerons, he found them +divided in their opinions; some declaring, that, before they engaged in +any new attempt, it was necessary to increase their stores of +provisions; and others urging that the ships, in which the Spanish +treasure was embarked, should be immediately attempted. The Symerons +proposed a third plan, and advised them to undertake another journey +over-land, to the house of one Pezoro, near Veragua, whose slaves +brought him every day more than 200 pounds sterling from the mines, +which he heaped together in a strong stone house, that might, by the +help of the English, be easily forced. But Drake, being unwilling to +fatigue his followers with another journey over land, determined to +steer a middle course between these variable opinions; and, manning his +two pinnaces, the Bear and the Minion, he sent John Oxenham in the Bear +towards Tolu, to seek provisions; and went himself in the Minion to the +Cabezes, to endeavour to intercept the treasure that was to be +transported from Veragua and that coast, to the fleet at Nombre de Dios; +first dismissing with presents those Symerons who desired to return to +their wives, and ordering those that chose to remain with him to be +kindly entertained. Drake took at the Cabezes a frigate of Veragua, the +pilot of which informed him, that there was in the harbour of Veragua a +ship freighted with more than a million of gold; to which he offered to +conduct him, being well acquainted with the soundings, if he might be +allowed his share of the prize; so much was his avarice superior to his +honesty. + +Drake, after some deliberation, complying with the pilot’s conditions, +sailed towards the harbour; but had no sooner entered the mouth of it +than he heard the report of artillery, which was answered by others at a +greater distance; upon which the pilot told them that they were +discovered, this being the signal appointed by the Governor to alarm the +coast. + +Drake now thought it convenient to return to the ships, that he might +enquire the success of the other pinnace, which he found with a frigate +that she had taken with twenty-eight fat hogs, 200 hens, and a great +store of maize or Indian corn. The vessel itself was so strong and +well-built, that he fitted it for war, determining to make a second +attempt on Nombre de Dios. + +On March the 21st, he set sail with the new frigate and the Bear towards +the Cabezes, at which he arrived in little more than two days, and found +there one Totu, a Frenchman, with a ship of war. Having supplied his +ship with water, and other articles of which he was in want, the Captain +desired to join the Admiral in his new attempt, to which Drake +consented, and admitted him to accompany him with 20 of his men, +stipulating to allow them a proportionable share of whatever booty they +should acquire: yet they were not without some suspicions of danger from +this new ally, he having eighty men, and they being now reduced to +thirty-one. Manning, however, the pinnaces, they set sail for Rio +Francisco, at which place they arrived on the 29th of March. Here they +landed; and, having dismissed their pinnaces for fear of discovery, and +ordered them to repair to the same place on the 4th day following, they +began their march through the woods towards Nombre de Dios, and +continued it with such silence and regularity as surprized the French, +who did not imagine the Symerons so discreet and obedient to command as +they appeared to be, and were therefore in perpetual anxiety about the +fidelity of their guides: nor did the Symerons treat the Frenchmen with +that submission and regard which they paid to the English, whose bravery +and conduct they had already tried. At length, after a laborious march +of more than seven leagues, they began to hear the hammers of the +carpenters in the bay, it being the custom in that hot season to work in +the night, and to rest in the day; and, in a short time, they perceived +the approach of the recoes, or droves of mules, from Panama. They now no +longer doubted that their labour would be rewarded, and every man +imagined himself secure from poverty for the remaining part of his life; +they, therefore, when the mules came up, rushed out, and seized them +with an alacrity proportioned to their expectations. The three droves +consisted of one hundred and nine mules, each of which carried 300 +pounds weight of silver. It was to little purpose that the soldiers, +ordered to convoy the treasure, attempted resistance. After a short +combat, in which the French Captain and one of the Symerons were +wounded, it appeared with how much greater ardour men are animated by +interest than fidelity. + +As it was possible for them to carry away but a small part of this +treasure, after having wearied themselves with hiding it in the +thickets, they determined to return by the same way they came; and, +without being pursued, they traversed the woods, where the French +Captain, being disabled by his wound, was obliged to stay, two of his +company continuing with him. When they had gone forward about two +leagues, the Frenchmen missed another of their company, who, upon +enquiry, was known to be intoxicated with wine, and supposed to have +lost himself in the woods by neglecting to observe the guides; but +common prudence not allowing them to hazard the whole company by too +much solicitude for a single life, they travelled on towards Rio +Francisco, at which they arrived on the 3d of April; and, looking out +for their pinnaces, were surprized with the sight of seven Spanish +sloops, and immediately concluded that some intelligence of their +motions had been carried to Nombre de Dios, and that these vessels had +been fitted out to pursue them, which might undoubtedly have overpowered +the pinnaces and their feeble crews. Nor did their suspicions stop here; +but immediately it occurred to them, that their men might be compelled +by torture to discover where their frigate and ship were stationed, +which being weakly manned, and without the presence of the chief +Commander, would fall into their hands almost without resistance, and +all possibility of escaping be entirely cut off. These reflections sunk +the whole company into despair; and every one, instead of endeavouring +to break through the difficulties that surrounded him, resigned himself +up to his ill fortune; when Drake, whose intrepidity was never to be +shaken, and whole reason was never to be surprized or embarrassed, +represented to them, that, though the Spaniards should have made +themselves masters of the pinnaces, they might yet be hindered from +discovering the ships. He put them in mind, that the pinnaces could not +be taken, the men examined, their examinations compared, their +resolutions formed, their vessels sent out, and the ships taken, in an +instant. Some time must necessarily be spent before the last blow could +be struck; and, if that time were not neglectfully lost, it might be +possible for some of them to reach the ships before the enemy, and +direct them to change their station. + +They were animated with this discourse, by which they observed that +their leader was not without hope; but, when they came to look more +narrowly into their situation, they were unable to conceive upon what it +was founded. To pass by land was impossible, as the way lay over high +mountains, thick woods, and deep rivers; they had not a single boat in +their power, so that passage by water seemed equally impracticable. But +Drake determined upon the only means of success which their condition +afforded them; and, ordering his men to make a raft out of the trees +that were then floating in the river, offered himself to put out to sea +upon it, and chearfully asked who would accompany him. John Owen, John +Smith, and two Frenchmen, who were willing to share his fortune, +embarked with him on the raft, which was fitted out with a sail made of +the biscuit sacks in which they had carried their provisions, and formed +a kind of oar to direct its course instead of a rudder. Then, having +comforted the rest with assurances of his regard for them, and +resolution to leave nothing unattempted for their deliverance, he put +off; and, after having with much difficulty sailed three leagues, +descried two pinnaces hasting towards him, which, upon a nearer +approach, he discovered to be his own; and, hailing them, proposed that +they should anchor behind a point that jutted out into the sea, while he +put to shore; and, crossing the land on foot, was received by his +company with that satisfaction which is only known to those who have +been acquainted with dangers and distresses. + + [Illustration: _Cap^t. Drake, going off to Sea on a Raft in Quest of + his two Pinnaces._ _J. June. Sc._] + +The same night they rowed silently to Rio Francisco, where they embarked +the whole company, with what treasure they had been able to bring with +them through the woods; then sailing back with the utmost expedition, +they returned to their frigate, and soon after to their ship, where +Drake divided the gold and silver equitably between the French and +English. + +Here they spent fourteen days in fitting out their frigate more +completely; during which time, the Frenchmen, with their ship, lay among +the Cabezes, while twelve English and sixteen Symerons travelled once +more into the country, as well to recover the French Captain, whom they +had left wounded, as to bring away the treasure which they had hid in +the woods. Drake, whom his company would not suffer to hazard his person +in another land expedition, went with them to Rio Francisco, where he +found one of the Frenchmen who had staid to attend their Captain, and +was informed by him, upon his enquiries after his fortune, that, half an +hour after their separation, the Spaniards came upon them, and easily +seized upon the wounded Captain; but that his companion might have +escaped with him, had he not preferred money to life; for seeing him +throw down a box of jewels that retarded him, he could not forbear +taking it up, and, with that and the gold which he had already, was so +loaded that he could not escape. With regard to the bars of gold and +silver which they had concealed in the ground, he informed them that 200 +men had been employed in searching for them. The people, however, either +mistrusting the informer’s veracity, or confident that what they had +hidden could not be found, pursued their journey; but, upon their +arrival at the place, found the ground turned up for two miles round, +and were able to recover no more than 13 bars of silver, and a small +quantity of gold. They discovered afterwards, that the Frenchman who was +left drunk in the woods, falling into the hands of the Spaniards, was +tortured by them till he confessed where Drake and his company had +concealed their plunder; so fatal to Drake’s expedition was the +drunkenness of his followers. + +Then, dismissing the French, they passed by Carthagena with their +colours flying, and soon after took a frigate laden with provisions and +honey, which they valued as a great restorative, and then sailed away to +the Cabezes. Here they staid about a week to careen their vessels, and +fit them for a long voyage, determining to set sail for England; and +that the faithful Symerons might not go away unrewarded, broke up their +pinnaces, and gave them the iron, the most valuable present in the world +to a nation whose only employments were war and hunting, and amongst +whom show and luxury had no place. Pedro, their Captain, being desired +by Drake to go through the ships, and to chuse what he most desired, +fixed his eye upon a scymetar set with jewels, which the French Captain +had presented to Drake for the provisions with which he had supplied +him, and, being unwilling to ask for so valuable a present, offered for +it four large quoits, or thick plates of gold, which he had formerly +concealed in the waters; but Drake, desirous to shew him, that fidelity +seldom is without a recompence, gave it him with the highest professions +of satisfaction and esteem. Pedro, receiving it with the utmost +gratitude, informed him, that by bestowing it he had conferred greatness +and honour upon him; for, by presenting it to his King, he doubted not +of obtaining the highest rank among the Symerons. He then persisted in +his resolution of giving him the gold, which was generously thrown by +Drake into the common stock; for he said, that those at whose expences +he had been sent out, ought to share in all the gain of the expedition, +whatever pretence cavil and chicanery might supply for the appropriation +of any part of it. Thus was Drake’s character consistent with itself; he +was equally superior to avarice and fear; and, through whatever danger +he might go in quest of gold, he thought it not valuable enough to be +obtained by artifice or dishonesty. + +They now forsook the coast of America, which for many months they had +kept in perpetual alarms, having taken more than 100 vessels of all +sizes between Carthagena and Nombre de Dios, of which they never +destroyed any, unless they were fitted out against them, nor ever +detained the prisoners longer than was necessary for their own security +or concealment, providing for them in the same manner as for themselves, +and protecting them from the malice of the Symerons; a behaviour which +humanity dictates, and which, perhaps, even policy cannot disapprove. He +must, certainly, meet with obstinate opposition who makes it equally +dangerous to yield as to resist, and who leaves his enemies no hopes but +from victory. + +What riches they acquired is not particularly related; but, it is not to +be doubted, that the plunder of so many vessels, together with the +silver seized at Nombre de Dios, must amount to a very great sum, though +the share that was allotted to Drake was not sufficient to lull him into +effeminacy, or to repress his natural inclination to adventures. They +arrived at Plymouth on the 9th of August, 1573, on Sunday in the +afternoon; and so much were the people delighted with the news of their +arrival, that they left the preacher, and ran in crouds to the key with +shouts and congratulations. + +Drake having, in the voyage just mentioned, had a view of the South Sea, +as has already been related, and formed a resolution to sail upon it, +did not suffer himself to be diverted from his design by the prospect of +any difficulties that might obstruct the attempt, nor any danger that +might attend the execution. His reputation was sufficiently established +to remove all obstacles (for obstacles he met with), and to obviate the +motives that produced them; but it was not till the year 1577, that he +was able to assemble a force proportioned to his design, and to obtain a +commission from the Queen, by which he was constituted Captain-General +of a squadron, consisting of five vessels, of which the Pelican, of 100 +tons, was commanded by himself as Admiral; the Elizabeth, of 80 tons, +Vice-Admiral, commanded by John Winter; the Marygold, of 30 tons, by +John Thomas; the Swan, of 50 tons, by John Chester and the Christopher, +of 15 tons, by Thomas Moon, the honest carpenter, who, on the former +voyage, destroyed the Swan by Drake’s direction. + +These ships, equipped partly by himself, and partly by other private +adventurers, he manned with 164 stout sailors, and furnished with such +provisions as he thought necessary for so long and hazardous a voyage: +nor did he confine his concern to the ordinary equipment of his ships +with naval stores and military preparations, but carried with him +whatever he thought might contribute to raise, in those nations with +which he should have intercourse, the highest ideas of the arts and +grandeur of his native country. He, therefore, not only procured a +complete service of silver-plate for his own table, and furnished the +cook-room with many vessels of the same metal, but engaged several +musicians to accompany him; rightly judging, that nothing would more +excite the admiration of savages, or uncivilized people, than the powers +of music. On this occasion, however, it must not be concealed, that he +engaged his men on the false pretence of sailing to Alexandria; and that +it was not till after he arrived on the coast of Brazil, that he +acquainted them with his design of passing the Straits, and entering the +South Seas. + +On the 15th of Nov. 1577, about three in the afternoon, he sailed from +Plymouth; but a heavy storm (such as no man on board had ever seen the +like), taking him almost as soon as out of port, forced him into +Falmouth, where he staid till the 13th of December to refit. He then +took his departure, and on the 25th of the same month fell in with the +coast of Barbary, and on the 27th cast anchor at the island of Mogadore, +about one mile distant from the main, between which and the isle they +found a very convenient harbour. Here he began to build the pinnaces, +the frames of which he brought ready from Plymouth to be put together, +as in his former voyage. While the carpenters were employed in this +service, they were discovered by the Moors that inhabit those coasts, +who sent two of their Chiefs on board Drake’s ship, receiving at the +same time two of his company as hostages. These men he not only treated +in the most hospitable manner, but presented them with such things as +they appeared most to admire; it being with him an established maxim to +endeavour to secure in every country a kind reception to such Englishmen +as should come after him, by treating the inhabitants with kindness and +generosity. + +But this friendly intercourse was in appearance soon broken; for, on the +next day, observing the Moors making signals from the land, they sent +out their boat, as before, to fetch them to the ship; and one John Frye +leapt ashore, intending to become an hostage, as on the former day, when +immediately he was seized by the Moors; and the crew, observing great +numbers start from behind a rock with weapons in their hands, thought it +next to madness to attempt his rescue, and, therefore, provided for +their own security by returning to the ship. Frye was mounted on +horseback, and immediately carried up into the country to their King, +who being then in continual expectation of an invasion from Portugal, +suspected that these ships were sent only to reconnoitre the coast, and +discover a proper harbour for a more formidable fleet; but, being +informed who they were, and whither they were bound, not only dismissed +his captive, but made large offers of friendship and assistance; which +Drake, however, did not stay to receive; but being disgusted at this +breach of the laws of commerce, and apprehending further treachery, he +quitted the coast on December 31, and on the 17th of January arrived at +Cape Blanco, having in their passage taken several Spanish vessels, and +found one in the harbour with no men. + +Here, while Drake was employing his men in catching fish, and training +them for land as well as sea service, the natives came down to the +sea-side with ambergrease and other gums, to traffic for such +commodities as they then stood most in need of, and with which Drake +very generously supplied them. + +Having rifled and discharged the Spanish ships which they had taken, +they sailed on the 22d of January towards the isles of Cape Verd, and on +the 27th came to anchor before Mayo, hoping to furnish themselves with +fresh water; but, having landed, they found the chief town deserted; +and, marching farther up the country, saw the vallies extremely +fruitful, and abounding with ripe figs, cocoes, and plantains, but could +by no means prevail upon the inhabitants to converse or traffic with +them. However, they were suffered by them to range the country without +molestation, but found no water, except at such a distance from the sea, +that the labour of carrying it to their ships was greater than it was at +that time necessary for them to undergo. Salt, had they wanted it, might +have been obtained with less trouble, being left by the sea upon the +sands, and hardened by the sun, during the ebb, in such quantities, that +the chief traffic of this island is carried on by means of it. Thus, +though the island abounded with goats, poultry, and delicious fruits of +various kinds, they could procure none of any consequence, because the +Portuguese, who were then in possession of it, were prohibited all +commerce with strangers on very severe penalties. + +On the 31st of January they made St. Iago, an island at that time +divided between the natives and the Portuguese, who, first entering +these islands under the shew of traffic, by degrees established +themselves, claimed a superiority over the natives, and harrassed them +with such cruelty, that they obliged them either to fly to the woods and +mountains, where many of them perished with hunger, or to take arms +against their oppressors, and, under the insuperable disadvantages with +which they contended, to die almost without a battle. Such treatment had +the natives of St. Iago received, which had driven them into the rocky +parts of the island, from whence they made incursions into the +plantations of the Portuguese, sometimes with loss, but generally with +that success which desperation produces; so that the Portuguese were in +continual alarms, and lived with the natural consequences of guilt, +terror, and anxiety. They were wealthy but not happy, and possessed the +island, but did not enjoy it. + +In passing this island, the garrison of the fort discharged three pieces +of cannon at them, but without effect. For this insult they took a +Portuguese ship laden with wines, the pilot of which they retained, but +set the rest of the crew on shore. This man, Nuno da Silva by name, was +very useful to them in traversing the coast of Brazil, being acquainted +with the bays and harbours where fresh water and provisions were to be +obtained. Him they continued to detain captive, though they broke up his +ship before they entered the Straits, till they were about to leave the +coasts of Peru, when finding him no longer serviceable, they set him on +shore in the Spanish settlements, from whence he afterwards returned +home, and wrote an account of the voyage as far as he went, which is +thought by many to be very authentic. + +It was soon after the capture of this ship that a difference arose +between Drake and his friend, Mr. Thomas Doughty, which, gradually +increasing, grew into inveteracy, and terminated at last in the death of +the latter. Doughty was a gentleman and a scholar, whom Drake had +persuaded to embark in this expedition to better his fortune and to +whom, till the incident happened which we are about to relate, he had +shewn particular marks of favour and friendship; but trivial beginnings +are often productive of the most important events. + +The ground of the malevolence with which Drake pursued Doughty, under +the colour of justice, has hitherto lain concealed from the public eye; +but we shall now trace it, step by step, till the fatal period when the +unhappy victim was brought to the block, and when Drake, by suffering +revenge to triumph over virtue, left an indelible blot upon his +character, which no panegyric can wipe away. + +Among the Harleian manuscripts there is a written account of this +voyage, in which the author has particularly had his eye on this +transaction. As he was an eye-witness of all that passed, his relation +will best appear in his own words: “Captain Drake, says he, having +boarded the ship of Nuno da Sylva, and feasted his eyes with the view of +the commodities, he committed the custody and well-ordering of this +prize unto Master Thomas Doughty, as his good and esteemed friend, +praying him in any case to see good order kept, and whoso should be the +breaker thereof, to give him to understand of any such without exception +of any. + +“It thus chanced that General Drake had a brother (not the wisest man in +christendom), whom he put into this said prize, as also divers others. +This Thomas Drake, as one more greedy of prey than covetous of honesty +or credit, offered himself the first and only man to break the General +his brother’s commandment; for he, contrary to his strict prohibition, +did not only break open a chest, but did dive suddenly into the same, +that Master Doughty knew not how to discharge himself against the +General but by revealing it unto him; yet first Master Doughty called +Thomas Drake unto him, and shewed him his great folly in this behalf, +who, yielding unto his fault, prayed Master Doughty to be good unto him, +and keep it from the General; but he briefly told him he could not keep +it, but he would deliver it with what favour he might. So at the +General’s next coming on board the prize, Master Doughty opened the same +unto him, who presently falling into a rage, not without some great +oaths, seemed to wonder what Thomas Doughty should mean to touch his +brother; and did, as it were, assure himself that he had some farther +meaning in this, and that he meant to strike at his credit, and he would +not, or could not, by God’s life (as he phrased it), suffer it. From +this time forth grudges did seem to grow between them from day to day, +to the no small admiration of the rest of the company, although some +envying his former favour and friendship with the General, and some, I +think, doubting that his capacity would reach too far to the +aggrandizing his credit in the country, talked variously of the matter; +however, Master Doughty was put again into the Pelican. Thus grudges, +although they had not long rested, yet were they grown to great +extremities, such and so great as a man of any judgment would verily +think that his love towards him in England was more in brave words than +hearty good will or friendly love.” So writes our author. + +In proceeding on their voyage, they came within sight of Fogo, an island +so called from a mountain about the middle of it continually burning, +and like the rest inhabited by the Portuguese. Two leagues to the south +of Fogo lies Brava, which has received its name from its fertility, +abounding with all kinds of fruits, and watered with great numbers of +springs and brooks, but, having neither harbour nor anchorage, was at +that time uninhabited. + +Drake, having sent out his boats with plummets to sound, was not able to +find any ground about it; and it is reported, that many experiments of +the like kind have been made without success. However, he took in water +sufficient; and on the 2d of Feb. set sail for the coast of Brazil. + +On February the 17th, he passed the equator, after being becalmed near +three weeks, during which time they had dreadful storms of thunder with +lightning, but without any memorable accident, till, continuing their +voyage, on March 28, one of their vessels with 28 men, and the greatest +part of the fresh water on board, was, to their great discouragement, +separated from them; but their perplexity lasted not long, for on the +next day they discovered her, and she again joined her associates. In +their long course, which gave them opportunities of observing several +animals, both in the air and water, at that time very little known, +nothing entertained or surprized them more than the flying-fish, which +is nearly of the same size with a herring, and has fins of the length of +his whole body, by the help of which, when he is pursued by the benito +(a large kind of mackarel), as soon as he finds himself upon the point +of being taken, he springs up into the air, and flies forward as long as +his wings continue wet, moisture being, as it seems, necessary to make +them pliant and moveable; and, when they become dry and stiff, he falls +down into the water, unless some vessel intercepts him, and dips them +again for a second flight. This unhappy animal is not only pursued by +fishes in his natural element, but attacked in the air, where he hopes +for security, by the don or spar kite, a great bird that preys upon +fish; and their species must certainly be destroyed, were not their +increase so great, that the young fry, in one part of the year, covers +that part of the sea. + +There is another fish, named the cuttle, of which whole shoals will +sometimes rise at once out of the water, and of which a great multitude +fell into their ship. + +At length, having sailed without sight of land for 54 days, they arrived +April the 5th on the coast of Brazil. “In the mean while, you shall +hear, says our author, what befel: Master Drake, never leaving to seek +and force upon Master Doughty, found, in the end, this opportunity to +degrade him. Whether of purpose, or his own voluntary, it chanced John +Brown the trumpet to go aboard the Pelican, where, for that he had been +long absent, the company offered him a hobbey, among the which, Master +Doughty putting in his hand, said, Fellow John, you shall have in my +hand, although it be but light amongst the rest; and so laying his hand +on his buttock, which perceived of John Trumpet, he began to swear +wounds and blood to the company to let him loose, for they are not all +(said he) the General’s friends that be here; and with that turned him +to Master Doughty, and said unto him, (as himself presently after told +me in the prize) God’s wounds, Doughty, what dost thou mean to use this +familiarity with me, considering thou art not the General’s friend; who +answered him, What, fellow John! what moves you to this, and to use +these words to me, that am as good and as sure a friend to my good +General as any in this place, and I defy him that shall say the +contrary. But is the matter thus? why yet, fellow John, I pray thee let +me live until I come into England. Thus, John Brown coming again +presently aboard the prize, had not talked any long time with the +General, but the boat went aboard and rested not, but presently brought +Master Doughty to the prize’s side, General Drake sitting in the midst +of his men, who hearing the boat at the ship’s side stood up, and Master +Doughty offering to take hold of the ship to have entered, said the +General, Stay there, Thomas Doughty, for I must send you to another +place, and with that commanded the mariners to row him on board the +fly-boat, saying unto him, it was a place more fit for him than that +from whence he came: but Master Doughty, although he craved to speak +with the General, could not be permitted, neither would he hear him.” +Soon after this, the fly-boat here mentioned, (called the Swan,) was +separated from them by a violent storm, “in all whose absence, says our +author, the General never ceased to inveigh against Master Doughty, +terming him a conjurer and a witch; and, at any time when we had foul +weather, he would say that Tom. Doughty was the occasion thereof, and +that it came out of Tom. Doughty’s capcase, and would avouch the same +with oaths.” + +After the storm above-mentioned, they steered near the land to the +southward; and on the 14th anchored under a cape, which they afterwards +called Cape Joy, because in two days the vessel that was missing +returned to them. Here they refreshed their weary crews, and took in +fresh water; but, finding the country, though pleasant, without +inhabitants, they weighed anchor, and, by running a little farther to +the southward, found a small harbour between a rock and the main, where +the rock breaking the force of the sea, the ships rode at anchor with +the greatest security. On this rock they killed several seals, keeping +them for food, and found them wholesome, though not palatable. + +Their next course was directed to the great river of Plate, in 36 deg. +of south latitude; but, not finding anchorage in that river, they sailed +in quest of a more convenient harbour, when they were surprized by a +sudden storm, in which they again lost sight of the fly-boat. This +accident determined Drake to contract the number of his ships, that he +might not only avoid the inconvenience of such frequent separations, but +ease the labour of his men, by having more hands in each vessel. For +this purpose he sailed along the coast and on May the 13th discovered a +bay, which, though it promised fair, he durst not enter before it was +examined: he, therefore, ordered his boat to be hoisted out, and, taking +the line into his own hand, went on sounding the passage till he was +three leagues from his ship, when on a sudden the weather changed, the +skies blackened, the wind rose, and all the usual forerunners of a storm +began to threaten them. Nothing was now thought of but the means of +returning to the ship; but the thickness of the fog intercepting it from +their sight, made the attempt almost impracticable. In this perplexity, +which Drake was not more sensible of than those whom he had left in the +ships, nothing was to be omitted, however dangerous, that might tend to +extricate them from it. Captain Thomas, therefore, having the lightest +vessel, steered boldly into the bay, and, taking the Admiral on board, +dropt anchor, and lay out of danger; while the rest that were in the +open sea suffered much from the tempest, and the Mary (the Portugueze +prize) was driven before the wind. The others, as soon as the tempest +was over, discovering by the fires that were made on shore where Drake +was, repaired to him. + +Here they met with no inhabitants, though there were several wigwams or +huts standing, in which they found some dried fowls, and among them +ostriches, of which the thighs were as large as those of a sheep. These +birds are too unwieldy to rise from the ground; but with the help of +their wings, or rather stumps, they run so swiftly, that the English +could never come near enough to shoot any of them. + +Not finding this harbour convenient, or well stored with wood and water, +they left it on the 15th of May, and on the 18th entered another much +safer and more commodious, which they no sooner arrived at, than Drake +sent Winter to the southward in search of those ships that were absent, +and immediately after sailed himself to the northward, and happily +meeting with the Swan, conducted her to the rest of the fleet; after +which, in pursuance of his former resolution, he ordered her to be +broken up, preserving the iron work for a future supply. The other +vessel which was separated in the late storm, could not be discovered. +While they were thus employed upon an island about a mile from the main +land, to which, at low water, there was a passage on foot, they were +discovered by the natives, who appeared upon a hill at a distance, +dancing, and holding up their hands, as beckoning to the English to come +to them, which Drake observing, sent out a boat with knives, bells, and +bugles, and such things as by their usefulness or novelty he imagined +would be agreeable. As soon as the English landed, they observed two men +running towards them as deputed by the company, who came within a little +distance, and then standing still, could not be prevailed upon to come +nearer. The English, therefore, tied their presents to a pole, which +they fixed in the ground, and then retiring, saw the Indians advance, +who taking what they found upon the pole, left in return such feathers +as they wore upon their heads, with a small bone about six inches in +length, carved round the top and burnished. Drake observing their +inclination to friendship and traffic, advanced with some of his company +towards the hill, upon sight of whom the Indians ranged themselves in a +line from east to west, and one of them running from one end of the rank +to the other, backwards and forwards, bowed himself towards the rising +and setting of the sun, holding his hands over his head, and, frequently +stopping in the middle of the rank, leaped up towards the moon, which +then shone directly over their heads thus calling the sun and moon, the +deities they worship, to witness to the sincerity of their professions +of peace and friendship. While this ceremony was performing, Drake and +his company ascended the hill, to the apparent terror of the Indians, +whose apprehensions when the English perceived, they peaceably retired, +which gave the natives so much encouragement, that they came forward +immediately, and exchanged their arrows, feathers, and bones, for such +trifles as were offered them. Thus they traded for some time but by +frequent intercourse, finding that no violence was intended, they became +familiar, and mingled with the English without the least distrust. They +go quite naked, except the skin of some animals, which they throw over +their shoulders when they walk or lie in the open air. They roll up +their hair, which is very long, with a plume of ostrich’s feathers, and +usually stick their arrows in it, that they may not encumber them, they +being made with reeds headed with flint, and therefore not heavy. Their +bows are about an ell long. Their chief ornament is paint, which they +use of several kinds, delineating generally upon their bodies the +figures of the sun and moon in honour of their deities. + +It is observable, that the inhabitants of most nations amongst whom the +use of cloaths is unknown, paint their bodies. Such was the practice of +the inhabitants of our own country. To this custom did our earliest +enemies, the Picts, owe their denomination. As it is not probable that +caprice or fancy should be uniform, there must be doubtless some reason +for a practice so general, and prevailing in distant parts of the world +which have no communication with each other. The original end of +painting their bodies was probably to exclude the cold; an end, which, +if we believe some relations, is so effectually produced by it, that the +men thus painted never shiver at the most piercing blasts: but, +doubtless, any people so hardened by continual severities, would, even +without paint, be less sensible of the cold than the civilized +inhabitants of the same climate. However, this practice may contribute +in some degree to defend them from the injuries of winter, and, in those +climates where little evaporates by the pores, may be used with no great +inconvenience: but in hot countries, where perspiration in a greater +degree is necessary, the natives only use unction to preserve them from +the other extreme of weather, or, more probably, from the inconvenience +of the flies, which, were it not for that or some such defence, would be +intolerable. + +These savages had no canoes, like the other Indians, nor any method of +crossing the water; which was probably the reason why the birds in the +adjacent islands were so tame that they might be taken with the hand, +having never been before frighted or molested. The birds here spoken of +are, without doubt, the penguins of which so ample a description is +given in the Voyages of Byron and Wallis. The great plenty of these +fowls, and of the seals that were found every-where on the shores of +this coast, contributed much to the refreshment of the English, who +named the bay where they then lay, Seal-bay, from the number they there +killed of those animals. + +These seals seem to be the chief food of the natives; for the English +often found raw pieces of their flesh half eaten, and left, as they +supposed, after a full meal, by the savages, whom they never knew to +make use of fire, or any art in dressing or preparing their victuals. +Nor were their other customs less wild or uncouth than their way of +feeding. One of them, having received a cap off the General’s head, and +being extremely pleased as well with the honour as the gift, to express +his gratitude, retired to a little distance, and thrusting an arrow into +his leg, let the blood run upon the ground, testifying, as it is +probable, that he was ready to shed his blood in his defence. + +When the Swan fly-boat was separated from the fleet in the storm off the +coast of Brazil, the crew, despairing of ever being able to rejoin it, +began to be in fear for provisions. They were on a desart coast, had no +place of rendezvous, and were ignorant even of their place of +destination. In this untoward situation a dispute arose among the +officers, of which the author of the manuscript before cited, gives the +following relation:--He had already taken notice that Master Thomas +Doughty had been sent on board this vessel as a kind of punishment, and +in truth so it proved; for the master of the vessel, who seems also to +have been the purser, knowing upon what terms he stood with Drake, took +every occasion to insult, or, as our author’s phrase is, to discredit +him; for those were always ranked among Drake’s friends who were enemies +to Master Doughty. “This man, foreseeing that provisions might run +short, put himself from the mess of Master Doughty, Captain Chester, and +the rest of the gentlemen, and did set himself amongst the sailors, +nothing at all sparing, but rather augmenting his own diet; but how +scantily those gentlemen did fare, there be some come home, that, except +they will deny their own words, can make relation thereof. + +“Master Doughty, with Master Chester, whom the General had made Captain +of the fly-boat, found themselves so ill used, that Master Doughty +accosted his friend one day in these words: I marvel, Master Chester, +that you will take it at his hands to be thus used, considering that you +were here authorized by the General to be our Commander. And, at the +same time, he spoke to the Master, and told him, that he used so much +partiality in the distribution of his provisions, that the same could +not be borne, considering the extremity they were like to fall into for +want of victuals; and that it was against reason that he and his +messmates should be so plentifully fed, while others were at the point +to starve. The Master hereat putting himself in a rage, swore that such +rascals as he was should be glad to eat the shoals (husks) when he would +have them. Master Doughty answered him again, that reason would will +that he should be used as well as other men, considering his advantages. +Thou any advantage here! replied the Master, I would not give a point +for thee nor thy advantages; and if ever thou comest home to enjoy any +advantages, I will be trussed up. Then in multiplying words, and as I +heard a blow or two passing between them, the Master, in the spleen of +his heart, looking at him with an evil eye, Thou! will thou have +victuals! thou shalt be glad, if we do not meet with the General, the +rather to eat that falls from my tail on the anchor-fluke ere thou +gettest home again. Then Master Doughty, turning to Master Chester, said +unto him, Master Chester, let us not be thus used at this knave’s hands. +Lose nothing of that authority that the General committed unto you. If +you will, we will put the sword into your hands again, and you shall +have the government. This case I will aver to be true, for there were +two or three witnesses sworn to these articles, as some of the special +matter that he had to lose his head for.” + +It was not many days after this quarrel before the Swan fell in again +with the fleet; when Drake, as has been said, caused her to be hauled on +shore, set on fire, and burnt; or, as others say, broke up and converted +into fire-wood for the use of the fleet. + +Mr. Doughty, being here delivered from the fly-boat, was again restored +to the Pelican, where the master with whom he had the dispute appears to +have preferred a complaint against him, and with such aggravations as he +thought proper to add; all which were favourably heard, and credit given +to the whole relation by the General, who wanted only a pretence to +persevere in his severity to the man who, being once his favourite, was +now become the object of his most inveterate hatred. Doughty, provoked, +no doubt, by the misrepresentations of the master, and the partiality +with which they were heard, gave the General some opprobrious, language, +adding, “that the lightest word that came out of his (Doughty’s) mouth +was to be believed as soon as the General’s oath. Whereupon the General +did not only strike him, but commanded him to be bound to the mast; for +the accomplishment of which, the master of the fly-boat took no little +pains. This happened as the two ships (the Pelican and the Canter) lay +together; and as soon as Doughty was released, he was put into the +Canter, although greatly against his will, for that he said he knew them +to be there that sought his life, as namely the master of the fly-boat, +and some other desperate and unhonest people; but would he or no, +thither he must, or else the General swore he would lift him out with +the tackle, and for that purpose commanded the tackle to be loosed. Thus +aboard the Canter he went, and his brother John Doughty with him.” The +Canter was a vessel taken from the Spaniards on the coast of Africa. + +While they lay in this harbour, there is one remarkable incident related +by this author that deserves particular notice, as it tends to +illustrate the previous steps that were pursued to accomplish the ruin +of this unfortunate gentleman. + +“On board the fly-boat, says he, was one, Thomas Cuttle, who some time +had been Captain of the Pelican under Drake, with whom the General had +been tampering. This man came out from him in great wrath, and offering +to go over to the main, between the which, and the island where they +then lay, was (as has been said) but a shallow water. He, standing well +nigh up to the middle in the water with his piece, uttered these words, +Well, my Masters, quoth he, I find I am heavily borne with here, because +I will not accuse this gentleman (meaning Doughty) of that, as I take +God to witness, I know not by him; and, therefore, I declare before you +all, that, whatsoever becomes of me, I never knew any thing by him but +to be the General’s friend; and, rather than I will bide this hard +countenance at the General’s hands, I will yield myself into cannibal’s +hands; and so I pray you all to pray for me.” + +After this public declaration the man departed; and, having reached the +opposite shore, he went up into the country, where firing his piece to +bring the natives to him, Drake taking it for a signal that he wanted to +return, sent a boat over to the main, and brought him back. + +Just before their departure from this harbour, which lay in a bay a +little to the southward of Cape Hope, “Captain Drake himself came on +board the Elizabeth, and calling all the company together, told them, +that he was to send thither a couple of men, the which he did not know +how to carry along with him this voyage, and go through therewithal, as +namely, quoth he, Thomas Doughty, who is a commotioner and a seditious +fellow, and a very bad and lewd fellow, and one that I have made that +reckoning of as of my left hand; and his brother the young Doughty, a +witch, a poisoner, and such a one as the world cannot judge of, having +his knowledge from the devil; and so warning the company that none +should speak to them, nor use any conference with them; if they did, he +would hold them as his enemies, and enemies to the voyage. And he willed +that great care should be taken that they should neither write nor read; +and then he declared what wealth the worst boy in the fleet should get +by this voyage, and how the worst boy should never need to go again to +sea, but should be able to live in England with a right good gentleman; +for, quoth he, you shall see that we will have gold come as plentiful as +wood into the ships. Having finished his speech, he departed, and +shortly after sent the said Thomas Doughty and his brother aboard the +Elizabeth, commanding them, as they would answer it with their lives, +not to set pen to paper, nor yet to read but what every man might +understand and see. And sure, adds our author, their entertainment there +was accordingly; for men durst not speak to them, although willingly +perhaps they would; and as their fare was with the simplest in the ship, +so was their lodging. But he, Thomas Doughty, having agreed with the +boatswain of the ship for a cabin which stood, God knows, in an +uncomfortable room, yet must he pay 3 l. for the same in England. But +what came of this to the poor fellow! he was fain for his friendly using +him to lose his office, and continue in heavy displeasure.” + +Having staid fifteen days in the harbour, during which time they +continued their friendly intercourse with the savages, on June the 3d +they set sail towards the South Sea, and six days afterwards stopt at a +little bay to break up the Christopher, which from the smallness of its +size was found incapable of living in those boisterous seas, of which, +before they entered them, they had conceived no adequate idea. Then +passing on, they found it necessary to call anchor in another bay, with +a view to recover the Portuguese prize, which was separated from them in +the storm of the 27th of April, and had not yet rejoined them. To return +in search of it was sufficiently mortifying; to proceed without it, was +not only to deprive themselves of a considerable part of their force, +but to expose their friends and companions, who had voluntarily embarked +on board her, to certain death or certain captivity. This consideration +prevailed; and, therefore, on the 18th, after prayers to God, with which +Drake (for example’s sake) never forgot to begin an enterprize, he put +to sea, and the next day near Port Julian discovered their associates, +whose ship was now grown leaky, having suffered much in the first storm +by which they were separated, and afterwards in the fruitless attempts +to regain the fleet. Drake, therefore, being desirous to relieve their +fatigues, entered Port Julian. They no sooner landed than they were +accosted by two of the natives, of whom Magellan left a very terrible +account, having described them as a nation of giants and monsters: nor +did they find his narrative entirely without foundation; for the least +of those they saw was larger and taller than the largest of their +company. The two who accosted the English appeared much pleased with +their new guests, received willingly whatever was given them, and very +exactly observed every thing that passed, seeming more particularly +delighted with seeing Oliver, the master-gunner, shoot an English arrow. +They shot themselves likewise in emulation, but their arrows always fell +to the ground far short of his. + +Soon after this friendly contest came another, who, observing the +familiarity of his countrymen with the strangers, appeared much +displeased; and, as the Englishmen perceived, endeavoured to persuade +them from such an intercourse. What effect his arguments had was soon +after apparent; for another of Drake’s companions, being desirous to +shew the third Indian a specimen of the English valour and dexterity, +attempted likewise to shoot an arrow; but, drawing it with his full +force, burst the bow-string: upon which, the Indians, who were +unacquainted with their other weapons, imagining them disarmed, followed +the company as they were walking negligently down towards their boat, +and let fly their arrows, aiming particularly at Winter, who had the bow +in his hand. He, finding himself wounded in the shoulder, endeavoured to +refit his bow; and, turning about, was pierced with a second arrow in +the breast. Oliver, the gunner, immediately presented his piece at the +insidious assailants, which failing to take fire, gave them time to +level another flight of arrows, by which he was killed; nor, perhaps, +had any of them escaped, surprized and perplexed as they were, had not +Drake animated their courage, and directed their motions, ordering them, +by perpetually changing their places, to elude as much as might be the +aim of their enemies, and to defend their bodies with their targets; and +instructing them by his own example to pick up and break the arrows as +they fell, which they did with so much diligence that the Indians were +soon in danger of being disarmed. Then Drake himself taking the gun, +which Oliver had so unsuccessfully attempted to make use of, discharged +it at the Indian that first began the fray and had killed the gunner, +aiming it so happily that the hail-shot, with which it was loaded, tore +open his belly, and forced him to such terrible outcries, that the +Indians, though their numbers increased, and many of them shewed +themselves from different parts of an adjoining wood, were too much +terrified to renew the assault; and suffered Drake without molestation +to withdraw his wounded friend, who, being hurt in his lungs, languished +two days, and then dying, was interred with his companion with the usual +ceremony of a military funeral. + +They staid here two months after this quarrel, without receiving any +other injuries from the natives, in which time they discovered the +gibbet on which Magellan had formerly executed some of his mutinous +company, and where “Drake, according to the writers of the Biographia +Britannica, did the least commendable action of his life, in executing +Mr. _John_ Doughty, a man next in authority to himself; in which, +however, he preserved a great appearance of justice.” + +To clear this matter fully, it will be necessary to bring together the +substance of what these authors have said on the subject, and then to +add the plain relation from the manuscript already quoted. + +‘Here it was (at Port St. Julian), say these writers, that on a sudden, +having carried the principal persons engaged in the service to a desart +island lying in the bay, he called a kind of council of war, or rather +court martial, where he exposed his commission, by which the Queen +granted him the power of life and death, which was delivered him with +this remarkable expression from her own mouth; _We do account, that he, +Drake, who strikes at thee, does strike at us._ He then laid open, with +great eloquence, (for, though his education was but indifferent, he had +a wonderful power of speech) the cause of this assembly. He proceeded +next to charge Mr. John Doughty, _who had been second in command, during +the whole voyage_, when Drake was present, and first in his absence, +with plotting the destruction of the undertaking, and the murder of his +person. He said he had the first notice of this gentleman’s bad +intentions before he left England; but that he was in hopes his +behaviour towards him would have extinguished such disposition, if there +had been any truth in the information. He then appealed for his +behaviour to the whole assembly, and to the gentleman accused. He next +exposed his practices from the time that he left England, while he lived +towards him with all the kindness and cordiality of a brother; which +charge he supported by producing papers under his own hand, to which Mr. +Doughty added a full and free confession. After this, the Captain, or, +as in the language of those times he is called, the General, quitted the +place, telling the assembly he expected that they should pass a verdict +upon him, for he would be no judge in his own cause. Camden, as the +reader will see, says, that he tried him by a jury; but, other accounts +affirm, that the whole forty persons of which the court was composed, +had judged him to death, and gave this in writing under their hands and +seals, leaving the time and manner of it to the General. Mr. Doughty +himself said, that he desired rather to die by the hands of justice than +to be his own executioner. Upon this, Captain Drake having maturely +weighed the whole matter, presented three points to Mr. Doughty’s +choice: first, to be executed upon the island where they were; next, to +be set on shore on the main land; or, lastly, to be sent home to abide +the justice of his country. He desired he might have till the next day +to consider of these, which was allowed him, and then, giving his +reasons for rejecting the two last, he declared that he made the first +his choice; and, having received the sacrament with the General, from +the hands of Mr. Francis Fletcher, Chaplain to the fleet, and made a +full confession, his head was cut off with an axe by the +Provost-Marshal, July the 2d, 1578. + +‘As to the imputation which this matter brought upon Drake, we will +first cite what Camden says of this transaction: “On the 26th of April, +entering into the mouth of the river of Plate, he saw an infinite number +of sea-calves; from thence sailing into the haven of St. Julian he found +a gibbet, set up, as it was thought, by Magellan for the punishment of +certain mutineers. In this very place John Doughty, an industrious and +stout man, and the next unto Drake, was called to his trial for raising +a mutiny in the fleet, found guilty by twelve men after the English +manner, and condemned to death, which he suffered undauntedly, being +beheaded, having first received the holy communion with Drake. And, +indeed, the most impartial persons in the fleet were of opinion, that he +had acted seditiously, and that Drake cut him off as an emulator of his +glory, and one that regarded not so much who he himself excelled in +commendation for sea matters, as who he thought might equal him; yet +wanted there not some who, pretending to understand things better than +others, gave out that Drake had in charge from Leicester to take off +Doughty upon any pretence whatever, because he had reported that the +Earl of Essex was made away by the cunning practices of that Earl.” + +‘We find this matter, add the writers just cited, touched in several +other books, and particularly in two, which were written on purpose to +expose the Earl of Leicester, and, perhaps, deserving the less credit +for that reason. + +‘It may be offered in defence of Sir Francis Drake, that this man was +openly put to death, after as fair a trial as the circumstances of time +and place would permit; that he submitted patiently to his sentence, and +received the sacrament with Drake, whom he embraced immediately before +his execution. Besides these, there are two points that deserve +particular consideration: first, that, in such expeditions, strict +discipline, and legal severity, are often absolutely necessary; +secondly, that, as to the Earl of Essex, for whose death Doughty had +expressed concern, he was Drake’s first patron, and it is, therefore, +very improbable he should destroy a man for endeavouring to detect his +murderer. We may add to all this, if liberty may be indulged to +conjectures, that this man, presuming upon the Earl of Leicester’s +favour (who very probably imposed him upon Drake to be rid of him), was +from thence encouraged to form designs against Drake; and this might +also be the reason which hindered him from inclining to an absolute +pardon, as doubting whether it was possible to trust one who had so far +abused his confidence already, and whose known interest with so great a +man might always enable him to find instruments, in case he was wicked +enough to enter upon fresh intrigues.’ + +We shall just remark upon, what is above quoted, that the authors do not +seem to have been well informed for they have all along imputed to John +Doughty what related to his brother Thomas; and, if credit may be given +to the author of the manuscript (John Cook by name), this unfortunate +Thomas fell a sacrifice to Drake’s resentment. “On this island in Port +St. Julian, says he, passed many matters, which, I think, God would not +have to be concealed, especially for that they tended to murder; for he +(Drake) spewed out against Thomas Doughty his venom. Here he ended all +his conceived hatred, not by courtesy and friendly reconcilement, but by +most tyrannical blood-spilling; for he was never quiet while he lived, +who in wisdom and honest government as far surpassed him, as he in +tyranny surpassed all men. The world never committed a fact like unto +this; for here he murdered him that, if he had well looked unto himself, +had been a more sure and stedfast friend unto him than ever was Pythias +to his friend Damon, as I think the sequel of this case will shew. + +“The last day of June, the General himself, being set in place of +judgment, and having the whole company brought on shore, and having +Captain John Thomas set close by him, who opened a bundle of papers that +were rolled up together, wherein was written divers and sundry articles, +the which, before they were read, the General spoke unto the purport of +them, and turning himself to Thomas Doughty, who was there present, +being before brought thither more like a thief than a gentleman of +honest conversation, he began his charge thus: Thomas Doughty, you have +here sought by divers means, in as much as you may, to discredit me, to +the great hinderance and overthrow of this voyage; besides other great +matters with which I have to charge you, the which, if you can clear +yourself of, you and I shall be very good friends; whereof if you +cannot, you have deserved death. Master Doughty answered, It should +never be approved that he had merited ill by undertaking any villainy +towards him. By whom, quoth the General, will you be tried? Why, good +General, said he, let me live to come unto my country, and I will there +be tried by her Majesty’s laws. Nay, Thomas Doughty, said he, I will +here impannel a jury on you to enquire into those matters that I have to +charge you withal. Why, General, replied Doughty, I hope you will see +your Commission be good. I’ll warrant you, answered the General, my +Commission is good enough. I pray you then let us see it, said Master +Doughty; it is necessary that it should be here shewn. Well, quoth he, +you shall _not_ see it. Then, addressing himself to the company, You +see, my Masters, how this fellow is full of prating, bind me his arms, +for I will be safe of my life. My Masters, you that be my good friends, +Thomas Good, Gregory ----, you there, my friends, bind him; so they took +and bound his arms behind him. Then he uttered divers furious words unto +Thomas Doughty, as charging him to be the man that poisoned my Lord of +Essex; whereas Master Doughty avouched it to his face, that he was the +man that brought the General first to the presence of my Lord in +England. Thou bring ME, quoth the General, to my Lord! See, my Masters, +see here how he goeth about to discredit me. This fellow with my Lord +was never of any estimation. I think he never came about him as a +gentleman; for I that was daily with my Lord never saw him there above +once, and that was long after my entertainment with my Lord. + +“Then, in fine, was there a jury called, whereof Master John Winter was +foreman. Then by John Thomas were the articles read unto them, _even +once over for a last farewel_, for fear that men should have carried +them away by memory; all which appeared to consist of words of +unkindness, and to proceed of some choler when the prisoner was +provoked, all which Doughty did not greatly deny; until at length came +in one Edward Bright, whose honesty of life I have nothing to do with, +who said, Nay, Thomas Doughty, we have other matter for you yet, that +will a little nearer touch you. It will i’ faith bite you to the +girskin. I pray thee, Ned Bright, said the prisoner, charge me with +nothing but truth, and spare me not. Then John Thomas read further for +his last article to conclude the whole withal, That Thomas Doughty +should say to Edward Bright, in Master Drake’s garden, that the Queen’s +Majesty and Council would be corrupted. So Bright holding up his finger, +said, How like ye this gare, sirrah? Why, Ned Bright, said Master +Doughty, what should induce thee thus to belye me? thou knowest that +such familiarity was never between thee and me: but it may be, that I +have said, if we brought home gold, we should be the better welcome; but +yet this is more than I do remember. Then it came out, on farther +evidence, that Master Doughty should say, that my Lord Treasurer had a +plot of the present voyage. No, that he hath not, quoth General Drake. +The other replied, that he had, and had it of him. See, my Masters, said +Drake, what this fellow hath done. God will have his treachery all +known; for her Majesty gave me special commandment, that of all men my +Lord Treasurer should not know it; but you see his own mouth hath +bewrayed him: so this was a special article against him to hurt his +throat, and greatly he seemed to rejoice at this advantage. + +“Then Master Doughty offered him, if he would permit him to live, and to +answer these objections in England, he would set his hand to whatso was +there written, or to any thing else that he would set down. Well, once +let these men, quoth the General, first find whether you are guilty in +this or no, and then we will talk further of the matter. And then he +delivered (after they had all taken their oaths given by John Thomas) +the bills of indictment, as I may term them, unto Mr. John Winter, who +was foreman of this inquest. Then Master Leonard Vicary, a very assured +friend of Master Thomas Doughty’s, said unto him, General, this is not +law, nor agreeable to justice, that you offer. I have not to do with you +crafty lawyers, neither do I care for the law; but I know what I will +do. Why, quoth Master Vicary, who was one of his jury, I know not how we +may answer his life. Well, Master Vicary, quoth he, you shall not have +to do with his life; let me alone with that; you are but to find whether +he be guilty in these articles that here are objected against him, or +no. Why, very well, said Master Vicary, then there is, I trust, no +matter of death. No, no, Master Vicary, quoth he; so with this the jury +went together, finding all to be true, without any doubt or stop made, +but only to that article that Edward Bright had objected against him; +for it was doubted of some whether Bright were sufficient with his only +word to cast away the life of a man. And truly it did argue small +honesty in a man to conceal such a matter if it had been spoken in +England, and to utter it in this place where will was law, and reason +put in exile; for, an honest subject would not have concealed such +matter, which made some doubt of an honest dealing. But, to be brief, +answer was made, that Bright was a very honest man; and so the verdict +being given in, it was told to the General, that there was doubt made of +Bright’s honesty. Why, quoth Master Drake, I dare to swear that what Ned +Bright has said is very true (yet within a fortnight after, the same +Bright was in such disliking with him, as he seemed to doubt his life; +and having displaced him of the Pelican, and put him into the Marygold, +he gave for reason, that himself would be safe, and he would put him far +enough from him). Thus having received in the verdict, he rose off the +place, and departed towards the water-side, where, calling all the +company with him, except Master Thomas Doughty and his brother, he there +opened a certain bundle of letters and bills, and, looking on them, +said, God’s will! I have left in my cabin that I should especially have +had (as if he had there forgotten his Commission): but, whether he +forgot his Commission or no, he much forgot himself, to sit as Judge +without shewing that he had any; but, truly, I think he shewed to the +uttermost what he had: for here he shewed forth, first, letters that +were written, as he said, by Master Hankins to my Lord of Essex for his +entertainment; secondly, he shewed letters of thanks from my Lord of +Essex unto Master Hankins, for preferring so good a servitor unto him, +and how much he had pleasured him; then read he letters that past from +my Lord of Essex unto Secretary Walsingham in his great commendation +then shewed he letters of Master Hatton’s unto himself, tending for the +acceptance of his men John Thomas and John Brewer, for their well usage +in this voyage; and, lastly, he read a bill of her Majesty’s adventure +of a thousand crowns (but I most marvelled that so many noblemen and +gentlemen did leave their letters in his hands, except it were to shew +in this place for his credit). So when he had all done, he said, Now, my +Masters, you may see whether this fellow hath sought my discredit or no, +and what should hereby be meant but the very overthrow of the voyage; +as, first, by taking away of my good name, and altogether discrediting +me, and then my life, which I being bereaved of, what then will you do? +You will fain one to drink another’s blood, and so to return again unto +your own country; you will never be able to find the way thither. And +now, my Masters, consider what a great voyage we are like to make, the +like was never made out of England; for by the same the worst in this +fleet shall become a gentleman; and, if this voyage go not forward, +which I cannot see how possibly it should, if this man live, what a +reproach it will be, not only unto our country, but especially unto us, +the very simplest here may consider of. Therefore, my Masters, they that +think this man worthy to die, let them with me hold up their hands; and, +they that think him not worthy to die, hold down their hands; at the +which, divers that envied his former felicity, held up their hands; some +others, again, for fear of his favouritry, sticked not to lift their +hands, although against their hearts; but some, again, lifted up their +hands and very hearts unto the Lord, to deliver us of this tyrannous and +cruel tyrant; who upon the same, coming to his former judgment-seat, +pronounced him the child of death, and persuaded him withal, that he +would by this means make him the servant of God: and said farther, if +any man could, between this and next meeting, devise any way that might +save his life, he would hear it; and wished himself to devise some way +for his own safeguard. Well, General, quoth he, seeing it is come to +this pass, _that I see you would have me made away_, I pray you carry me +with you to Peru, and there set me ashore. No, truly, Master Doughty, I +cannot answer it to her Majesty, if I should so do; but, how say you, +Thomas Doughty, if any man will warrant me to be safe from your hands, +and will undertake to keep you sure, you shall see what I will say unto +you. Master Doughty then calling on Master Winter, said unto him, Master +Winter, will you be so good as to undertake this for me? Then Master +Winter said unto Master Drake, that he should be safe of his person, and +he would warrant him, if he did commit him to his custody. Then Drake, a +little pausing, said, See then, my Masters, we must thus do; we must +nail him close under the hatches, and return home again without making +any voyage, and if you will do so, then speak your minds. Then a company +of desperate bankrupts that could not live in their own country without +the spoil of that as others had got by the sweat of their brows, cried, +God forbid, good General! which voice was no less attentively heard, for +there needed no spur to a willing horse. Thus, telling Master Doughty to +prepare for his death, and having given him one whole day’s respite to +set all things in order, he rose and departed, promising that his +continual prayers to God should not cease, that it would please God to +put it into his head how he might do him good: but he had so often +before sworn that he would hang him, that I think at this present he +meant to do him little good. Thus Master Doughty continuing all this +night, the next day, and the second night in his prayers, except some +small time that he used in setting his worldly business in some way, and +distributing to such as he thought good, such things as he then had with +him, was the 2d day of July commanded to prepare himself, and to make +ready to die. Then Master Doughty, with a more chearful countenance than +ever he had in all his life, to the show, as one that did altogether +contemn life, prayed him, that, ere he died, he might receive the +sacrament; which was not only granted, but Drake himself offered to +accompany him to the Lord’s Table, for the which Master Doughty gave him +hearty thanks, never worse terming him than my good Captain. Master +Drake offered him withal to make choice of his own death, and for that +he said he was a gentleman he should but lose his head, the which kind +of death was most agreeable to his mind, in as much as he must needs +die. And, truly, I heard say, that Master Drake offered him, if he +would, that he should be shotten to death with a piece, and that he +himself would do that exploit, and so he should die by the hands of a +gentleman. But, in fine, they together received the Lord’s Supper; the +which, I do ever assure myself, that he did take with as uncorrupted a +mind as ever did any innocent of the world; for he, sure, shewed himself +to have all his affiance and only trust in God; he shewed himself so +valiant in this extremity as the world might wonder it; he seemed to +have conquered death itself, and it was not seen, that of all this day +before his death, that ever he altered one jot of his countenance, but +kept it as staid and firm as if he had some message to deliver to some +nobleman. They having thus received the sacrament, there was a banquet +made, such as the place might yield, and there they dined together, in +which time, the place of execution being made ready, after dinner, as +one not willing any longer to delay the time, he told the General, that +he was ready as soon as pleased him; but prayed him, that he might speak +alone with him a few words, with the which they talked a-part the space +of half a quarter of an hour, and then with bills and staves he was +brought to the place of execution, where he shewed himself no less +valiant than all the time before; for, first, here kneeling on his +knees, he first prayed for the Queen’s Majesty of England his Sovereign +lady and mistress; he then prayed to God for the happy success of this +voyage, and prayed to God to turn it to the profit of his country: he +remembered also therein divers his good friends, and especially Sir +William Winter, praying Master John Winter to commend him to that good +Knight; all which he did with so chearful a countenance, as if he had +gone to some great prepared banquet, the which, I sure think, that he +was fully resolved that God had provided for him; so, at the last, +turning to the General, he prayed him that he might make water ere he +died, for, quoth he, the flesh is frail, and withal turned him about and +did so; and coming again, said, Now, truly, I may say as said Sir Thomas +More, that he that cuts off my head shall have little honesty, my neck +is so short: So turning him, and looking about on the whole company, he +desired them all to forgive him, and especially some that he did +perceive to have displeasure borne them for his sake, whereof Thomas +Cuttle was one, Hugh Smith was another, and divers others: whereupon, +Smith prayed him to say before the General then, whether ever they had +any conference together that might redound to his (the General’s) +prejudice or detriment. He declared it at his death, that neither he, +nor any man else, ever practised any treachery towards the General with +him; neither did he himself ever think any villainous thought against +him. Then he prayed the General to be good unto the same Hugh Smith, and +to forgive him for his sake. So the General said, Well, Smith, for +Master Doughty’s sake, and at his request, I forgive thee; but become an +honest man hereafter. So then, Master Doughty embracing the General, +naming him his good Captain, bid him farewel; and so bidding the whole +company farewel, he laid his head to the block, the which being stricken +off, Drake most despitefully made the head to be taken up and shewed to +the whole company, himself saying, See, this is the end of traitors! So +he being buried, and those things finished, the whole company being +together, Master Drake protested before God, that whosoever he was who +should offend but the eighth part that Thomas Doughty had done, should +die for it. He also protested, and swore by the life of God, and the +blessed sacrament which he that day had received, that whosoever he were +within the fleet that did give another a blow, should lose his hand, +without exception of any; and yet, the next day, it fortuned that Master +Doughty’s younger brother, walking both silently and mournfully, as well +for remembrance of his brother’s late death, as also weighing the +imminent peril over his own head, (as what has been already said and the +present consequence may purport), there comes unto him this Edward +Bright, the chief instrument of his brother’s death, saying unto him, +God’s wounds! thou villain, what knowest thou by my wife? and withal +struck at him with his ruler, as of purpose to pick a quarrel, to hasten +his end also. Why, Ned Bright, quoth he, thou seest in what case I am, I +pray thee let me alone; and withal bore off the blow with his arm, +wherewith the ruler broke: but Bright, seeming very furious, thrust him +in the face with the piece that remained in his hand, the splinters +whereof entered an inch into his face; presently upon the which, he went +unto the General to complain of Bright. Why, John Doughty, quoth he, +without having any regard of his oath the day before made, Ned Bright +will be open to your revenge in England; for, I dare say, thy brother +did belye her, when he said that she had an ill name in Cambridge. Then +might every man perceive the little-meant honesty.” + + [Illustration: _The beheading of Capt^n. Doughty by Drake._ _J. June + Sc._] + +From this plain narrative of the trial and execution of Doughty, of the +genuineness of which there cannot be the least doubt, as the concomitant +little circumstances all concur to confirm the author both an eye and +ear witness of what he has related, there is reason to believe, that the +success of the voyage covered the iniquity of the undertaker; and that +the immense booty which Drake brought to England, enabled him to stifle +the complaints of individuals; and, by a proper address, to convert the +acts of oppression, murder, and pyracy, of which he was guilty, into so +many deeds of necessary duty, in order to the accomplishment of the main +object, the acquisition of wealth at the expence of honesty. + +That Drake never had a Commission from the Queen, as his friends would +suggest, appears not only from his not producing it at the trial of +Doughty (which can hardly be justified, in contempt to the prisoner), +but from his not producing it upon another occasion, when, as shall be +shewn immediately, he vauntingly produced other credentials of far less +moment, in order to justify his conduct, and give him credit with his +company. The story, then, of the remarkable words foisted into the mouth +of his Sovereign, and recited by his biographer, is as false as +inconsistent with the character of that wise Princess, who, though there +is reason from her after-conduct to conclude that she was privy to the +voyage, yet never openly countenanced it, till after it was completed, +and the issue of it determined; as appears from the account of the +conversation which Drake himself gave to his followers, a few days +before he left Port St. Julian to seek a passage into the South Seas. + +“On the 6th of August, says our author, he commanded his whole company +to be ashore, and, placing himself in a tent, one side of which was +open, and calling Master Winter on one side of him, and John Thomas on +the other side, his man laid before him a great paper book, and withal +Master Fletcher offered himself to make a sermon. Nay soft, Master +Fletcher, said he, I must preach this day myself, although I have small +skill in preaching. Well, all ye the company, here are ye, or not? +Answer was made, that they were all here. Then commanded he every ship’s +company severally to stand together; which was also done. Then, said he, +My Masters, I am a very bad orator, for my bringing up hath not been in +learning; but whatso I shall here speak, let every man take good notice +of, and let him write it down, for I will speak nothing but what I will +answer it in England, yea, and before her Majesty, as I have it here +already set down [but whether it were in his book or not, that I know +not, but this was the effect of it, and very near the words]: Thus it +is, my Masters, that we’re very far from our country and friends; we are +compassed in on every side with our enemies; wherefore we are not to +make small reckoning of a man, for we cannot have a man if we would give +for him ten thousand pounds; wherefore we must have these mutinies and +discontents that are grown amongst us redressed; for, by the life of +God, it doth even take my wits from me to think on it. Here is such +controversy between the sailors and the gentlemen, and such stomaching +between the gentlemen and sailors, that it doth even make me mad to hear +it. But, my Masters, I must have it cease; for I must have the gentlemen +to haul and draw with the mariners, and the mariners with the gentlemen: +and let us shew ourselves to be all of a company; and let us not give +occasion to the enemy to rejoice at our decay and overthrow. I would +know him that would refuse to set his hand to a rope; but I trust there +is not any such here; and, as gentlemen are very necessary for +government sake on the voyage, so have I shipt them for that purpose, +and to some further intent; and yet, though I know sailors to be the +most envious people of the world, and so unruly without government, yet +may not I be without them. Also, if there be any here willing to return +home, let me understand of them; and here is the Marygold, a ship that I +can very well spare, I will furnish her to such as will return with the +most credit that I can give them, either by my letters or any way else; +but let them take care that they go homeward; for, if I find them in my +way, I will surely sink them; therefore, you shall have time to consider +hereof until to-morrow, for, by my troth, I must needs be plain with +you; _I have taken that in hand that I know not in the world how to go +through withal_; it passeth my capacity; it hath even bereaved me of my +wits to think on it. [Well, yet the voice was, that none would return; +they would all take such part as he did.] Well then, my Masters, quoth +he, came ye all forth with your own good wills, or no? They answered, +All, willingly. At whose hands, my Masters, take ye to receive your +wages? At yours, answered the company. Then, said he, how say you, will +you take wages, or stand to my courtesy? To your courtesy, good Captain, +was the reply. Then he commanded the steward to the Elizabeth to bring +him the key of the stores, the which he did; then, turning him unto +Master Winter, he said, Master Winter, I do here discharge you of your +Captainship; and so in brief he said to all the Officers. Then Master +Winter and John Thomas asked him what should move him to displace them? +He asked in return, whether they could make any reason why he should not +do so? So willing them to content themselves, he willed silence in those +matters, saying, Ye see here the great disorders we are entangled into; +and, although some have already received condign punishment, as by +death, who, I take God to witness, as you all know, was to me as my +other hand, yet you see, over and besides the rest, his own mouth did +bewray his treacherous dealings: and see, how, trusting to the +singularity of his own wit, he over-reacht himself at unawares. But see +what God would have to be done; for her Majesty commanded, that of all +men my Lord Treasurer should have no knowledge of this voyage, and to +see that his own mouth hath declared that he had given him a plot +thereof. But, truly, my Masters, and as I am a gentleman, there shall no +more die; I will lay my hand on no more, although there be here who have +deserved as much as he; and so charging one Worrall that was present, +that his case was worse than Doughty’s, who, in Master Doughty’s +extremities, was one of Drake’s chief confellows, who, humbling himself +to Drake, even upon his knees, prayed him to be good unto him, Well, +well, Worrall, said he, you and I shall talk well enough of this matter +hereafter. Then he charged one John Audley with some ill dealings +towards him, but opened no matter, but said, he would talk with him +alone after dinner. Here is some again, my Masters, not knowing how else +to discredit me, say and affirm, that I was set forth on this voyage by +Master Hatton; some by Sir William Winter; and some by Master Hankins; +but these are a company of idle heads that have nothing else to talk of. +And, my Masters, I must tell you, I do know them as my very good +friends; but, to say that they were the fitters forth of this voyage, or +that it was by their means, I tell you it was nothing so. But, indeed, +thus it was, My Lord of Essex wrote in my commendation unto Secretary +Walsingham more than I was worthy; but by like I had deserved somewhat +at his hands, and he thought me in his letters a fit man to serve +against the Spaniards for my practice and experience that I had in that +trade; whereupon, indeed, Secretary Walsingham did come to consult with +his Lordship, and declared unto him, that for that her Majesty had +received divers injuries of the King of Spain, for the which, she +desired to have some revenge; and withal, he shewed me a plot, willing +me to set my hand, and to write down where I thought he might most be +annoyed; but I told him some part of my mind, but refused to set my hand +to any thing, affirming, that her Majesty was mortal, and that, if it +should please God to take her Majesty away, it might so be that some +person might reign that might be in league with the King of Spain, and +then will mine own hand be a witness against myself. Then was I very +shortly after, and on an evening, sent for unto her Majesty by Secretary +Walsingham; and, the next day, coming to her Majesty, these, or the like +words, she said, Drake, so it is that I would gladly be revenged on the +King of Spain for divers injuries that I have received: and said +further, that he was the only man that might do this exploit, and withal +craved his advice therein, who told her Majesty of the small good that +was to be done in Spain, but the only way was to annoy him by his +Indies. Then, with many more words, he shewed forth a bill of her +Majesty’s adventure of 1000 crowns, which, however, he said at some time +before, that her Majesty did give him towards his charges. He shewed +also a bill of Master Hatton’s adventure, and divers letters of credit +that had passed in his behalf; but he never let them come out of his own +hands. He said also, that her Majesty did swear by her crown, _That, if +any within her realm did give the King of Spain hereof to understand (as +she suspected but two), they should lose their heads therefore_. And +now, Masters, said he, let us consider what we have done: _We have now +set together by the ears three mighty Princes, namely, her Majesty, the +Kings of Spain and Portugal; and, if this voyage should not have good +success, we should not only be a scorning, or a reproachful +scoffing-stock unto our enemies, but also a great_ BLOT _to our whole +country for ever; and, what triumph would it be to Spain and Portugal; +and, again, the like would never be attempted_. And now, restoring every +man again to his former office, he ended: thus shewing the company that +he would satisfy every man, or else he would sell all that he ever had +even unto his plate; for, quoth he, I have good reason to promise, and +am best able to perform it; for, I have somewhat of mine own in England; +and, besides that, I have as much adventure in this voyage as three of +the best whatsoever; and, if it so be, that I never come home, yet will +her Majesty pay every man his wages, whom indeed you and I all came to +serve; and, for to say you came to serve me, I will not give you thanks; +for it is only her Majesty that you serve; and this voyage is only her +fitting forth: so willing all men to be friends, he willed them to +depart about their business. The 8th of August, they weighed anchor and +departed; but, the day before, he came on board the Elizabeth, and swore +very vehemently, I know not upon what occasion, that he would hang to +the number of 30 in the fleet that had deserved it: and then again +charged Worrall that his case was worse than Doughty’s, and that by +God’s wounds he had deserved to be hanged. And, Master Winter, said he, +where is your man Ulysses? By God’s life, if he were my man, I would cut +off his ears: nay, by God’s wounds, I would hang him; but wherefore +truly I do not know.” + +Nothing can be a clearer proof that Drake had no Government Commission +than the above account. In his speech, which the writer says is nearly +in his own words, he does not so much as pretend to have received any +Commission, only a private intimation from the Queen and Walsingham, +that her Majesty wanted to be revenged of divers injuries received from +the King of Spain. But was countenancing four or five piratical +plunderers to rob innocent people, a princely way for one Sovereign to +take revenge of another, in times of profound peace? It was, indeed, a +pitiful connivance in Queen Elizabeth to engage 1000 crowns in a +piratical adventure of this kind, and what could never have been +credited of that magnanimous Princess, had she not afterwards approved +of his piracy, by going aboard his ship, and openly approving what, it +was even then said, least became a trading nation to encourage, the +breach of treaties, and piratical practices. But, it is remarkable, that +five months elapsed after his return to England before her Majesty’s +pleasure was publicly known; during which time men talked variously of +the expedition, and the fate of Drake seemed to hang in suspence; so +true proved Doughty’s prediction, that “the Queen’s Majesty and Council +might be corrupted.” + +That Drake bore no naval Commission appears still more clearly, from his +displacing the Captains and Officers of all his ships without demanding +from them their Commissions; from his lifting his men, not for any +hostile expedition, but for a trading voyage to Alexandria; and from his +asking them, before his setting sail from the Port of St. Julian to +enter the South Seas, from whom they expected their wages. From these +circumstances it follows incontestibly, that, if he had a naval +Commission, he was the only Officer in the fleet possessed of +one;--Doughty, whom he beheaded, and who, before their falling out, was +second in command, bore no naval Commission; and, it is more than +probable, that this gentleman’s questioning the Commission of Drake was +the real cause of his death, as Drake more than once charges him with +the overthrow of the voyage, which he could no otherwise effect than by +discrediting a Commission, on the authority of which both Officers and +men were to be persuaded to plunder a people at peace with their nation, +and without which every man was liable to be executed for piracy, +whenever he should be overpowered. + +It were needless for us to enlarge our remarks; every reader has now the +subject before him, and every reader will form a judgment for himself. + +What we have said, in consequence of having traced this transaction from +beginning to end, may seem to clash with the opinion we previously +entertained of Drake’s humanity, courage, and kindness to his followers, +but will not seem strange to those who are acquainted with the nature of +periodical writings, where one part of the work is necessarily printed +off before the other is written. In pursuing the course of this voyage, +new authors have been consulted, and new lights collected, which have +enabled us to detect not only the errors of other writers, but also to +correct our own; and, from the sequel of this voyage, we may venture to +foretel, that the reader will concur in sentiment with us, that, though +Drake was bold, he was not honest; that, though he did not kill those he +plundered and had no motive to destroy, he spared none who opposed his +designs, or who did not pay implicit obedience to his arbitrary will; +that, though he was an able seaman, he was a jealous rival; and that, +though he was a gallant leader, he was a most tyrannical Commander. We +shall now accompany him to the South Seas, where the Spaniards, not +suspecting an enemy, were in no condition to defend themselves against +his attacks. + +Drake having reduced the number of his ships to three, they left the +port, and on August the 20th entered the Straits of Magellan, in which +they struggled with contrary winds, and the various dangers which the +intricacy of that winding passage exposed them to, till night, when they +had passed the first narrow, and had entered a wider sea, where they +discovered an island, to which they gave the name of Elizabeth, in +honour of their Sovereign. On the 24th they came to an island, in which +they found such an infinite number of birds, since called penguins, that +they killed 3000 of them in one day. This bird, of which they then knew +not the name, they describe as somewhat less than a wild goose, without +feathers, and covered with a kind of down, unable to fly or rise from +the ground, but capable of running and swimming with amazing celerity. +They feed on fishes in the sea, and come to land only to rest in the +day, and lay their eggs, which, according to later voyagers, they +deposit in holes, as regularly dispersed and as numerous as the cells in +a beehive. + +From these islands to the South Sea the strait becomes very crooked and +narrow; so that sometimes by the interposition of head-lands the passage +seems entirely shut up. To double these capes they found it very +difficult, on account of the frequent variations to be made in the +course. Here are, indeed, as Magellan observes, many harbours; but in +most of them no bottom is to be found, which, however, does not seem +verified by experience; the harbours being in general good, though the +tides and blasts continually rushing in from various directions create +the danger. The land on both sides rises into innumerable mountains; the +tops of them were encircled with clouds and vapours, which, being +congealed, fall down in snow, and increase their height by hardening +into ice; an observation which might naturally occur to Drake, who +passed the strait in their winter before the snows were dissolved. +However, even at that season, which answers to our February, they found +the vallies, in some places, green, fruitful, and pleasant. Anchoring in +a bay near Cape Forward, Drake, imagining the strait quite shut up, went +in his boat to endeavour to find some other passage out; and, having +found an inlet towards the North, was returning to his ships; but +curiosity soon prevailed upon him to stop for the sake of observing a +canoe or boat with several natives of the country in it. He could not at +a distance help admiring the form of this little vessel, which seemed +inclining to a semi-circle, the stern and prow standing up, and the body +sinking inward; but much greater was his wonder, when, upon a nearer +inspection, he found it made only with the barks of trees, sewed +together with thongs of seal-skin, so artificially, that scarcely any +water entered the seams. + +The people were well shaped, and painted like those who have been +already described. On the land they had a hut built with poles, and +covered with skins, in which they had water-vessels and other utensils, +made likewise with the barks of trees. Among these people they had an +opportunity of remarking, what is frequently observable in savage +countries, how natural sagacity and unwearied industry may supply the +want of such manufactures or natural productions as appear to us +absolutely necessary for the support of life. Though the inhabitants +were wholly strangers to iron and to the use we make of it, yet, instead +of it, they substituted the shell of a muscle, of prodigious size, found +upon their coasts. This they ground upon a stone to an edge, which was +so firm and solid, that neither wood nor stone were able to resist it. +With instruments made of shells, these simple people were able to +perform all their mechanic operations; nor do they seem so deformed and +ugly as our late voyagers represent them, who being, perhaps, more +refined than those who sailed with Captain Drake, might fancy a greater +difference between themselves and these savages than in nature there +really is. + +On this occasion we cannot forbear remarking, that, though Drake entered +the strait in what is accounted the most unfavourable season, yet he +passed it in sixteen days, though, at that time, wholly unknown; a +passage the more extraordinary, as none of our later voyagers made it in +less than thirty six days in the middle of summer, and Captain Wallis +was at least four months in making it. + +Drake, as has been said, having taken a survey of the country from Cape +Forward, continued his course to the North-west-ward, and, on the sixth +of September, entered the great South Sea, on which no English vessel +had ever been navigated before; and proposed to have directed his course +towards the Line, that his men, who had suffered by the severity of the +climate, might recover their strength in a warmer latitude. But his +design was scarce formed, before it was frustrated; for on September the +seventh, after an eclipse of the moon, a storm arose so violent that it +left them little hopes of surviving it: nor was its fury so dreadful as +its continuance; for it lasted, with little intermission, thirty-two +days, in which time they were driven more than 200 leagues out of their +course, without being able either to avail themselves of their sails, or +make use of their anchors. + +In this storm, on the 30th of September, the Marigold, Captain Thomas, +was separated from them; and on the 7th of October, having entered a +harbour, where they hoped for some intermission of their fatigues, they +were in a few hours forced out to sea again by a violent gust, at which +time they lost sight of the Elizabeth, Captain Winter, whose crew, as +was afterwards discovered, wearied with labour, and discouraged with the +prospect of future dangers, recovered the straits the day following, +and, returning by the same passage through which they came, sailed along +the coast of Brazil, and, in the year following, arrived in England. + +They were now driven Southward 55 degrees, where they discovered a +cluster of islands, in one of which they anchored and staid two days, to +the great refreshment of the crew, having met with excellent water, and +plenty of greens. Not far distant from this bay they entered another, +where they beheld some naked inhabitants ranging along the coast in +their canoes in search of provisions. With these they exchanged some +toys for such refreshments as they had to supply. + +And now, being furnished with wood and water, they again set sail, and +were, by a new storm, driven to the latitude of 57 degrees, when they +beheld the extremities of the American coast, and the confluence of the +Atlantic and Southern oceans. Here they arrived on the 28th of October, +and at last were blest with the sight of a calm sea, having, for almost +two months, endured such a storm, as no voyager has given an account of, +and such as in that part of the world, though accustomed to hurricanes, +the inhabitants were unacquainted with. + +On the 30th of October, they steered towards the place appointed for the +rendezvous of the fleet, in case of separation, which was in 30 degrees +South; and, on the next day, discovered two islands, so well stocked +with fowls, that they victualled their ships with them. After this +supply, they sailed northward, along the coast of Peru, till they came +to 30 degrees, where, finding neither ships, nor any convenient port, +they came to anchor Nov. the 29th, at Mucho, an island inhabited by such +Indians as the cruelty of their Spanish conquerors had driven from the +continent, to whom they applied for water and provisions, offering them +in return such things as they imagined most likely to please them. The +Indians seemed willing to traffic; and, having presented them with +fruits and two fat sheep, shewed them a place where they might come for +water. + +Next morning, according to agreement, the English landed with their +water-vessels, and sent two men forward towards the place appointed, +who, about the middle of the way, were suddenly attacked by the Indians +and immediately slain. Nor were the rest of the company out of danger; +for behind the rocks was lodged an ambush of 500 men, who, starting up +from their retreat, discharged their arrows into the boat with such +dexterity, that every one of the crew was wounded by them. The sea being +then high, and hindering them from either retiring or making use of +their weapons, Drake himself received an arrow under his eye, which +pierced him almost to the brain; and another in his breast. The danger +of these wounds was much increased by the absence of their surgeon, who +was in the Elizabeth, so that they had none to assist them but a boy, +whose age did not admit of much experience or skill; yet so much were +they favoured by Providence, that they all recovered. No reason could be +assigned for which the Indians should attack them with so furious a +spirit of malignity, but that they mistook them for Spaniards, whose +cruelties might very reasonably incite those to revenge, whom they had +driven, by incessant persecution, from their country, wasting immense +tracts of land by massacre and devastation. Nuno da Sylva adds, that +none of the Indians were hurt by the English, though they came so near +the boat, as to seize and carry off four of the oars. + +On the afternoon of the same day they set sail, and on the 30th of +November dropt anchor in Phillip’s bay, where their boat, having been +sent out to discover the country, returned with an Indian in his canoe +whom they had intercepted. He was of a graceful stature, drest in a +white coat or gown, reaching almost to his knees; very mild, humble, and +docile; such as perhaps were all the Indians, till the Spaniards taught +them revenge, treachery, and cruelty. This Indian, having been kindly +treated, was dismissed with presents; and informed, as far as the +English could make him understand, what they chiefly wanted, and what +they were willing to give in return; Drake ordered his boat to attend +him, and set him safe on shore. + +When he was landed, he made signs for the boat to wait till his return, +and meeting some of his countrymen, gave them such an account of his +reception, that, within a few hours, several of them repaired with him +to the boat, with fowls, eggs, and a hog; and with them one of their +captains, who willingly came into the boat, and desired to be conveyed +by the English to their ship. + +By this man Drake was informed that no supplies were to be expected +here; but that Southward, in a place to which he offered to be his +pilate, there was great plenty. This proposal was accepted, and on the +5th of December, under the direction of the good-natured Indian, they +came to anchor in the harbour called by the Spaniards Val Parizo, in 33 +deg. 40 min. S. latitude, near the little town of St. Jago, where they +met not only with sufficient stores of provisions, and with storehouses +full of the wines of Chili, but with a ship called the Captain of +Morial, richly laden, having, together with large quantities of the same +wine, some of the fine gold of Baldivia to the amount of threescore +thousand pezoes, each pezo of the value of eight shillings, and a great +cross of gold set with emeralds. The Spaniards at first, mistaking the +English for friends, invited them to feast with them; but soon being +undeceived, one of the crew jumped overboard, and alarmed the town; but +the inhabitants, instead of making opposition, fled hastily, and left +whatever was in the town a prize to the enemy. In the chapel Drake and +his men found the most valuable booty. + +Having spent three days here in storing their ships, and loading the +money and effects, they departed, and landed their Indian pilot where +they first received him, after having rewarded him much above his +expectations or desires. They had now little other anxiety than for +their friends, who had been separated from them, and whom they now +determined to seek. But considering that, by entering every creek and +harbour with their ships, they exposed themselves to unnecessary +dangers, and that their boat could not contain such a number as might +defend themselves against the Spaniards, they determined to station +their ship at some place where they might commodiously build a pinnace, +which, being of light burden, might safely sail where the ship would be +in danger of being stranded; and, at the same time, carry a sufficient +force to resist the enemy, and afford better accommodation than it was +possible to obtain in the boat. To this end, on the 19th of December, +they entered a bay near Coquimbo, a town inhabited by the Spaniards, +who, discovering them immediately, issued out to the number of 100 +horsemen, with about 200 naked Indians running by their sides. The +English, observing their approach, retired to their boat without any +loss, except of one man, whom no persuasions or intreaties could move to +retire with the rest, and who was therefore overtaken by the Spaniards, +who thought to have taken him prisoner, but, having an halbert in his +hand, he manfully defended himself, till, being overpowered by numbers, +he was run through the body with a lance. The Spaniards, exulting at the +victory, ordered the Indians to draw the dead carcase from the rock on +which he fell, and in the sight of the English beheaded it, and then cut +off the right hand, and tore out the heart, which they carried away in +triumph. + +Leaving this place, they soon found a harbour more secure and +convenient, where they built their pinnace, in which Drake went to seek +his companions; but, finding the wind contrary, he was obliged to return +in two days. + +From hence they came to a port called Sarcipaxa, where, being landed, +they found a Spaniard asleep with silver bars lying by him to the value +of 4000 Spanish ducats: notwithstanding the insults which they had +received from his countrymen, they did not think fit to disturb this +harmless man’s repose, but, taking the silver, left him quietly to sleep +out his nap. + +Coasting along the shore, they observed a Spaniard driving eight +Peruvian sheep, which on landing they found to be laden with silver, +each sheep having 100lb. weight in two leather bags across his back. +They delivered the poor animals of their heavy burdens, and lodged the +bags in their own ships. + +Farther on lay some Indian towns, from which the inhabitants repaired to +the ship on floats made of seal-skin blown full of wind, two of which +they fasten together, and, sitting between them, row with great +swiftness, and carry considerable burdens. They very readily traded for +glass and such trifles, with which the old and the young seemed equally +delighted. + +Arriving at Marmarena on the 26th of January, Drake invited the +Spaniards to traffic with him, which they accepted; and supplied him +with necessaries, selling to him, among other provisions, some of those +sheep which have been mentioned, whose bulk is equal to that of a cow, +and whose strength is such, that one of them can carry three tall men +upon his back; their necks are like a camel’s, and their heads like +those of our sheep. They are the most useful animals of this country, +not only affording excellent fleeces and wholesome flesh, but serving as +carriers over rocks and mountains, where no other beast can travel for +their foot is of a particular form, which enables them to tread firm on +the steepest and most slippery places. + +On all this coast, it is said, the mountains are so impregnated with +silver, that from one hundred weight of common earth five ounces of fine +silver may be separated. + +They continued their course towards the North, and on the 7th of +February arrived at Arica, in 8 deg. 30 min. S. latitude, and in this +port found three small barks, in which they found 57 slabs of silver, +each of the size and shape of an ordinary brick, and weighing about +20lb. They took no prisoners; for the crews, fearing no interlopers, +were all on shore carousing with one another. At this port the Spaniards +were wont to land their merchandize, and to embark the silver, which was +transported from thence to Panama; but, since Drake’s incursion, they +carry their silver over land to Lima, and load no more treasure here, +except what they pay for the purchase of such merchandize as is brought +from Europe to supply their market. Wanting numbers to assault the town, +they proceeded in their course, and falling in with a small +coasting-vessel, laden with linen and other cloaths, Drake supplied his +crew with what quantity of those articles they stood in need of, and +dismissed the Spaniards with the remainder. + +From hence they sailed to Chuli; in which port there was a ship that had +300,000 pezoes of silver in bars; but the Spaniards had sent an express +from Arica, to acquaint the Governor that Drake was upon the coast. This +express arrived at Chuli, just two hours before Drake entered the port; +in which time the master of the ship had thrown his treasure overboard, +and had secured himself and crew on shore, leaving only one Indian on +board to make the report. Drake, fearing the alarm would spread faster +than he could sail, lost no time in hazardous searches, but instantly +departed, and steered for Lima, where they arrived on the 15th of +February, and entered the harbour without resistance, in which, +according to some writers, there were thirty sail of ships; others say, +twelve; but all agree, that several of them were of considerable force: +so that Drake’s security consisted not in his strength, but in his +reputation, which had so intimidated the Spaniards, that the sight of +their own superiority could not rouse them to opposition. Instances of +such panic terrors are to be met with in other relations; but as they +are, for the most part, quickly dissipated by reason and resolution, a +wise Commander will rarely ground his hopes of success on them; and, +perhaps, on this occasion, the Spaniards scarcely deserve a severer +censure for their cowardice, than Drake for his temerity. A writer of +good authority, to reconcile the matter, tells us, that Drake took them +at unawares, and that the crews, as is usual in times of perfect +security, were with their families on shore; and many of those who were +ready to sail, were taking leave of their friends. Be this as it may, +all seem to agree, that Drake made here a considerable booty, having +taken from one ship a chest full of rials of plate, which he found +concealed under the steerage, and, from other ships, silks and linen +cloth to a considerable value. He did not, however, remain long in this +harbour, but hastened in pursuit of the Cacafuego, which ship had sailed +but three days before, and which, they were here informed, was bound to +Paita. In the pursuit, they fell in with another ship, out of which they +took a large quantity of gold, together with a crucifix of the same +metal, richly adorned with emeralds. They continued the pursuit; but, +having gained intelligence, that, instead of Paita, she was gone to +Panama, Drake crouded all the sail he could, and, to encourage the +pursuers, promised, that whoever first descried the prize should have +his gold chain as a reward; which fell to the lot of his brother John. +On the 1st of March they came up with her, and, after exchanging a few +shot, they boarded her, and found not only a quantity of jewels, and +thirteen chests of money, but eighty pounds weight of gold, and +twenty-six tons of uncoined silver, with services of wrought plate to a +great value. In unlading this prize they spent six days; and then +dismissing the Spaniards, stood off again to sea. + + [Illustration: _Sir Francis Drake engaging the Cacafuego, a rich + Spanish ship._ _J. June Sculp._] + +Lopez Vaz, a Spanish writer, tells us, that, in less than 24 hours after +their departure from Lima in pursuit of the Cacafuego, news was brought +that Drake was upon the coast, but that the Governor had already +assembled the force of the country to oppose his landing; and that, +finding he had left the harbour, he ordered three ships with six pieces +of cannon (being all he could collect), and 250 men, to pursue him: but, +the equipment of these vessels necessarily requiring time, Drake had +gained the advantage of them: and, coming within sight of the prize off +Cape Francisco, the Captain of which, Juan de Anton, a Biscayan, seeing +at a distance a ship crouded with sails, and imagining the Viceroy of +Peru had dispatched her on some message to him, struck his sails, and +lay to till Drake approaching nearer, he discovered his mistake. He +would then have made his escape, but Drake nearing him fast with his +great ordnance, against which the Captain could make no defence, he was +constrained to yield. “There was in this ship, adds the Spaniard, eight +hundred and fifty thousand pezoes of silver, and forty thousand pezoes +of gold, all which silver and gold was customed: but what treasure they +had uncustomed, I know not; for many times they carry almost as much +more as they pay custom for; otherwise the King would take it from them, +if they should be known to have any great sum; wherefore every ship +carries a bill of custom, that the King may see it. All the treasure +which Drake took was merchants and other mens goods, saving 180,000 +pezoes of the King’s. He had also out of this ship good store of +victuals, with other necessaries, which were to be carried from Panama, +and was five days in taking out such things as he needed. + +“This done, he sailed to the coast of New Spain, without going to +Panama. The ships that were sent by the Viceroy of Peru from Lima, +arrived off Cape St. Francisco 20 days after Drake had taken the +Cacafuego, and had intelligence by a ship coming from Panama, which they +met at the said Cape, that Francis Drake had taken the ship with silver, +and was not gone for Panama; whereupon the Commander of the three ships, +thinking that Captain Drake had been gone for the Straits of Magellan, +directed his course that way to seek him.” + +Thus Drake, changing his course to the west, escaped his enemies, and +fell in with a ship from the East Indies laden with silks, China ware, +and cotton. The owner, a Spaniard, was on board, who presented Drake +with a falcon wrought in massy gold, with an emerald set in the breast +of it, the largest he had ever beheld. With this present, and a golden +cup from the pilot, Drake was contented, and dismissed the ship, taking +only four chests of China ware, which at that time was of great value in +Europe. + +On the 13th of March they came in sight of land, which happened to be a +small island about two leagues from the main continent. There they found +a harbour, and anchored in five fathom water, where they staid till the +20th, on which day, a little coasting frigate passing by, was pursued by +the pinnace, boarded, and taken. Being laden with sasaparilla, honey, +butter, and other country goods, Drake unloaded the sasaparilla, and in +the room of it put the gold and silver from his own ship, in order to +heave her up, to new caulk her sides, and stop her leaks; in which +service the crew were employed till the 26th of the same month, when +having reloaded the cargo, and taken in a sufficient quantity of wood +and water, they continued their course westward along the coast, taking +the Spanish frigate with them to bear them company. + +On April 6, a little before sun-set, they discovered a ship, that held +on her course about two leagues to seaward from the main land. To this +ship they gave chace, and before morning they neared her, and suddenly +boarded her while the men slept. Being masters of this prize without +resistance, they ordered the prisoners on board their own ship, among +whom was one Don Francisco Xarate, who meant to sail to Panama, and from +thence to China, with the letters and patents that were found in his +possession (among which were the letters of the King of Spain to the +Governor of the Philippines); as also the sea charts wherewith they were +to be directed in their voyage, which were of admirable use to Drake in +his return home. From this ship they took great quantities of +bale-goods, and other valuable merchandize, and then dismissed her. They +also took a young negroe girl, whom Drake or some of his companions +having got with child, they afterwards inhumanly set her on shore on an +island in their way home, just as she was ready to lie in; of which +notice will be taken in its proper place. Having retained a Spanish +pilot from this ship, they obliged him to direct them to a safe harbour, +where they might supply themselves with provisions for their intended +voyage. This man brought them to the harbour of Anguatulco, or, as +others write, Guatalco, where arriving on the 13th of April, they staid +till the 26th of the same month, and then set sail, having first +dismissed all their Spanish prisoners, together with Nuno da Sylva, the +Portugueze pilot, whom they brought from the Canaries, and who had +served them faithfully in all their trials and dangers; in reward for +which he was now abandoned by Drake to the mercy of the enemy. This man, +when he landed on the continent, was first carried to Mexico, and there +put to the torture to make discoveries. He was afterwards sent prisoner +into Old Spain, and there examined; and, having given a faithful +relation of all he knew, was released, and returned home to his own +country, where he published, as has already been said, an account of the +voyage as far as he went, which was afterwards translated into all the +European languages, and universally read. + +On their arrival at Anguatulco, they had no sooner landed than Drake +with part of his men marched up to the town, where they found the chief +magistrate sitting in judgment upon a parcel of poor savages, and ready +to pass sentence of death upon almost all of them, they being charged +with a conspiracy to kill their masters, and set fire to the town. Drake +changed the scene, and made judges and criminals without distinction, +his prisoners, conducting them all in procession to his ship. Here he +made the Judge write an order to the Commanding Officer to deliver up +the town, in which they found a great pot, says my author, as big as a +bushel, full of rials of plate, a gold chain, and a few jewels. The gold +chain was taken from a gentleman who was making his escape from the +town, but was intercepted by an English sailor, who rifled him of all +the valuables he had about him, of which the gold chain was thought to +be of the least value. + + [Illustration: _Drake Conveying the Spanish Judges and Criminal Savages + of Anguatulco; in Procession on Board his own Ship._] + +Being now sufficiently enriched, and having given over all hopes of +finding their associates, and, perhaps, beginning to be infected with +that desire of ease and pleasure which is the natural consequence of +wealth obtained by successful villainy, or, what is still more probable, +being in fear of a surprize before they had secured their booty, they +began to consult about their return home; and, in pursuance of Drake’s +advice, resolved first to find out some convenient harbour where they +might more safely lie and equip themselves for the voyage, and then +endeavour to discover a nearer passage from the South Seas into the +Atlantic Ocean; a passage that would not only enable them to return home +with full security, and in a shorter time, but would much facilitate the +navigation into those parts, and of course immortalize their names. + +For this purpose they had recourse to a port in the island of Canes, +where they met with fish, wood, and fresh water; and, being sufficiently +stored with other provisions, with which they had supplied themselves +from their prizes and at Anguatulco, they set sail first with a +resolution of seeking a passage by the north-west, and, if that failed, +by the Moluccas, and thence, following the course of the Portugueze, to +return by the Cape of Good Hope. + +In pursuance of the first resolution, they sailed about 600 leagues, +till coming into the latitude of 43 deg. north, they found the air so +excessive cold, that the men could no longer bear to handle the ropes to +navigate the ship: they, therefore, changed their course till they came +into the latitude of 38 deg. and 30 min. under which height they +discovered a very good harbour, and, fortunately, had a favourable wind +to enable them to enter it. + +Here, on the 17th of June, they cast anchor, and, in a short time, had +opportunities of observing that the natives of that country were not +less sensible than themselves; for, the next day, there came a man +rowing in his canoe towards the ship, and, at a distance from it, made a +long oration with very extraordinary gesticulations, and great +appearance of vehemence; and, a little time afterwards, made a second +visit in the same manner; and then returning a third time, he presented +them, after his harangue was finished, with a kind of crown of black +feathers, such as their kings wear upon their heads, and a basket of +rushes filled with a particular herb, both which he fastened to a short +stick, and threw into the boat: nor could he be prevailed upon to +receive any thing in return, though pushed towards him upon a board, +only he took up a hat that was flung in the water. + +Three days afterwards, the ship, having received some damage at sea, was +brought nearer to land, that her lading might be taken out; in order to +which, the English, who had now learned not to commit their lives too +negligently to the mercy of savage nations, raised a kind of +fortification with earth and palissades, and erected their tents within +it. All this was not beheld by the inhabitants without the utmost +astonishment, which incited them to come down in crouds to the coast, +with no other view, as it afterwards appeared, but to compliment the +beautiful strangers that had condescended to touch upon their country. + +Drake, neither confiding too much in appearances, nor wholly distrusting +the friendly disposition of the inhabitants, directed them to lay aside +their bows and arrows, and, on their approach, presented them with linen +and other necessaries, of which he shewed them the use. They then +returned to their habitations, about three quarters of a mile from the +English camp, where they made such loud and violent noises, that they +were heard by the English, who had vanity enough to believe that they +were paying them a kind of melancholy adoration. + +Two days afterwards, they perceived the approach of a far more numerous +company, who stopt at the top of a hill which over-looked the English +settlement, while one of them made a long oration, at the end of which +all the assembly bowed their bodies, and pronounced the syllable _Ob_ +with a solemn tone, as by way of confirmation of what had been said by +the orator. Then the men laying down their bows, and leaving their women +and children on the top of the hill, came down towards the tents, and +seemed transported in the highest degree at the kindness of Drake, who +received their gifts, and admitted them to his presence. The women at a +distance appeared seized with a kind of phrenzy, such as that of old +among the Pagans in some of their religious ceremonies, and, in honour +as it seemed of their guests, tore their cheeks and bosoms with their +nails, and threw themselves upon the stones with their naked bodies. + +Three days after this, on June 25, 1579, Drake received two Ambassadors +from the Hioh, or King, of the country, who, intending to visit the +camp, required that some token might be sent him of friendship and +peace. This request was readily complied with; and soon after came the +King, attended by a guard of about an hundred tall men, and preceded by +an Officer of State, who carried a sceptre made of black wood, adorned +with chains made of a kind of bone or horn, which are marks of the +highest honour among them. Behind him was the King himself, dressed in a +coat of beasts skins, with a crown woven with feathers upon his head. +His attendants followed, dressed nearly in the same manner all but the +crown; and after them came the common-people, with baskets platted so +artificially that they held water, in which, by way of present, they +brought roots and fish. + + [Illustration: _Drake receiving the Crown from the Hioh, or King of New + Albion._] + +Drake, not lulled into security, ranged his men in order of battle, and +waited their approach, who coming nearer, stood still, while the +scepter-bearer made an oration; at the conclusion of which, they came +again forward at the foot of the hill, and then the scepter-bearer began +a song, which he accompanied with a dance, in both which the men joined, +but the women danced without singing. Drake now distrusting them no +longer, admitted them into his fortification, where they continued their +song and dance a short time; and then both the King and some others of +the company made a long harangue, in which it appeared, by the rest of +their behaviour, that they entreated them to accept of the government of +their country; and the King, with the concurrence of the rest, placed +the crown upon Drake’s head, graced him with the chains and other signs +of authority, and saluted him with the title of _Hioh_. The kingdom thus +offered, though of no farther value to him than that it furnished him +with present necessaries, Drake thought it not prudent for him to +refuse; and, therefore, took possession of it in the name of Queen +Elizabeth, not without ardent wishes that this acquisition might be of +use to his native country. The kingdom being thus consigned, and the +grand affair at an end, the common people left their King and his Nobles +with Drake, and dispersed themselves over the camp; and when they saw +any one that pleased them more than the rest, they tore their flesh and +vented their outcries, as before, in token of reverence and respect. +They then proceeded to shew them their wounds and diseases, in hopes, +perhaps, of a miraculous cure; to which the English, to benefit and +undeceive them at the same time, applied such remedies as they used on +like occasions. + +They were now grown confident and familiar, and came down to the camp +every day, repeating their ceremonies, till they were more fully +informed how disagreeable they were to those whose favour they were so +studious of obtaining. They then visited them without ceremony, indeed, +but with a curiosity so ardent, that it left them no leisure to provide +the necessaries of life, with which the English were, therefore, obliged +to supply them. They had, then, sufficient opportunity to remark the +custom and disposition of these new allies, whom they found tractable +and benevolent, strong of body far beyond the English, yet unfurnished +with weapons either for assault or defence, their bows being too weak +for any thing but sport. Their dexterity in taking fish was such, that, +if they saw them so near the shore that they could come to them without +swimming, they never missed them. + +The same curiosity that had brought them in such crouds to the shore, +now induced Drake and some of his companions to travel up into their +country, which they found at some distance from the coast very fruitful, +filled with large deer, and abounding with a peculiar kind of cunnies +smaller than ours, with tails like rats, paws such as those of a mole, +and bags under their chins, in which they carry provisions to their +young. + +The houses of the inhabitants were round holes dug in the ground, from +the brink of which they raise rafters, or poles, shelving towards the +middle, where they all meet in a ridge, and are crampt together; the +people lie upon rushes, and make the fire in the middle of the house, +letting the smoke fly out at the door. The men are generally naked; but +the women make a kind of petticoat of bulrushes, which they comb like +hemp, and throw the skin of a deer over their shoulders. They are very +modest, tractable, and obedient to their husbands. The soil is but badly +cultivated; but contentment seems to prevail in a very eminent degree +among all ranks of this happy people. + +The land was named by Drake New Albion, from its white cliffs, in which +it bore some resemblance to his native country, and the whole history of +the resignation of it to the English was engraven on a piece of brass, +then nailed on a post, and fixed up before their departure, which being +now discovered by the people to be near at hand, they could not forbear +perpetual lamentations. + +When the English on the 23d of July weighed anchor, they saw them +climbing to the tops of hills, that they might keep them in sight, and +observed fires lighted up in many parts of the country, on which, as +they supposed, sacrifices were offered. + +Near to this harbour, they touched at some islands where they found +abundance of seals; and, despairing now to find any passage through the +northern regions, they, after a general consultation, determined to +steer away to the Moluccas; and, setting sail July 25, they held a +western course for 68 days without sight of land; and, on September 30, +arrived within view of some islands, about 20 deg. northward from the +Line, from whence the inhabitants resorted to them in canoes hollowed in +the middle, and raised at both ends so high above the water, that they +seemed almost a semi-circle; they were burnished in such a manner that +they shone like ebony, and were kept steady by a piece of timber fixed +on each side of them. The first company that came brought fruits, +bananas, and other things of no great value, with an appearance of +traffic, and exchanged their lading for other commodities with great +show of honesty and friendship. But having, as they imagined, laid all +suspicion asleep, they sent another fleet of canoes, of which the crews +behaved with all the insolence of savages, and all the rapacity of +thieves; for, whatever was suffered to come into their hands, they +seemed to consider as their own, and would neither pay for it nor +restore it: and, at length, finding the English resolved to admit them +no longer, they discharged a shower of stones from their boats, which +insult Drake prudently and generously returned, by firing his great guns +without hurting them; at which they were so terrified, that they leaped +into the water, and hid themselves under their canoes. + +Here we cannot help remarking how nearly this description agrees with +the accounts given by the late navigators, of the temper and disposition +of the inhabitants of the islands lately discovered between the Tropics. +Drake, indeed, found the firing of his guns without hurting them, +sufficient to intimidate these ignorant people; but our later voyagers +have thought their vengeance not complete for any slight insult, without +murdering them by wholesale to strike them with terror. The writer of +the late voyages says, “Our men shewed as much impatience to destroy +them as a sportsman to kill his game.” + +Having for some time but little wind, they did not arrive at the +Moluccas till the 3d of November; and then, designing to touch at +Tidore, as they coasted along the island Mutua, belonging to the King of +Ternate, they were visited by his Viceroy, who informed them that it +would be more advantageous for them to have recourse to his master for +supplies, than to the Portuguese, with whom he was at enmity. Drake was, +by the arguments of the Viceroy, prevailed upon to alter his resolution; +and, on November the 5th, cast anchor before Ternate. Scarce was he +arrived, before the Viceroy, with others of the chief nobility, came out +in three large barges rowed by forty men on each side, to conduct the +ship into a safe harbour; and, soon after, the King himself, having +received a velvet cloak by a messenger from Drake, as a token of peace, +came with such a retinue and dignity of appearance, as was not expected +in those remote parts of the world. He was received with discharges of +cannon, and every kind of music, with which he was so much delighted, +that he invited the performers on board his barge. + +The King was of a graceful stature and royal carriage, of a mild aspect +and low voice. His attendants were dressed in white cotton or callico, +of whom some, whose age gave them a venerable appearance, seemed as +councilors, and the rest officers or nobles. His guards were not +ignorant of fire-arms, but had not many among them, being equipped for +the most part with bows and darts. The King, having spent some time in +admiring the new objects that presented themselves, retired as soon as +the ship was brought to anchor, and promised to return on the day +following and in the mean time the inhabitants, having leave to traffic, +brought down provisions in great abundance. The King came not aboard, +according to his promise, but sent his brother to excuse him, and withal +to invite Drake ashore, proposing to stay himself as an hostage for his +return. Drake declined going himself, but sent some gentlemen of his +retinue in company with the King’s brother, and kept the Viceroy till +their return. + +These gentlemen were received by another of the king’s brothers, and +conduced in great state to the castle, where there was a court of, at +least, 1000 persons, among whom were threescore ancient men, privy +counsellors to the king; and on each side of the gate without, stood +four old men of foreign countries, who served as interpreters in +commerce. In a short time appeared the King himself, drest in cloth of +gold, with his hair woven into gold ringlets, a chain of gold upon his +neck, and on his fingers rings very artificially set with diamonds and +jewels of great value. Over his head was borne a rich canopy and by his +chair of state stood a page with a fan set with sapphires, to moderate +the excess of the heat. Here he received the compliments of the English, +and then honourably dismissed them. The castle, which they had some +opportunity of observing, seemed of no great force. It was built by the +Portuguese, who, attempting to reduce this kingdom into absolute +subjection, murdered the King, and intended to pursue their plot by the +destruction of all his sons. But the general abhorrence which cruelty +and perfidy naturally excite, armed the whole nation against them, and +procured their total expulsion from all the dominions of Ternate, which, +from that time, increasing in power, continued to make new conquests, +and to deprive them of other acquisitions. + +Here they shipt between four and five tons of cloves, intending to bring +them to Europe. While they lay before Ternate, a gentleman came on board +attended by his Portuguese interpreter. He was dressed somewhat in the +European manner, and soon distinguished himself from the natives of +Ternate, or any country they had ever yet seen, by his civility and +quick comprehension. Such a visitant may easily be imagined to excite +their curiosity, which he gratified by informing them that he was a +native of China, of the family of the King then upon the throne; and +that being accused of a capital crime, of which, though he was innocent, +he had not sufficient evidence to clear himself, he had petitioned the +Emperor that he might not be exposed to a trial; but that his cause +might be referred to Divine Providence; and that he might be allowed to +leave his country, with a prohibition against returning, unless heaven, +in attestation of his innocence, should enable him to bring back to the +King some intelligence that might be to the honour and advantage of the +Empire of China. In search of such information he had now spent three +years, and left Tidore for the sake of conversing with the English +General, from whom he hoped to receive such accounts as would enable him +to return with honour and safety. Drake, whether he credited or +disbelieved his story, caused a recital to be made by one of the +company, who talked the language of the interpreter, of such adventures +and observations as he judged would be most pleasing to his visitor, to +all which the Chinese Exile gave the utmost attention; and, having +caused them to be repeated a second time, to impress them in his mind, +thanked the Creator of the World for the knowledge he had gained, he +then proposed to the General to sail to his country, to which he +willingly undertook to be his pilot; but Drake could not be induced to +prolong his voyage. + +He therefore set sail, on Nov. the 9th, in quest of a more convenient +harbour, where he might clean and refit his ship, which, by the length +of the voyage, and the heat of the climate, was now become foul and +leaky. Directing his course southward, he soon fell in with an +uninhabited island, which, by its appearance, promised fair to answer +his purpose. At a distance it looked like a beautiful grove; the trees +were large, straight, and lofty; but, what was more extraordinary, they +were interspersed with such an astonishing number of shining flies, that +the whole island in the night seemed to glow with fire. Here they found +a convenient haven, and here they landed and continued 26 days. They +found upon this island tortoise, but of a monstrous size, and various +sorts of fruits of a delicious flavour. + +Leaving this place on the 12th of December, they cruelly deserted the +unhappy mulatto girl whom they had taken for their pleasure from a ship +that fell into their hands on the coast of New Spain. They had, at the +same time, taken on board a negroe youth, who they thought might be +serviceable to them in conversing with his nation in their way home; +but, finding him of little or no use on board, and provisions beginning +to fail, they pretended to send this simple couple far into the country +to gather fruits, and, in the mean time, unmoored the ship, and hoisted +sail; and, before the return of the victims, were out of sight of their +tears, and out of hearing of their cries: a melancholy instance this of +the depravity of man’s heart, and of the relentless cruelty of minds +addicted to rapine and lust. The poor girl, not yet fifteen, was ready +to be delivered of an innocent babe; and the youth, not twenty, was the +only resource in the midst of her distress. What befel them cannot be +known; but Providence seemed to punish the perfidy of the crew by a +severe trial of their fortitude soon after. + +Having a wind not very favourable, they happened to be intangled among a +multitude of islands, interspersed with dangerous shallows, till January +the 9th, 1580. When they thought themselves clear, and were sailing +along with a brisk gale, they were, at the beginning of the night, +suddenly surprized in their course by a sudden shock, the cause of which +was instantly discovered, for they were thrown upon a concealed rock, +and, by the speed of their course, fixed too fast for any hope of +escaping. + +Here the intrepidity of Drake was shaken, and his dexterity baffled: +here all the horrors of mind, attendant on conscious guilt, concurred to +aggravate the distress of those who were instrumental in abandoning the +harmless slaves. Those who were innocent reproached the guilty with +being the authors of their present distress; and, among the rest, Mr. +Fletcher, the chaplain, exclaimed against the Captain, as one whose +crimes of murder and lust had brought down divine vengeance on all the +company. Drake, who knew well how to dissemble his resentment, judging +this an improper time to encourage disputes, endeavoured, by every means +in his power, to appease the increasing animosity. To preserve, +therefore, the minds of the company at rest, he found it necessary to +keep their hands employed, and, for that purpose, ordered the pumps to +be constantly plied. Convinced by this experiment that the water did not +gain upon them in the hold, he conceived hopes, that, by lightening the +ship, they might possibly be able to heave her off. He knew it would be +in vain to persuade them to part with their treasure, and, therefore, he +first caused the guns to be thrown overboard, and then the spices; and, +afterwards, the water-casks to be bulged, being in hopes, that, if they +could be released, water might again be supplied from the neighbouring +islands, some of which were at no great distance. His next attempt was +to discover about the shallows some place where they might fix an +anchor, in order to bring their ship to, and, by that means, clear her +from the rock: but, upon examination, it was found that the rock on +which they had struck, rose, as many others in those seas do, almost +perpendicular, and that there was no anchorage, nor any bottom to be +fathomed a boat’s length from the ship. But this discovery was by Drake +wisely concealed from the common sailors, lest they should abandon +themselves to despair, for which there was, indeed, much cause, there +being no prospect left, but that they must there sink along with the +ship. + +In this deplorable situation they had remained for four and twenty +hours, when Drake, finding all human efforts vain, addressed himself to +his companions in distress, and exhorted them to lay aside all +animosities, and prepare themselves, by forgiving each other, for +obtaining that mercy through Christ, which they could not hope to +receive on any other terms. “On this occasion,” says my author, “every +thief reconciled himself to his fellow-thief, and Fletcher administered +the sacrament to them all.” At length, when their hopes had forsaken +them, and no new struggles could be made, they were, on a sudden, +relieved by the wind’s shifting, and a fresh breeze springing up, which +taking the ship on the leeward quarter, she reeled off the rock, without +receiving any very dangerous hurt, to the unspeakable joy of every soul +on board. + +This was the greatest and most inextricable distress which they had +suffered, and made such an impression upon their minds, that for some +time afterwards they durst not adventure to spread their sails, but went +slowly forward with the utmost circumspection, till, arriving at the +fruitful island of Baretene, they entered the port to repair what damage +the ship had received upon the rock. They found the people of this +island of an amiable and obliging disposition, courteous in their +manners, and honest in their dealings. They are finely proportioned, +tall of stature, and of comely features. The men, in general, go naked; +but the women cover themselves from the waist downwards, are modest, yet +not insensible of love and pleasure. They found the island abounding +with every necessary, and not as few of the comforts of life. + +Having repaired the ship and refreshed the men, they continued their +course without any material occurrence till the 11th of March, when they +came to anchor before the island of Java, and sending to the King a +present of cloth and silks, received from him in return a present supply +of refreshments; and on the day following Drake went himself on shore, +and entertained the King with music, and obtained leave to store his +ship with provisions. This island was governed by a great number of +petty Kings or Rayas, subordinate to one Chief. Of these princes three +came on board together a few days after their arrival, and having, upon +their return, recounted the wonders they had seen, and the civilities +with which they had been treated, incited others to satisfy their +curiosity in the same manner; and Raya Denan, the chief King, came +himself to view the ship, with the warlike armaments and instruments of +navigation. This intercourse of civilities somewhat retarded the +business for which they came; but, at length, they not only victualled +their ship, but payed the bottom, which was the more necessary +frequently to be repeated, as, at that time, sheathing of ships was not +in practice. + +The Javans were at this time a warlike people, well armed, with swords, +targets, and daggers, forged by themselves, and exquisitely wrought. +They were sociable, full of vivacity, and beyond description happy. They +were likewise hospitable to strangers, and not at all addicted to +thievery, the general characteristic of the islanders in the Pacific +Sea. + +From Java Drake intended to have visited the Malaccas, but his company +became troublesome, being desirous of returning home. On this occasion +he called to mind the speech of Master Fletcher, while they remained +hopeless upon the rock, and, under pretence of his spiriting up the +people to oppose him, he caused him, says my author, “to be made fast by +one of his legs with a chain, and a staple knocked fast into the +hatches, in the forecastle of the ship. He called all the company +together, and then put a lock about one of his legs; and Drake, sitting +cross-legged on a chest, and a pair of pantofles in his hand, he said, +Francis Fletcher, I do here excommunicate thee out of the Church of God, +and from all the benefits and graces thereof, and I renounce thee to the +devil and all his angels; and then he charged him, upon pain of death, +not once to come before the mast; for, if he did, he swore he should be +hanged, and Drake caused a posey to be written, and bound about +Fletcher’s arm, with charge, that if he took it off he should then be +hanged; the posey was, FRANCIS FLETCHER, THE FALSEST KNAVE THAT LIVETH.” +It does not, however, appear how long he was obliged to wear this posey +as it is called. But Drake was obliged to alter his resolution, and +comply with the company’s desires. + +On the 25th of March, 1580, he, therefore, took his departure, and, on +the 15th of June, they doubled the Cape of Good Hope, having then on +board his ship fifty-seven men, and but three casks of water. + +On the 12th of July they passed the Line, reached the coast of Guinea on +the 16th, and on July the 22d arrived at Sierra Leona, after a most +delightful passage, in which they discovered how much the Portuguese had +abused the world in their false representations of the horrors and +dangers that attended the navigation round the Cape. At Sierra Leona +they staid two days to refresh the men, and, having furnished themselves +with wood and water for the remainder of the voyage, they set sail for +England in high expectation of enriching their country with the spoils +of the Spaniards. + +On the 11th of September they made the island of Ferara, and, on the +third of November, they entered the harbour of Plymouth. In this voyage +Drake surrounded the world, which no Commander in Chief had ever done +before; and what, at that time appeared a thing extraordinary, by +steering a western course they had lost a day in their account. + +Their success in this voyage, and the immense wealth[2] they brought +home, raised much discourse throughout the kingdom; some highly +commending, and some as loudly decrying the principles upon which it was +acquired. The former alledged, that this enterprize was not only +honourable to the Commander who conducted, and the crew who assisted in +the performance of it, but to their country; that it would establish our +reputation for maritime skill in foreign nations, and raise a laudable +spirit of emulation at home; and that, as to the money, our merchants +having suffered deeply by the treachery and villainy of the Spaniards in +the new discovered country, there was nothing more just than that the +nation should receive an equivalent by the reprisals which Drake and his +company, at the hazard of their lives, had bravely extorted. + + [2] Lopez Vaz, a Spanish writer, says, that Drake carried from the + coast of Peru, 866,000 pezoes of silver, equal to 866 quintals, equal + to 100 pound weight each quintal, amounting to 1,139,200 ducats. He + also carried away 100,000 pezoes of gold, equal to 10 quintals, each + quintal valued at 1500 Spanish ducats; and all this over and above the + treasure in the ship, which was not entered, consisting of gold, + silver, pearls, precious stones, coined money, and other things of + great value. He also rifled the ships from the Philippines, laden with + spices, silks, velvets, and other rich merchandize, the value not + known.--By the above account, the silver only, at 5s. per oz. amounts + to 259,800l. and the gold to 48,000l. sterl. But we have seen a + manuscript that makes the value of the whole cargo brought home by the + Golden Hind (for that was the name that Drake chose his ship, the + Pelican, should be known by) amount to 800,000l. though that which was + divided among the crew was only 80,000l. Is it not reasonable then to + conclude, that the Queen and Council had a considerable share of the + remainder? + +The other party argued, that Drake, in fact, was no better than a +pirate; that, of all others, it least became a trading nation to +countenance such depredations; that the expedition was not only a breach +of all our treaties with Spain, but likewise of our old leagues with the +House of Burgundy; and that the consequences would infallibly involve +the Queen in a war, by which the nation would suffer infinitely more +than the riches acquired by a single ship could counterbalance. + +These were the sentiments, and these the speculations with which the +different parties amused themselves for some time after the arrival of +Drake in his native country. At length, the approbation of the Queen +determined the dispute; for all acquiesced in the wisdom of their +Sovereign. + +On the 4th of April, 1581, her Majesty went to Deptford, and dined on +board the ship in which so many Kings had been entertained before; and, +after dinner, she conferred the honour of knighthood on her Commander; +an honour not to be obtained in those days on trivial occasions, but as +a reward for signal services. This mark of distinction was a full +declaration of her Majesty’s approbation, silenced Drake’s enemies, and +gave joy to his friends. She likewise gave directions for the +preservation of the ship, that it might remain a monument of his own and +his country’s glory. + +What contributed the more to render the fame of Drake illustrious, was +the frequent attempts that had been made by navigators, the most +renowned in their time, to atchieve the fame; but without success. In +1527 the Spaniards sent Gracca de Loaisa, a Knight of Malta, with a +squadron of seven ships to follow the rout of Magellan, who, though his +ship returned to Spain, yet he himself lost his life, before he arrived +at the Malaccas, the promised islands. Loaisa passed the straits, +indeed, lost some of his ships in the South Seas, others put into the +ports of New Spain, and only his own vessel and one more reached the +East Indies, where himself and all his people perished. + +In 1526, the Genoese sent two ships to pass the straits, of which one +was cast away, and the other returned home without effecting any thing. + +Sebastian Cabot, in the service of the crown of Portugal, made the like +trial; but, not being able to find the straits, returned into the river +of Plate. + +Americus Vespusius, a Florentine, from whom the new world received its +name, undertook to perform, in the service of the crown of Portugal, +what Cabot had promised without effect; but that vain man was still more +unfortunate; for he could neither find the straits, nor the river of +Plate. + +Some years after this, the Spaniards equipped a stout squadron, under +the command of Simon de Alcasara; but, before they reached the height of +the straits, the crews mutinied, and obliged their Commander to return. + +Such repeated miscarriages discouraged even the ablest and boldest +seamen; so that from this time both Spaniards and others dropped all +thoughts of emulating Magellan, till Drake conceiving his design, as has +already been said, concealed it in his breast till ripe for execution. + +Being now advanced to eminence, in 1585 he was employed in the Queen’s +service, and sent on an expedition to the West Indies as Commander in +Chief; and having under him Captain Martin Forbisher, Captain Knollys, +and other experienced Officers of the royal navy, he took St. Jago, St. +Domingo, Carthagena, and St. Augustin. He returned elated with his +success; but, as my author says, not much enriched by the plunder. + +In 1587, he was again employed in an expedition to Lisbon, in which +Captain Forbisher also bore a part. Here they gained intelligence that a +considerable fleet was assembled in the bay of Cadiz, with a view to the +forming an armament for the invasion of England; he immediately repaired +to their place of rendezvous, and fell upon them at unawares; and, as it +is said, burnt 10,000 tons of shipping, with all the stores which they +were amassing for the intended invasion. + +In their return they fell in with a carrack from the East Indies, richly +laden, of which they likewise got intelligence in the port of Lisbon. +This was the St. Philip, of which Linschoten gives the following +account, when this Dutchman was at Goa, the chief settlement of the +Portuguese in the East Indies: “There came in, he says, from the island +of Japan, certain Jesuits, and with them three Princes, being the +children of so many Kings of that country, wholly apparelled like +Jesuits, not one of them above the age of 15 years, being minded by the +persuasion of the Jesuits to visit Portingall, and from thence to go to +Rome to see the Pope, thereby to procure great profit, privileges, and +liberties for the missionaries in that island. + +“In 1584, they set sail for Portingallo, and from thence travelled into +Spain, where, by the King and all the Spanish nobility, they were with +honour received, and presented with many gifts, which the Jesuits kept +for themselves. + +“Out of Spain, they rode to see the Pope; that done, they travelled +throughout Italy, where they were much honoured, and presented with many +rich presents, by means of the great report the Jesuits made of them. + +“To conclude, they returned to Madrid, where with great honour they took +their leave of the King, who furnished them with letters of +recommendation to the Viceroy, and all the Portingall Governors of +India; so they went to Lisbon, and there took shipping in 1586, and came +to Goa in the ship called St. Philip, which ship, in her return to +Portingall, was taken by Captain Drake, being the first that was taken +coming from the East Indies; which the Portuguese took for an evil sign, +because the ship bore the King’s own name;” both Spain and Portugal +being at that time governed by the same Sovereign. + +“When the Princes and Jesuits of Japan arrived at Goa on their return +from Europe, they were received, adds Linschoten, with great rejoicings; +for it was verily thought they had all been dead. On their landing they +were all three apparelled in cloth of gold and silver after the Italian +manner, being the same the Italian noblemen and gentlemen had given +them. They came to Goa very lively and in high spirits; and the Jesuits +were not a little proud, that through their means the voyage had been +successfully performed. In Goa they staid till the monsoon or time of +the wind’s setting in to sail for China, and thence to Japan, where, +with great triumph and wondering of all the people, they were received +and welcomed home, to the great furtherance of the Jesuits.” + +The St. Philip, in her voyage to Goa, had been driven by stress of +weather into Masambique, where she met with the St. Laurence, homeward +bound, that had likewise been driven into the same port disabled, having +lost her masts, and received other considerable damage, by which she was +rendered unserviceable. The St. Philip, therefore, as soon as she had +landed her passengers at Goa, returned to Masambique, and took in the +lading of the St. Laurence, which enabled her to make her voyage to +Europe about the usual time; a circumstance fortunate for Drake, as it +increased both his fame and his fortune. + +In 1588, Drake was appointed Vice-Admiral, under Charles Lord Effingham +Howard, High-Admiral of England, to oppose the formidable armada that +had for three years before been secretly preparing in Spain for the +invasion of England. In Drake’s letter to Lord Treasurer Burleigh, +acquainting him with the approach of the Spaniards, he concludes with +this elegant compliment to his superior: “That, though the strength of +the enemy out-went report, yet the chearfulness and courage which the +Lord Admiral expressed gave all who had the honour to serve under him +assurance of victory;” a compliment which was the more admired in Drake, +as in a former letter to the same Minister, in which he tells him of his +gallant atchievement in the port of Cadiz, “Not resting, said he, at +Lisbon, we sailed so close to the Spanish King, _that we singed his +beard_;” a course metaphor, it must be owned, but strongly +characteristic. + +Drake’s good fortune still accompanied him; for in the engagement which +afterwards happened on the arrival of the armada, though he committed +the greatest error that ever Commander was guilty of, by pursuing some +hulks belonging to the Hans Towns for plunder, when he was entrusted to +carry lights in the night for the direction of the English fleet, he +misled the Admiral; yet he was the only Commander who profited most by +the destruction of the enemy. Lord Howard, supposing the lights of the +Spanish Admiral to be the lights which Drake was ordered to carry, was +entangled in the very centre of the Spanish fleet, before he found his +mistake; but, fortunately, night favouring his escape, he disengaged +himself before he was discovered. This blunder was afterwards effaced by +the gallant behaviour of Drake, than whom no man was ever bolder, or +more determined. We do not, however, find his name among the Commanders +whom the Lord High Admiral thought proper to thank for their services on +that occasion. On the 2d of July, says Strype, Sir Francis, observing a +large Spanish galleon, commanded by Don Pedro de Valdez, who was the +reputed projector of the invasion, floating at a distance from both +fleets, sent his pinnace to summon the Captain to surrender, who at +first vauntingly set him at defiance; but being told it was Drake that +required him to yield, he immediately struck his colours, and, with 46 +of his crew, came on board the conqueror. In this ship he found 50,000 +ducats, with other effects to a much greater amount. + +The next year he was appointed Admiral of a squadron sent to place Don +Antonio on the throne of Portugal, to which that Prince pretended to +have a right. “But, says Rapin, (whose account of this expedition we +shall follow) as the Queen was extremely frugal, and an undertaking +against Spain could not but be very expensive, she so ordered it, that +Drake and Norris took upon them to be at the charge, in hopes of making +themselves amends by the booty they should meet with. So she only found +them six ships of war, with a present of 60,000 l. with leave to raise +soldiers and sailors for the expedition. Drake had already tried the +Spaniards in America and in the Channel, and was convinced they were +more formidable in common opinion than in reality; wherefore, joining +with Sir John Norris, and some other private persons, they equipped a +fleet, and embarked 11,000 soldiers and 1500 marines. The Hollanders +having also added some ships, the fleet consisted, according to Stow, of +146 sail, transports and victuallers included. Drake commanded at sea, +and Norris was General of the land forces. They took with them Don +Antonio, who hoped, by the assistance of the English, to be put in +possession of his kingdom, where he pretended to have many friends. + +“They sailed from Plymouth on the 18th of April, and soon after arrived +at the Groyne, where landing their troops, they assaulted the lower +town, and carried it by storm. Then they besieged the upper town. But +Norris, having advice that the Conde di Andrada was approaching with a +body of troops to relieve the place, suddenly raised the siege to march +against him; and, overtaking him, slew 3000 of his men. This done, he +burnt several villages; and, without returning to the siege, re-embarked +his troops, their principal design being against Portugal. + +“Whilst they were sailing towards the coasts of that kingdom, they were +joined by the Earl of Essex, with some ships he had armed at his own +charge, unknown to the Queen. Some days after, they arrived at Panicha, +a little town in Portugal, and, taking it, restored it to Don Antonio; +from thence Norris marched by land to Lisbon, Drake promising to follow +with the fleet up the Tagus. The army marched 40 miles without +opposition; and encamping before Lisbon, took the suburbs of St. +Catharine: but, as Drake performed not his promise, and the army wanted +cannon and ammunition, it was resolved in a council of war to retire. +This resolution was taken, because there was no appearance that the +Portuguese were inclined to revolt, as Don Antonio had expected; and +also, because there was no news of the succours he had boasted of from +the King of Morocco. The army marching towards the mouth of the Tagus, +met Drake, who had taken the town of Cascaes, and excused himself upon +the impossibility of performing his promise. Some days after, the castle +of Cascaes surrendering, it was blown up; and, to make themselves amends +for the charges of the expedition, the English seized sixty vessels +laden with corn, and all manner of naval stores to equip a new fleet +against England, belonging to the Hans Towns. Then they went and took +Vigo, which was abandoned by the inhabitants; and, firing the town, +returned to England. This expedition did some damage to the King of +Spain, but was of no benefit to Elizabeth; and the booty was not +sufficient to pay for equipping the fleet, though Camden says, they +brought home 150 pieces of heavy cannon, and a great booty. Above six +thousand men perished in this expedition by sickness.” + +The writers of Drake’s life say, that Norris grievously reproached Drake +with breach of his promise, and charged the miscarriage of the +expedition to his timidity. Indeed, Drake’s good genius seems now to +have forsaken him; and happy, say the same writers, if, having received +this first check at play, he had withdrawn his stake. + +As the war with Spain continued, Hawkins and Drake, who, as it should +seem, wanted to continue their old game, where the profits were more, +and the danger less, united their interest to persuade the Queen and +Council to undertake an effectual expedition to the West Indies, by +which the nation might be enriched, and the enemy deprived of those +resources by which they were enabled to carry on the war. + +For this purpose they procured, according to Rapin, twenty-six of the +Queen’s ships, the equipment of which, like the former, seems to have +been supplied by private adventure; a practice at that time very common, +where plunder was to be the reward. The preparations for this +expedition, however, as it far exceeded all former enterprizes to the +American Indies, could not be made so privately, or conducted so +secretly, but that the Spaniards found means to discover both its +strength and destination, and prepared themselves accordingly. + +As the places that were to be attacked lay at a great distance, it was +necessary to gain time, in order to fortify them. It was, therefore, +found necessary to devise some expedient to prevent the sailing of that +formidable armament, till every thing was in readiness to oppose it. +Accordingly, it was given out, that a second invasion was intended +against England; and when the Spanish fleet was ready to sail for +America, that had been equipping under pretence of an invasion, a sham +attack was made upon Cornwall, in order to spread an alarm, and give it +countenance. + +This had the desired effect. It was thought improper to part with so +many stout ships while the nation was threatened; and the expedition was +therefore retarded, till the panic had subsided. + +It was therefore the 28th of August, in 1695, before the Commanders +obtained permission to sail; and in the mean time the Queen having +received advice that the plate fleet was safe arrived in Europe, and +that only one ship, which had sprung her mast, remained behind, her +Majesty acquainted them with the intelligence, and advised them to +attack Porto Rico, before they pursued their grand enterprize, by which +they might make themselves masters of the galleon without losing much +time in the conquest. + +Sir Francis Drake, who was not formed to act in conjunct expeditions, +had not been long at sea before he differed in opinion from his fellow +Commander, and pursued a project totally different from the first object +of the voyage, in which, however, he was seconded by Sir Thomas +Baskerville, Commander of the land forces. This scheme was to attack the +Canaries in the way to America; in which, however, they failed; and +spending necessarily much time in the island of Dominica in landing and +refreshing the men, who, being unused to long voyages in hot climates, +were many of them unfit to proceed, the Spaniards had so effectually +prepared themselves, that, when the Generals came to action, they found +an opposition very different from what they expected; and were soon +sensible, that what they had formerly effected by surprize with a +handful of sailors, was not now to be accomplished with a whole army of +disciplined troops. + +In their course to Porto Rico, one of the sternmost ships of the English +fleet fell into the hands of five Spanish frigates that had been sent +from Spain to convoy home the galleon from that port. From this ship +they gained the intelligence of the intended attack, the consequences of +which being foreseen by Sir John Hawkins, it threw him into a sudden +disorder, of which in a few days he died--some say, of a broken heart. + +They were now, Nov. 12, 1595, before Porto Rico, and the same evening +that Sir John Hawkins died, as the principal officers were at supper, a +cannon-shot from the fort pierced the cabin, killed Sir Nicholas +Clifford, wounded Captain Stratford, mortally wounded Sir Brute Browne, +and struck the stool from under Sir Francis Drake, as he was drinking +success to the attack. + +The next day, pursuant to a resolution of a council of war, a general +attack was made upon the shipping in the harbour, but without effect. +The Spaniards suffered much, but the English more; who, finding it +impossible to make an impression upon the fortifications of the town, +weighed anchor, and steered to Rio de la Hacha, set fire to the town and +burned it to the ground: they likewise performed some other exploits of +the like kind; but having landed the troops destined to cross the +isthmus to attack Panama, after a fatiguing march in which they were +great sufferers, they returned, without being able to reach the place. +This disappointment materially affected Drake, who having, as he +thought, provided a sufficient force to carry into execution the +enterprize which he had well-nigh effected with a few sailors and +Symerons some years before, could not bear the thought of surviving his +disgrace. “Now, says Fuller, began the discontent of Sir Francis Drake +to feed upon him. He conceived, that expectation, a merciless usurer, +computing each day since his departure, exacted an interest and return +of honour and profit proportionable to his great preparations, and +transcending his former atchievements. He saw that all the good which he +had done in his voyage, consisted in the evil he had done the Spaniards +afar off, whereof he could present but small visible fruits in England. +These apprehensions accompanying, if not causing, the disease of the +flux, wrought his sudden death; and sickness did not so much untie his +cloaths, as sorrow did rend at once the robe of his mortality asunder. +He lived by the sea, died on it, and was buried in it.” + +This account of the manner of Sir Francis Drake’s death seems to be +authentic, though some have not scrupled to insinuate, that sickness had +no part in that catastrophe. Be that as it may, Fuller’s reflections +upon it deserve to be remembered. “Thus, says he, we see how great +spirits, having mounted to the highest pitch of performance, afterwards +strain and break their credit in striving to go beyond it; Or, it may +be, God oftentimes leaves the brightest men in an eclipse, to shew that +they do but borrow their lustre from his reflection.” + +Thus we have endeavoured to trace the actions of this celebrated +navigator from beginning to end. If we have withdrawn the veil, which +has hitherto covered his infirmities, it has been in the pursuit of +truth; not with a design to detract from his real merit, but to shew his +character in the true light. In the current of success, even crimes of +the deepest die are sometimes patronised even by the public. The actions +which gave rise to Drake’s popularity, are such as a courageous leader, +with an hundred armed followers, might in these peaceable times easily +perform, by entering the cities or towns on the coast of Britain, in the +dead of night, cutting the throats of the watch, and all who happen to +be awake in the streets, breaking open and plundering houses, and +churches, seizing every thing valuable that should fall into their +hands, and before the people could recover from their consternation, +making their escape with their booty. Were such a company masters of an +armed vessel, if there were no ship of force to oppose them, what should +hinder their sailing from place to place, and, _provided they could +out-run report_, performing the like exploits in every town they came +to? Would there be anything truly great in this? Or would the man who +should undertake and execute an enterprize of such a horrid nature, be +justly entitled to the name of Hero? If not, what shall we say of +Drake’s nocturnal enterprize on Nombre de Dios; of his way-laying the +treasure in the road from Panama; of his ranging the unarmed coasts of +Chili and Peru; and of his plundering villages, towns, and ships +belonging to a peaceable unsuspecting people, with whom his nation was +at peace, and from whom opposition was not to be dreaded? What, indeed, +did the people at that time say? Those who were the sufferers cried out +loudly against the plunderer; and Bernardine de Mendoza, the Spanish +Ambassador at the court of Queen Elizabeth, insisted that he should be +punished for his robberies, and that all the money and effects he had +seized should be restored; but, if the Queen was a private adventurer, +as, from Drake’s declaration to his followers, and from other instances +of the womanish littlenesses of that Princess, there is reason to +suspect, What hope was there of justice or restitution from +remonstrance? Indeed, it served that avaricious Queen for a pretence to +sequester the treasure which Drake brought home, and to convert, it is +probable, the greatest part of it to her own use; for, as we have +already shewn from good authority in a note, though the whole booty was +valued at 800,000l. yet only 80,000l. was divided among the plunderers; +and Rapin tells us, that some part of the treasure was afterwards repaid +by the Queen to Spain. If she had not retained enough in her hands, no +one will suppose, that the Sovereign, who could cause the goods of her +favourite Leicester to be set to public sale after his death, for the +payment of money she had lent him, would have repaid to Spain from her +own coffers the plunder that had been unjustly taken by one of her +meaner subjects. + +To dignify actions, therefore, of the most infamous piracy with the name +of great, is to exalt vice, and to substitute successful villainy in the +place of substantial virtue. If we view Drake in the light of a +courageous plunderer, he may vie with the De la Poles, the Blackbeards, +or any of those daring disturbers of the times in which they lived, who +struck a panic wherever they roved to commit their ravages: but, +consider him as a Commander, employed in the defence of his country, and +we shall see nothing to admire, except his courage. In the first +enterprize in which he was engaged, he was indeed successful. The Queen, +suspecting an intention in Philip of Spain to revenge the injuries his +subjects had received, pitched upon Drake, who had given the offence, as +the fittest man to prevent the consequences. He, therefore, as he had +done before, attacked the enemy by surprize, and set fire to a +defenceless number of transports assembled in the harbour of Cadiz, +without a ship of war to protect them, or a gun fired by way of +opposition. The accident which afterwards threw the rich India ship in +his way, on his return home, did him no honour as a Commander, though it +gave him credit as a fortunate adventurer: nor did his behaviour in the +Channel, when, instead of maintaining his post, he pursued the Hans +merchant ships, add at all to his reputation as a Vice-Admiral. His +American enterprize with Lord Carlisle was attended with no laurels; and +the only two enterprizes in which he was employed in a joint command, he +ruined by his perfidy and self-conceit. + +It may, indeed, be urged in Drake’s defence, that it was the policy of +the Queen his Sovereign, to countenance her subjects in distressing +Spain, and in mortifying the haughty monarch who sat upon the throne; +and that almost all the heroes of her active reign, acquired their glory +by practices founded on the same prevailing principle. + +This argument in his favour cannot be denied its due wright. The +expeditions of Sir John Hawkins; of Sir Walter Raleigh; of Lord +Carlisle; of Sir John Norris; of the Earl of Essex; of Cavendish; and, +indeed, of most others undertaken against Spain; were professedly with a +view to plunder; and the charges of fitting them out were chiefly borne +by those who were to be sharers in the booty: yet, surely, there is a +material difference between the glory that is purchased by valour in the +field, and fame that is acquired by compacts to surprize the innocent, +and invade the property of the peaceable. + +Having now seen Drake in two distinct points of view, as a leader of a +company of plunderers, and as a Commander in the royal navy, let us do +justice to his character by viewing him as a mariner, and in that light +he will hardly have his equal. To project a voyage round the globe, and +to conduct it without the assistance of a single mariner on board who +had ever crossed the Line, Nuno da Silva, the Portuguese pilot, +excepted, was, perhaps, one of the boldest exploits that ever man +performed. His navigating his ships along the coast of Brazil; his +carrying them through the straits of Magellan in a shorter time than any +mariner has ever done since; his keeping the sea in a storm for thirty +days together; his skill in navigating the coasts of Chili, Peru, and +New Spain, where no English ship had ever sailed; his accuracy in +discovering the track of the Spanish ship from the East Indies, and his +consummate sagacity in pursuing a new course home to avoid pursuers; +cannot be enough admired or applauded. His knowledge of the globe is +manifest from the first attempt he made to return home by a northern +passage; a passage which he knew would not only secure him from the +danger of pursuers, but, were it practicable, would open a free +intercourse between his nation and the rich inhabitants of that opulent +country in which he was then situated. Finding himself, however, +disappointed in this design, how great was his sagacity in the discovery +of an unknown country, wherein to repair his ship, refresh his +followers, take in wood and water, and to supply himself with every +necessary for the vast voyage by sea he was to encounter; and yet, such +was his knowledge in making provision against every contingency that +might happen, that he lost but one man by sickness during the long run +from the coast of New Spain to the Ladrones, in which Commodore Anson +lost near half his crew. Nor is his skill less to be admired in his +return from the Ladrones, the most dangerous navigation of any part of +the known world; for, except the accident upon the rock, as has already +been related, he sailed from the Ladrones to Java unembarrassed; from +Java to Sierra Leona, on the coast of Africa, without touching at any +port, or encountering any difficulty, save from a scarcity of water; a +thing hardly to be credited, and which was never performed by any +mariner before his time, or since. + + + + + THE + VOYAGES + OF + CAPT. THOMAS CAVENDISH, + THE SECOND ENGLISH NAVIGATOR WHO SAILED ROUND THE WORLD. + + +This Gentleman was descended from an antient family in Suffolk, whose +ancestors came into England with William the Conqueror. His father, +William Cavendish, of Trimley St. Martin, near Ipswich, dying young, +left his son Thomas a minor, and heir to the manors of Trimley, +Stratton, and Grimston, with other lands of inheritance to a very +considerable amount: but this youth, whose atchievements we are about to +relate, being of a high-spirited disposition, and, as soon as he came of +age, subject to no controul, fell early into the fashionable gallantries +and vices of the times, and dissipated the best part of his ample +fortune before he entertained any thoughts of applying to business, or, +perhaps, was sensible how deeply his affairs were embarrassed. + +But he no sooner began to reflect, and to perceive, that, without +application to some kind of employment, he must be undone, than he made +choice of a sea-faring life, not only as most suitable to his unsettled +turn of mind, but also as the most likely means of restoring his +fortune, and establishing his credit. + +The kingdom was now involved in war with the Spaniards, the then most +powerful, and consequently the haughtiest and most formidable people in +Europe, who, drawing immense riches from their new acquisitions in +America, not only raised the envy but the enmity of other powers, by +their pride and their perfidy. + +Gentlemen of fortune, and gentlemen of no fortune, were about this time +equally encouraged to distress the enemy. The war laid open an immense +field for enterprize; and every one was at liberty to share the harvest, +who was willing to bestow the pains of gathering the produce and +bringing it home. + +Among the most active and the most indefatigable was Sir Walter Raleigh, +who not only was the most experienced, but the most successful leader of +his time. With him our adventurer first determined to embark; and, as +Sir Walter had just projected a new voyage to America at his own charge, +he was ready enough to admit associates, who were able and willing to +bear a part of the expence. Unfortunately for our new adventurer, all +the advantage he derived from this project was only in the knowledge he +obtained of sea affairs, and of the temper and genius of the people with +whom he had to deal; for the profits that accrued from the voyage by no +means answered the sums employed in pursuing it. He observed, that, by +means of their great riches, the Spaniards could command intelligence of +all that was in agitation against them on this side the globe; but that, +if they were to be taken off their guard, the southern hemisphere must +be the place of action. He had already an example, in Sir Francis Drake, +of the immense wealth that was to be acquired on the coast of Peru, if +secrecy could be preserved, and he determined to be upon his guard, and +to keep his design solely within his own breast. + +With this view he sold a part of the remains of his estate, and set +about building two ships proper for his enterprize at Harwich, at that +time an obscure port, namely, one called the _Desire_, of 120 tons; and +another of 60, called the _Content_; to these he added the _Hugh +Gallant_, a bark of 40 tons. In the equipment of this little squadron, +he purchased many articles of commerce to cover his design, and then +privately laid in guns, ammunition and stores, with a moderate quantity +of provisions, intending to purchase the rest at some other convenient +port, when he was just ready to depart. + +He likewise enlisted but half his complement of men; and when he arrived +at Plymouth he supplied the rest. In the whole conduct of what has been +already related, he was his own sole director, and none of those who +sailed with him knew whither he was bound, till after their embarkation +at Plymouth. It is even uncertain whether Lord Hounsdon, who procured +his commission, knew the place of his destination. + +An enterprize so well concerted cannot fail to excite curiosity; and as +it was excellently written by Mr. Pretty, brother to Sir William, who +accompanied Cavendish throughout the voyage, it will best appear in its +ancient dress. + +“We departed, says Mr. Pretty, out of Plymouth on Thursday the 21st of +July, 1586, with three sails (to wit, the Desire a ship of 120 tons, the +Content of 60 tons, and the Hugh Gallant a bark of 40 tons); in which +small fleet were 123 persons of all sorts, with all kind of furniture, +and victuals sufficient for the space of two years. On Tuesday the 26th +of the same month, we were forty-five leagues from Cape Finis Terræ, +where we met with five sails of Biscayers, coming from the Grand Bay in +Newfoundland, as we supposed, which our Admiral shot at, and fought with +them three hours; but we took none of them, by reason the night grew on. + +The 1st of August we came in sight of Fort Ventura, one of the isles of +the Canaries, about ten o’clock in the morning. + +On Sunday, being the 7th of August, we were gotten as high as Rio del +Oro, on the coast of Barbary. + +On Monday the 19th, we fell in with Cape Blanco, but the wind blew so +much at the North, that we could not get up where the Canters do use to +ride and fish: therefore we lay off six hours west-south-west, because +of the sand which lieth off the Cape south-west and by south. + +The 15th day of the same month we were in the height of Cape Verd, by +estimation fifty leagues off the same. The 18th, Sierra Leona did bear +east of us, being forty leagues from us; and the same day the wind +shifted to the north-west; so that, by the 20th day of the said month, +we were in six degrees thirty minutes to the northward of the +Equinoctial Line. + +The 23d, we set sail for Sierra Leona, and on the 25th day we fell in +with the point on the south-side of Sierra Leona, which Mr. Brewer knew +very well, and went in before with the Content, which was Vice-admiral: +and we had no less than five fathoms water when we had least, and had, +for fourteen leagues in south-west, all the way running into the harbour +of Sierra Leona, sixteen, fourteen, twelve, ten, and eight fathoms of +water. + +The 26th of the said month, we put into the harbour; and, in going in, +we had by the southmost point at least five fathoms water by the rock, +which lieth at the said point: and after we came within two or three +cables length of the said rock, we never had less than ten fathoms water +until we came up to the road, which is about a league from the point, +bordering always on the south-side until you come up to the +watering-place, in which bay is the best road: but you must ride far +into the bay, because there runs prodigious great tides in the offing, +and it commonly floweth into the road at a south-east and by east moon. + +It is from England to this place 930 leagues; which we ran from the 21st +of July to the 26th of this month of August. On Saturday, being the 27th +day, there came two negroes from the shore aboard our Admiral, and made +signs unto our General that there was a Portuguese ship within the +harbour; so the Hugh Gallant, being the Rear-admiral, went up three or +four leagues, but, for want of a pilot, they went no farther; for the +harbour runneth up three or four leagues more, and is of a prodigious +breadth, and very dangerous, as we were afterwards informed by a +Portuguese. + +On Sunday the 28th, the General sent some of his company on shore, and +there, as they played and danced all the forenoon among the negroes, to +the end that they might hear some good news of the Portuguese ship, and +as they were returning to go on board, they spied a Portuguese, which +lay hid among the bushes, whom we took and brought away with us the same +night: and he told us it was very dangerous going up with our boats in +search of the ship that was at the town. Whereupon we went not to seek +her, because we knew he told us the truth for we bound him and made him +fast, and so examined him. He told us also, that his ship was there cast +away, and that there were two more of his company among the negroes. The +Portuguese’s name was Emmanuel, and was by his occupation a chalker, +belonging to the port of Portugal. + +On Monday morning, being the 29th day, our General landed with 70 men, +or thereabouts, and went up to their town, where we burnt two or three +houses, and took what spoil we could, which was but little; but all the +people fled: and, in our retiring on board, in a very little plain, at +their town’s end, they shot their arrows at us out of the woods, and +hurt three or four of our men. Their arrows were poisoned; but yet none +of our men miscarried at that time. Their town is very artificially +built with mud walls; their houses built round, with their yards paled +in, and kept very clean, as are their streets. These negroes used great +obedience to their King, as one of our men said, which was an hostage +for the negroes which came first. There were in their town, by +estimation, about one hundred houses. + +The first of September, there went many of our men on shore at the +watering-place, and did wash shirts very quietly all the day. And the +second day they went again, and the negroes were in ambush round about +the place; and the carpenter of the Admiral going into the wood, to do +some special business, espied them by good fortune. But the negroes +rushed out upon our men so suddenly, that, in retiring to our boats, +many of them were hurt; among whom Wm. Pickman, a soldier, was shot in +the thigh; who, plucking the arrow out, broke it, and left the head +behind; and he told the chirurgeons that he plucked out all the arrow, +because he would not have them lance his thigh: whereupon the poison +wrought so that night, that he was prodigiously swolen, and the next +morning he died; the piece of the arrow with the poison being afterwards +plucked out of his thigh. + +The 3d day of the said month, divers of our fleet went up four miles +within the harbour with our boat, and caught great store of fish, and +went on shore, and took lemons from the trees; and, coming on board +again, saw two buffaloes. + +The 6th day we departed from Sierra Leona, and went out of the harbour, +and staid one tide three leagues from the point of the mouth of the +harbour, in six fathoms, and it flowed south-south-west. + +On Wednesday, being the 7th of the same month, we departed for one of +the isles of Cape Verd, which is ten leagues distant from the point of +Sierra Leona and about five o’clock the same night we anchored about two +miles off the island, in six fathoms water, and landed the same night, +and found plantains only upon the island. + +The 8th day, one of our boats went out, and sounded about the island, +and they passed through a Sound at the west end of the island, where +they found five fathoms water round about the island, until they came to +the very gut of the Sound, and then for a cast or two they had but two +fathoms water, and presently after six fathoms, and so deeper and +deeper. And, at the east end of the island, there was a town where +negroes resorted at some times, as we perceived by their provision. + +There is no fresh water on all the south-side that we could perceive; +but, on the north-side, three or four very good places of fresh water: +and all the whole island is a wood, save certain little places where the +houses stand, which are environed round about with plantain trees, +whereof the fruit is excellent meat. This place is subject very much to +thunder, rain, and lightning, in this month: I think the reason is, +because the sun is near the Line Equinoctial. On Saturday the 10th, we +departed from the said island about three o’clock in the afternoon, the +wind being at the south-west. + +The last of October, running west-south-west, about twenty-four leagues +from Cape Frio in Brazil, we fell in with a great mountain, which had an +high round knob on the top of it, standing like a tower. + +The first of November, we went in between the island of St. Sebastian +and the main land, carried several things on shore, set up a forge, and +had our casks on shore; our cooper made hoops: and so we remained there +until the 23d day of the same month in which time we fitted our things, +built our pinnace, and filled our fresh water. And while our pinnace was +building, there came a canoe from the river of Janeiro, meaning to go to +St. Vincent, wherein were six naked slaves of the country, which did row +the canoe, and one Portuguese; and the Portuguese knew Christopher Hare, +Master of the Admiral; for that Mr. Hare had been at St. Vincent, in the +Minion of London, in the year 1581: and, thinking to have John Whithal, +the Englishman, which dwelleth at St. Vincent, come unto us, which is +twenty leagues from this harbour, with some others, thereby to have had +some fresh victuals, we suffered the Portuguese to go with a letter unto +him, who promised to return or send some answer within ten days, for +that we told him we were merchants, and would traffic with them; but we +never received any answer from him and seeing that he came not according +to appointment, our business being dispatched, we weighed anchor, and +set sail from St. Sebastian on the 23d of November. + +The 16th day of December we fell in with the coast of America, in 47 +deg. and 20 min. the land bearing west from us about six leagues off; +from which place we ran along the shore until we came into 48 deg. It is +a steep beach all along. + +The 17th of December, in the afternoon, we entered into an harbour, +where our Admiral went in first; wherefore our General named the said +harbour Port Desire; in which harbour is an island or two, where there +is a wonderful great store of seals, and another island of birds, called +grey gulls. These seals are of a wonderful bigness, huge and monstrous +of shape; and, for the fore-part of their bodies, cannot be compared to +any thing better than to a lion: their head, neck, and fore-part of +their bodies, are full of rough hair; their feet are in the manner of a +fin, and in form like unto a man’s hand; they breed and cast every +month, giving their young milk, yet continually get they their living in +the sea, and live altogether upon fish: their young are extraordinary +good meat; and being boiled or roasted, are hardly to be known from lamb +or mutton. The old ones are of such bigness and force, that it is as +much as four men are able to do to kill one of them with great staves; +and he must be beaten down with striking on the head of him; for his +body is of that bigness, that four men could never kill him, but only on +the head; for being shot through the body with an harquebuss, or a +musket, yet he will go his way into the sea, and never care for it at +the present. Also the fowls that were there were very good meat, and +great plenty of them: they have burrows in the ground like conies, for +they cannot fly; they have nothing but down upon their pinions; they +also fish and feed in the sea for their living, and breed on shore. + +This harbour is a very good place to trim ships in, and to bring them on +ground and grave them in, for there ebbeth and floweth much water; +therefore we graved and trimmed all our ships there. + +The 24th of December, being Christmas-eve, a man and a boy of the +Rear-admiral went some forty scores from our ships, unto a very fair +green valley at the foot of a mountain, where was a little pit or well +which our men had digged and made some two or three days before, to get +fresh water; for there was none in all the harbour; and this was but +brackish; therefore this man and boy went thither to wash their linen: +and being in washing at the said well, there were great numbers of +Indians which were come down, and found the said man and boy in washing. +These Indians being divided on each side of the rocks, shot at them with +their arrows, and hurt them both; but they fled presently, being about +fifty or threescore, though our General followed them but with sixteen +or twenty men. The man was shot quite through the knee, the boy into the +shoulder; either of them having very sore wounds. Their arrows are made +of little canes, and their heads are of a flint stone, set into the cane +very artificially. They are as wild as ever was a buck, or any other +wild beast; for we followed them, and they ran from us as we had been +the wildest things in the world. We took the measure of one of their +feet, and it was eighteen inches long. Their custom is, when any of them +die, to bring him or them to the cliffs by the sea-side, and upon the +top of them they bury them; and in their graves are buried with them +their bows and arrows, and all their jewels which they had in their +life-time, which are fine shells that they find by the sea-side, which +they cut and square after an artificial manner; and all are laid under +their heads. The grave is made with large stones of great length and +bigness, being set all along full of the dead man’s darts, which he used +when he was living. And they colour both their darts and their graves of +a red colour, which they use in colouring themselves. + +The 28th of December, we departed out of the port of Desire, and went to +an island which lieth three leagues to the southward of it; where we +trimmed our saved penguins with salt, for victuals, all that and the +next day, and departed along the coast south-west and by-south. + +The 31st we fell in with a rock, which lieth about five leagues from the +land, much like unto Edistone, which lieth off the sound of Plymouth; +and we sounded, and had eight fathoms rocky ground, within a mile +thereof; the rock bearing west-south-west. We went coasting along +south-south-west, and found great store of seals. This rock standeth in +48 deg. 30 min. to the southward of the Line. + +The 2d day of January, we fell in with a very fair white cape, which +standeth in 51 degrees, and had seven fathoms water a league off the +land. + +The 3d, we fell in with another great white cape, which standeth in 52 +deg. 45 min. from which cape there runneth a low beach about a league to +the southward; and this beach reacheth to the opening of the dangerous +strait of Magellan, which is in divers places five or six leagues wide, +and in two several places more narrow. Under this cape we anchored, and +lost an anchor; for it was a great storm, and lasted three days very +dangerous. + +The 6th day we put in for the straits. + +The 7th day, between the mouth of the straits and the narrowest place +thereof, we took a Spaniard, whose name was Hernando, who was there with +23 Spaniards more, which were all that remained of four hundred left +there three years before, all the rest being dead with famine. And the +same day we passed through the narrowest of the straits, where the +aforesaid Spaniard shewed us the hull of a small bark, which we judged +to be a bark called the John Thomas, one of Drake’s fleet. It is from +the mouth of the straits unto the narrowest of the straits fourteen +leagues, and the course lieth west and by-north. The mouth of the +straits lieth in 52 degrees. + +From the narrowest of the straits unto Penguin island is ten leagues, +and lieth west-south-west, somewhat to the southward, where we anchored +the 8th day, and killed and salted plenty of penguins for victuals. + +The 9th day we departed from Penguin island, and ran south-south-west to +King Philip’s city, which the Spaniards had built; which town or city +had four forts, and every fort had in it one cast piece, which pieces +were buried in the ground; the carriages were standing in their places +unburied: we digged for them and had them all. They had contrived their +city very well, and seated it in the best place of the straits for wood +and water: they had built up their churches by themselves: they had laws +very severe among them, for they had erected a gibbet, whereon they had +done execution on some of their company. It seemed unto us, that their +whole living for a great space was altogether upon muscles and limpets; +for there was not any thing else to be had, except some deer which came +out of the mountains down to the fresh rivers to drink. These Spaniards +came to fortify the straits, to the end that no nation should have +passage through into the South Sea, saving their own only: but, as it +appeared, it was not God’s will so to have it; for during the time that +they were there, which was two years at the least, they could never have +any thing to grow, or in any ways prosper; and, on the other side, the +Indians often preyed upon them, until their victuals grew so short, +(their store being spent which they had brought with them out of Spain, +and having no means to renew the same) that they died like dogs in their +houses, and in their clothes, wherein we found some of them still at our +coming, until that in the end the town being wonderfully tainted with +the smell and savour of the dead people, the rest which remained alive +were driven to bury such things as they had there in their town, and so +to forsake the town, and to go along the sea-side to seek their victuals +to preserve them from starving, taking nothing with them, but every man +his harquebuss, and his furniture, that was able to do it (for some of +them were not able to carry them for weakness), and so lived, for the +space of a year and more, on roots, leaves, and sometimes a fowl which +they might kill with their piece. To conclude, they set forward, +determined to travel towards the river of Plate, there being only +twenty-three persons left alive, whereof two were women, which were the +remainder of four hundred. In this place we watered and wooded well and +quietly. Our General named this town Port Famine: it standeth in 53 +degrees by observation to the southward. + +The 14th day we departed from this place, and ran south-south-west, and +from thence south-west unto Cape Froward, five leagues west-south-west, +which cape is the southermost part of all the straits, and standeth in +the latitude of 54 degrees. From which cape we ran west and by-north +five leagues, and put into a bay or cove on the south side, which we +called Muscle-cove, because there was great plenty of them: we rode +therein six days, the wind being still westerly. + +The 21st day of January we departed from Muscle-cove, and went +north-west and by-west ten leagues, to a very fair sandy bay on the +north-side, which our General called Elizabeth-bay: and, as we rode +there that night, one of our men died which went in the Hugh Gallant, +whose name was Grey, a carpenter by his occupation, and was buried there +in that bay. + +The 22d we departed from Elizabeth-bay in the afternoon, and went about +two leagues from that place, where there was a fresh water river, up +which our General went with the ship’s boat about three miles; which +river hath very good and pleasant ground about it. It is low and +champaign soil, and we saw no other ground in all the straits, but what +was craggy rocks, and monstrous high hills and mountains. In this river +are a great many savages, which we saw, and had conference with them. +They were men-eaters, and fed altogether upon raw flesh, and other +filthy food: which people had lately preyed upon some of the Spaniards +before spoken of; for they had gotten knives, and some pieces of rapiers +to make darts of. They used all the means they could possibly to have +enticed us farther up the river, on purpose to have betrayed us; which +being perceived by our General, he caused us to shoot at them with our +harquebusses, whereby we killed many of them. So we sailed from this +river, to the channel of St. Jerome, which is two leagues off. + +From the river of St. Jerome, about three or four leagues, we ran west +into a cape which is on the north-side; and from that cape unto the +mouth of the straits the course lieth north-west and by-west, and +north-west; between which place and the mouth of the straits, to the +southward, we lay in harbour until the 23d of February, by reason of +contrary winds, and most vile and foul weather, with such rain and +violent stormy winds which came down from the mountains and high hills, +that they hazarded the best cables and anchors that we had for to hold; +which, if they had failed, we had been in great danger to have been cast +away, or at least to have been famished: for, during this time, which +was a full month, we fed almost altogether on muscles, limpets, and +birds, or such as we could get on shore, seeking every day for them, as +the fowls of the air do where they can find food in continual rainy +weather. + +There is, at every one or two miles end, an harbour on both sides of the +land. And there are, between the river of St. Jerome and the mouth of +the straits, going into the South Sea, about 34 leagues, by estimation; +so that the whole length of the straits is about 90 leagues: and the +mouth of the said straits standeth nearly in the same height that the +entrance standeth in when we pass out of the North Sea, which is about +52 deg. and 40 min. to the southward of the Line. + +The 24th day of February, we entered into the South Sea; and on the +south side in going out of the straits is a fair high cape, with a low +point adjoining to it; and on the north-side are four or five islands +which lie six leagues off the main, and much broken and sunken ground +about them. By noon, the same day, we had brought these islands east of +us five leagues off; the wind being southerly. + +The first of March, a storm took us at north, which night the ships lost +the company of the Hugh Gallant, being in 49 degrees 30 min. and 45 +leagues from land. This storm continued three or four days and for that +time we in the Hugh Gallant, being separated from the other two ships, +looked every hour to sink, our bark was so leaky, and ourselves so +fatigued and weakened with freeing it of water, that we slept not during +three days and three nights. + +The 15th of March, in the morning, the Hugh Gallant came in between the +island of St. Mary and the main, where she met with the Admiral and the +Content, who had rid at the island of La Mocha two days, which island +standeth in south latitude 38 deg. at which place some of our men went +on shore with the Vice-Admiral’s boat, where the Indians fought with +them with their bows and arrows, and were very wary of their calivers. +These Indians were enemies to the Spaniards, and belonged to a great +place called Arauco, and took us for Spaniards, as we afterwards +learned. + +The above-mentioned place, Arauco, is very rich, and full of gold mines; +and yet could it not be subdued at any time by the Spaniards; but they +always returned with the greatest loss of men: for these Indians are +quite desperate, and careless of their lives, living at their own +liberty and freedom. + +The 15th day aforesaid, in the afternoon, we weighed anchor, and ran +under the west side of St. Mary’s island, where we rid very well in six +fathoms water, and very fair ground, all that night. + +The 16th day, our General went on shore himself, with 70 or 80 men, +every one with his furniture. There came down to us certain Indians, +with two which were the Chiefs of the island, to welcome us on shore, +thinking we had been Spaniards, for it is subdued by them; who brought +us up to a place where the Spaniards had erected a church, with crosses +and altars in it; and there were about this church two or three +store-houses, which were full of wheat and barley ready threshed, and +made up in cades of straw, to the quantity of a bushel of corn in every +cade. The wheat and barley was as fair, as clear, and every way as good +as any we have in England. There were also the like cades full of +potatoe-roots, which were very good to eat, ready made up in the +store-houses, for the Spaniards when they should come for their tribute. +This island also yielded many sorts of fruits, hogs, and hens. These +Indians are held in such slavery by their masters, that they dare not +eat a hen or hog themselves: but the Spaniards have made them all in +that island christians. Thus we filled ourselves here with corn as much +as we would have, and as many hogs as we had salt to salt them with, and +great plenty of hens, with a number of bags of potatoe-roots, and about +500 dried dog-fishes, and Guinea wheat, which is called maiz. And having +taken as much as we would, yet we left a prodigious great store behind +us. Our General had the two Chiefs of the island on board our ship, and +provided great cheer for them, and made them merry with wine: and they, +in the end, perceiving that we were not Spaniards, made signs, as near +as our General could perceive, that, if we would go over unto the main +land to Arauco, there was much gold; making us signs, that we should +have great store of riches. But, because we could not understand them, +our General made haste, and within two or three days we furnished +ourselves, and departed. + +The 18th day, in the morning, we departed from this place; and ran all +that day north-north-east about ten leagues, and at night lay with a +short sail off and on the coast. + +The 19th, we ran in east-north-east with the land, and bore in with a +place called the Conception, where we anchored under an island, and +departed the next morning without going on land. + +The 20th, we departed from the Conception, and went into a little bay, +which was sandy, where we saw fresh water and cattle; but we staid not +there. + +The 30th day, we came into the bay of Quintero, which standeth in 33 +deg. and 50 min. + +The said day, presently after we were come to an anchor in the bay, +there was a herdsman, that kept cattle, lying upon the point of the hill +asleep; who, when he awaked, and had espied three ships which were come +into the bay, before we could get on shore, he had mounted a horse which +was feeding by, and rode his way as fast as ever he was able; and our +General, with thirty shot with him, went on shore. He had not been on +land an hour when there came three horsemen with bright swords towards +us, so hard as they could ride, till within a quarter of a mile of us, +and then stopt, and would come no nearer unto us: so our General sent +unto them a couple of our men with their shot, and Hernando, who was the +Spaniard that we had taken up at the mouth of the straits. But the +Spaniards would not suffer our men to come near with their shot, but +made signs that one of our men should come alone unto them: so the said +Hernando, the Spaniard, went unto them, and our two men stood not far +from them. They had some conference; and, in the end, Hernando came back +from them, and told our General that he had parlied with them for some +victuals, and they had promised as much as we would have. Our General +sent him back again with another message, and another shot with him; and +being come near unto them, they would not suffer any more than one to +approach them: whereupon our men let the Spaniard go unto them alone; +who being at some good distance from them, they staid but a small time +together, before the said Hernando leaped up behind one of them, and +rode away with them, notwithstanding the damnable oaths which he had +made continually to our General, never to forsake him, but to die on his +side before he would be false. Our General, seeing how he was dealt +with, filled water all that day with good watch, and carried it on +board: and night being come, he determined next day to send into the +country to find their town, and to have taken the spoil of it, and to +have fired it, if they could have found it. + +The last of March, Captain Havers went up into the country, with 50 or +60 men, with their shot and furniture with them, and we travelled seven +or eight miles into the land: and, as we were marching along, we espied +a number of herds of cattle, of kine and bullocks, which were +wonderfully wild: we saw also great plenty of horses, mares, and colts, +which were very wild and unhandled: there is also great store of hares +and conies, and plenty of partridges, and other wild fowls. The country +is very fruitful, with fair fresh rivers all along, full of wild-fowl of +all sorts. Having travelled so far, that we could go no farther for the +monstrous high mountains, we rested ourselves at a very fair fresh +river, running in and along fair low meadows, at the foot of the +mountains, where every man drank of the river, and refreshed himself. +Having so done, we returned to our ships, the likeliest way we thought +their town would be; so we travelled all the day long, not seeing any +man, but we met with many wild dogs; yet there were two hundred horsemen +abroad that same day, by means of the Spaniard which they had taken from +us the day before, who had told them that our force was but small, and +that we were wonderfully weak; and, though they did espy us that day, +yet durst they not give the onset upon us; for we marched along in +array, and observed good order, whereby we seemed a greater number than +we were, until we came unto our ships that night again. + +The next day, being the first of April, 1587, our men went on shore to +fill water at a pit which was a quarter of a mile from the water-side; +and, being early hard at their business, were in no readiness: mean +while, there came pouring down from the hills almost two hundred +horsemen, and before our people could return to the rocks from the +watering-place, twelve of them were cut off, part killed, and part taken +prisoners; the rest were rescued by our soldiers who came from the rocks +to meet with them; for though only fifteen of us had any weapons on +shore, yet we made the enemy retire in the end, with the loss of +twenty-four of their men, after we had skirmished with them an hour. + +After the loss of these men, we rode at anchor, and watered in despite +of them, with good watch and ward, until the 5th of the said month. + +The 5th day, we departed out of this bay of Quintero; and off from the +bay there lieth a little island, about a league distant, whereon there +are great store of penguins, and other fowls, whereof we took to serve +our turns, and sailed away north, and north-by-west; for so lieth the +coast along this place. + +The 15th, we came thwart of a place, which is called Morro-Moreno, which +standeth in twenty-three degrees thirty minutes, and is an excellent +good harbour: and there is an island which maketh it an harbour; for a +ship may go in at either end of the island. Here we went with our +General on shore, to the number of thirty men; and as soon as we had +effected our landing, the Indians of the place came down from the rocks +to meet us, with fresh-water and wood on their backs. They are in great +awe of the Spaniards, and very simple people, living most savagely: for +they brought us to their dwellings, about two miles from the harbour, +where we saw their women and bedding, which is nothing but the skin of +some beast laid upon the ground; and over them, instead of houses, is +nothing but five or six sticks laid across, which stand upon forked +sticks stuck in the ground, and a few boughs laid over them. Their diet +is raw fish, which stinketh most vilely: and when any of them die, they +bury their bows and arrows with them, and all that they have; for we +opened one of their graves, and saw the order of them. Their canoes or +boats are very artificially made of two skins resembling bladders, and +are blown full at one end with quills: they have two of these bladders +blown full, which are sewed together, and made fast with a sinew of some +wild beast; which, when they are in the water, swell, so that they are +as tight as may be. They go to sea in these boats, and catch plenty of +fish, but they use it in a beastly manner. + +On the 23d, in the morning, we took a small bark, which came out of +Arica road, which we kept and called the George. The men forsook it, and +went hastily away with their boat. Our Admiral’s pinnace followed the +boat, and the Hugh Gallant’s boat took the bark: our Admiral’s pinnace +could not recover the boat before it got on shore, but went along into +the road of Arica, and laid aboard a great ship of one hundred tons, +riding in the road right before the town, but all the men and goods were +gone out of her, only the bare ship was left alone. They made three or +four very fair shots at the pinnace as she was coming in, but missed her +very narrowly with a minion-shot which they had in the fort. Whereupon +we came into the road with the Admiral and the Hugh Gallant: but the +Content, which was the Vice-admiral, was behind out of sight; by means +whereof, and for want of her boat to land men withal, we landed not: +otherwise, if we had been together, our General with the company would +resolutely have landed to take the town, whatsoever should have come of +it. The cause why the Content staid behind, was, that she had found, +about fourteen leagues to the southward of Arica, in a place where the +Spaniards had landed a whole ship’s lading of botigas of wine of +Castile, whereof the said Content took into her as many as she could +conveniently carry, and came after us into the road of Arica the same +day. By this time we perceived that the town had gathered all their +power together, and also conveyed all their treasure away, and buried +it, for they had heard of us. Now, because it was very populous with the +aid of one or two neighbouring places, our General saw there was no +landing without loss of many men; wherefore he gave over that +enterprise. While we rode at anchor they shot at us, and our ships shot +at them again for every shot two. Moreover, our pinnace went in close +almost to the shore, and fetched out another bark which rode there, in +despite of all their forts, though they shot still at the pinnace, which +they could never hit. After these things our General sent a boat on +shore with a flag of truce, to know if they would redeem their great +ship or no: but they would not; for they had received special +commandment from the Viceroy at Lima, not to buy any ship, or ransom any +man, upon pain of death. Our General did this, in hopes to have redeemed +some of our men, which were taken prisoners on shore by the horsemen at +Quintero, otherwise he would have made them no offer of parley. + +The 25th, riding still in the road, we spied a sail coming from the +southward, and our General sent out his pinnace to meet her, with all +our boats; but the town made such signs from the hill with fires and +tokens out of the watch-house, that before our pinnace could get to +them, they ran the bark on shore two miles to the southward of the town; +but they had little leisure to carry any thing with them, but all the +men escaped, among whom there were certain friars, for we saw them in +their friar’s weeds as they ran on shore. Many horsemen came from the +town to rescue them and to carry them away, otherwise we had landed and +taken or killed them: so we went on board the bark as she lay sunk, and +fetched out the pillage; but there was nothing in it of any value: and +we came on board our ships again the same night, and the next morning we +set the great ship on fire in the road, and sunk one of the barks, +carrying the other along with us, and so departed from thence and went +away north-west. + +The 27th, we took a small bark which came from St. Jago, near unto +Quintero, where we lost our men first. In this bark was one George, a +Greek, an intelligent pilot for all the coast of Chili. They were sent +to the city of Lima with letters of advice of us, and of the loss of our +men: there were also in the said bark one Fleming and three Spaniards, +and they were all sworn, and received the sacrament, before they came to +sea, by three or four friars, that, if we should chance to meet them +they should throw those letters overboard; which as we were giving them +chace with our pinnace, before we could reach them, they had accordingly +thrown away. Yet our General wrought so with them, that they did confess +their errand; but he was fain to cause them to be tormented with their +thumbs in a winch, and to repeat it several times with extreme pain: +also he made the old Fleming believe that he would hang him, and the +rope being about his neck, he was pulled up a little from the hatches; +and yet he would not confess, chusing rather to die than he would be +perjured. + +The 3d of May, we came into a bay where are three little towns, which +are called Paracca, Chincha, and Pisca; where some of us landed, and +took certain houses wherein was bread, wine, figs, and hens: but the sea +went so high that we could not land at the best of the towns, without +sinking of our boats, and great hazard of us all. This place standeth in +thirteen degrees and forty minutes to the southward of the Line. + +The 5th of May, we departed from this harbour, leaving the Content, our +Vice-admiral, at the island of Seals, by which means at that time we +lost her company. + +The 9th, we gave chace to a sail, but we could not reach it. + +The 10th day, the Hugh Gallant, in which bark I Francis Pretie was, lost +company of our Admiral. + +The 11th, we who were in the Hugh Gallant put into a bay which standeth +in twelve degrees forty minutes, in which bay we found a river of fresh +water about eight o’clock at night; and though we were but of small +force, no more than one bark and eighteen men in it, yet we went on +shore to fill water; where, having filled one boat’s lading, while our +crew were going on board, two or three of our company which were on +shore, as they were going a little from the watering-place with their +furniture about them, spied where there were four or five hundred bags +of meal on an heap covered with a few reeds; so that night we filled +water, and took as much meal as we thought good, which fell out well for +us who were then lost, and stood in need of victuals: and, by break of +day in the morning, we came on board, and there staid and rode until the +afternoon; in which time the town, seeing us ride there still, brought +down much cattle to the sea-side to have enticed us to come on shore; +but we saw their intent, and weighed anchor, and departed the 12th day. + +The 13th day at night, we put into a bay which standeth in nine degrees +twenty minutes, where we saw horsemen. And that night we landed, namely, +Mr. Bruer, captain; myself; Arthur Warford; John Way, preacher; John +Newman; Andrew Wight; William Gargefield; and Henry Hilliard; and we +eight only, having every man his harquebuss and his furniture about him, +marched three quarters of a mile along the sea side, where we found a +boat of five or six tons hauled up dry on the shore about a cable’s +length from the water; and with extreme labour we launched the bark. +When it was on float, Captain Bruer and I went in, while the rest were +fetching their things; but suddenly it was ready to sink, and the +Captain and I stood up to the knees, laving out the water with our +targets; but it sunk down faster than we were able to free it, insomuch +that in the end we had much ado to save ourselves from drowning. When we +were out, we stood in great fear that our own boat, wherein we came on +shore, was sunk; for we could no where see it. Howbeit, the Captain +commanded them to keep it off for fear of the great surge that went by +the shore, yet in the end we spied it, and went on board by two and two, +and were forced to wade up to the arm-pits sixty paces into the sea, +before we could get into the boat, by reason of the shoalness; and then +departed the fourteenth day in the morning. + +The 16th, we took with the Hugh Gallant, being but sixteen men of us in +it, a large ship which came from Guaianil, which was called the Lewis, +and was of the burthen of three hundred tons, having twenty-four men in +it, wherein was a pilot, one Gonsalvo de Ribas, whom we carried along +with us, and a negroe called Emmanuel. The ship was laden with nothing +but timber and victuals, wherefore we left her seven or eight leagues +from the land very leaky and ready to sink: we sunk her boat, and took +away her foresail and some provisions. + +The 17th of May, we met with our Admiral again, and all the rest of our +fleet: they had taken two ships, the one laden with sugar, melasses, +maize, skins, many packs of pintadoes, some marmalade, and a thousand +hens. The other ship was laden with wheat-meal, and boxes of marmalade. +One of these ships, which had the chief merchandize in it, was worth +twenty thousand pounds, if it had been in England, or in any other part +of Christendom, where we might have sold it. We filled all our ships +with as much as we could of these goods; the rest we burnt and the ships +also, and set the men and women that were not killed on shore. + + [Illustration: _Cavendish plunders & burns Paita._] + +The 20th day in the morning, we came into the road of Paita; and, being +at an anchor, our General landed with sixty or seventy men, skirmished +with some of the town, and drove them all to flight to the top of the +hill which is over the town; except a few slaves and some others who +were of the meaner sort, who were commanded by the Governor to stay +below in the town at a place which was building for a fort, having with +them a bloody ensign, being in number about an hundred men. Now, as we +were rowing between the ships and the shore, our gunner shot off a great +piece out of one of the barks, and the shot fell among them, and made +them to fly from the fort, as fast as they could run; but, having got up +upon the hill, they in their turn, shot among us with their small-shot. +After we were landed, and had taken the town, we ran upon them and +chaced them so fiercely for the space of an hour, that we drove them in +the end away by force; and, being got up the hills, we found where they +had hid what they had brought out of the town. We also found the +quantity of twenty-five pounds weight of silver in pieces of eight, and +abundance of houshold stuff, and storehouses full of all kinds of wares. +But our General would not suffer the men to carry much cloth or apparel +away, because they should not cloy themselves with burdens; for he knew +not whether our enemies were provided with fire-arms according to the +number of their men, for they were five men to one of us, and we had an +English mile and an half to our ships. Being come down in safety to the +town, which was very well built, and kept very clean in every street, +with a town-house or guildhall in the midst of it, and had to the number +of two or three hundred houses at least in it; we set it on fire, and +burnt it to the ground, and goods to the value of five or six thousand +pounds. There was also a bark riding at anchor in the road, which we set +on fire and departed, directing our course to the island of Puna. + +The 25th of May, we arrived at the island of Puna, where is a very good +harbour. There we found a great ship of 250 tons riding at anchor with +all her furniture, which was ready to be hauled on ground, for there is +a special good place for that purpose. We sunk it and went on shore, +where the Lord of the island dwelt, who had a sumptuous dwelling, which +was by the water-side, exceedingly well contrived, with many very +singular good rooms and chambers in it, and out of every chamber was +framed a gallery, with a stately prospect towards the sea on one side, +and into the island on the other side, with a magnificent hall below, +and a very great storehouse at one end of the hall, which was filled +with botigas of pitch and bast to make cables with; for the most part of +the cables in the South Sea are made upon that island. This great +Casique obliged all the Indians on the island to work and trudge for +him: he is an Indian born, but is married to a beautiful woman who is a +Spaniard, by reason of his pleasant habitation and his great wealth. + +This Spanish woman, his wife, is honoured as a Queen in the island, and +never walketh upon the ground on foot, but accounteth it too base a +thing for her; but when her pleasure is to take the air, or to go +abroad, she is always carried in a sedan upon four mens shoulders, with +a veil or canopy over her, to shade her from the sun or the wind, having +her gentlewoman still attending about her, with a great troop of the +best men in the island with her. But both she and the lord of the +island, with all the Indians in the town, were nearly fled out of the +island before we get could get to an anchor, by reason we were becalmed +before we could get in, and were gone over unto the main land, having +carried with them 100,000 crowns, which we knew by a Captain of the +island, an Indian, whom we had taken at sea as we were coming into the +road, being in a balsa or a canoe for a spy to see what we were. + +The 27th, our General himself, with certain shot and some targetliers, +went over to the main unto the place where this Indian Captain told us +the Casique, who was Lord of all the island, was gone unto, and had +carried all his treasure with him: but, at our coming to the place where +we went to land, we found newly arrived there four or five great balsas +laden with plantains, bags of meal, and many other kinds of victuals. +Our General marvelled what they were, and what they meant, asking the +Indian guide, and commanding him to speak the truth upon his life. Being +then bound fast, he answered, being very much abashed, as well as our +company were, that he neither knew from whence they should come, nor who +they should be, for never a man was in either of the balsas; yet he had +told our General before, that it was an easy matter to take the said +Casique and all his treasure; and that, there were but three or four +houses standing in a desart place, and no resistance; and that if he +found it not so, he might hang him. Again being demanded to speak upon +his life what he thought these balsas should be? he answered, that he +could not say what they were, nor from whence they should come, except +it was to carry sixty soldiers, who he did hear were to go to a place +called Guaiaquil, which was about six leagues from the said island, +where two or three of the King’s ships were on the stocks in building, +and where there were continually an hundred soldiers in garrison, who +had heard of us, and had sent for sixty more, for fear of burning of the +ships and town. Our General, not any whit discouraged, either at the +sight of the balsas unlooked for, or at hearing of the sixty soldiers +not until then spoken of, bravely animating his company to the exploit, +went presently forward, being in the night in a most desart path through +the woods, until he came to the place; where, as it seemed, they had +kept watch either at the water-side, or at the houses, or at both, and +were newly gone out of the houses, having so short warning that they +left the meat both boiling and roasting at the fire, and were fled with +their treasure with them, or else buried it where it could not be found. +Our company took hens, and such things as we thought good, and came +away. + +The 29th, our General went in the ship’s boat unto a little island +adjoining, whither the Casique, who was Lord of Rena, had caused all the +hangings of his chambers, which were Cordovan leather, all gilded over, +and painted very fair and rich, with all his houshold stuff, and all the +ships tackling which were riding in the road at our coming in, with +great store of nails, spikes of iron, and very many other things, to be +conveyed; all which we found, and brought away what our General thought +requisite for the ships. + +This island is very pleasant for all the delights of life, and fruitful; +but there are no mines of gold or silver in it. There are, at least, 200 +houses in the town about the Casique’s palace, and as many in one or two +towns more upon the island, which is almost as big as the Isle of Wight, +in England. There is planted, on the one side of the Casique’s house, a +fair garden with all herbs growing in it, and at the lower end a well of +fresh water, and round about it are trees set, whereon bombazine cotton +groweth after this manner: The tops of the trees grow full of cods, out +of which the cotton groweth, and in the cotton is a seed of the bigness +of a pea, and in every cod there are seven or eight of these seeds; and +if the cotton be not gathered when it is ripe, then these seeds fall +from it and spring again. + +There are also in this garden fig-trees, which bear continually; also +pompions, melons, cucumbers, raddishes, rosemary, and thyme, with many +other herbs and roots. At the other end of the house there is also +another orchard, where grow oranges, sweet and sour lemons, +pomegranates, and limes, with divers other fruits. There is very good +pasture-ground in this island and there are many horses, oxen, bullocks, +sheep very fat and fair, a great many goats, which are very tame, and +are used continually to be milked. They have also abundance of pigeons, +turkies, and ducks of prodigious bigness. + +There was also a very large and great church near to the Casique’s +house, whither he caused all the Indians in the island to come and hear +mass, for he himself was made a christian when married to the Spanish +woman before spoken of; and upon his conversion he caused the rest of +his subjects to be christened. In this church was an high altar, with a +crucifix, and five bells hanging in one end thereof. We burnt the +church, and brought the bells away. + +By this time we had hauled on ground our Admiral, and made her clean, +burnt her keel, pitched and tarred her, and had hauled her on float +again; and, in the mean time, kept watch in the great house both night +and day. + +The 2d of June, in the morning, by day-break, every one of the watch +having gone abroad to seek provisions, some one way and some another, +some for hens, some for sheep, some for goats; upon a sudden there came +down upon us an hundred soldiers, with musquets, and an ensign, which +were landed on the other side of the island that night, and all the +Indians of the island along with them, everyone with weapons, and their +baggage after them; which happened by means of a negroe, whose name was +Emmanuel, who fled from us at our first landing there. Thus, being taken +at a disadvantage, we had the worst, for our company did not exceed +sixteen or twenty, whereof they had slain one or two before they were +come to the houses; yet we skirmished with them an hour and a half. At +last, being greatly over-charged with multitudes, we were driven down +from the hill to the water side, and there we kept them in play a while, +until in the end our halberdier, who had kept the way of the hill, and +had slain a couple of them as he breathed himself, had an honourable +death, for a shot struck him to the heart; who, feeling himself mortally +wounded, cried to God for mercy, and fell down dead. But, soon after, +the enemy was driven back from the bank side to the green; and, in the +end, our boat came, and carried as many of our men as could go in her +without hazard of sinking; but one of our men was shot through the head +with his own piece, being a snap-hand, as he was getting into the boat. +Four of us were left behind, which the boat could not carry, of whom +myself was one, who had our shot ready, and retired into a cliff until +the boat came again, which was presently after they had carried the rest +on board. There were forty-six of the enemy slain by us, whereof they +dragged some into bushes, and some into old houses, which we found +afterwards. We lost only 12 of our men. + +The same day we went on shore again with 70 men, and had a fresh +skirmish with the enemy, and made them retire. This done, we set fire to +the town, and burnt it to the ground; and, shortly after, made havock of +their fields, orchards, and gardens, and burnt four great ships more, +which were building on the stocks. + +The 3d of June, the Content, which was our Vice-Admiral, was hauled on +ground to grave at the same place, in spite of the Spaniards; and also +our pinnace was new trimmed. + +The 5th, we departed out of the road of Puna, where we remained eleven +days, and turned up to a place which is called Rio Dolce, where we +watered; at which place also we sunk our Rear-Admiral, called the Hugh +Gallant, for want of men, being a bark of 40 tons. + +The 10th, we set the Indians on shore, which we had taken before as we +were coming into the road of Puna. + +The 11th, we departed from Rio Dolce. + +The 12th, we doubled the Equinoctial Line, and continued our course +northwards all that month. + +The 1st of July, we had sight of the coast of Nueva Espanna, being four +leagues distant from land, in the latitude of 10 degrees to the +northward of the Line. + +The 9th, we took a new ship of 120 tons burthen, wherein was one Michael +Sancius, whom our General took to serve his turn to water along the +coast; for he was one of the best coasters in the South Sea. This +Michael Sancius was a provincial born in Marseilles, and was the first +man that told us news of the great ship called the Santa Anna, which we +afterwards took coming from the Philippines. + +There were six men more in this new ship. We took her sails, ropes, and +fire-wood, to serve our turns, set her on fire, and kept the men. + +The 10th, we took another bark, which was going with advice of us and +our ships all along the coast, as Michael Sancius told us; but all +company that were in the bark were fled on shore. Neither of these ships +had any goods in them; for they came both from Sonsonate, in the +province of Guatimala; the new ship, for fear we should have taken her +in the road; and the bark, to carry news along the coast, which bark we +also set on fire. + +The 26th, we came to anchor in ten fathoms, in the river of Copalita, +where we intended to water; and that same night we departed with +thirty-two men in the pinnace, and rowed to Aguatulco, which is but two +leagues from the aforesaid river, and standeth in 15 deg. 40 min. to the +northward of the Equinoctial Line. + +The 27th day, in the morning, by break of day, we came into the road of +Aguatulco, where we found a bark of 50 tons, which was come from +Sonsonate, laden with cocoas and anil, which they had there landed; and +the men were all fled on shore. We landed there, and burnt the town, +with the church and custom-house, which was very fair and large, in +which house were 600 bags of anil to dye cloth, every bag whereof was +worth 40 crowns; and 400 bags of cocoas, every bag whereof is worth 10 +crowns. These cocoas go among them for meat and money; for 150 of them +are in value one rial of plate in ready payment. They are very like an +almond, but are not so pleasant in taste. They eat them, and make drink +of them: this the owner of the ship told us. I found in this town, +before we burnt it, a flasket full of boxes of balm. After we had +spoiled and burned the town, wherein there were some hundred houses, the +owner of the ship came down out of the hills with a flag of truce unto +us, who before with all the rest of the townsmen run away, and at length +came on board our pinnace upon Captain Havers’ word of safe return. We +carried him to the river of Copalita, where our ships rode. When we came +to our General, he caused him to be set on shore in safety the same +night, because he came upon the Captain’s word. + +The 28th, we set sail from Copalita, because the sea was so great that +we could not fill water, and ran the same night into the road of +Aguatulco. + +The 29th, our General landed, and took with him thirty men two miles +into the woods, were we took a Mestizo, whose name was Michael de +Truxillo, who was customer of that town, and we found with him two +chambers full of his stuff; we brought him and his stuff on board: and +whereas I say he was a Mestizo, it is to be understood, that a Mestizo +is one who hath a Spaniard to his father, and an Indian to his mother. + +The 2d day of August, having watered, and examined the said Mestizo and +set him on shore again, we departed from the port of Aguatulco the same +night; which standeth, as I said before, in 15 deg. and 40 min. to the +northward of the Line. Here we overslipped the haven of Acapulco, from +whence the ships are fitted out for the Philippines. + +The 24th, our General with thirty of us went with the pinnace to an +haven called Puerto de Natividad, where we had intelligence by Michael +Sancius that there should be a pinnace; but, before we could get +thither, the said pinnace was gone to fish for pearls twelve leagues +farther, as we were informed by certain Indians whom we found there. We +took a mullatto in this place in his bed, who was sent with letters of +advice concerning us along the coast of Nueva Galicia, whose horse we +killed. We took his letters, left him behind, set fire to the houses, +and burnt two new ships of 200 tons each which were building there on +the stocks, and came on board of our ships again. + +The 26th, we came into the bay of St. Jago, where we watered at a fresh +river, along which river many plantains were growing. Here is abundance +of fresh fish; here also some of our company dragged for pearls, and +caught some quantity. + +The 2d of September, we departed from St. Jago, at four o’clock in the +evening. The bay of St. Jago standeth in nineteen degrees and eighteen +minutes to the northward of the Line. + +The 3d, we arrived in a little bay a league to the westward of Port de +Natividad, called Malacca, which is a very good place to ride in; and +this day, about twelve o’clock, our General landed with thirty men, and +went up to a town of Indians which was two leagues from the road, which +town is called Acatlan: there were in it about 20 or 30 houses, and a +church which we defaced, and came on board the same night. All the +people fled out of the town at the sight of us. + +The 4th, we departed from the road of Malacca, and sailed along the +coast. The 8th we came to the road of Chacalla, in which bay there are +two little houses by the water-side. This bay is 18 leagues from the +Cape de los Corientes. + +The 9th, in the morning, our General sent up Captain Havers with forty +men of us before day, and, Michael Sancius being our guide, we went unto +a place about two leagues up into the country, in a most obscure desart +path, through the woods and wilderness, and in the end we came to a +place where we took three housholders with their wives and children, and +some Indians, one carpenter (who was a Spaniard), and a Portuguese. We +bound them all, and made them come to the sea-side with us: our General +made their wives fetch us plantains, lemons, oranges, pine-apples, and +other fruits, whereof they had abundance, and so let their husbands +depart, except Sembrano, the Spanish carpenter, and Diego, the +Portuguese, and the tenth day we departed from the road. + +The 12th, we arrived at a little island called the isle of St. Andrew, +on which there is great store of fowl and wood; where we dried and +salted as many of the fowls as we thought good. We also killed there +abundance of seals and oguanos, which are a kind of serpents with four +feet, and a long sharp tail, strange to them who have not seen them, but +they are very good meat. We rode here until the 17th, at which time we +departed. + +The 24th, we arrived in the road of Massatlan, in twenty-three degrees +thirty minutes, just under the Tropic of Cancer. It is a very great +river within, but is barred at the mouth; and upon the north side of the +bar without is good fresh water, but there is much difficulty in filling +it, because at low water it is shoal half a mile off the shore. There is +great store of fresh fish in this bay, and good fruits up in the +country, whereof we had some, though not without danger. + +The 27th, we departed from the road of Massatlan, and ran to an island +which is a league to the northward of the said Massatlan, where we +trimmed our ships, and new built our pinnace. There is a little island a +quarter of a league from it, on which are seals; where a Spanish +prisoner, whose name was Domingo, being sent to wash shirts, with one of +our men to keep him, made his escape and swam to the main, which was an +English mile distant; at which place we had seen thirty or forty +Spaniards and Indians, who were horsemen and kept watch there, and came +from a town called Chiametla, which was eleven leagues up into the +country, as Michael Sancius told us. We found upon the island where we +trimmed our pinnace, fresh water, by digging two or three feet deep into +the sand, where no water nor sign of water was before to be perceived; +otherwise we must have gone back 20 or 30 leagues to water, which might +have occasioned our missing the prey we had long waited for: but one +Flores, a Spaniard, who was also a prisoner with us, made a motion to +dig in the sands. Now, our General, having had experience before of the +like, commanded to put his motion in practice, and, digging three feet +deep, we found very good and fresh water: so we watered our ships, and +might have filled a thousand tons more if we had pleased. + +We staid in this island until the ninth day of October, and then +departed at night for the Cape of St. Lucar, which is on the west side +of the point of California. + +The 14th, we fell in with the Cape of St. Lucar, which cape is very like +the Needles at the isle of Wight, and within the said cape is a great +bay, called by the Spaniards Aguada Segura, into which bay falleth a +fair fresh river, about which many Indians use to keep. We watered in +the river, and lay off and on with the said cape of St. Lucar, until the +4th of November, and had the winds hanging still westerly. + +The 4th of November, beating up and down upon the head-land of +California, in 23 degrees 40 minutes to the northward, between seven and +eight o’clock in the morning, one of the company of our Admiral, who was +the trumpeter of the ship, going up unto the top, espied a sail bearing +in from the sea with the cape; whereupon he cried, with no small joy to +himself and all the company, A sail! a sail! With which chearful word, +the Master of the ship, and divers others of the company, went also up +to the main-top, who, perceiving his speech to be very true, gave +information unto our General of this happy news, who was no less glad +than the cause required: whereupon he gave in charge presently unto the +whole company, to put all things in readiness; which being performed, he +gave them chace for three or four hours, standing with our best +advantage, and working for the wind. In the afternoon we got up to them, +giving them a broadside with our great ordnance, and a volley of small +shot, and presently laid the ship aboard, whereof the King of Spain was +owner, which was Admiral of the South Sea, called St. Anna, and thought +to be seven hundred tons in burthen. Now, as we were ready on the ship’s +side to enter her, there not being above fifty or sixty men at most in +our ship, we perceived that the Captain of the Santa Anna had made +sights fore and aft, and hid their sails close on their poop, their +midship, with their forecastle, and not one man to be seen, they +standing so close under their sights, with lances, javelins, rapiers, +targets, and an innumerable quantity of large stones, which they threw +overboard upon our heads, and into our ships so fast, and being so many +of them, that they put us off the ship again, with the loss of two of +our men, who were slain, and four or five wounded. But for all this, we +new trimmed our sails, and fitted every man his furniture, and gave them +a fresh encounter with our great ordnance, and also with our small shot, +raking them through and through, to the killing and wounding of many of +their men. Their Captain, still like a valiant man, with his company, +stood very stoutly unto his close sights, not yielding as yet. Our +General encouraging his men afresh, with the whole noise of trumpets, +gave them the other encounter with our great ordnance, and all our small +shot, to the great discouragement of our enemies, raking them through in +divers places, killing and wounding many of their men. They being thus +discouraged and spoiled, and their ship being in hazard of sinking, by +reason of the great shot which were made, whereof some were under water, +after five or six hours fight, set out a flag of truce, and parlied for +mercy, desiring our General to save their lives, and to take their +goods, and that they would presently yield. Our General promised them +mercy, and willed them to strike their sails, and to hoist out their +boat, and to come on board: which news they were full glad to hear, and +presently struck their sails, hoisted out their boat, and one of their +chief merchants came on board unto our General, and, falling down upon +his knees, offered to have kissed our General’s feet, and craved mercy. +Our General pardoned both him and the rest, upon promise of their true +dealing with him and his company, concerning such riches as were in the +ship; and sent for their Captain and pilot, who, at their coming, used +the like duty and reverence as the former did. Our General promised +their lives, and good usage. The said Captain and pilot presently +certified the General what goods they had on board, viz. 122,000 pezoes +of gold; and the rest of the riches that the ship was laden with, were +silks, sattins, damasks, with musk, and divers other merchandize, and +great plenty of all manner of provisions, with the choice of many +conserves, and several sorts of very good wines. These things being made +known to the General by the aforesaid Captain and pilot, they were +commanded to stay on board the Desire; and on the 6th day of November +following we went into an harbour, which is called by the Spaniards +Aguada Segura, or Puerto Seguro. + +Here the whole company of Spaniards, both men and women, to the number +of 190 persons, were set on shore; where they had a fair river of fresh +water, with great plenty of fresh fish, fowl, and wood, and also many +hares and conies upon the main land. Our General also gave them plenty +of provisions, garvances, peason, and some wine. Also they had all the +sails of their ship to make them tents on shore, with licence to take +such store of planks as should be sufficient to make them a bark. Then +we fell to heaving in of our goods, sharing of the treasure, and +allotting to every man his portion; in division whereof, the 8th of this +month, many of the company fell into a mutiny against our General, +especially those who were in the Content, which were nevertheless +pacified for the time. + +On the 17th day of November, which is the day of the happy coronation of +her Majesty, our General commanded all his ordnance to be shot off, with +the small shot, both in his own ship, and in the Content, which was our +Vice-Admiral. This being done, the same night we had many fire-works, +and more ordnance discharged, to the great admiration of all the +Spaniards who were there, for the most of them had never seen the like +before. + +This ended, our General discharged the Captain, and gave him a royal +reward, with provision for his own and company’s defence against the +Indians, both of swords, targets, pieces, shot, and powder, to his great +contentment. But before his departure, he took out of this great ship +two young lads born in Japan, who could both read and write their own +language; the eldest, being about twenty years old, was named +Christopher; the other was called Cosmus, about seventeen years of age; +both of very good capacity. He took also with him, out of their ship, +three boys born in the isles of Manilla; the one about fifteen, the +other about thirteen, the youngest about nine years of age: the name of +the eldest was Alphonso, the second Anthony de Dasi, the third remaineth +with the Right Honourable the Countess of Essex. He also took from them +one Nicholas Roderigo, a Portuguese, who had not only been in Canton, +and other parts of China, but had also been in the islands of Japan, +being a country most rich in silver mines, and had also been in the +Philippines. He took also from them a Spaniard, whose name was Thomas de +Ersola, who was a very good pilot from Acapulco, and the coast of Nueva +Espanna, unto the islands of Ladrones, where the Spaniards put in to +water, sailing between Acapulco and the Philippines; in which isles of +Ladrones they found fresh-water plantains, and potatoe-roots: howbeit, +the people are very rude, and heathens. + +The 19th day of November aforesaid, about three o’clock in the +afternoon, our General caused the King’s ship to be set on fire, which, +having to the quantity of 500 tons of goods in her, we saw burnt unto +the water, and then gave them a piece of ordnance, and set sail joyfully +homewards towards England, with a fair wind, which by this time was come +about to east-north-east; and, night growing near, we left the Content +a-stern of us, which was not as yet come out of the road: and here, +thinking she would have overtaken us, we lost her company, and never saw +her after. + +We were sailing from this haven of Aguada Segura, in California, unto +the isles of Ladrones, the rest of November, and all December, and so +forth until the 3d of January, 1588, with a fair wind, for the space of +forty-five days; and we esteemed it to be between seventeen and eighteen +hundred leagues. + +The 3d of January, by six o’clock in the morning, we had sight of one of +the islands of Ladrones, called the island of Guarsa, standing in 13 +deg. 40 min. towards the north; and, sailing with a gentle gale before +the wind, by one or two o’clock in the afternoon we were come within two +leagues of the island, where we met with sixty or seventy sail of +canoes, full of savages, who came off to sea unto us, and brought with +them in their canoes, plantains, cocoas, potatoe-roots, and fresh fish, +which they had caught at sea, and held them up unto us for to truck, or +exchange with us; which, when we perceived, we made fast little pieces +of old iron upon small cords and fishing lines, and so veered the iron +into their canoes; and they caught hold of them, and took off the iron, +and in exchange of it they would make fast unto the line, either a +potatoe-root, or a bundle of plantains, which we hauled in: and thus our +company exchanged with them, until they had satisfied themselves with as +much as did content them; yet we could not be rid of them; for, +afterwards, they were so thick about the ship, that it stemmed and broke +one or two of their canoes; but the men saved themselves, being in every +canoe four, six, or eight persons, all naked, and excellent swimmers and +divers. They are of a tawny colour, marvellously fat, and ordinarily +bigger of stature than the most of our men in England, wearing their +hair very long, yet some of them have it made up and tied with a knot on +the crown, and some with two knots, much like unto their images, which +we saw them have carved in wood, and standing in the head of their +boats, like unto the images of the devil. Their canoes were as +artificially made as any that ever we had seen, considering they were +made and contrived without any edged tool: they are not above half a +fathom in breadth, and in length some seven or eight fathoms, and their +heads and sterns are both alike: they are made out with rafts of canes +and reeds on the starboard-side, with mast and sail: their sail is made +of mats of sedges square or triangle ways; and they sail as well right +against the wind as before it. These savages followed us so long that we +could not be rid of them until in the end our General commanded our +harquebusses to be made ready, and he himself fired one of them, and the +rest shot at them; but they were so nimble, that we could not discern +whether they were killed or not, because they could fall backward into +the sea and prevent us by diving. + +The 14th, by break of day, we fell in with an head-land of the +Philippines, which is called Cabo del Spirito Santo, which is of very +great bigness and length; high land in the midst of it, and very low +land, as the cape lieth east and west, trending far into the sea to the +westward. This cape or island is distant from the isle of Guana 310 +leagues. We were in sailing of this course eleven days, with scant winds +and foul weather, bearing no sail two or three nights. This island +standeth in thirteen degrees, and is inhabited for the most part by +heathens, and very woody through the whole island. It is short of the +chiefest island of the Philippines, called Manilla, about sixty leagues. +Manilla is well planted, and inhabited by Spaniards to the number of six +or seven hundred persons, who dwell in a town unwalled, which hath three +or four small block-houses, part made of wood and part of stone, being +indeed of no great strength. They have one or two small gallies +belonging to the town. It is a very rich place in gold and many other +commodities; and they have yearly traffic from Acapulco, in Nueva +Espanna, and also twenty or thirty ships from China, and from the +Sanguelos, which bringeth them many sorts of merchandize. The merchants +of China and the Sanguelos are part Moors and part heathens; they bring +great quantities of gold with them, which they traffic and exchange for +silver, and give weight for weight. These Sanguelos are men of great +genius for inventing and making all manner of things, especially in all +handicrafts and sciences; and every one is so expert, perfect, and +skilful in his faculty, that few or no Christians are able to go beyond +them in that which they take in hand. For drawing and embroidering upon +sattin, silk, or lawn, either beast, fowl, fish, or worm, for liveliness +and perfectness both in silk, silver, gold, and pearl, they excel. + +The 14th, at night, we entered the straits between the island of Lucon +and the island of Camlaia. + +The 15th day, we fell in with an island called Capul, and had, betwixt +that and another island, a very narrow passage, occasioned by a ledge of +rocks, lying off the point of the island of Capul, and no danger, but +water enough a good way off. Within the point there is a fine bay, and a +very good harbour in four fathoms water, within a cable’s length of the +shore. Our ship was no sooner come to an anchor, than presently there +came a canoe rowing on board us, in which was one of the chief Casiques +of the island, whereof there are seven, who, supposing that we were +Spaniards, brought us potatoe roots, which they call camotas, and green +cocoas, in exchange for which we gave his company linnen to the quantity +of a yard for four cocoas, and as much linnen for a basket of potatoe +roots, of a quart in quantity, which roots are very good eating, and +very sweet either roasted or boiled. + +This Casique’s skin was carved and cut with various coloured strakes and +devices all over his body; we kept him still on board, and caused him to +send those men who brought him on board back to the island, to invite +the rest of the principal men to come on board: who were no sooner gone +on shore, than presently the people of the island came down with their +cocoas and potatoe roots, and the rest of the Casiques likewise came on +board, and brought with them hens and hogs. They used the same order +with us which they do with the Spaniards; for they took for every hog, +which they call balboye, eight rials of plate, and for every hen or cock +one rial of plate. Thus we rode at anchor all that day, doing nothing +but buying roots, cocoas, hens, hogs, and such things as they brought, +refreshing ourselves very much. + +The same day, at night, Nicholas Roderigo, the Portuguese whom we had +taken out of the great Santa Anna, at the Cape of California, desired to +speak with our General in secret; which, when our General understood, he +sent for him, and asked him what he had to say to him. The Portuguese +made him answer, That, although he had offended his worship heretofore, +yet now he had vowed his faith and true service to him; and, in respect +whereof, he neither could nor would conceal such treason as was plotting +against him and his company; which was this, that the Spaniard who was +taken out of the great Santa Anna for a pilot, whose name was Thomas de +Ersola, had written a letter secretly, sealed it, and locked it up in +his chest, meaning to convey it, by the inhabitants of this island, to +Manilla; the contents whereof were, that there had been two English +ships along the coast of Chili, Peru, Nueva Espanna, and Nueva Galicia, +and that they had taken many ships and merchandize in them, and burnt +divers towns, and spoiled all that ever they could come unto; and that +they had taken the king’s ship which came from Manilla, and all his +treasure, and all the merchandize that was therein, and had set all the +people on shore, taking himself away by force; therefore he willed them +that they should make strong their bulwarks, with their two galleys, and +all such provision as they could possibly make. He further signified, +that we were riding at an island called Capul, which was at the end of +the island of Manilla; being but one ship with small force in it; and +that the other ship, as he supposed, was gone for the north-west +passage, standing in fifty-five degrees; and that, if they could use any +means to surprize us, being there at anchor, they should dispatch it, +for our force was but small, and our men but weak; and that the place +where we rode was but fifty leagues from them: otherwise, if they let us +escape, within a few years they must make account to have their town +besieged and sacked by an army of English. This information being given, +our General called for him, and charged him with these things, which, at +the first, he utterly denied; but, in the end, the matter being made +manifest and known of certainty by special trial and proofs, the next +morning, our General gave orders that he should be hanged, which was +accordingly performed the 16th of January. + +We rode for the space of nine days about this island of Capul, where we +had divers kinds of fresh victuals, with excellent fresh water in every +bay, and great plenty of wood. The people of this island go almost +naked, and are of a tawny colour. The men wear only a girdle about their +waists, of a kind of linnen of their own weaving, which is made of +plantain leaves, and an apron, which, coming from their back and +covering their nakedness, is made fast to their girdles at their navels. + +These people use a strange kind of order among them, which is this: +every man and man-child among them hath a little peg-nail thrust through +the head of his privy parts, being split in the lower end, and rivetted, +and on the head of the nail is as it were a crown; which they take out +and in as they have occasion: and for the truth thereof we ourselves +have taken one of these nails from a son of one of their kings, who was +of the age of ten years. + +On the 23d of January, our General, Mr. Thomas Cavendish, caused all the +chiefs of this island and of an hundred islands more, whom he had made +to pay tribute to him, which tribute was in hogs, hens, potatoes and +cocoas, to appear before him, and made himself and his company known +unto them, that they were Englishmen, and enemies to the Spaniards; and +thereupon spread his ensign, sounded his trumpets, and beat his drums; +which they much wondered at. To conclude, they promised both themselves +and all the islands thereabout, to aid him whensoever he should come +again to overcome the Spaniards. Also our General gave them, in token +that we were enemies to the Spaniards, money back again for all their +tribute which they had paid, which they took very friendly, and rowed +about our ship to give us pleasure. At last our General ordered a sacre +to be shot off, whereat they wondered, and, with great contentment, took +their leave of us. + +The next day, being the 26th of January, we set sail, about six o’clock +in the morning, and ran along the coast of the island of Manilla, +shaping our course north-west, between Manilla and the isle of Masbat. + +The 28th in the morning, about seven o’clock, riding at an anchor +between two islands, we spied a frigate under her courses, coming out +between two other islands, which, as we imagined, came from Manilla, +sailing close by the shore along the main island of Panama. We chaced +this frigate along the shore, and gained fast upon her, until in the end +we came so near that she stood in for the shore, close by a wind, and +being becalmed, banked up with her oars; whereupon we came to an anchor +with our ship a league and a half from the place where the frigate rowed +in, and manned our boat with half a dozen shot, and as many men with +swords, who did row the boat. Thus we made after the frigate, which had +run into a river where we could not reach her; but as we rowed along the +shore, our boat came into very shallow water, where many marks were set +up in divers places in the sea, from whence two or three canoes came +forth, whereof one made somewhat near unto us with three or four Indians +in it. We called unto them, but they would not come nearer unto us, but +rowed from us, whom we durst not follow too far, for fear of bringing +ourselves too much to the leeward of our ship. Here, as we looked about +us, we spied another balsa or canoe of a great bigness, which they who +were in her did set along, as we usually set a barge, with long staves +or poles, which was builded up with great canes, and below near the +water made to row with oars, wherein were about five or six Indians and +one Spaniard. Now, as we were come almost at the balsa, we ran aground +with our boat, but one or two of our men leapt overboard and freed it +again presently, and keeping thwart her head, we laid her aboard, and +took into us the Spaniard, but the Indians leaped into the sea, and +dived and rose again far off from us. Presently, upon the taking of this +canoe, there appeared upon the sands a band of soldiers, marching with +an ensign having a red cross like the flag of England, who were about +fifty or sixty Spaniards, lately come from Manilla to that town, which +is called Reguan, in a bark to fetch a new ship of the king’s, which was +building in a river within the bay, and staid there only for certain +irons to serve for the rudder of the said ship, which they looked for +every day. + +This band of men shot at us from the shore with their musquets, but hit +none of us, and we shot at them again. They also manned a frigate, and +sent it out after our boat to have taken us, but we with our oars went +from them; and whether they perceived they could not overtake us, but +that they must come within danger of the ordnance of our ship, they +stood in with the shore again, and landed their men; and presently sent +their frigate about the point, but whither we knew not: so we came on +board with this one Spaniard, who was neither soldier nor sailor, but +one who was come among the rest from Manilla, and had been in the +hospital there a long time before, and was a very simple fellow, and +such a one as could answer to very little that was enquired of him +concerning the state of the country. Here we rode at anchor all that +night, and perceived that the Spaniards had dispersed their band into +two or three parties, and kept great watch in several places with fires +and shooting-off of their pieces. + +This island hath much plain ground in it in many places, and many fair +and straight trees grow upon it, fit to make excellent masts for all +sorts of ships. There are also mines of very fine gold in it, which are +in the custody of the Indians. And, to the southward of this place, +there is another very great island, which is not subdued by the +Spaniards, nor any other nation. The people who inhabit it are all +negroes; and the island is called the Island of Negroes. It is almost as +big as England, standing in nine degrees. The most part of it seemeth to +be very low land, and, by all likelihood, is very fruitful. + +The 29th day of January, about six o’clock in the morning, we set sail, +sending our boat before, until it was two o’clock in the afternoon, +passing all this time as it were through a strait, betwixt the said two +islands of Panama and the island of Negroes; and, about 16 leagues off, +we espied a fair opening, trending south-west and by-south; at which +time our boat came on board, and our General sent commendations to the +Spanish Captain, whom we came from the evening before, by the Spaniard +we had taken, and desired him to provide good store of gold, for he +intended to see him with his company at Manilla within a few years, and +that he did but want a bigger boat to have landed his men, or else he +would have seen him then; and so caused him to be set on shore. + +The 8th day of February, by eight o’clock in the morning, we espied an +island near Gilolo, called Batochina, which standeth in one degree from +the Equinoctial Line, northward. + +The 14th day of February, we fell in with eleven or twelve very small +islands, lying very low and flat, full of trees; and passed by some +islands which are sunk, and have the dry sands lying in the main sea. +These islands, near the Moluccas, stand in three degrees ten minutes to +the southward of the Line. + +On the 17th day, one John Gameford, a cooper, died, who had been sick of +an old disease a long time. + +The 20th day, we fell in with certain other islands, which had many +small islands among them, standing four degrees to the southward of the +Line. + +On the 21st day of February, being Ash-Wednesday, Captain Havers died, +of a most violent and pestilent ague, which held him furiously for seven +or eight days, to the no small grief of our General, and of all the rest +of the company, who caused two falcons and one sacre to be shot off, +with all the small shot in the ship; who, after he was shrouded in a +sheet, was thrown over-board, with great lamentation of us all. +Moreover, presently after his death, myself, with divers others in the +ship, fell very sick, and so continued in very great pain for the space +of three weeks, or a month, by reason of the extreme heat and +intemperateness of the climate. + +The 1st day of March, having passed through the straits of Java Minor +and Java Major, we came to an anchor, under the south-west parts of Java +Major; where we espied certain of the inhabitants, who were fishing by +the sea side in a bay which was under the island. Then our General +taking into the ship-boat certain of his company, and a negroe who could +speak the Morisco tongue, whom he had taken out of the Santa Anna, made +towards those fishers; who, having espied our boat, ran on shore into +the woods, for fear of our men. But our General caused his negroe to +call unto them; who had no sooner heard him call, than presently one of +them came to the shore side, and made answer. Our General, by the +negroe, enquired of him for fresh water; which they found; and caused +the fisher to go to the King, and to acquaint him of a ship that was +come to have traffic for victuals, and for diamonds, pearls, or any +other rich jewels that he had for which, he should have either gold, or +other merchandize in exchange. The fisher answered, that we should have +all manner of victuals that we would request. Thus our boat came on +board again. Within a while after, we went about to furnish our ship +thoroughly with wood and water. + +About the 8th of March, two or three canoes came from the town unto us, +with eggs, hens, fresh fish, oranges, and limes, and brought word we +should have had victuals more plentifully, but that they were so far to +be brought to us where we rode. Which when our General heard, he weighed +anchor, and stood in nearer for the town; and, as we were under sail, we +met with one of the King’s canoes coming towards us: whereupon we dropt +some of our sails, and staid for the canoe until it came aboard us, then +stood into the bay, which was hard by, and came to an anchor. In this +canoe was the King’s Secretary, who had on his head a piece of died +linnen, folded up like unto a Turkish turban. He was all naked, except +about his waist; his breast was carved with the broad arrow upon it; he +went bare-footed. He had an interpreter with him, who was a Mestizo, +that is, half an Indian and half a Portuguese, who could speak very good +Portuguese. This Secretary signified unto our General, that he had +brought him an hog, hens, eggs, fresh fish, sugar canes, and wine, which +wine was as strong as aqua-vitæ, and as clear as any rock-water. He told +him farther, that he would bring victuals so sufficiently for him as he +and his company would request, and that within the space of four days. +Our General used him singularly well, banquetted him most royally with +the choice of many and sundry conserves, wines both sweet and otherwise; +and caused his musicians to make him music. This done, our General told +him, that he and his company were Englishmen; that we had been at China, +and had trafficked in that country; that we were come thither to make +enquiries, and purposed to go to Molucca. The people told our General, +that there were certain Portuguese in the island, who staid there as +factors continually, to traffic with them, to buy negroes, cloves, +pepper, sugar, and many other commodities. This Secretary of the King, +with his interpreter, lay one night on board our ship. The same night, +because they lay on board, in the evening at the setting of the watch, +our General commanded every man in the ship to provide his harquebuss, +and his shot; and so with shooting off forty or fifty small shot, and a +sacre, himself set the watch. This was no small wonder to these heathen +people, who had not commonly seen any ship so furnished with men and +ordnance. The next morning we dismissed the Secretary and his +interpreter, with all humanity. + +The fourth day after, which was the 12th of March, according to their +appointment, came the King’s canoes: but the wind being somewhat scant, +they could not get on board that night, but put into a bay under the +island until the next day; and, presently after the break of day, there +came to the number of nine or ten of the King’s canoes, so deeply laden +with provisions as they could swim, with two live oxen, half a score of +large fat hogs, a number of live hens, ducks, and geese, with eggs, +plantains, sugar-canes, sugar in plates, cocoas, sweet oranges, and +bitter limes, great store of wine and aqua-vitæ, salt to season meat +with, and almost all manner of provisions besides, accompanied with +divers of the King’s Officers who were there. Among all the rest of the +people, in one of these canoes, came two Portuguese, who were men of +middle stature, and very proper personage: they were each of them in a +loose jerkin and hose, which came down from the waist to the ancle, +according to the fashion of the country, and partly because it was Lent, +and a time for doing of their penance. They account it as a thing of +great dishonour among these heathens, to wear either hose or shoes on +their feet. The Portuguese had on each of them a very fair and a white +lawn shirt, with falling bands on the same, very decent, their bare legs +excepted. These Portuguese were no small joy unto our General, and all +the rest of our company; for we had not seen any christian that was our +friend for a year and an half before. Our General used and treated them +singularly well with banquets and music. They told us, that they were no +less glad to see us than we were to see them, and enquired into the +estate of their country, and what was become of Don Antonio, their King, +and whether he were living or not; for that they had not been in +Portugal for a long time, and that the Spaniards had always brought them +word that he was dead? Then our General satisfied them in every demand, +assuring them that their King was alive and in England, and had +honourable allowance from our Queen; and that there was war betwixt +Spain and England, and that we were come under the King of Portugal into +the South Sea, and had warred upon the Spaniards there, and had fired, +spoiled, and sunk all the ships along the coast that we could meet with, +to the number of eighteen or twenty sail. With this report they were +abundantly satisfied. + +On the other side, they declared unto us the state of the island of +Java: First, the plentifulness, great choice, and store of provisions of +all sorts, and of all manner of fruits, as before set down; then the +great and rich merchandizes which are there to be had. Then they +described the nature and properties of the people, as followeth: The +name of the King of that part of the island was Raya Bolamboam, who was +a man had in great majesty and fear among them. The common people may +not bargain, sell, or exchange any thing with any other nation, without +special licence from their King; and, if any so do, it is present death +for him. The King himself is a man of great years, and hath an hundred +wives; his son hath fifty. The custom of the country is, that, +whensoever the King doth die, they take the dead body and burn it, and +preserve the ashes of him; and, within five days next after, the wives +of the said King so dead, according to the custom and use of their +country, every one of them go together to a place appointed; and, the +chief of the women, who was nearest to him in account, hath a ball in +her hand, and throweth it from her; and to the place where the ball +resteth, thither they go all, and turn their faces to the eastward, and +every one, with a dagger in her hand (which dagger they call a crise, +and is as sharp as a razor), stab themselves to the heart, and, with +their own hands, bathe themselves in their blood, and falling flat on +their faces, so end their days. This thing is as true as it may seem to +any hearer to be strange. + + [Illustration: _The_ KING _of_ JAVA’_s Wives destroying themselves at + his Death_.] + +The men of themselves are very politic and subtle, and singularly +valiant (being naked men) in any action they undertake, and very +submissive and obedient to their king: for example, if their king +command them to undertake any exploit, be it ever so dangerous or +desperate, they dare not nor will not refuse, though they should die +every man of them in executing the same; for he will cut off the heads +of every one of them who return alive, without bringing their purpose to +pass; which is such a thing amongst them as maketh them the most valiant +people in all the south-east parts of the world; for they never fear any +death; for being in fight with any nation, if any of them feeleth +himself hurt with lance or sword, he will willingly run himself upon the +weapon quite through the body to procure his death the more speedily, +and in this desperate manner end his days, or overcome his enemy. +Moreover, although the men be tawny of colour, and go continually naked, +yet their women are fair of complexion, and go more apparelled. + +After they had thus described the state of the island and the order and +fashion of the people, they told us further, that, if their king, Don +Antonio, would come unto them, they would warrant him to have all the +Moluccas at command, besides China-Sanglos and the isles of the +Philippines; and that he might be assured to have all the Indians on his +side that were in the country. After we had fully contented these +Portuguese, and the people of Java who had brought us provisions in +their canoes, they took their leave of us with promise of all good +entertainment at our return; and our General gave them three great +pieces of ordnance at their departing. + +Thus, the next day, being the 16th of March, we set sail towards the +Cape of Good Hope, called by the Portuguese Cabo de Buena Esperanca, on +the most southern coast of Africa. + +The rest of March, and all the month of April, we spent in traversing +that mighty and vast sea, between the island of Java and the main of +Africa, observing the heavens, the Crosiers, or the South-pole, the +other stars, the fowls which are marks unto seamen of fair weather and +foul weather, approaching of lands or islands, the winds, the tempests, +the rains and thunder, with the alterations of tides and currents. + +The 10th day of May, we had a storm from the west, and it blew so hard +that it was as much as the ship could steer close by under the wind; and +the storm continued all that day and all that night. + +The next day, being the 11th of May, in the morning, one of the company +went up to the top, and espied land bearing north and north-by-west of +us; and about noon we espied land to bear west of us, which we imagined +to be the Cape of Buena Esperanca, whereof indeed we were short about +forty or fifty leagues; and, by reason of the scantness of the wind, we +stood along to the south-east until midnight, at which time the wind +came fair, and we hauled along westward. + +The 12th and 13th days we were becalmed, and the sky was very hazy and +thick until the 14th day at three o’clock in the afternoon, at which +time the sky cleared, and we spied land again, which was that called +Cabo Falso, which is short of Cabo de Buena Esperanca forty or fifty +leagues. + +This cape is very easy to be known, for there are right over it three +very high hills, standing but a small way one off another, and the +highest standeth in the midst, and the ground is much lower by the +sea-side. The Cape of Good Hope beareth west and by-south from the said +Cabo Falso. + +The 16th day of May, about four o’clock in the afternoon, the wind came +up at east a very brisk gale, which continued till Saturday with as much +wind as ever the ship could go before. At which time, by six o’clock in +the morning, we espied the promontory or head-land called the Cabo de +Buena Esperanca, which is a pretty high-land; and at the westernmost +point, a little off the main, appear two hummocks, the one upon the +other, and three other hummocks lying further off into the sea, yet low +land between and adjoining unto the sea. + +This Cape of Buena Esperanca is set down and accounted 2000 leagues from +the island of Java in the Portuguese sea charts, but it is not so much +by almost 150 leagues, as we found by the running of our ship. We were +in running of these 1850 leagues just nine weeks. + +The 8th day of June, by break of day, we fell in sight of the island of +St. Helena, seven or eight leagues short of it, having but a small gale +of wind, or almost none at all, insomuch as we could not get into it +that day, but stood off and on all that night. + +The next day, being the ninth of June, having a pretty easy gale of +wind, we stood in with the shore, our boat being sent away before to +make the harbour; and, about one o’clock in the afternoon, we came to an +anchor in twelve fathoms water, two or three cables length from the +shore, in a very fair and smooth bay under the north-west side of the +island. + +This island is very high land, and lieth in the main sea; standing, as +it were, in the midst of the sea, between the main land of Africa, the +main of Brazilia, and the coast of Guinea; and is in fifteen degrees +forty-eight minutes to the southward of the Equinoctial Line, and is +distant from the Cape of Buena Esperanca between five and six hundred +leagues. + +The same day, about two or three o’clock in the afternoon, we went on +shore, where we found an exceeding fair and pleasant valley, wherein +divers handsome buildings and houses were set up; and one particularly, +which was a church, was tiled and whitened on the outside very fair, and +made with a porch; and within the church, at the upper end, was set an +altar, whereon stood a very large table, set in a frame, having in it +the picture of our Saviour Christ upon the cross, and the image of our +Lady praying, with divers other histories curiously painted in the same. +The sides of the church were hung round with stained cloths, having many +devices drawn on them. + +There are two houses adjoining to the church, on each side one, which +serve for kitchens to dress meat in, with necessary rooms and houses of +office. The coverings of the said houses are made flat, where is planted +a very fair vine, and through both the said houses runneth a very good +and wholesome stream of fresh water. + +There is also over against the church a very fair causeway, made up with +stones reaching unto a valley by the sea side, in which valley is +planted a garden, wherein grow great store of pompions and melons; and +upon the said causeway is a frame erected, whereon hang two bells, +wherewith they ring to mass; and near to it a cross is set up, which is +squared, framed, and made very artificially of free-stone, whereon is +carved in cyphers what time it was built, which was in the year of our +Lord 1571. + +This valley is the fairest and largest low plot in all the island, and +is exceeding sweet and pleasant, and planted in every place, either with +fruit or with herbs. + +There are fig-trees which bear fruit continually and very plentifully; +for on every tree you may see blossoms, green figs, and ripe figs all at +once, and it is so all the year long. The reason is, that the island +standeth so near the sun. There is also great store of lemon-trees, +orange-trees, pomegranate-trees, pomecitron-trees, and date-trees, which +bear fruit as the fig-trees do, and are planted carefully and very +artificially, with pleasant walks under and between them; and the said +walks are overshadowed with the leaves of the trees; and in every void +place is planted parsley, sorrel, basil, fennel, anniseed, mustard-seed, +radishes, and many very good herbs. The fresh-water brook runneth +through divers places in this orchard, and may, with very small pains, +be made to water any one tree in the valley. + +This fresh-water stream cometh from the tops of the mountains, and +falleth from the cliff into the valley the height of a cable; and hath +many arms issuing out of it, that refresh the whole island, and almost +every tree in it. The island is altogether high mountains and steep +vallies, except it be on the tops of some hills, and down below in some +of the vallies, where great plenty of all those fruits before spoken of +do grow. There are much more growing on the tops of the mountains than +below in the vallies; but it is very toilsome and dangerous travelling +up unto them and down again, by reason of the height and steepness of +the hills. + +There are also upon this island great store of partridges, which are +very tame, not making any great haste to fly away, though one come very +near them, but only to run away and get up into the steep cliffs; we +killed some of them with a fowling-piece; they differ very much from our +partridges which are in England both in bigness and also in colour, for +they are almost as big as hens, and are of an ash colour, and live in +covies, twelve, sixteen, and twenty together; you cannot go ten or +twelve score paces but you shall see or spring one or two covies at the +least. + +There are likewise no less plenty of pheasants in the island, which are +also very big and fat, surpassing those which are in our country in +bigness and in numbers in a company; they differ not very much in colour +from the partridges before spoken of. We found, moreover, on this +island, plenty of Guinea-cocks, which we call turkies, of colour black +and white, with red heads; they are much the same in bigness with ours +in England; their eggs are white, and as big as a turkey’s egg. + +There are in this island thousands of goats, which the Spaniards call +cabritos, which are very wild; you shall see one or two hundred of them +together, and sometimes you may see them go in a flock almost a mile +long; some of them (whether it be the nature of the breed of them or of +the country I know not) are as big as an ass, with a mane like a horse, +and a beard hanging down to the very ground; they will climb up the +cliffs, which are so steep that a man would think it a thing impossible +that any living creature could go there. We took and killed many of them +for all their swiftness, for there are thousands of them upon the +mountains. + +Here are in like manner great store of swine, which are very wild and +fat, and of great bigness; they keep altogether upon the mountains, and +will very seldom abide any man to come near them, except it be by mere +chance, when they are found asleep, or otherwise, according to their +kind, are taken lying in the mire. + +We found in the houses, at our coming, three slaves who were negroes, +and one who was born in the island of Java, who told us, that the +East-Indian fleet, which were in number five sail, the least whereof was +in burden eight or nine hundred tons, all laden with spices and Calicut +cloth, with store of treasure, and very rich stones and pearls, were +gone from the said island, St. Helena, but twenty days before we came +thither. + +This island hath been found long ago by the Portuguese, and hath been +altogether planted by them for their refreshment, as they come from the +East-Indies; and, when they come, they have all things in plenty for +their relief, by reason that they suffer none to inhabit there, that +might eat up the produce of the island, except some very few sick +persons of their company, whom they suspect will not live until they +come home; these they leave there to refresh themselves, and take them +away the year following, with the other fleet, if they live so long. +They touch here rather in their coming home from the East Indies, than +at their going thither, because they are thoroughly furnished with corn +when they set out of Portugal; but are meanly victualled at their coming +from the Indies, where there groweth but little corn. + +The 20th day of June, having taken in wood and water, and refreshed +ourselves with such things as we found there, and made clean our ship, +we set sail about eight o’clock at night towards England. At our setting +sail we had the wind at south-east, and we hauled north-west and +by-west. The wind is commonly off the shore at this island of St. +Helena. + +On Wednesday the 3d day of July, we went away north-west, the wind being +still at south-east; at which time we were in one degree and forty-eight +minutes to the southward of the Equinoctial Line. + +The 12th day of the said month of July there was very little wind; and, +towards night, it was calm, and blew no wind at all, and so continued +till Monday, being the 15th day of July. + +On Wednesday the 17th day of the said month, we had a small gale at +west-north-west. We found the wind continually to blow at east and +north-east, and east-north-east, after we were in three or four degrees +to the northward; and it altered not until we came between thirty and +forty degrees to the northward of the Equinoctial Line. + +On Wednesday the 21st day of August, the wind came up at south-west a +fair gale; by which day at noon we were in thirty-eight degrees of north +latitude. + +On Friday in the morning, being the 23d of August, at four o’clock we +hauled east and east-by-south, for the most northern islands of the +Azores. + +On Saturday the 24th day of the said month, by five o’clock in the +morning, we fell in sight of the two islands of Flores and Corvo, +standing thirty-nine degrees thirty minutes; and sailed away north-east. + +The 3d of September, we met with a Flemish hulk that came from Lisbon, +and declared unto us the overthrowing of the Spanish fleet, to the +singular rejoicing and comfort of us all. + +The 9th of September, after a terrible tempest, which carried away most +part of our sails, by the merciful favour of the Almighty, we recovered +our long-wished-for port of Plymouth, in England, from whence we set +forth at the beginning of our voyage.” + +[The wealth acquired in this voyage, though very considerable, was soon +dissipated; and, in less than three years, Cavendish again found himself +under the necessity of preparing for a second, in which, however, he was +very unfortunate. He had, indeed, increased his preparations; and, it is +not to be doubted, but that the certainty he had conceived of acquiring +a more ample fortune by a second enterprize, made him the more careless +in the management of the treasure he had acquired by the first. + +The ships fitted out on this occasion were the Leicester, commanded by +himself as Admiral; the Roebuck, Captain Cocke, Vice-Admiral; the +Desire, Captain Davis, Rear-Admiral; the _Dainty_, Captain Coffen; and +the _Black Pinnace_, whose Commander’s name is not mentioned. The +Commanders in this expedition were some of the ablest navigators the +nation produced, and the highest expectations were formed from their +fortitude and approved experience. + +Of the accounts that have been given of this expedition, that published +by John Jane, a gentleman who accompanied Captain Davis in the Desire, +is the most complete; for which reason, we shall give it in the writer’s +own words, as it is but in few hands, and full of interesting events: + +“The 26th of Aug. 1591, we departed from Plymouth, says Mr. Jane, with +three large ships and two barks. + +The 29th of November, we fell in with the bay of Salvador, upon the +coast of Brasil, twelve leagues on this side Cape Frio, where we were +becalmed until the 2d of December: at which time we took a small bark +bound for the river of Plate, with sugar, haberdash-wares, and negroes. +The master of this bark brought us to an isle called Placentia, thirty +leagues west from Cape Frio, where we arrived the 5th of December, and +rifled six or seven houses inhabited by the Portuguese. The 11th, we +departed from this place, and, the 14th, arrived at the island of St. +Sebastian; from whence Mr. Cocke and Captain Davis presently departed +with the Desire and Black Pinnace, for taking the town of Santos. The +15th, at evening, we anchored at the bar of Santos, from whence we +departed, with our boats, to the town; by which expedition, we took all +the people at mass, both men and women, whom we kept all that day in the +church as prisoners. The cause why Mr. Cavendish desired to take this +town, was to supply his great wants; and, having it now in quiet +possession, we stood in assurance of having provisions in great +abundance. But such was the negligence of Captain Cocke, that the +Indians were suffered to carry out whatsoever they would in open view, +and no man did controul them: and the next day, after we had won the +town, our prisoners were all set at liberty; only four poor old men were +kept as pledges to supply our wants. Thus, in three days, the town, +which was able to furnish such another fleet with all kinds of +necessaries, was left unto us nakedly bare, without people and +provisions. + +Eight or ten days after, Mr. Cavendish himself came hither, where he +remained until the 22d of January, seeking by entreaty to have that +whereof we were once possessed. But, in conclusion, we departed worse +furnished from the town, than when we came unto it. The 22d, we burnt +St. Vincent’s to the ground. The 24th, we set sail, shaping our course +for the straits of Magellan. + +The 7th of February, we had a very great storm; and, the 8th, our fleet +was separated by the fury of the tempest. Then our Captain called unto +him the master of our ship, a very honest and sufficient man; and, +conferring with him, he concluded to go for Port Desire, hoping that the +General would come thither, because that in his first voyage he had +found great relief there; for our Captain could never get any direction +what course to take in any such extremities, though many times he had +entreated for it, as often I have heard him with grief report. In +sailing to this port, by good chance, we met with the Roebuck, wherein +Mr. Cocke had endured great extremities, and lost his boat, and +therefore desired our Captain to keep him company, for he was in a very +desperate situation. Our Captain hoisted out his boat, and went on board +him to know his estate, and, returning, told us the hardness thereof, +and desired the Master and all the company to be careful in all their +watches not to lose the Roebuck, and so we both arrived at Port Desire +the sixth of March. + +The 16th of March, the Black Pinnace came to us; but the Dainty came +not, but returned back to England, leaving their captain on board the +Roebuck, without any provision more than the apparel that he wore. The +18th the Leicester came into the road, and Mr. Cavendish came into the +harbour in a boat which he had made at sea; for his long boat and +pinnace were lost at sea: and being on board the Desire, he told our +captain of all his extremities, and spoke most hardly of his company, +and of divers gentlemen that were with him, purposing no more to go on +board his own ship, but to stay in the Desire. We all sorrowed to hear +such hard speeches of our good friends; but having spoken with the +gentlemen of the Leicester, we found them faithful, honest, and resolute +in proceeding, although it pleased our General otherwise to conceive of +them. + +The 20th of March, we departed from Port Desire, Mr. Cavendish being in +the Desire with us. The 8th of April, we fell in with the straits of +Magellan, enduring many furious storms between Port Desire and the +strait. The 14th, we passed through the first strait. The 16th, we +passed the second strait, being ten leagues distant from the first. The +18th, we doubled Cape Froward, which cape lieth in 53 degrees 30 +minutes. The 21st we were forced, through the fury of the weather, to +put into a small cove with our ships, four leagues from the said cape, +upon the south shore, where we remained until the 15th of May. In the +which time we endured extreme storms, with perpetual snow, where many of +our men died with cursed famine, and miserable cold, not having +wherewith to cover their bodies, nor to fill their bellies, but living +by muscles, water, and weeds of the sea, with a small relief, from the +ship’s store, in meal, sometimes. And all the sick men in the Leicester +were most uncharitably put on shore into the woods, in the snow, rain, +and cold, when men of good health could scarcely endure it, where they +ended their lives in the highest degree of misery, Mr. Cavendish all the +while being on board the Desire. In these great extremities of snow and +cold, doubting what the end would be, he asked our captain’s opinion, +because he was a man that had good experience of the north-west parts, +in his three several discoveries that way, employed by the merchants of +London. Our captain told him, that this snow was a matter of no long +continuance, and gave him sufficient reason for it, and that thereby he +could not much be prejudiced or hindered in his proceeding. +Notwithstanding, he called together all the company, and told them, that +he purposed not to stay in the straits, but to depart upon some other +voyage, or else to return again for Brazil: but his resolution was to go +for the Cape of Good Hope. The company answered, that, if it pleased +him, they did desire to stay God’s favour for a wind, and to endure all +hardness whatsoever, rather than to give over the voyage, considering +they had been here but a small time, and because they were within forty +leagues of the South Sea, it grieved them now to return: +notwithstanding, whatever he ordered, that they would perform. So he +concluded to go for the Cape of Good Hope, and to give over this voyage. +Then our captain, after Mr. Cavendish was come on board the Desire from +talking with the company, told him, that, if it pleased him to consider +the great extremity of his situation, the slenderness of his provisions, +with the weakness of his men, it was no course for him to proceed in +that new enterprize: for if the rest of your ships (said he) be +furnished answerable to this, it is impossible to perform your +determination; for we have no more sails than masts, no victuals, no +ground-tackling, no cordage more than is over-head, and, among +seventy-five persons, there is but the master alone that can order the +ship, and but fourteen sailors: the rest are gentlemen, serving-men, and +artificers. Therefore it will be a desperate case to take so hard an +enterprize in hand. These persuasions did our captain not only use to +Mr. Cavendish, but also to Mr. Cocke. In fine, upon a petition delivered +in writing by the chief of the whole company, the General determined to +depart out of the straits of Magellan, and to return again for Santos in +Brazil. + +So the 15th of May, we set sail, our General being then in the +Leicester. The 18th, we were free of the straits, but at Cape Froward it +was our hard hap to have our boat sunk at our stern in the night, and to +lose all our oars. + +On the 20th, being thwart of Port Desire, in the night the General +altered his course, as we suppose, by which occasion we lost him: for, +in the evening, he stood close by a wind to seaward, having the wind at +north-north-east, and we standing the same way, the wind not altering, +could not the next day see him: so that we then persuaded ourselves, +that he was gone for Port Desire to relieve himself, or that he had +sustained some mischance at sea, and was gone thither to remedy it. +Whereupon our captain called the General’s men unto him, with the rest, +and asked their opinion what was to be done. Every one conjectured that +the General was gone for Port Desire. Then the Master, being the +General’s man, and careful of his master’s service, as also of good +judgment in sea-matters, told the company how dangerous it was to go for +Port Desire, if we should there miss the General: for (said he) we have +no boat to land ourselves, nor any anchors or cables that I dare trust +in so quick streams as are there: yet, in all likelihood concluding that +the General was gone thither, we steered our course for Port Desire, and +by chance met with the Black Pinnace, which had likewise lost the fleet, +being in a very miserable case: so we both concluded to seek the General +at Port Desire. + +The 26th day of May, we came to Port Desire, where not finding our +General as we hoped, being most slenderly victualled, without sails, +boat, oars, nails, cordage, and all other necessaries for our relief, we +were struck into a deadly sorrow. But, referring all to Providence, we +entered the harbour, and found a place of quiet road, which before we +knew not. Having moored our ship with the pinnace’s boat, we landed upon +the south shore, where we found a standing pool of fresh-water, which by +estimation might hold about ten tons, whereby we were greatly comforted. +From this pool we fetched more than forty tons of water, and yet we left +the pool as full as we found it. And, because at our first being at this +harbour we were at this place and found no water, we persuaded ourselves +that God had sent it for our relief. Also there were such extraordinary +low ebbs as we had never seen, whereby we got muscles in plenty and +great abundance of smelts, so that, with hooks made of pins, every man +caught as many as he could eat: by which means we preserved our ship’s +victuals, and spent not any during the time of our abode here. + +Our Captain and Master, considering our ability to go to the General, +found our wants so great, as that in a month we could not fit our ship +to set sail; for we must needs set up a smith’s forge to make bolts, +spikes, and nails, besides the repairing of our other wants. Whereupon +they concluded it to be their best course, to take the pinnace, and to +furnish her, and to go to the General with all expedition, leaving the +ship and the rest of the company until the General’s return; for he had +vowed to our Captain, that he would return again to the straits, as he +had told us. The Captain and Master of the pinnace, being the General’s +men, were well contented with the motion. + +But the General having in our ship two most pestilent fellows, when they +heard of this determination, they utterly misliked it, and, in secret, +dealt with the company of both ships, vehemently persuading them that +our Captain and Master would leave them in the country to be devoured by +the cannibals, and that they were merciless and without charity: +whereupon the whole company joined in secret with them, in a night, to +murder our Captain and Master, with myself and all those they thought +were their friends. There were marks taken in his cabbin, how to kill +him with musquets through the ship’s side, and bullets made of silver +for the execution, if their other purposes should fail. All agreed +hereunto except the boatswain of our ship, who, when he knew the matter, +revealed it to the Master, and so to the Captain. Then the matter being +called in question, those two murderous fellows were found out, whose +names were Charles Parker and Edward Smith. + +The Captain, being thus hardly beset, in peril of famine, and in danger +of being murdered, was constrained to use lenity, and by courteous means +to pacify this fury: shewing, that, to do the General service, unto whom +he had vowed faith in this action, was the cause why he purposed to go +unto him in the pinnace, considering that the pinnace was so necessary a +thing for him, as that he could not be without her, because he was +fearful of the shore in so great ships. Whereupon all cried, with +cursing and swearing, that the pinnace should not go unless the ship +went. Then the Captain desired them to shew themselves christians, and +not so blasphemously to behave themselves, without regard and +thanksgiving to God for their great deliverance. By which gentle +speeches, the matter was pacified, and the Captain and Master, at the +request of the company, were content to forgive this great treachery of +Parker and Smith, who, after many admonitions, concluded in these words: +“The Lord judge between you and me:” which after came to a most sharp +revenge, even by the punishment of the Almighty. Thus, by a general +consent, it was concluded not to depart, but to stay there for the +General’s return. Then our captain and Master, seeing that they could +not do the General that service which they desired, made a motion to the +company, that they would lay down under their hands the losing of the +General, with the extremities wherein we then stood: whereunto they +consented, and wrote under their hands what followeth: + + _The Testimonial of the Company of the_ Desire, _touching the losing + of their General, which appeareth to have been utterly against their + meanings._ + +“The 26th of August 1591, we whose names are here underwritten, with +divers others, departed from Plymouth, under Mr. Thomas Cavendish our +General, with four ships of his, viz. the Leicester, the Roebuck, the +Desire, and the Black Pinnace, for the performance of a voyage into the +South Sea. The 19th of November, we fell in with the bay of Salvador, in +Brazil. The 16th of December we took the town of Santos, hoping there to +revictual ourselves, but it fell not out to our contentment. The 24th of +January we set sail from Santos, shaping our course for the straits of +Magellan. The 8th of February, by violent storms, the said fleet being +parted, the Roebuck and the Desire arrived at Port Desire the sixth of +March. The sixteenth of March, the Black Pinnace arrived there also: and +the 18th of the same, our Admiral came into the road, with whom we +departed the 20th of March in poor and weak estate. The 8th of April +1592, we entered the straits of Magellan. The 21st of April we anchored +beyond Cape Froward, within 40 leagues of the South Sea, where we rode +until the 15th of May. In which time we had great store of snow, with +some gusty weather, the wind continuing still west-north-west against +us. In this time we were inforced, for the preserving of our victuals, +to live the most part upon muscles, our provision was so slender; so +that many of our men died in this hard extremity. Then our General +returned for Brazil, there to winter, and to procure victuals for this +voyage against the next year. So we departed the straits, the 15th of +May. The 21st, being thwart of Port Desire, 36 leagues off the shore, +the wind then at north-east and by-north; at five of the clock at night, +lying north-east, we suddenly cast about, lying south-east and by-south, +and sometimes south-east: the whole fleet following the Admiral, our +ship coming under his lee, shot a-head of him, and so framed sail fit to +keep company. This night we were severed, by what occasion we protest we +know not, whether we lost them or they us. In the morning we only saw +the Black Pinnace, then supposing the Admiral had overshot us. All this +day we stood to the eastwards, hoping to find him; because it was not +likely that he would stand to the shore again so suddenly. But missing +him towards night, we stood to the shoreward, hoping by that course to +find him. The 22d of May, at night, we had a violent storm, with the +wind at north-west, and we were inforced to hull, not being able to bear +sail; and this night we perished our main tressle-trees, so that we +could no more use our main-top-sail, lying most dangerously in the sea. +The pinnace likewise received a great leak, so that we were inforced to +seek the next shore for our relief. And, because famine was like to be +the best end, we desired to go for Port Desire, hoping, with seals and +penguins, to relieve ourselves, and so to make shift to follow the +General, or there to stay his coming from Brasil. The 24th of May we had +much wind at north. The 25th was calm, and the sea very lofty, so that +our ship had dangerous foul weather. The 26th, our fore-shrouds broke, +so that, if we had not been near the shore, it had been impossible for +us to get out of the sea. And now, being here moored in Port Desire, our +shrouds are all rotten, not having a running rope whereto we may trust, +and being provided only of one shift of sails, all worn, our top-sails +not able to abide any stress of weather; neither have we any pitch, tar, +or nails, nor any store for the supplying of these wants; and we live +only upon seals and muscles, having but five hogsheads of pork within +board, and meal three ounces for a man a day, with water for to drink. +And for as much as it hath pleased God to separate our fleet, and to +bring us into such hard extremities, that only now by his mere mercy we +expect relief, though otherwise we are hopeless of comfort; yet, because +the wonderful works of God, in his exceeding great favour towards us his +creatures, are far beyond the scope of man’s capacity, therefore by him +we hope to have deliverance in this our deep distress. Also, for as much +as those upon whom God will bestow the favour of life, with return home +to their country, may not only remain blameless, but also manifest the +truth of our actions, we have thought good, in christian charity, to lay +down under our hands the truth of all our proceedings, even till the +time of this our distress. + +Given in Port Desire, the 2d of June, 1592,” &c. + +After they had delivered this under their hands, then we began to labour +to preserve our lives; and we built up a smith’s forge, and made nails, +bolts, and spikes; others made ropes of a piece of our cable; and the +rest gathered muscles, and took smelts, for the whole company. Three +leagues from this harbour there is an isle with four small isles about +it, where there are abundance of seals; and, at that time of the year, +the penguins came thither, in great plenty, to breed. We concluded with +the pinnace, that she should sometimes go thither to catch seals for us; +upon which condition we would share victuals with her man for man; +whereunto the whole company agreed. So we parted our poor store, and she +laboured to fetch us seals to eat, wherewith we lived when smelts and +muscles failed; for in the nep-tides we could get no muscles. Thus, in +the most miserable calamity, we remained until the 6th of August, still +keeping watch upon the hills to look for our General and so great was +our vexation and anguish of soul, as I think never flesh and blood +endured more. Our misery daily increasing, time passing, and our hope of +the General being very cold, our Captain and Master were fully persuaded +that the General might, perhaps, go directly for the straits, and not +come to this harbour: whereupon, they thought no course more convenient, +than to go presently for the straits, and there to stay his coming; for, +in that place he could not pass, but of force we must see him: Whereunto +the company most willingly consented, as also the Captain and Master of +the pinnace; so that upon this determination we made all possible speed +to depart. + + [Illustration: Cavendishes Crew _in Great distress at Port desire, + Setup a Forge & repair their shatterd Vessels_.] + +The 6th of August we set sail, and went to Penguin Isle; and, the next +day, we salted 20 hogsheads of seals, which was as much as our salt +could do. The 7th, towards night, we departed from Penguin Isle. The +9th, we had a sore storm, so that we were constrained to hull, for our +sails were not fit to endure any force. The 14th, we were driven in +among certain isles never before discovered by any known relation, lying +fifty leagues, or better, off the shore, east and northerly from the +straits; in which place, had not the wind ceased, we must of necessity +have perished. But, the wind shifting, we directed our course for the +straits; and, the 18th of August, we fell in with the Cape in a very +thick fog; and, the same night, we anchored ten leagues within the Cape. +The 19th, we passed the first and second straits. The 21st, we doubled +Cape Froward. The 22d, we anchored in Salvage Cove, so called because we +saw many savages there. Notwithstanding the extreme cold of this place, +yet do all these people go naked, and live in the woods like satyrs, +painted and disguised, and flee from you like wild deer. They are very +strong, and threw stones at us of three or four pounds weight, an +incredible distance. The 24th, in the morning, we departed from this +cove, and the same day we came into the north-west reach, which is the +last reach of the straits. The 25th, we anchored in a good cove, within +14 leagues of the South Sea: in this place we purposed to stay for the +General; for the strait at this place, is scarce three miles broad, so +that he could not pass but we must see him. After we had staid here a +fortnight in the depth of winter, our victuals consuming (for our seals +stunk most vilely, and our men died pitifully through cold and famine, +for the greatest part of them had not cloaths to defend them from the +extremity of the winter’s cold) being in this heavy distress, our +Captain and Master thought it the best course to depart from the straits +into the South Sea, and to go for the isle of Santa Maria, which is to +the northward of Baldivia, in 37 deg. 15 min. where we might have +relief, and be in a temperate clime, and there stay for the General, for +of necessity he must come by that isle. So we departed the 13th of +September, and came in sight of the South Sea. On the 14th, we were +forced back again, and recovered a cove, three leagues within the +straits from the South Sea. Again we put forth, and being eight or ten +leagues free of the land, the wind rising furiously at west-north-west, +we were forced back again into the straits for want of sails; for we +never durst bear sail in any stress of weather, they were so weak: so +again we recovered the cove three leagues within the straits, where we +endured most furious weather; so that one of our two cables brake, +whereby we were hopeless of life: yet it pleased God to calm the storm, +and we unreeved our sheets, tacks, halliards, and other ropes, and +moored our ship to the trees, close by the rocks. We laboured to recover +our anchor again, but could not, it lay so deep in the water, and, as we +think, covered with oaze. Now had we but one anchor, which had but one +whole fluke, a cable spliced in two places, and a piece of an old one. +In the midst of these our troubles, the wind came fair the first of +October; whereupon, with all expedition, we loosed our moorings, and +weighed our anchor, and so towed off into the channel; for we had mended +our boat in Port Desire, and had five oars of the pinnace. When we had +weighed our anchor, we found our cable broken; only one strand held. +Being in the channel, we reeved our ropes, and again rigged our ship; no +man’s hand was idle, but all laboured even for the last gasp of life. +Here our company was divided; some desired to go again for Port Desire, +and there to be set on shore, where they might travel for their lives; +and some stood with the Captain and Master to proceed. Whereupon the +Captain said to the Master, “Master, you see the wonderful extremity of +our estate, and the great doubts among our company of the truth of your +reports, as touching relief to be had in the South Sea. Now, good +Master, for as much as you have been in this voyage once before with +your Master the General, satisfy the company of such truths as are to +you best known; and, you the rest of the General’s men, who likewise +have been with him in his first voyage, if you hear any thing contrary +to the truth, spare not to reprove it, I pray you.” Then the Master +said, “If you think good to return, I will not gainsay it: but this I +think, if life may be preserved by any means, it is in proceeding; for +at the isle of Santa Maria I do assure you of wheat, pork, and roots +enough. Also, I will bring you to an isle where pelicans be in great +abundance, and we shall have meal in great plenty, besides a possibility +of intercepting some ships upon the coast of Chili and Peru. But, if we +return, there is nothing but death to be hoped for: therefore, do as you +like, I am ready; but my desire is to proceed.” These his speeches, +being confirmed by others that were in the former voyage, there was a +general consent for proceeding; and so, the 2d of October, we put into +the South Sea, and were free of all land. This night the wind began to +blow very much at west-north-west, and still increased in fury, so that +we were in great doubt what course to take. To put into the straits we +durst not, for lack of ground-tackle: to bear sail we doubted, the +tempest was so furious, and our sails so bad. The pinnace came round +with us, and told us that she had received many grievous seas, and that +her ropes did every hour fail her, so as they could not tell what shift +to make. We, being unable in any sort to help her, stood under our +courses in view of the lee-shore, still expediting our ruinous end. + +The 4th of October, the storm growing beyond measure furious, the +pinnace, being in the wind of us, struck suddenly a hull, so that we +thought she had received some grievous sea, or sprung a leak, or that +her sails failed her, because she came not with us; but we durst not +hull in that unmerciful storm, but sometimes tried under our main +course, sometimes with a haddock of our sail, for our ship was very +leeward, and most laboursome in the sea. This night we lost the pinnace, +and never saw her again. + +The 5th, our fore-sail was split and all torn: then our Master took the +mizzen, and brought it to the fore-mast, to make our ship work, and with +our sprit-sail we mended our fore-sail, the storm continuing beyond all +description in fury, with hail, snow, rain, and wind, such and so +mighty, as that in nature it could not possibly be more, the sea such +and so lofty, with continual breach, that many times we were doubtful +whether our ship did sink or swim. + +The 10th of October, being, by the account of our Captain and Master, +very near the shore, the weather dark, the storm furious, and most of +our men having given over to labour, we yielded ourselves to death +without further hope of succour. Our Captain sitting in the gallery very +pensive, I came and brought him some _rosa solis_, to comfort him; for +he was so cold, that he was scarce able to move a joint. After he had +drank, and was comforted in heart, he began, for the ease of his +conscience, to make a large repetition of his forepassed time, and, with +many grievous sighs, he concluded with a short prayer for our +preservation. Having ended, he desired me not to make known to any of +the company his intolerable grief and anguish of mind, because they +should not thereby be dismaid. And so suddenly, before I went from him, +the sun shined clear; so that he and the Master both observed the true +elevation of the Pole, whereby they knew by what course to recover the +straits. Wherewithal our Captain and Master were so revived, and gave +such comfortable speeches to the company, that every man rejoiced, as +though we had received a present deliverance. The next day, being the +11th of October, we saw Cape Deseado, being the cape on the south shore +(the north shore being nothing but a company of dangerous rocks, isles, +and shoals). This cape being within two leagues to the leeward of us, +our Master greatly doubted that we could not double the same: +nevertheless, being a man of good spirit, he resolutely made quick +dispatch, and set sail. Our sails had not been half an hour on board, +but the foot-rope of our fore-sail brake, so that nothing held but the +oylet-holes. The seas continually brake over the ship’s poop, and flew +into the sails with such violence, that we still expected the tearing of +our sails, or over-setting of the ship; and, besides, to our utter +discomfort, we perceived that we fell still more and more to lee-ward, +so that we could not double the cape. We were now come within half a +mile of the cape, and so near the shore, that the counter-surf of the +sea would rebound against the ship’s side, so that we were much dismaid +with the horror of our present end. Being thus at the very point of our +death, the wind and the seas raging beyond measure, our Master veered +some of the main sheet; and whether it was by that occasion, or by some +current, or by the wonderful power of God, as we verily think it was, +the ship quickened her way, and shot past that rock, where we thought +she would have shored. Then between the cape and the point there was a +little bay; so that we were somewhat farther from the shore: and, when +we came so far as the cape, we yielded to death; yet the Father of all +mercies delivered us, and we doubled the cape about the length of our +ship, or very little more. Being shot past the cape, we presently took +in our sails, which only God had preserved unto us; and when we were +shot in between the high lands, the wind blowing trade, without an inch +of sail, we spooned before the sea, three men being not able to guide +the helm, and in six hours we were put twenty-five leagues within the +straits, where we found a sea answerable to the ocean. + +In this time we freed our ship from water, and after we had rested a +little, our men were not able to move; their sinews were stiff, and +their flesh dead, and many of them (which is most lamentable to be +reported) were so eaten with lice, as that in their flesh did lie +clusters of them, as big as pease, yea and some as big as beans. Being +in this misery, we were constrained to put into a cove, for the +refreshing of our men. Our Master knowing the shore, and every cove very +perfectly, put in with the shore, and moored to the trees, as before +time we had done, laying our anchor to the sea-ward. Here we continued +until the 20th of October; but not being able any longer to stay, +through extremity of famine, the 21st we put off into the channel, the +weather being reasonably calm: but before night it blew most extremely +at west-north-west. The storm growing outrageous, our men could scarcely +stand by their labour; and, the straits being full of turning reaches, +we were constrained by the discretion of the Captain and Master in their +accounts, to guide the ship in the hell-dark night, when we could not +see any shore, the channel being in some places scarce three miles +broad. But our Captain, as we first passed through the straits, drew +such an exquisite plan of the same, as I am assured it cannot in any +sort be bettered: which plan he and the Master so often perused, and so +carefully regarded, as that in memory they had every turn and creek, and +in the deep-dark night, without any doubting, they conveyed the ship +through that crooked channel: so that I conclude, the world hath not any +so skilful pilots for that place, as they are; for otherwise we could +never have passed in such sort as we did. + +The 25th, we came to an island in the straits, named Penguin Isle, +whither we sent our boat to seek relief, for there were great abundance +of birds, and the weather was very calm; so we came to an anchor by the +island in seven fathoms. While our boat was on shore, and we had great +store of penguins, there arose a sudden storm, so that our ship did +drive over a breach, and our boat sunk at the shore. Captain Cotton and +the Lieutenant, being on shore, leapt into the boat and freed the same, +and threw away all the birds, and with great difficulty recovered the +ship: myself also was in the boat at the same time, where for my life I +laboured to the best of my power. The ship, all this while, driving upon +the lee-shore, when we came on board we helped to set sail, and weighed +the anchor; for before our coming they could scarce hoist up their +yards, yet with much ado they set their fore-course. Thus in a mighty +fret of weather, the 27th day of October we were free of the straits, +and the 30th of October we came to Penguin Isle, being three leagues +from Port Desire, the place where we purposed to seek for our relief. + +When we were come to this isle we sent our boat on shore, which returned +laden with birds and eggs; and our men said the penguins were so thick +upon the isle, that ships might be laden with them; for they could not +go without trampling upon the birds, whereat we greatly rejoiced. Then +the captain appointed Charles Parker and Edward Smith, with twenty +others, to go on shore, and to stay upon the isle, for the killing and +drying of these penguins, and promised, after the ship was in harbour, +to send the rest, not only for expedition, but also to save the small +store of victuals in the ship. But Parker, Smith, and the rest of their +faction, suspected that this was a device of the captain’s to leave his +men on shore, that, by these means, there might be victuals for the rest +to recover their country: and when they remembered that this was the +place where they would have slain their captain and master, surely +(thought they) for revenge hereof will they leave us on shore. Which, +when our captain understood, he called God to witness, that revenge was +no part of his thoughts; they gave him thanks, desiring to go into the +harbour with the ship, which he granted. So there were only ten left +upon the isle, and the last of October we entered the harbour. Our +master, at our last being here, having taken careful notice of every +creek in the river, in a very convenient place, upon sandy oaze, ran the +ship a-ground, laying our anchor to sea-ward, and with our running ropes +moored her to stakes upon the shore, which he had fastened for that +purpose; where the ship remained till our departure. + +The 3d of November, our boat with water, wood, and as many as she could +carry, went for the isle of Penguins; but being deep she durst not +proceed, but returned again the same night. Then Parker, Smith, +Townshend, Purpet, with five others, desired that they might go by land, +and that the boat might fetch them when they were against the isle, it +being scarce a mile from the shore. The captain bade them do what they +thought best, advising them to take weapons with them: “For, (saith he) +although we have not at any time seen people in this place, yet in the +country there may be savages.” They answered: “That here were great +store of deer, and ostriches: but if there were savages, they would +devour them.” Notwithstanding, the captain caused them to take weapons +with them, carlivers, swords, and targets: so the 6th of November, they +departed by land, and the boat by sea; but from that day to this day we +never heard of our men. The 11th, while most of our men were at the +isle, only the captain and master, with six others, being left in the +ship, there came a great multitude of savages to the ship, throwing dust +in the air, leaping and running like brute beasts, having vizards on +their faces like dogs faces, or else their faces are dogs faces indeed. +We greatly feared lest they would set our ship on fire, for they would +suddenly make fire, whereat we much marvelled: they came to windward of +our ship, and set the bushes on fire, so that we were in a very stinking +smoak; but as soon as they came within our shot, we shot at them, and +striking one of them in the thigh, they all presently fled; so that we +never saw more of them. Hereby we judged, that these cannibals had slain +our nine men. When we considered who they were that were thus murdered, +and found that they were the principal men who would have murdered the +captain and master, with their friends, we saw the just judgment of God, +and made supplication to his Divine Majesty to be merciful unto us. +While we were in this harbour, our captain and master went with the boat +to discover how far this river did run, that, if need should enforce us +to leave our ship, we might know how far we might go by water: so they +found, that, farther than twenty miles, they could not go with the boat. +At their return they sent the boat to the isle of penguins: whereby we +understood that the penguins dried to our hearts content, and that the +multitude of them was infinite. All the time that we were in this place, +we fared passing well with eggs, penguins, young seals, young gulls, and +other birds, such as I know not, of all which we had abundance. In this +place we found an herb called Scurvy-grass, which we fried with eggs, +using train-oil instead of butter. This herb did so purge the blood, +that it took away all kinds of swellings, of which many had died, and +restored us to perfect health of body; so that we were in as good case +as when we came first out of England. We staid in this harbour until the +22d of December, in which time we had dried 20,000 penguins; and the +captain, the master, and myself, had made some salt, by laying +salt-water upon the rocks in holes, which, in six days would be kerned. +Thus God did feed us, even as it were with manna from heaven. + +The 22d of December, we departed with our ship for the isle, where, with +great difficulty, by the skilful industry of our master, we got 14,000 +of our birds, and had almost lost our captain in labouring to bring the +birds on board: and, had not our master been very expert in the set of +those tides, which run after many fashions, we had also lost our ship in +the same place. The 22d at night we departed with 14,000 dried penguins, +not being able to fetch the rest, and shaped our course for Brazil. Now, +our captain rated our victuals, and brought us to such allowance, as +that our victuals might last six months for our hope was, that within +six months we might recover our country, though our sails were very bad. +So our allowance was two ounces and an half of meal for a man a-day, and +to have so twice a-week; so that five ounces did serve for a week. Three +days a week, we had oil, three spoonfuls for a man a-day; and two days +in a week pease, a pint among four men a-day, and every day five +penguins for four men, and six quarts of water for four men a-day. This +was our allowance; wherewith we lived, though weakly, and very feeble. +The 30th of January, we arrived at the isle of Placentia in Brazil, the +first place that, outward-bound, we were at: and having made the shoal, +our ship lying off at sea, the captain, with twenty-four of the company, +went with the boat on shore, being a whole night before they could +recover it. The last of January, at sun-rising, they suddenly landed, +hoping to take the Portuguese in their houses, and by that means to +recover some Casavi meal, or other victuals for our relief; but when +they looked for the houses, they were all razed and burnt to the ground, +so that we thought no man had remained on the island. Then the captain +went to the gardens, and brought from thence fruits and roots for the +company, and came on board the ship, and brought her into a fine creek +which we had found out, where we might moor her by the trees, and where +there was water, and hoops to trim our casks. Our case being very +desperate, we presently laboured for dispatch away; some cut hoops, +which the coopers made, others laboured upon the sails and ship, every +man travailing for his life; and still a guard was kept on shore to +defend those that laboured, every man having likewise his weapon by him. +The 3d of February, our men, with twenty-three shot, went again to the +gardens, being three miles from us upon the north shore, and fetched +Casavi-roots out of the ground, to relieve our company, instead of +bread; for we spent not of our meal while we staid here. The 5th of +February, being Monday, our captain and master hastened the company to +their labour; so some went with the coopers to gather hoops, and the +rest laboured on board. This night many of our men in the ship dreamed +of murder and slaughter: in the morning they reported their dreams: one +saying to another, “This night I dreamed that thou wert slain.” Another +answered, “And I dreamed that thou wert slain.” And this was general +through the ship. The captain hearing this, who likewise had dreamed +very strangely himself, gave very strict charge, that those who went on +shore should take weapons with them, and saw them himself delivered into +the boat, and sent some of purpose to guard the labourers. All the +forenoon they laboured in quietness, and when it was ten o’clock, the +heat being extreme, they came to a rock near the wood’s side (for all +this country is nothing but thick woods), and there they boiled +Casavi-roots, and dined. After dinner some slept, others washed +themselves in the sea, all being stripped to their shirts, and no man +keeping watch, no match lighted, and not a piece charged. Suddenly, as +they were thus sleeping and sporting, having got themselves into a +corner, out of sight of the ship, there came a multitude of Indians and +Portuguese upon them, and slew them sleeping: only two escaped, one very +sore hurt, the other not touched, by whom we understood of this +miserable massacre. With all speed we manned our boat, and landed to +succour our men; but we found them slain, and laid naked in rank one by +another, with their faces upward, and a cross set by them: and withal we +saw two very great pinnaces come from the river of Janeiro very full of +men; who we suspected came from thence to take us; because there came +from Janeiro soldiers to Santos, when the General had taken the town, +and was strong in it. Of seventy-six persons who departed in our ship +out of England, we were now left but twenty-seven, having lost thirteen +in this place, with their chief furniture, as muskets, calivers, powder, +and shot. Our casks were all in decay, so that we could not take in more +water than was in our ship, for want of casks, and that which we had was +marvellous ill-conditioned. And being there moored by trees, for want of +cables and anchors, we still expected the cutting of our moorings, to be +beaten from our decks with our own furniture, and to be assailed by them +of Janeiro. What distress we were now driven into, I am not able to +express. To depart with eight tons of water in such bad casks, was to +starve at sea, and in staying our case was ruinous. These were hard +choices; but, being thus perplexed, we made choice rather to fall into +the hands of the Lord than into the hands of men. So, concluding to +depart, the 6th of February we were off in the channel, with our +ordnance, and small shot, in readiness for any assault that should come; +and, having a small gale of wind, we recovered the sea in most deep +distress. Then bemoaning our estate one to another, and recounting over +all our extremities, nothing grieved us more than the loss of our men +twice, first being slaughtered by the cannibals at Port Desire, and at +this isle of Placentia by the Indians and Portuguese. And considering +what they were who were lost, we found that all those who conspired the +murdering of our Captain and Master were now slain by savages, the +gunner only excepted. Being thus at sea, when we came to Cape Frio the +wind was contrary; so that three weeks we were grievously vexed with +cross winds; and, our water consuming, our hope of life was very small. +Some desired to go to Baya, and to submit themselves to the Portuguese, +rather than to die for thirst: but the Captain, with fair persuasions +altered their purpose of yielding to the Portuguese. In this distress it +pleased God to send us rain in such plenty, as that we were well +watered, and in good comfort to return. But after we came near unto the +sun, our dried penguins began to corrupt, and there bred in them a most +loathsome and ugly worm, of an inch long. This worm did so mightily +increase, and devour our victuals, that there was in reason no hope how +we should avoid famine, but be devoured of these wicked creatures; there +was nothing that they did not devour, iron only excepted; our cloaths, +hats, boots, shoes, shirts, and stockings: and for the ship, they did so +eat the timbers, as that we greatly feared they would undo us, by +gnawing through the ship’s side. Great was the care of our Captain, +Master, and company, to consume these vermin, but the more we laboured +to kill them, the more they increased; so that at the last we could not +sleep for them, but they would eat our flesh, and bite like musquetos. +In this woeful case, after we had passed the Equinoctial Line towards +the north, our men began to fall sick of such a monstrous disease, as I +think the like was never heard of: for in their ancles it began to +swell; from thence in two days it would be in their breasts, so that +they could not draw their breath; and then fell into their lower parts, +and there did swell most grievously, and most dreadful to behold, so +that they could neither stand, lie, nor go: whereupon our men grew big +with grief. Our Captain, with extreme anguish of his soul, was in such +woeful distress, that he desired only a speedy end; for divers grew +raging mad, and some died in most loathsome and furious pain. It were +incredible to write our misery as it was. There was no man in perfect +health, but the Captain and one boy; the Master being a man of good +spirit, with extreme labour, bore out his grief, so that it grew not +upon him. To be short, all our men died, except sixteen, of which there +were but five able to move. The Captain was in good health, the Master +indifferent, Captain Cotton and myself swolen and short-winded, yet +better than the rest who were sick, and one boy in health: upon us five +only the labour of the ship did stand: The Captain and Master as +occasion served, would take in and heave out the top-sails; the Master +only attended on the sprit-sail; and all of us at the capstan without +sheets and tacks. In fine, our misery and weakness was so great, that we +could not take in or heave out a sail: so our top-sail and sprit-sail +were torn all in pieces by the weather. The Master and Captain taking +their turns at the helm, were mightily distressed, and monstrously +grieved with the woeful lamentation of our sick men. Thus, as lost +wanderers upon the sea, the 11th of June 1593, it pleased God that we +arrived at Bear Haven in Ireland, and there ran the ship on shore; where +the Irishmen helped us to take in our sails, and to moor our ship for +floating; which slender pains of theirs cost our Captain ten pounds, +before he could have the ship in safety. Thus, without victuals, sails, +men, or any furniture, God only guided us into Ireland, where the +Captain left the Master and three or four of the company to keep the +ship; and, within five days after, he and certain others had passage in +an English fisher-boat to Padstow, in Cornwall. In this manner our small +remnant, by God’s mercy only, were preserved and restored to our +country, to whom be all honour and glory world without end.” + + +We have already observed, that the above relation is the only complete +account of this voyage which has hitherto appeared; by which we would be +understood to mean, that it is the only complete account of the +proceedings of any one of the ships engaged in this second expedition of +Cavendish, from her first setting out till her return home. There are +other accounts of the distresses attending this voyage, but they refer +to parts only, and do not contain a regular series of events from +beginning to end, as we shall endeavour to shew, in pursuance of our +plan of tracing the great out-lines of the lives of our celebrated +circum-navigators, from their first entering upon action till the period +of their retreat. + +When the impartial reader revolves in his mind the effects of distresses +like those already described in the foregoing account, upon a company of +ungovernable sailors, not under that subordination which regular +discipline always establishes to Officers properly commissioned, he will +then be prepared to determine, whether Cavendish complains with reason +against Davis, as being the death of him, and to use his own words, “the +decay of the whole action;” or, whether the miscarriage did not arise +partly from unavoidable accidents, and partly from the impetuosity of +his own temper, and his own misconduct. + +The misfortunes that attended the progress of this most distressful +voyage, appear to us to have taken their rise from the accident of being +becalmed for seven-and-twenty days under the Line; during which time +they not only consumed a considerable proportion of their provisions, +but the men became sick; and the scurvy, which seldom makes its +approaches on this side the Equator, had already infected near half the +crews. + +This reduced them to the necessity, not only of seeking land where fresh +provisions might be procured, but of wasting more time with a view to +the recovery of the sick, than was consistent with the navigation of +those boisterous seas through which they were to pass. + +We have already seen that when they were masters of Santos, they were in +the utmost distress for want of provisions, and yet the opportunity was +suffered to pass without obtaining any effectual relief; and that this +distress is not aggravated by the writer of the above voyage, appears +from the testimony of Knivet, in Purchas’s Pilgrams, who says, “that +here they had such disorders among themselves, that if the Portuguese +had been of any courage, they might have destroyed the whole fleet; for +our men, says he, would fight for their victuals, as if they had been no +Christians but Jews”, (which by the way shews the strange notions which +the multitude in those days entertained of the uncharitable disposition +of the Jews to one another; a characteristic not at all applicable to +that people); “and they that got the best would get them into some hole, +or into the wilderness under some tree, and there they would remain as +long as they had meat.” + +From this early beginning of distress, very little hope could be +reasonably entertained of the issue. The season was advancing fast, when +the severity of the weather would render their proceeding into the South +Seas by the straits of Magellan very dangerous; and, being already in +want of provisions, they could have no means of an effectual supply till +they could reach the fertile countries on the opposite side of those +straits; the General’s prolonging his stay therefore on the eastermost +coasts of Brazil till the 22d of January, was not only an imprudent but +a fatal delay; and, as it was foreseen, proved the actual ruin of the +voyage. + +At the time when they should have passed the straits of Magellan, they +were in consultation, if not worse employed, at Santos; and after they +set sail they were attacked by a storm, of which Cavendish himself says, +“a _worser_ might not be endured. Such was the fury of the +west-south-west winds, as we were driven from the shore four hundred +leagues, and constrained to beat from 50 deg. to the southward into 40 +degrees to the northward again, before we could come near the shore; in +which time we had a new shift of sails clean blown away, and our ship in +danger to sink in the sea three times; which with extremity of men’s +labour we recovered.” Here the reason that prevented Cavendish’s arrival +at Port Desire till the 18th of March, 12 days after the Desire and +Roebuck, is fully explained. And after he had refitted his ship and +refreshed his men, and was ready to sail, he goes on in the same letter, +which is directed to Sir Tristriam Gorges, “And now,” says he, “we were +almost four months beating between the coast of Brazil and the straits, +being in distance not above 600 leagues, which is commonly run in twenty +or thirty days; but such was the adverseness of our fortune, that in +coming thither we spent the summer, and found in the straits the +beginning of a most extreme winter, not durable for Christians.” + +After this concession, compared with what the writer of Davis’s voyage +has related of the sufferings of his people, let the reader determine +with what justice Cavendish arraigns Davis, when he attributes to the +villainy of that officer his own death, and the ruin of the voyage. + +But to pursue the narrative of the General’s proceedings from the time +of his parting with the Desire and Black Pinnace in the night of the +20th of May, as already related in the preceding voyage. It appears +indeed, that he continued his course to the coast of Brazil accompanied +by the Roebuck, which, however, was parted from him in lat. 36° S. in +one of the most grievous storms, as he himself confesses, that any +Christians ever endured upon the seas to live, in which the Roebuck +sprung her masts, and was otherwise so much damaged as to arrive in the +bay of St. Vincent in the greatest distress, being little better than a +mere wreck. + +The General himself suffered considerably, and was forced to take +shelter likewise in the same bay, though the little town of St. Vincent +they had burnt on their leaving Santos the summer before. Here +twenty-five of his men, getting drunk on shore, were suddenly set upon +by the Portuguese, in revenge for their former treatment, and every man +of them slaughtered. To revenge this treachery, as it is called, +Cavendish determined to attack Santos, and to level it with the ground; +and now, being joined by the crew of the Roebuck, he landed above the +town, but was most shamefully repulsed, after having plundered a few +farm-houses, and, as it should seem the custom was, set them on fire. + +Here being disappointed of his revenge, he departed with a view to +attack a small inhabited island about twenty leagues to the westward; +from whence, when he had provided himself with such necessaries as the +island could afford, he intended, according to his promise, and +agreeable to the expectations of Davis, to have returned to the straits +of Magellan, and to have proceeded to the South Seas in prosecution of +his first design. But there seemed a fatality attending every measure he +devised. + +He was diverted from the prosecution of this enterprize by the +persuasions of a Portuguese pilot on board, who advised the attack of +Spirito Santo, as the only place that could supply his wants, and enable +him to refit his ships. In this undertaking he lost fourscore of his men +killed, and forty wounded. And now, having no alternative, but either to +return home, or to burn one of his ships for want of hands, and proceed +with the other to the straits; the crew of the Roebuck, fearing, as they +well might, that theirs was the ship destined for the flames, watched +their opportunity when their Captain was sick on board the General, to +make their escape in the night, taking with them both the surgeons, and, +as Cavendish says, double the proportion of provisions for their number +of men, “having with them at their departure but six and forty men, and +carrying away with them the proportion for six months victual of 120 men +at large.” Yet it is not easy to reconcile the truth of this assertion +with the distresses for want of provisions which are all along +complained of from their first arrival on the coast of Brazil in the +summer to the present time. In the straits of Magellan, it is asserted, +that, to save their victuals, they were forced in a great measure to +live upon sea-weeds, muscles, periwincles, and the fruits of the +country; for, says Knivet, the allowance from the ship was but +little.--But to proceed: + +Cavendish, finding himself thus forsaken, every-where disappointed, +betrayed, as he complains, and distressed to the last extremity, his +ship full of sick and wounded, and himself with a wounded spirit, +directed his course to the island of St. Sebastian, 200 leagues to the +westward of Spirito Santo, where he arrived when he had but just one +cask of water left. Here he set 20 of his sick men ashore; and, having +refitted his ship, and refreshed his people, he wanted very much to have +sailed back to the straits: “But, says his biographer, his mutinous crew +obliged him to sail for England;” and he died before his return. + +In his letter to Sir Tristriam Gorges, which appears to have been +written a little before his death, he discovers the utmost perturbation +of mind. “And now, says he, what with grief for the loss of my most dear +cousin [John Lock], and the continual trouble I endured among such +hell-hounds [his ship’s crew], wishing myself upon any desart place in +the world, there to die, rather than thus basely to return home again; +which course I had put in execution, had I found an island which the +charts make to be in eight degrees to the southward of the Line. I swear +to you I sought it with all diligence, meaning (if I had found it) there +to have ended my unfortunate life. But God suffered not such happiness +to light upon me; for I could by no means find it; so was forced to come +towards England.” + +The bitterness which he expresses against his crew might, and did, +probably, arise from their determined resolution not to expose +themselves to the like hardships they had already undergone, and in +which the major part of their companions were suffered to perish without +pity, and to languish without relief: for, if we may believe Jane, the +sick men on board the General were most uncharitably put on shore into +the woods in the straits of Magellan; where, according to Cavendish’s +own account, “there was nothing but such flights of snow, and +extremities of frosts, as in his life he had never beheld or felt the +like. The men, adds he, were well in the morning, and by night frozen to +death.” In this miserable manner, in seven or eight days, 40 of his crew +actually perished, and 70 more sickened. + +Of the ships that sailed in this expedition, consisting of five sail, we +can trace only three that returned to England, namely, the Galleon, +otherwise named the Leicester, of which the General was Commander; the +Dainty, commanded by Captain Cotton, who went a volunteer, and whose +ship, having parted company on her first arrival on the coast of Brazil, +instead of pursuing her voyage to the South Seas, returned back to +England with very little damage. + +The Roebuck, in which sailed from Plymouth 170 brave seamen, after +stealing away from the General in the night, as already related, was +never more heard of; the Black Pinnace foundered in a violent storm in +the South Sea, and in her about 70 men. Of the crews of the Desire, only +26 out of 150 lived to see their native country; and, of the General’s +ship, though the number that perished cannot be exactly ascertained, yet +there could not more than 50 at most survive their General. + +Now, if the gallant actions and glorious exploits that entitle men to +fame and immortality, involve in their atchievement so many of their +fellow-creatures in misery, let the benevolent and humane unite with us +in depreciating such murderous practices; and, instead of holding forth +a Drake, or a Cavendish, as examples worthy of imitation, let us hold in +detestation all those false worthies, whose actions have their rise in +“a ravenous appetite for robbery, and in an insatiable desire of +acquiring wealth without industry, and greatness without virtue.” + + + + + THE + VOYAGES + OF + CAPT. WILLIAM DAMPIER. + + +Among the Navigators who first surrounded the globe, Captain William +Dampier, considered as a Mariner and Naturalist, will ever be held in +the foremost rank. From his Voyages the world received the earliest and +best information of remote countries, and their genuine productions; and +it is on his plan that future navigators have thought fit to proceed in +giving an account of new discoveries. His history will afford a notable +instance of the power of genius and application unassisted by learning, +when the mind is wholly bent upon the pursuit and improvement of one +art. + +He was the son of parents who lived in the parish of East Coker, in +Somersetshire, reputable, but not rich. While they lived they gave him +an education very ill suited to a sea-faring life; but they both dying +when he was yet young, those to whose care he was entrusted removed him +from the grammar-school, and put him to an English school to learn +writing and accompts. Here he did not remain long before an opportunity +offered of placing him with the master of a ship at Weymouth, agreeable +to the inclinations which he had very early discovered of going to sea; +a lesson to parents and guardians to consult the genius of children, if +they would wish them to rise to eminence in the profession to which they +are bred. + +With this master he made a short voyage to France, and was highly +gratified: but, his next voyage being to Newfoundland, where he was +employed a whole summer in the fishery, the rigour of the climate and +the nature of the service so cooled his ardour for sea-adventures, that +he determined to relinquish the employment, and return to his friends. + +He was now eighteen years of age; and, after leading for some time an +idle life, finding his friends begin to look cool upon him, he formed a +resolution to leave the country, and to try his fortune in town. His +course of life, and the natural bent of his inclination, led him to seek +the company of sea-faring companions, who, being pleased with his jovial +humour, encouraged him to resume his old employment, to which, having an +opportunity to enter on board an Indiaman, he was easily persuaded. + +In this ship, the John and Martha, Captain Earning, he sailed to Bantam, +in quality of a foremastman; and in little more than a year returned to +England, perfectly reconciled to the business of a mariner, which, by +the severity of the service he was first employed in, he had determined +never to follow. + +In this voyage, by favour of the master of the ship, he learned the +rudiments of the art of navigation, in which he afterwards became a +great proficient; but he had not yet learned to keep a journal. It +should seem that he employed the following year, after his Indian +voyage, in improving those hints which he received from the master, and +in qualifying himself for an easier and more advantageous birth, than +that of going before the mast for the future. With this view he retired +again into the country, and spent the summer with his brother. But, +tired of a studious life, he embraced the occasion of the Dutch war, to +enter on board the Royal Prince, commanded by Sir Edward Sprague, but in +what station does not appear. He tells us, indeed, that he was in two +engagements; but that, falling sick, he was put on board the hospital +ship, and saw the third only at a distance, in which his Commander was +unfortunately killed: so that he does not seem to have risen higher at +this period than the ordinary rank of an able seaman. + +Being soon after removed to Harwich among the rest of the sick and +wounded, he there languished till the conclusion of the Dutch war, when +he received his discharge; and then returned again to Somersetshire for +the recovery of his health; which was no sooner restored than he +prepared again to go to sea. + +But Colonel Hellier, a neighbouring Gentleman, having a large plantation +in Jamaica, being acquainted with his resolution, made him an offer of +going there as a superintendant, with a handsome appointment; which he +very readily accepted; and, about the beginning of the year 1674, +embarked for Jamaica. But he soon grew tired of land service; his roving +disposition still inclining him to seek the sea. The road, he says, to +take possession of his new office, when he arrived at Jamaica, was +formerly a great way round: but Mr. Hellier, the Colonel’s brother, +being desirous of shortening the way, coasted along the river with some +companions, till they found it run between rocks that rose perpendicular +on both sides: they endeavoured to climb that which intercepted the way +to the plantation: but, while they with the utmost danger and difficulty +were surmounting the rock, a dog they had with them found a more +convenient passage through a hole. This suggested to Mr. Hellier a new +track: so by blowing up some fragments of the rock in one part, and +levelling some hollows in others, a passage was obtained wide enough for +a loaded horse. By this accidental discovery the road was shortened near +one half. + +He was now in his 22d year. In six months after his arrival at Jamaica +he was tired of his superintendency, and quitted it; and soon after +engaged in a trade with the logwood-cutters in Campeachy bay; which +trade he followed near three years, and then commenced logwood-cutter +himself. Unsettled in his mind, and still eager in pursuit of new +adventures, in less than a year he quitted the logwood-cutters; and +about the beginning of 1678, returned to England. + +In 1679, we find him again returned to Jamaica, with a cargo of +merchandize, which being sold at Port Royal, he furnished himself with +other goods, such as he knew he could carry to a good market at +Campeachy; and by this advantageous traffic, he so enriched himself, as +to be able to purchase an estate in his own country, of one whom he knew +had a good title to it. And now, sufficiently happy, he was preparing to +return home; when one Mr. Hobby invited him to make a short trading +voyage to the Moskito-shore, a part of the world he had not yet seen. +This invitation to embark in a new adventure he could not resist and, +therefore, sent home the writings of his late purchase to his brother, +with the same friends whom he purposed to have accompanied to England +himself, and then went on board with Mr. Hobby. + +The Moskitos, he says, are Indians that inhabit the main, between the +Honduras and Nicaragua. They are tall, well-made, raw-boned, lusty, +strong, and nimble of foot, long visaged, have lank black hair, look +stern, are hard favoured, and of a dark copper-coloured complexion. They +are but a small nation; the same, perhaps, that Drake calls Symerons. +They are very dexterous at throwing the lance, fisgig, harpoon, or any +manner of dart, being bred to it from their infancy; for, the children, +imitating their parents, never go abroad without a lance, which they +throw indifferently at almost every object that falls in their way, till +by constant practice they become masters of the art. They next learn to +parry a lance, arrow, or dart; and the training of them to this exercise +is in this manner: Two boys place themselves at a small distance, and +throw light blunt lances at each other; one throws the lance, and the +other parries, alternately. He that parries holds a small stick in his +right hand, with which he turns aside the lance that is darted at him: +and, by constantly practising in this manner, they at last become so +dexterous, that they will shoot arrows at each other, and parry them as +fast as they are shot. This they will do with a small stick no bigger +than the rammer of an ordinary fowling-piece. + +Before they arrive at manhood, they become so dexterous, that they +disregard the arrows of their enemies; and, unless they are poured thick +upon them, and come more than one at a time, they will suffer not one in +a thousand to hit them. + +They are no less expert at striking of fish; and two or three of them +will in those seas maintain a ship’s company of 100 men. Turtle and +manatee are their principal pursuit: the former will commonly weigh 600 +weight; and two Moskito-men will strike two of them a-day, while the +season lasts, for many days together. The manatee is known also by the +name of the sea-cow, and is struck with a harpoon, so contrived by the +Moskito-men as to be thrown with a long stick; but they are very +cautious of discovering their art even to the English--the Spaniards +they hate mortally. The turtle they strike with a different instrument, +of which our author has given a cut. + +About this time the æra of buccaneering commences. The buccaneers were a +set of low men, who, in humble imitation of their betters, first began +with fitting out small vessels in some of the islands in the West +Indies, and then cruising in them till they were able to make themselves +masters of better ships. This being accomplished, they went in +formidable companies as occasion offered, and declared open war against +all the Spanish settlements. These freebooters had generally two or +three Moskito-men on board each of their vessels, whom they found +serviceable in many other respects besides supplying them with fish. By +their situation they had opportunities of being well acquainted with the +strength and riches of the Spanish settlements, and by their inclination +they were their avowed enemies. They therefore served the buccaneers for +guides, and at the same time assisted in their most hazardous attacks. + +This being premised, let us now return to Dampier, who, as has just been +said, had agreed to make a voyage with Captain Hobby; and having set +sail from Port Royal, either by accident or design, they fell in with +Coxen, Sawkings, Sharp, and other buccaneers, who were riding at anchor +on the west side of the island of Jamaica, and were then meditating an +enterprize over the isthmus of Darien, in order to fall suddenly upon +the Spaniards in the South Seas. This expedition, it was given out, +would enrich the undertakers; and as all who engaged in it, according to +the law of buccaneers, were to be proportionable sharers, all Captain +Hobby’s men deserted him to join the buccaneers, Dampier only excepted, +who, after three or four days consideration, was easily persuaded to +make one among the rest. + +Shortly after Christmas, 1680, they all set sail, and steering to Porto +Bello, on the 5th of April, they landed near Golden Island, to the +number of between three and four hundred men, and began their march +guided by chiefs of the Muskito Indians, and headed by Captain Sawkings, +who, by general consent, was chosen their leader. + +After a fatiguing journey of nine days, in which many of them suffered +great hardships, they arrived at Santa Martha, a Spanish settlement on a +river of that name that empties itself into the Southern ocean; which +after some opposition they took. They were made to believe, before they +approached it, that it was a place of considerable strength, abounding +in riches, and inhabited by merchants of considerable property; but upon +entering it, they were greatly disappointed, and therefore, as might be +expected from such a lawless crew, they were as ready to fall upon those +who had projected the enterprise, as upon those whom they accounted the +enemy. + +They now, much discontented with one another, parted company. One party, +continuing their march to the Southern ocean, and there embarking, some +in canoes, some in periagos, and some in small barks which they found in +the river, continued their course to the bay of Panama, and in their way +attempted the little town of Puebla Novo, before which their commander +in chief Captain Sawkins was killed, and his followers defeated. In what +manner this undisciplined crew procured ships, guns, and ammunition, we +are not told; yet ships, guns, and ammunition to pursue their ravages +they did procure as appears by the sequel. + +Captain Coxen, with his company, foreseeing many difficulties in this +Southern project, after the taking of Santa Martha returned to the North +Seas, where he continued his piracies with various success. + +Dampier, however, followed the views of those who persevered in their +first resolution of prosecuting their fortune in the South Seas; and he +continued to accompany them during the year 1680; but, after the death +of Sawkings, Captain Sharpe being chosen commander in chief in his room, +Dampier with many of his companions, suspecting both the courage honesty +of their new leader, entered into a confederacy to displace him, and to +choose Captain Watling in his room, which they soon found means to +accomplish by general consent. Under Captain Sharpe the only enterprize +of consequence was the taking of Ylo, a small island on the Peruvian +coast, from whence they sailed to Juan Fernandez, where, as has been +said, Captain Sharpe was displaced. + +It happened, however, that Captain Watling, soon after his advancement, +having planned an attack upon Arica, fell a victim to his own project; +for he was killed in the first onset, and his party defeated. The +confederates, after this misfortune, remaining some time without a +leader, fell again into party divisions; one party declaring themselves +in favour of their former Commander, the other opposing his re-election. +To put an end to these dissentions, it was at last agreed to part +companies, and to cast lots which company should keep possession of the +ship. It happened that the party in opposition to Dampier proved the +fortunate party; so that Dampier and his companions were reduced to the +necessity of returning either to the N. Sea over the same isthmus by +which they came into the South, or submitting themselves to the mercy of +the Spaniards. Nor does it appear that any of them carried more riches +back than they brought with them, notwithstanding the vast promises with +which they had been flattered at their first setting out: for it has +been generally observed, that the confederacies of the wicked are +defeated by their own deceit; and that they themselves are, for the most +part, the instruments of their own misfortunes. + +The company with which Dampier chose to associate, consisted of 44 men +who bore arms, a Spanish Indian who bore arms also, two Moskito Indians, +already described, with five slaves taken in the South Seas, whom they +kept to carry their luggage. The vessels they had to carry this company +were, the long-boat belonging to the ship, and two canoes, one of which +had been sawn asunder, and joined again; and these were furnished for +their defence with two patararoes, the companies small arms, and very +scanty proportion of provisions and ammunition: and, thus equipped, they +had to sail more than 200 leagues before they reached the river of Santa +Martha, from whence they were to set out on their march by land for the +North Sea. Such an enterprize, one would imagine, could hardly have been +undertaken with any hope of succeeding by reasonable men. + +On April the 17th, 1681, they parted with Captain Sharpe, 12 leagues to +the north-west of the island of Plate; and, on May the 1st, they landed, +after many strange adventures, in the bay of Panama, in order to pursue +their journey. Here they found the river Santa Martha, of which they +meant to avail themselves, blocked up by a ship of considerable force, +that had been stationed there for more than six months to intercept +their passage. This obliged them to seek a new tract, through which, +however, the greatest part of the company, with incredible difficulty, +passed safe to the opposite shore, among whom was Dampier, whose +hardiness enabled him to undergo the severest trials, and whose +well-judged precautions exempted him from many unnecessary sufferings to +which others by their imprudence frequently exposed themselves. + +On the 1st of May, about three in the afternoon, they began their march; +and, on the 23d, they completed their journey; in which time they +travelled 110 miles, crossing some lofty mountains, but chiefly keeping +along the vallies among deep and dangerous rivers, some of which they +forded, some they passed by felling large trees upon the banks, and some +they were obliged to swim over in their cloaths and accoutrements. Those +who could not swim were dragged through by means of ropes. Their first +landing-place upon the south coast was very disadvantageous to them, and +forced them to a circuit of 50 miles more than was necessary, could they +have landed in the bay of Santa Martha, or navigated the river Chepoa, +by either of which the Indians pass from one shore to the other in three +days, and sometimes in less. + +Those who arrived on the north coast first, among whom was Dampier, +embarked immediately on board a French buccaneer, Captain Tristrian, +Commander, who, in two days after they arrived, joined eight sail of +buccaneers more, who were planning another expedition over-land to +Panama: but, when they were told of the ill success of the first, the +fatigues they must undergo, the risques they must run, and at length the +uncertainty of the event, they unanimously concurred in relinquishing +that design, and held a consultation what other enterprize was fit for +such a formidable body of them to undertake. At length, they concluded +to attack a Spanish town up Carpenter’s river, and for that purpose set +sail one after another, in order to preserve secresy, having previously +appointed a place of rendezvous. When the ship in which our navigator +sailed arrived at the place appointed, they found Captain Wright there +before them, who had taken a Spanish Tartan with 30 men, well furnished +with small arms, and four patararoes, who with 12 armadillos had been +fitted out to seek the buccaneers, and to sink them. This, they that +came over-land, who were heartily tired with living among the French, +thought a good opportunity to set up for themselves; they, therefore +applied to Captain Wright, requesting him to fit up the Tartan for them; +to which, after some hesitation, he consented, on condition that they +should be under his command as one and the same ship; to which they made +no objection. + +The rest of the fleet not arriving at the general rendezvous, according +to agreement, it was soon discovered, that the Spanish armadillos [or +small men of war] had fallen in with and dispersed them. Every one, +therefore, was at liberty to pursue his own enterprise; and Captain +Wright with his new associates chose the coast of Carthagena to try +their fortune. Here they were joined by Captain Yankey; and, falling in +with a stout ship, they fought and took her. She proved to be a prize of +14 guns and 40 men, laden with sugar and tobacco, and had eight or ten +tons of marmalet on board. The Captains differed about the right to the +ship. Yankey, however, took possession by vote of the crews; and Captain +Wright took Yankey’s ship, which was better than his own. The cargo, +after a great deal of difficulty, they disposed of at a Dutch settlement +for less than one-fourth of its value. + +However, the goods being now converted into ready money, the produce was +shared, and the Captains parted. Captain Wright stood for the Caracca +coast, with his men drunk, and quarrelling every day; and Captain Yankey +pursued a quite different course. On the coast of the Caraccas, Captain +Wright took three barks, one laden with hides, one with European +commodities, and a third with earthen-wares and brandy. With these barks +he went to the island Rocu; and, having divided the cargoes into three +equal parts, he gave to every 20 men (for they were 60 in all) one part +and a bark, and so dismissed them. That in which our navigator had an +interest was brought to Virginia on July 16, 1682, where we shall leave +both him and the ship, to give some account of Captain Yankey. + +On board of Yankey sailed one Mr. Cook, as quarter-master, the second in +command, according to buccaneer law; and, they having taken a prize from +the Spaniards, the command of the prize was claimed by Mr. Cook, on +board of which all who chose to sail under the new Captain had liberty +so to do: among others there were several who came over land with him +from the South Seas (for he too had left Captain Sharpe, and had +followed the example of Dampier). All these chose to follow the fortune +of their old acquaintance: but the Frenchmen grudging the English the +possession of so fine a vessel, together with their share of the goods +on board her, combined together; and, after plundering them of ship, +goods, arms, and money, turned them all a-drift on the island of Vacca. +In this destitute condition, Captain Tristrian, of whom mention has +already been made, shewed some compassion, by taking on board about +eight or nine of them, among whom were Captain Cook and Captain Davis, +formerly masters of buccaneers, who, being carried into Petit Guavres, +found means, when the French crews were carousing on shore, to make +themselves masters of their benefactor’s ship, to slip her cable, and to +steer with all the sail they could spread to Vacca to the relief of +their starving countrymen, who, overjoyed to be released, instantly came +on board; and, soon after they set sail, had the good fortune to make +prize of a ship laden with wine, which was newly come from France. They +afterwards fell in with a ship of good force, of which they likewise +made prize; and in her they came to the resolution of sailing into the +South Seas, and ranging the coasts of Chili and Peru. But, first, it was +necessary for them to sail to Virginia to dispose of their spare ships +and cargoes, and to fit their capital prize for war. This they did by +mounting her with 28 guns, and furnishing her with stores, provisions, +and other necessaries for the prosecution of so long a voyage. When +these ships arrived at Virginia, Dampier, and all those who came +over-land with him, happened to be there; and, being made acquainted, +with Captain Cook’s intention, they very readily agreed to join in his +adventure. + +And now, having followed Dampier through all the busy scenes of action +in which he was engaged, till his 30th year, we come at length to that +period, at which the more notable adventures of his life commence. + +On the 18th of August, 1683, he set sail from Achamack river, in +Virginia, in the prize under the command of Captain Cook; and, on the +23d, they met with a violent tempest, which lasted without intermission +till the 28th, during which time they shipt some of the heaviest seas +that ever ship endured. But as soon as the storm abated, they had fine +weather, and a brisk gale, till they arrived at the islands of Cape +Verd, where they staid to careen their ship, to refresh themselves, and +to take in fresh water. This they did at the little island of Sal: but, +being told that the island of Mayo abounded most with cattle, they left +Sal, and went to Mayo to purchase provisions. Here they met with a cold +reception; the inhabitants absolutely refusing to have any traffic with +them, or to suffer them to land: the reason was, that about a week +before, an English ship pretending friendship had cast anchor, and by a +shew of kindness had invited the Governor with his train on board; but, +as soon as they had them in their power, they caused them to write for +cattle and other provisions, by way of ransom, to regain their liberty; +and, what was still more base, after they were furnished with what they +required, they carried off their prisoners, who had not then been heard +of. Dampier afterwards learnt, that the Englishman who was guilty of +this treachery was Captain Bond, who afterwards surrendering himself to +the Spaniards, entered into their service, and taught them to fit out +fire-ships, of which they were before totally ignorant in the South +Seas. + +From Mayo they sailed to Sherboro, on the coast of Africa, where they +staid a few days, and purchased rice, palm-wines, sugar, honey, and +fowls, and then made sail for the straits of Magellan. On the 6th of +February, 1684, they came in sight of the straits mouth; but the wind +being contrary, they continued their course to the south, and doubled +Cape Horn. In latitude 57, when they thought themselves clear of the +cape, they encountered a storm on the 14th of February, which lasted +without abatement till the 3d of March, during which time the rain +poured down immoderately for many days; by which, however, they were +plentifully supplied with fresh water. + +When the storm abated, the wind changed to the south, and proved very +favourable; for at this time they found themselves in lat. 60 deg. S. +But, the gale continuing brisk, by the 17th of March they had run to the +height of Baldivia, in 48 deg. S. On the 19th, in the morning, they saw +a ship to the southward coming after them with all the sail she could +croud. Supposing her to be a Spanish ship from Baldivia and Lima, they +lay by for her; but, on her nearer approach, they saw she was an English +ship; and, upon hailing her, was told that her Captain’s name was Eaton, +that she came from London, and was bound for a cruise in the South Seas. + +Rogues are always good friends till they come to share their booty; so +these free-booters agreed to sail together; and accordingly kept company +to the island of Juan Fernandez, where they both prepared to refresh and +refit. + +March 22, 1684, they anchored in the south bay, in 25 fathoms water, not +a cable’s length from the shore; and as soon as Captain Cook’s ship was +moored, Dampier was eager to go ashore to look for a _Moskito-man_, whom +they had left in this island, when they were driven from it in the year +1681, by three Spanish men of war, Dampier being at that time in the +ship commanded by Captain Watling, just after Captain Sharpe was +displaced. This man, when Captain Watling drew off his crew, happened to +be in the woods hunting for goats; and the ship was under sail before he +came back. Dampier was curious to know whether this Moskito-man was yet +alive; and, if he was, how it had fared with him and it seemed that the +Indian was no less anxious to enquire after his friends, when he saw +that the ships that were approaching were English ships. The poor fellow +had observed them the day before, when first they came in sight, and, +judging about what time they would come to an anchor, he had killed +three goats, and gathered greens, ready to dress as soon as the company +should be at liberty to come on shore. He was already upon the beach +before the ships could be well secured, and was first seen by one of his +countrymen who happened to be on board; and it was no small pleasure to +mark the excessive joy of these two Indians at their meeting. The +Moskito-man belonging to the ship was named _Robin_: he on the island +_Will_. Robin was the first who leapt on shore; and, running to Will, +threw himself flat on his face at his feet, who, helping him up, and +embracing him, fell flat in like manner with his face at Robin’s feet, +and was by him taken up and embraced as before. The surprize, the +tenderness, the solemnity of the interview, which was exceedingly +affectionate on both sides, was admired even by the crews of buccaneers, +who were spectators from the ships of what passed on shore. When +Dampier, who was his old friend, came up, _Will_ was no less transported +with joy to see him than to meet his countryman, but he expressed it in +quite another manner: other friends too he met with among the crew who +knew him, and they were all over-joyed at meeting so unexpectedly; for +these men are very much beloved on board the ships wherever they sail, +for their readiness to assist in whatever service they are put upon. +When the ceremonies of congratulation were over, and they had time to +make enquiries, he told them, that he was several times sought after by +the Spaniards, who knew that he was left upon the island; because when +the ship set sail he was in sight of the shore, and was seen by them +before he could secret himself: but as he was continually upon the +watch, and had discovered a secret retreat, they never had been able to +find him. He had with him, he said, his gun and his knife, a small horn +of powder, and a few shot. These being soon spent, he contrived a way, +by notching his knife, to saw the barrel of his gun in small pieces, +with which he made harpoons, lance-heads, hooks, and a long knife; +heating the pieces first in the fire, which he lighted after the English +manner, by striking his gun-flint against the back of his knife. The +iron when it was hot he hammered with stones, and formed it into the +various shapes he had occasion to apply it. By continued labour and +perseverance, he had worked himself such a complete set of instruments, +for killing and catching his provisions by land and water, as surprized +the people when they were brought out for their inspection. But, says +Dampier, it is no more than these Moskito-men are accustomed to do in +their own country, where they make their own fishing and striking +instruments, without either forge or anvil: and other Indians are still +more ingenious; for they make hatchets of a very hard stone, with which +they cut down trees, make canoes, and frame their houses. + +Poor Will had built himself a little house about half a mile from the +shore, which he had made warm and convenient, by lining it with +goat-skins. He had likewise raised himself a couch about two feet above +the ground, which he had also made soft with the fur of the animals he +caught, and with the down of the young birds (for he could catch no +other) which he occasionally met with and pluckt. Cloaths he had none; +for he had worn them to rags among the bushes and brambles through which +he was often obliged to pursue his prey. He had been on the island about +three years; and in all that time had never conversed with any human +being. He had seen Spaniards; but he always took care, after the first, +that none of them should ever see him. + +At this island these free-booters staid sixteen days; and, on the 8th of +April, the two ships set sail together, and pursued their course +northwards towards the Line, at the distance of 12 or 14 leagues from +the shore, for fear of being seen. The land from 24 deg. to 10 deg. S. +is of a most prodigious height, with ridges of such lofty mountains from +one end of Peru and Chili to the other, that their summits seem to rise +above the clouds; and from the sea they appear for ever blue. Dampier +attributes to the excessive height of these mountains, the want of great +rivers in all this tract; and says, there seldom falls any rain from 30 +deg. to 4 deg. S. He adds, that the limits of the Pacific Ocean ought to +be confined within that space extended westward indefinitely; for, in +all this tract of water, says he, there are no dark rainy clouds, nor +any winds, but trade winds, no tempests, no tornadoes, or hurricanes, +though north of the Line, they are met with in this Ocean as well as the +Atlantic. There is, however, often a thick horizon, so as to hinder an +observation of the sun with the quadrant; and, sometimes, hazy mornings, +and thick mists, but not such as will wet one. The rivers in all this +tract, he says, run small; sometimes they run at one season of the year, +and at others are quite dry. These observations, if just, are truly +wonderful. + +They coasted along the Pacific Ocean from Juan Fernandez to lat. 90 deg. +40 min. S. without meeting with any thing worthy of note; but, on the 3d +of May, they fell in with a ship laden with timber, which they instantly +took without resistance. From this ship they learnt, that the Spaniards +were apprized of their being upon their coasts, and that the Viceroy had +sent expresses to all the sea-ports to put the inhabitants upon their +guard against any sudden attack. + +On this intelligence they immediately altered their course, and steered +for Lobos de la Mer, in lat. 6 deg. 24 min. S. Here they cleared their +ships bottoms; and strictly questioned their prisoners concerning the +state of the country, and which were the towns of greatest note. Several +towns were mentioned; but Truxillo appeared to be that which, if +conquered, would yield the most profit: Truxillo was therefore the place +agreed upon to make a descent. In their passage they descried three +sail: Eaton pursued two of those to seaward; and Cook presently made +prize of that which was nearest the land. They were ships laden with +flour for Panama; in one of which was found a letter from the Viceroy of +Lima to the President of Panama, acquainting him with enemies being upon +the coast, and with the supposed strength of their forces. They also +found an image of the Blessed Virgin in wood, and a stately mule, being +a present to the President, with seven or eight tons of marmalate of +quinces, which is eaten as a great delicacy in that country. From the +prisoners taken in these prizes they learned, that the Spaniards were +fortifying Truxillo, and that a garrison was already established. The +attack of that town was therefore judged impracticable; and it was +resolved to retire to the Gallapagos with the prizes, and there to +consult what next was best to be undertaken. The Gallapagos are a +cluster of islands lying on the Equator, very little known or +frequented, till the buccaneers found their way into the South Seas; the +nearest of them lies 110 leagues to the westward of the main, in long. +70 deg. W. from England. For these islands they set sail on the 29th of +May, and reached them on the 31st. Here they found plenty of turtle, +which they feasted upon fresh every day. They staid about ten or twelve +days; and laid up about 5000 packs of meal from their prizes to serve as +a future supply in case of necessity. + +Being told by an Indian prisoner that was born at Rio Lexa, that there +were great riches in his city, and that he would shew them the way to +the place, they concluded to set sail, and to trust to the fidelity of +their Indian guide; intending, however, to anchor by the way at the +island of Cocos, in lat. 5 deg. 40 min. S. to lodge some of their meal, +as more convenient to have recourse to on ordinary occasions than the +islands of Gallapagos. With this intent their stoutest meal-ship was +taken with them; but, not being able to make the island, they steered to +the continent. + +It happened, however, in the course of this short run, that Captain +Cook, who had been taken ill at Juan Fernandez, as soon as he came +within a few leagues of Cape Blanco, in latitude 9 deg. 56 min. S. +suddenly died, “though in the morning, says Dampier, he was as likely to +live as he had been for a long time before;” but, he adds, “it is usual +for sick men coming from the sea, to die off as soon as they come within +sight of land.” The death of Captain Cook occasioned a general +consultation, when it was agreed to come to an anchor in Caldera-bay, +within a league of Cape Blanco, and there to give him christian burial. +While the men were employed in digging the grave, three Indians came up +to see what they were about, and entered into conversation with the +diggers, at the same time appearing very shy; but, notwithstanding their +caution, as soon as the corps was decently interred, they were all three +seized at once by the company, and very strictly examined. They at first +pretended to know nothing of the Spaniards; but at length they +acknowledged that they were sent from Nicoya, a town about 12 leagues +off, to learn what they could concerning any strangers that should touch +upon the coast, the people of that town having advice that enemies were +in the adjoining seas, and that therefore it behoved them to be upon +their guard. They learnt likewise from these Indians, that the +inhabitants in that neighbourhood were chiefly husbandmen, and bred +cattle; that they traded in hides, corn, and other provisions, for which +they received in return, shoes, hats, linnen, and other cloth; and that, +at no great distance, there were some very large cattle-pens, where they +might furnish themselves with as many buffaloes as would fill their +ships. This was welcome news to sailors, none of whom had tasted any +fresh meat for many weeks; and a company of 24 of them set out +immediately with an Indian for their guide, to look for the cattle-pens. + +After a short march of between three and four miles, they came in sight +of a savannah where a great number of cattle were grazing; of which, +some were for instantly killing as many as they could carry away, while +others were for staying all night, and driving them into the pens to +supply the ships at once, before the owners were apprized of their +design. This resolution prevailed; but Dampier, who was of the party, +and who never chose to run unnecessary hazards, returned to the ships +with about half the company, together with the Indian guide, while the +rest chose to stay where they were. In the morning, when these voluntary +drovers were expected to return with their cattle, none came: it was +therefore feared that some disaster had befallen them; and boats were +manned, and sent out to look for them. + + [Illustration: _Capt^n Davis’s Men taken off the Rock by their + Comrades._] + +As the boats were rowing along, some of the company happened to spy a +number of people upon a rock up to their middles in water; and, upon +nearing them, they soon saw that they were the very people they were in +search of; and, therefore, hastened to take them on board. Lucky it was, +that the boatmen happened to spy them just as they did, for in an hour +more they had been all swallowed up by the tide. They had been suffered +to sleep all night unmolested; and in the morning when they were +scattered about among the cattle, and driving them into the pens, they +were surprized by the sudden appearance of about 60 Spanish soldiers +well armed, who placed themselves in a convenient situation to cut off +their retreat. Alarmed at this unexpected discovery, they hastened to +join in a body, resolving to sell their lives dear, if they found it +impossible to make their escape. Accordingly, they looked well round +them in order to discover an opening to some other part of the shore, +than that against which their ships rode, marching at the same time in +as good order as their situation would admit, and giving the Spaniards +now-and-then a volley of shot, to keep them at a proper distance. The +Spaniards, who are not over eager to come to a close engagement, kept +themselves sheltered behind the bushes, whistling some random shot at +the fugitives, by way of return; which, however, did them no harm. In +this cautious manner they advanced slowly towards the beach where +Captain Cook was buried; and, looking for their boat, saw her in flames +by the water-side, near the spot where they had grounded her the night +before. All hope of retreat being now cut off; and the Spaniards, to +make sure of their surrender, having posted themselves in such a manner +as to prevent all communication with the ships, they were at length +reduced to the last extremity; when, fortunately, spying a rock just +above water, about 100 yards from the shore, they all determined to +commit themselves to the mercy of the ocean, rather than fall into the +hands of the Spaniards. With this resolution they rushed together into +the tide, holding fast by one another, and determining that if one +perished all should perish. In this manner they made good their landing +upon the rock, where they had continued seven hours when they happened +to be discovered by their comrades, who were suffered by the Spaniards +to release them without firing a gun. + +After this disappointment it was thought adviseable not to hazard a +second attempt; they therefore weighed anchor, and continued their +course to Ria Lexa, having first chosen Mr. Edward Davis, the next in +command to Captain Cook, Commander in his room. On the 20th of July they +set sail, and in three days they were a-breast of their intended port. + +Ria Lexa is known by a high-peaked volcano, which smokes all the day, +and in the night sometimes sends forth flames of fire. It lies a +considerable distance from the main, and before you approach the town +there is a small island on which the Spaniards had placed a guard. This +guard the buccaneers surprized; but from them they learnt, that the town +was strongly fortified; that the Governor was informed of their being +upon the coast, and that the garrison was well provided for defence. +This news discouraged the adventurers, who did not come to fight but to +plunder: they therefore instantly withdrew from Ria Lexa, and steering +for the gulph of Amapalla, they there careened their ships, and parted +company. This gulph is a large arm of the sea running ten leagues up +into the country. On the south point lies Cape Cawina, and on the N. W. +St. Michael’s Mount, in lat. 12 deg. 40 min. N. But before they came to +the gulph, it was agreed that Captain Davis should go before with two +canoes well-manned, in order, by surprising some of the natives, to gain +intelligence. Accordingly, as soon as they approached the gulph, the +canoes departed, and Captain Davis, the first night, arrived at a small +island on which there was a town called Mangera, which, for want of a +guide, he could not find. In the morning he found it; but the Indian +inhabitants had all fled, and left the place deserted; only the padre, +with two boys to attend him, were left to take their fate. As all that +Captain Davis wanted was a prisoner for the sake of information, one +more intelligent than the friar could not have fallen into his hands. +From him they learnt, that there were several Indian villages in the +gulph; but that there were only three towns that had churches; that he +served all the three; that there was only another white man, besides +himself, in the whole gulph, who was a kind of secretary to the Spanish +government, and who collected the revenues and kept the accompts. + +Captain Davis, upon receiving this intelligence, taking with him the +friar and his two boys, ventured to approach Amapalla, which stands upon +an eminence. As Davis with his men gained the ascent, the Secretary, +attended by the Casique or Indian Chief, demanding, in Spanish, who they +were, and from whence they came, was answered by Davis, that they were +Biscayers, and that they were sent thither by the King of Spain to clear +the seas from enemies; that their ships were foul, and were coming there +to clean; and that he was come before to prepare a convenient station, +and to demand assistance from his Majesty’s Indian subjects. The +Secretary bid him welcome; said he loved an Old Spain man; and gave him +and his followers a kind invitation to come and take their residence in +the town. Captain Davis ascended the hill, placing the friar in the +front. They were received with every possible mark of respect both by +the Secretary and the Indian inhabitants, and after the first +salutations were past, they were conducted to the church, where all +business of a public nature is transacted. Accordingly, the friar +entered first and was followed by Captain Davis and most of the +by-standers; but one or two of the Indians loitering behind were pushed +in by Davis’s men, who then, suspecting some mischief, sprung back +again, and all the rest of the Indians taking the alarm, followed their +example, leaving Davis and the friar, looking at one another in high +confirmation, ignorant as posts of the cause that had occasioned the +desertion, while, at the same time, the brutes who had caused the rout +were firing upon the poor Indians for flying, and in the skirmish the +Secretary was killed upon the spot, the only person in all the gulph +that could speak Spanish, the friar and his two boys excepted. + +Davis’s design was, when they were all in the church, to have shut them +in, and made his own terms with them: but, poor wretches! there was no +need to practice farther treachery with them; for, notwithstanding the +brutality of these pretended Biscayers, the Indians shewed them every +kind of civility, helped them to repair their ships, hewed down timber +for them, and brought it to the docks; furnished them with cattle and +fresh provisions from the main; and assisted them in filling water, and +carrying wood aboard. All this while the friar with his two lads were +kept prisoners, and it was feared, when they were ready to sail, that +they would have carried them off; for the Indians had a great veneration +for their priest. He had learned their language, and was very useful to +them both by his kind offices and admonitions. + +They remained here from the latter end of July till the 3d of September, +when they set the friar and his youths on shore; and, the two Captains, +or more properly the two crews, having quarrelled, each of them pursued +a different course. Davis steered along the main of Peru, till having +ranged the whole coast of South America, they came to the island of +Plata, in lat. 1 deg. 10 min. S. so called by the Spaniards, after Drake +had shared the plunder of the Cacafuego upon it. Here the two ships met +again, when Captain Eaton’s men reported that they had met in their +course with dreadful tornadoes, with thunder and lightning frightful to +the last degree; that the air smelt of sulphur, and they every moment +expected to be involved in smoke and flame. Captain Eaton proposed a +reconciliation but, his terms being rejected, he staid but one night, +and the day following Davis left the island, and attempted the little +town of Manta, about seven or eight leagues from Plata. They found the +place deserted, and brought away one old woman, the only living creature +they found in the place. She informed them, that a great many enemies +were come over-land from the north seas; that they were yet in canoes +and periagoes; and that the Viceroy had commanded all the Spanish +trading ships on the coast to be burnt, to prevent their falling into +the enemies hands. On this news, Davis retired again to the island of +Plata, to wait the event, where soon after an English ship arrived, +called the Cygnet, commanded by Captain Swan. This ship had been fitted +out by some merchants of London, with a view to trade; but all trade +being effectually at a stop, Swan was easily persuaded to put his goods +up to auction among the adventurers with whom he accidentally fell in, +to man his ship with them, and to turn buccaneer himself. The new comers +were headed by a Captain Harris, who contented himself for the present +to command a small bark under Captain Swan. There was great joy at this +meeting; and Captain Davis and Captain Swan were, like other rogues, +very fond of each other for their own villainous purposes. They now +wished for Captain Eaton again, that having men enough they might all +unite, and undertake some place of consequence. With this view they +fitted up a small bark, and dispatched her in pursuit of him, appointing +a place of rendezvous, if the bark should be fortunate enough to meet +with him. In the mean time they set sail, directing their course to +Payta, a small town in lat. 5 deg. 15 min. S. built under a rock near +the sea-side. In their way they fell in with a large ship of 400 tons, +laden with timber, by whom they received intelligence that the Viceroy +had ordered 10 frigates to be fitted up with all expedition, in order to +drive them out of those seas. “Captain Davis’s unsettled crew, says +Dampier, began now heartily to repent their not accepting of Captain +Eaton’s terms.” However, they pursued their course, and on the 3d of +November landed in the road of Payta, and next morning attempted the +town, which they found deserted, and not so much as one day’s provisions +left in the whole place. Here they got intelligence, that Captain Eaton +had burnt a ship in that road the week before, and was sailed to the +westward; by which they judged that he had taken his departure for the +East Indies, by which course it was always his intention to return home. +They, therefore, began to prepare for their defence, in case of being +attacked by the Spanish frigates. They burnt Captain Harris’s bark, +because she was a heavy sailor, and fitted up another small bark for a +fire-ship; and, having examined their powder and ammunition, and +overhauled their rigging, and put every thing in the best order they +could, they made sail for the isles of Lobos. At Lobos they found a +letter left by the bark that was sent in quest of Captain Eaton, +acquainting them that he had been there, but had sailed some days before +the arrival of the bark; and that the bark was gone to Plata, the place +of rendezvous. Here it was concerted to attempt the town of Guaiaquil, +before they returned to Plata. Accordingly, on the 29th in the morning, +they set sail from Labos, steering directly for the bay of Guaiaquil. +This bay runs in between Cape Blanco on the south side, and Point +Shanday on the north, 25 leagues from Cape Blanco. In the bottom of this +bay lies the island of Santa Clara, in the form of a corpse laid out in +a shroud, of which the east end represents the head, and the west end +the feet. Ships that are bound to the port of Guaiaquil keep to the +southward of this isle, to avoid the shoals on the north side, where, it +is reported, a very rich wreck lies sunk, and that a person, who came +from the King of Spain with a patent to fish for wrecks, had taken up +some of the plate, but he dying, the patent expired without much effect. +The Indians, however, have taken some by stealth, and would probably +have got much more but for the swarms of cat-fish that hover round this +island, the prick of whose fins is so poisonous that whenever they draw +blood the wound proves mortal. From Santa Clara to Puna Arona is about +seven leagues, on which island the inhabitants, who are all seamen or +fishermen, are obliged to keep constant watch, and to give notice to the +Governor of Guiaquil of the approach of all shipping, whether friends or +foes. The houses in the town of Puna stand upon posts 10 or 12 feet +high, with ladders on the outsides to ascend the rooms. Dampier says, he +never saw any such in any other part of the world, except among the +Malayans in the East Indies. They are thatched with palmeto-leaves, and +their chambers well boarded, in which they exceed the Malayans. From +Puna to Guiaquil is seven leagues, and at the distance of one league +from the entrance of the river, which rises about two miles on the other +side Guiaquil, it is divided into two streams, one stream leading to +Leon, the other to Guiaquil. Guiaquil, according to Dampier, is one of +the principal sea-ports in the South Seas. The commodities exported from +that city are cocoa, hides, tallow, sarsaparilla and other drugs, and +woolen-cloth, commonly called Quito cloth. This cloth, which is made at +the rich inland town of Quito, is worn by all the common people +throughout the kingdom of Peru. But, besides cloth, Quito abounds with +gold, washed down from the mountains that surround it, which the Indians +make a trade of gathering in the adjacent brooks, where it is sometimes +found in solid lumps, but generally in small dust mixed with sand. + +As soon as the ships entered the bay they cast anchor off Cape Blanco; +and the crews manned their boats and small barks to advance with the +more secrecy towards the town. In their way they made prize of a small +vessel, laden with Quito-cloth, the master of which told them of the +watch at Puna; and at the same time acquainted them that three ships +were expected to sail from Guiaquil next tide with 1000 negro slaves. +They had not rowed far before they fell in with one of the ships laden +with negroes, and took her. They cut her main-mast down, and left her at +anchor. The next day they made prize of the other two; but in taking +them they alarmed the town: and, there being no discipline observed, no +Commander in Chief to lead them on in a body, one party counteracted the +other party; so that none of their attacks took place. Captain Davis +advanced with a party of his men till they were quite exhausted in +marching through swamps and mangroves. Captain Swan and most of his men +were for retreating, seeing the town alarmed; but, being upbraided with +cowardice, agreed to proceed. They had two Indian guides; and one of +them undertook to lead the way into the town, and was followed by a +Davis’s man, who was fastened to him by a rope, to prevent his making +his escape. But, a little before they came within musket-shot, Davis’s +man, who had boasted of his courage, and sought the post of honour, to +be next man to the guide, cut the string, and let the guide loose; who, +finding himself at liberty, took to his heels, and made his escape. The +other, when he saw him out of reach, cried out, that somebody had cut +the string, and that the guide was gone. This spread a general panic; so +the design was all at once defeated; for, after that, not a man would +advance a step farther, but all retired to their boats and embarked +without either firing a gun, or having a gun fired at them. After +looking at the town for half an hour, they departed: and, having drest a +cow, and filled their bellies, they fell down the bay with the tide, +rifled the negro-ships, and took about 40 of the stoutest men along with +them, and turned the rest adrift. Dampier remarks upon this miscarriage, +that there never was a fairer opportunity for men to enrich themselves +than they had: but all their golden dreams vanished at once; and they +returned as they went, directing their course to Plata, to meet the bark +sent in search of Captain Eaton. + +When they arrived, they found her with her crew almost famished; for +having sought the ships at Lobos, and from Lobos to Plata, and from +Plata to Lobos again, without finding them, and having scarce 14 days +provisions on board when they set out, they were constrained to make a +descent upon the village of Santa Helena, where they succeeded, and got +a small quantity of maize, with which and the turtle they happened to +strike, and some boobies and penguins they killed, they had made shift +to subsist, though with the utmost difficulty. Such was the regard these +plunderers bore for each other, when projects of robbery were in view. +Here the cargo of the cloth-bark, the only booty they had made, was +shared by lots, and Captain Swan had the bark to serve him as a tender. +Here also, according to custom, they quarrelled; Captain Davis’s men +placing the miscarriage to the cowardice of Captain Swan’s; and Captain +Swan’s to the over-forwardness of Captain Davis’s. At length the matter +was compromised by the mediation of the two Commanders; and they agreed +in the next place to attack Lavelia, a pretty large town in the bay of +Panama, about seven leagues from the sea-side, on the banks of a river +on the north-side of the bay. + +On this expedition they set sail the 23d of December, 1684. On the 28th, +they arrived at a small village called Tomaco, which they surprized and +took, and in it a Spanish Knight, Don Diego de Pinas, who came in a ship +from Lima to load timber, in which ship there were only eight Spaniards, +and twelve or thirteen jars of good old wine. The wine they seized, but +let the ship go. + +On the 1st of January, 1685, in passing from Tomaco to Gallo they took a +packet-boat from Panama to Lima with letters. The Spaniards threw the +letters over-board; but there being a string and a small buoy to the box +in which they were inclosed, the box was seen and taken up. The contents +of the public dispatches were, that the armada from Old Spain were +arrived at Porto Bello, and that the President of Panama had received +orders to hasten the Plate fleet from Lima. + +This was joyful news for the buccaneers, who now thought of nothing but +sharing the treasures of Peru. They laid aside their pitiful project +upon Lavelia, and concluded to careen their ships at the King’s Isles, +near the entrance of the gulph of Panama, to which gulph no ships could +sail without being seen from these isles. There were now two ships and +three barks in company, a fire-ship, and two small tenders. They all +changed their course, and steered for the isles, in their way to which +they took a ship of 90 tons, laden with flour. On the 23d of January +they arrived at the place appointed; and on the 25th, they cast anchor +in the harbour of Galleria, setting all hands to work to clean the +barks, in order to cruise in the channel till the next spring-tide, when +the large ships might be laid up to be cleaned also. + +On the 27th, the barks, being finished, were sent to cruise in the +entrance of the gulph; and on the 4th day after, they brought in a prize +laden with corn, salt-beef, and fowls. The beef and fowls came in good +time. The 14th of February, they made an end of careening their large +ships, took in wood and water, and, on the 15th, sailed into the +channel, to cruise for the plate-fleet. When they came a-breast of Old +Panama, they sent their Knight upon his parole with a letter to the +President, to treat for the exchange of prisoners; but by some accident, +says Dampier, he was killed. The next day they sent another letter to +the President by a _Mestiso_ (a mixed breed, half Indian half Spaniard). +This letter produced the desired effect. The English prisoners were +released, and about 40 Spaniards were returned in their room. + +Leaving Panama, they cast anchor before Tobago; and, while they lay in +that road, a stratagem was played upon them that was near proving fatal +to men and ships. A pretended merchant from Panama came by stealth to +trade with them for such merchandize as they might have on board (a +thing not uncommon on those coasts), and was well received. It was +agreed, that in the night he should send his bark out with such +commodities as they wanted, and take back such as they had to return. +Accordingly the bargain was made, and the bark came out as was expected, +hailing the ships with the watchword that was to be her security. Being +cautious, however, lest some mischief should be intended, they called to +the people on board the bark to cast anchor; which they not regarding, +were instantly fired at; upon which the crew took to their canoes, and +set fire to the pretended smuggling ship, which had been prepared as a +fireship by that Capt. Bond who carried off the officers from Mayo, as +has been already related in the beginning of the voyage. This was aimed +chiefly at Captain Davis’s ship; but at the same time, Captain Swan’s +people observed a small float on the water with something like a man in +it, making towards their ship; the man, seeing he was discovered, dived, +and the float disappeared: this, they apprehended, when they saw the +fireship blow up, was some combustible matter intended to be stuck to +the rudder of Swan’s ship, as was formerly attempted upon that of +Captain Sharpe’s in the harbour of Coquimbo. Both ships, however, were +glad to cut their cables, and it was with difficulty that Davis’s +escaped. The fireship drove burning, towards Tobago, but after the first +explosion she did not burn clear, only made a smother, not being +properly contrived. + +This Bond, who instructed the Spaniards in making her, after he left the +Cape de Verd isles, as has already been related, steered for the South +Seas, and in his passage meeting with Captain Eaton, Bond’s pilot, +Richard Morton by name, persuaded him to join with Eaton and to make the +voyage conjointly; but after they had sailed in company two days, Morton +took an opportunity to slip on board Eaton, and persuaded him to drop +Bond, which he did in the night, Morton still continuing on board with +Eaton. Bond being thus deserted, and having no navigator with him who +had ever been in the South Seas, and having been scouted for +mal-practices in the North Seas, had no other resource but that of +betraying his countrymen’s designs to ingratiate himself with the +Spaniards. With this view he steered directly for Porto Bello, +surrendered himself and crew to the Governor, informing him of the +buccaneer’s designs in the South Seas, and offering to remain himself as +surety for the truth of what he said. The Governor, not doubting the +fact, entertained him, and sent him over to the Viceroy of Lima to be +employed by him as he should think fit; and he proved a very useful +instrument in defeating the enterprizes of his old companions. + +But to proceed. In the morning when it was light, the ships returned to +their buoys to fish up their anchors; and while they were thus employed, +they were alarmed by a multitude of canoes and periagoes that were in +motion all round the island. They seemed to make directly towards the +ships, and when they came within call, the people on board learnt that +they were a new company of English and French invaders just arrived from +the North Seas to try their fortune along with the old, and were headed +by two captains, one Grenet, the other Lequie; that they consisted of +200 French and the rest English; and that 180 English more were still on +the isthmus, under the command of Captain Townley, and were daily +expected to arrive in order to join the rest. All the Englishmen were +immediately taken on board Captain Davis and Captain Swan; and the +French were accommodated with the flour prizes, of which mention has +already been made, and Captain Grenet, as the eldest officer, was made +choice of to command his countrymen. In a few days, Captain Townley +arrived, having already made himself master of two ships, one laden with +flour, the other with wine, brandy, and oil: the prisoners they took in +these ships declared, that the fleet from Lima was ready to sail. Soon +after the arrival of Capt. Townley, there came a canoe out of the river +of Santa Martha, who said there were 300 men more on the isthmus of +Darien in their way to these seas. On the 15th, they fell in with a bark +with five or six Englishmen in her that belonged to Captain Knight, who +had been six months in the South Seas, and was now upon the coast of +Mexico, where he came in sight of this bark, but not being able to come +up with her in his ship, had sent the men that were found in her in a +canoe to make prize of her; who, having succeeded, had lost company in +the night, and could not recover their ship again. This bark Captain +Swan took under his care, on pretence that the men had run away and left +their commander, and gave her to Captain Harris, who presently manned +her. + +The time approached when the Lima fleet was expected, and some letters +were intercepted that contained the instructions to the commanders which +course to steer. In consequence whereof the captains of the buccaneers +held a consultation in what manner to steer in order to intercept them; +but, while they were yet undetermined, word was brought that the Spanish +fleet was advancing, and, as it should seem, to give them battle. This +news was by no means agreeable. Such a motley crew of common plunderers +were but ill suited to stand a regular engagement. However, there was +now no alternative, either they must fight or run away; in which case, +being taken singly, they probably would all be destroyed; but by +fighting some might chance to escape. The Spaniards were 14 in number; +of which the Admiral carried 40 guns and 540 men; the Vice-admiral 40 +guns, 400 men; the Rear-admiral 36 guns, 360 men; one ship of 24 guns, +300 men; one of 18 guns, 250 men; and one of eight guns, 200 men; two +fireships; six ships with only small arms, some periagoes and tenders, +having eight hundred men among them all. + +The English, who were to engage this formidable squadron, consisted of +ten sail; Captain Davis’s ship of 36 guns, 156 men, mostly English; +Captain Swan, 16 guns, 140 men, all English; these were the only ships +of force; the others being furnished with none but small arms; Captain +Townley had 110 men, all English; Captain Grenet 308 men, all French; +Captain Harris 100 men, most English; Captain Branley 36 men, some +English, some French; Davis’s tender, eight men; Swan’s tender, eight +men; Townley’s bark, eighty men; and a small bark of thirty tons made +into a fireship, with a canoe’s crew in her; in all 960 men. The +English, notwithstanding the superiority of the enemy, resolved to begin +the attack, having the advantage of the weather gage, which gave them +the choice either to fight or run. Accordingly, about three in the +afternoon, they bore down right before the wind on the enemy, who kept +close upon a wind to meet them; but night came on without any thing +material being done on either side. + +When it grew dark, the Spanish Admiral put forth a light as a signal for +the fleet to cast anchor, and presently hoisted a light on his top, +which after continuing there an hour was taken down, and in a little +time hoisted again. The English, being still to windward, were not aware +of this stratagem; for the Spaniard, knowing of what consequence it was +to gain the weather gage, hoisted the second light upon the topmast of +one of his barks, and edged away silently himself, followed by his +capital ships, and, as soon as it was day-light, appeared to windward of +the English. This was an unexpected stroke, and left them no other +course to take but to fly. + +Captain Townley being hard pressed by the enemy, made a bold push +through a narrow gut that parted the isles, and was followed by several +of the smaller ships, by which they escaped. Captain Harris was chaced +to the westward, and returned no more. And Captain Davis maintained a +running fight all day round the bay of Panama, with the loss only of a +single man. At night the Spaniards gave over the pursuit, and suffered +the English to rendezvous at the same islands from whence they sailed +the day before to begin the attack. + +The 30th, the Spaniards, without pursuing their victory, continued their +course to Panama; and the English having lost Captain Harris in the +engagement, as has just now been mentioned, set sail to the keys of +Quibo in search of him, that being the place appointed to rendezvous in +case of being dispersed. Here they cashiered their cowardly French +Captain, who never came into the engagement at all; and, having found +Captain Harris, they held a consultation about their future operations. + +All their hopes being now frustrated of effecting any thing considerable +by sea, they turned their thoughts on making their fortunes by land; and +for that purpose their prisoners were all strictly examined, with regard +to the strength and riches of the principal cities along the sea-coast, +and within 20 or 30 miles within land. + +On the 5th of July they were joined by Captain Knight, of whom mention +has already been made. He had been cruising more than six months, and +had got nothing except a good ship. He expected to have found the fleet +at King’s Islands enriched with the treasures of the Spanish fleet: but +when he came there, he was informed by the master of a bark-log which he +took, that they were worsted, and had fled to the westward, where he had +now come to join them. + +In order more effectually to pursue their inland enterprizes, they set +about providing canoes for navigating the rivers that led to the chief +cities, against which they had formed designs, and on the 20th of July +they sailed from Quibo, bending their course for Ria Lexa, the nearest +port to Leon, the city they determined first to attack. Their whole +force consisted of 640 men in eight ships, commanded by the Captains +Davis, Swan, Townley, and Knight, with a fireship and three tenders. + +Being arrived within eight leagues of the shore, they quitted their +ships and embarked to the number of 520 men in 31 canoes; and after a +dangerous passage, in which they met with two dreadful tornados, and in +which the large canoes were very near sinking; they arrived at length at +the creek that leads to Leon, and advancing within five miles of the +city without the loss of a man, they landed to the number of 470, +leaving the remainder under the command of Dampier to guard the canoes. + +They marched from the boats in three divisions. Captain Townley with 80 +of the briskest men led the van; Captain Swan with 100 men followed +next, to support him; Captain Davis headed the main body, consisting of +170 men, and Captain Knight with the remainder, composed the rear. +Captain Townley, who had advanced more than two miles a head of the +rest, met a party of Spanish horsemen, and defeated them. Encouraged by +this success, his men pushed briskly on, and entered the town, driving +all before them. When they had gained the high-street they were opposed +by the main body of the Spaniards, drawn up on the parade in order of +battle; but, on two or three of their principal Officers being killed, +they were soon dispersed; and Captain Townley had made himself master of +the city before the foremost division that was to support him had +entered the suburbs. About six in the evening the rearguard came +straggling in; many of the men who composed it, being tired and unable +to keep pace with the rest, came dropping in all night; and one old man +was killed next morning by the Spaniards, from whom he refused to accept +of quarter. He fired his piece among them, reserving his pistols to +defend himself when he should come to close engagement; but they +returned his fire, and shot him dead at a distance. He was a stout +grey-headed old man, aged about 84, and had served under Oliver in the +time of the Irish Rebellion; after which, he entered on board a ship, +and sailed to Jamaica, where he had followed buccaneering for many +years. He could not be prevailed on to tarry with the canoes, but said +he would venture as far as the boldest man among them. He was much +regretted, being a cheerful old man, and never dispirited. + +The Spaniards likewise picked up another straggler, one Mr. Smith, a +merchant, who had accompanied Capt. Swan with an intent to trade, when +that gentleman took in his cargo at London for the South Seas. This +gentleman was carried before the Governor of Leon, who was encamped at +some distance from the town, and was examined by him concerning the +number of the invaders. Being known to a Mulatto servant that attended +the Governor, he was the more easily credited; when he told him, that +they were 1000 strong in the town, and that 500 were left to guard the +canoes. This information had its effect; for the Governor, who was +assembling the force of the country to fall upon the assailants, sent +next day a flag of truce, with an offer to ransom the city. They +demanded 300,000 pieces of eight, and provisions for 1000 men for four +months. The demand, it is probable, exceeded the Governor’s abilities; +so that he was obliged to suffer the city to be set on fire, because he +could not comply with their exorbitant demands. In the mean time, Mr. +Smith being exchanged for a lady that had fallen into the hands of the +invaders, and a Spanish gentleman released, upon promise of sending them +150 oxen to Ria Lexa, the next town they intended to assault, they left +Leon in flames, and returned to their canoes. It does not appear that +the plunder of Leon answered the expectations of the assailants. Be that +as it may, they prowled down the river, stealing cattle, or any thing +that fell in their way; and, on the 16th of June, reached Ria Lexa, in +the harbour of which the ships were already arrived. The Spaniards, for +their better defence, had thrown up an intrenchment at the mouth of a +narrow creek leading to the town, and had placed 110 soldiers to defend +it; they had besides thrown a boom across the river, to prevent either +ships or boats from advancing up the channel: so that these men might +have maintained their posts against an army of 500 regulars. But when +the English came in sight of the breast-work, they fired but two guns +before the Spaniards run away. They were about half an hour in cutting +the boom; and, the channel being now clear, they entered the town +without farther opposition. Here they found nothing but empty houses, +except such things as the inhabitants could not, or would not carry +away; these were about 500 sacks of flour, some pitch, tar, and cordage, +all which, though things of little value to the Spaniards, were +notwithstanding of great use to them. They therefore conveyed them +aboard the ships; and having here received the 150 beeves (the ransom of +the gentleman released on his parole at Leon), some were employed in +killing and salting, while others made excursions to the neighbouring +farms and sugar-works, from whence they rarely returned empty handed. + +They staid here from the 17th to the 24th, “when some of our destructive +crew (to use Dampier’s own words) set fire to the houses, I know not by +whose order, but we marched away, and left them burning.” + +The 25th, the Captains Davis and Swan agreed to part company. They had +hitherto been unsuccessful in concert; they therefore determined to try +their fortunes separately. Knight and Harris accompanied Davis; and +Townley with his two barks followed Captain Swan. + +In a few days Davis set sail for the coasts of Peru; but Capt. Swan, +after staying to take in wood and water, and to recover his men, pursued +his course to the westward, intending first to examine the country of +Mexico towards the north, and then to steer for the East-Indies, and by +that course to return home. This was a very flattering voyage for +Dampier, who was no less earnest to store his mind with the knowledge of +new countries, than to enlarge his fortune by the riches they contained: +he therefore quitted Davis, and entered on board with Captain Swan. + +On the 3d of September they set their prisoners and pilots on shore; the +latter being of no farther use, and the former only an incumbrance. A +malignant fever continued to rage on board, which carried off many of +their men. As the same distemper broke out in the fleet of Captain +Davis, it was concluded that they had taken the infection at Ria Lexa, +where, a few months before their arrival, the inhabitants had been +visited by a kind of plague, which had almost depopulated the town. They +had still, however, about 340 men in tolerable health in four ships. + +In their course to the north-westward, they met with most tempestuous +weather, violent tornadoes from the north-east almost every day, with +such flashes of lightning and claps of thunder, as no man on board had +ever heard. + +On the 14th they came in sight of the well-known volcano of Guatimala, +which appears at first with a double peak. Between these peaks fire and +smoke with dreadful roarings frequently break forth, and spread the +alarm far and wide; yet the inhabitants of Guatimala continue to reside +near the foot of the mountain, and are not so much intimidated upon +those occasions as those who live at a greater distance. This city is +famous for many rich commodities, the produce of the neighbouring hills +and savannas among which it is situated. It lies about eight leagues +from the South Sea, and by report not above 40 or 50 leagues from the +North, to which it sends annually great quantities of indico, anatta, +silvester, and cochineal. The indico plant grows wild about Guatimala, +and has lately been introduced and cultivated in Georgia and Carolina. +The anatta is a red dye, and is made from the flowers of a shrub which +grows in many of the southern provinces of America. Silvester is the +seeds of a fruit not unlike the prickly pear of England; and cochineal +is a collection of insects bred in fruit of the same shape and size. +Both the trees grow wild about Guatimala; and both the silvester and +cochineal yield the same kind of dye, and are sometimes substituted one +for the other, though the cochineal is generally accounted the most +valuable. + +The volcano of Guatimala is seen at 75 miles distance; and the sea, as +they approached it, was full of floating pumice-stones, washed by the +rains from the adjacent hills, and precipitated by the floods into the +main ocean, where, by a constant accumulation, they cover an immense +space. Driftwood they likewise observed in great abundance; and the +trees were large and not much rotted. + +When they had reached the latitude of Toguantapeque, in 14 deg. 30 min. +N. Captain Townley, with 106 men in nine canoes, attempted to land; but +found the country defended by huge sandy hills, against which the waves +beat high with incredible fury. The wind being fair, he coasted along +the shore for several days, and the ships continued to follow him with +an easy sail: at length, grown desperate, he rushed upon a sandy beach, +but the canoes overset before they could reach the land. In this attempt +one or two men perished; some had a leg or an arm broke, and others were +very much hurt. However, the majority having made good their landing, +dragged afterwards their boats on shore; but what gave them the greatest +concern was, that all but those who had been provident enough to seal up +their cartouch-boxes, had wetted their powder, and rendered their +fire-arms useless. This gave a damp to their enterprize; yet they +prepared to penetrate the country, and to get sight of the town of which +they were in search: but either there was no such place, or their fears +prevented their discovering it; for all that were alive returned on +board the ships without procuring a meal’s provisions to refresh the +sick. + +After this fruitless expedition, they still continued coasting to the +westward, with the wind at east-north-east, till they came to Tangola, a +small island where there was good anchorage; from thence they sailed to +Guatulco, a sea-port in lat. 15 deg. 30 min. N. the best in Mexico. On +one side of the entrance into this harbour there is a small island, and +on the other a hollow rock, through which the billows as they pass +produce a horrible roaring, and, being compressed against the sides, are +forced through a hole at the top, and rise like the waters of an +artificial fountain to an incredible height. In this harbour there is +good anchorage. It is about three miles in depth and one in breadth, +runs in north-west, and on the west side small ships may ride +land-locked secure from wind, or weather. At the bottom of this harbour, +Drake found a fine rivulet of water, near a village, of which hardly any +traces remained, except the ruins of a small chapel enclosed in a fine +grove of trees that gave it a very venerable appearance. Here the sick +on board the ships were brought ashore; and here a project was formed to +traverse the country, and plunder the inland towns; but, after +travelling 14 miles, and seizing two or three Indian guides, they could +only find a little village, where some vanellos were drying, the cods of +which are held in great esteem by the Spaniards. They grow upon vines +that creep like ivy about trees of greater magnitude, and flourish in +the bay of Campeachy, as well as in the country of Guatulco; but the +Indians keep the method of curing them a secret to themselves. The +Indians of this village could speak but little Spanish, appeared to be a +poor harmless people, had neither gold nor silver among them, nor could +they tell where those precious metals were to be obtained. It was +therefore to no purpose to pursue their march through a country, rich, +indeed, in natural productions, but destitute of cultivation, and almost +without inhabitants; they therefore returned to their ships; and, while +the sick were endeavouring to regain their strength, the healthy +employed themselves in providing necessaries to continue the voyage. + +On the 8th, four canoes well manned set forwards to the port of Angels, +with orders to wait there till the arrival of the ships. In the mean +time their instructions were to take some prisoners. + +On the 12th, the malignity of the distemper with which they had been +long afflicted being abated, and the sick in a fair way of recovery, the +ships set sail in order to follow the boats. The boats, however, had +mistaken the harbour, and two of them, in attempting to land at a place +near which they had observed some cattle feeding, were overset in the +beach, and with difficulty got out again to sea, with the loss of one +man drowned, and some others hurt. They lost likewise four of their +guns, and spoiled their ammunition; and, in a very distressed condition, +the next day met the ships. The other two canoes parted from them in the +night of the 9th, and had not rejoined them since. The harbour of Port +Angels lies in latitude 15 deg. N. and is open to all winds, except +those from the land. The Spaniards had compared it to that of Guatulco; +but there being no similitude, the boats had passed it without knowing +it; and the two that were missing had rowed as far as Acapulco before +they discovered their mistake. When the ships arrived before the +harbour, the missing boats were ready to join them; and there appearing +to be plenty of cattle at no great distance from the shore, 100 men were +landed to supply the ships with beef. + +The country round this harbour exhibited a most delightful prospect; the +hills were covered with large and lofty trees, the plains with a most +beautiful verdure, and the savannas interspersed with rills and rivers, +on the banks of which were innumerable little shrubs, the beauty and +variety of whose flowers surpass description. Here they made no doubt of +being furnished with whatever their wants required. In less than four +miles march, the party that were landed met with a grazing seat +belonging to Don Diego de la Rosa, in which they found store of salt, +and a considerable quantity of maize, but no inhabitants, the family +having fled on the first appearance of a descent. They found also +poultry in abundance, and hogs or cabritos without number. Here they +feasted for two or three days, and every man brought away as much as he +could carry; but the ruggedness of the road, and the weakness of the +company, debilitated by sickness, prevented their improving so +favourable an opportunity to the best advantage. They relinquished with +reluctance many good things which they had in possession, more than +sufficient for present enjoyment, but too cumbersome to be conveyed to +the ships for future use. + +In the harbour of Port Angels there is good riding in 13, 20, and 30 +fathom water. The flood rises about five feet, sets to the north-east; +and the ebb at south-west. + +The 27th in the morning they set sail from Port Angels, and in the +evening came to an anchor in 16 fathom water, under a small rocky island +six leagues to the westward of their former station, of which island the +Spanish books give no account. The next day they weighed and continued +their course; and, being a-breast of a small lagune whence the missing +boats had a few days before taken a quantity of fish, they lay to, and +sent in a boat with 12 men to bring off a more ample supply. The +Spaniards, on marking the trim of the ships, suspected their intent; +and, concealing themselves behind a rock at the narrow entrance of the +lagune, discharged a volley of small arms at the boat just as it passed +the place of their ambuscade, by which five of the crew were dangerously +wounded. Alarmed at this sudden attack, and finding it impossible to +retreat, because of the narrowness of the channel, they pushed forwards +into the lagune, where they could lie out of gunshot till the enemy +dispersed, or till they should be relieved by the vigilance and valour +of their own people. In this situation, however, they continued two days +and three nights; till at length Captain Townley, fearing some disaster +had befallen them, manned his canoes, and, beating the Spaniards from +the rocks, opened the sufferers a free passage to the sea. Their joy was +the greater, as the pains of the wounded men began to grow intolerable; +and, had they not then been relieved, they must in another day, nay, +some of them, perhaps, in a few hours, have died in the greatest +agonies. This lagune lies in latitude 16 deg. 40 min. N. + +On the 2d of November they passed by a remarkable rock, called by the +Spaniards the Algatross; five or six miles to the westward of which are +seven or eight white cliffs that serve to direct mariners to avoid a +dangerous shoal stretching about a league and a half south-by-west. A +little farther to the westward the Spaniards have erected a breast-work +upon a small island at the mouth of a fair river, which at that time was +defended by 200 men. They manned their boats, and being determined to +land, the Spaniards, after firing 20 or 30 shot, deserted the island, +and left the channel open. They entered on the west side, and found +plenty of salt laid up in cabbins for curing the fish which they catch +in the lagunes, but in what manner Dampier could not conceive, for he +neither saw hook, line, net, boat, or canoe. At the distance of three +leagues from the entrance of the river they came to a house in which was +a Mulatto servant, who informed them, that at Acapulco there was a stout +ship from Lima; and that a little higher up the river, there was maize +and cattle in abundance, to which place he offered to be their guide. + +On this intelligence a contention arose between the commanders. Captain +Townley, who was in want of a better ship, proposed to sail immediately +to Acapulco to make himself master of that from Lima; but Captain Swan +was first for procuring provisions to enable them to subsist while they +were pursuing the grand object they had in view, that of intercepting +the Manilla ship which every year comes constantly from the East Indies +richly laden, and arrives nearly at a certain season off the southermost +point of California in her course to Acapulco. As questions of this kind +are always decided by numbers among voluntary adventurers, Captain +Townley’s proposal was not only seconded by his own crew, but also by +the greatest part of Captain Swan’s. They accordingly returned to the +ships with all expedition, and set sail on the 5th, and on the 7th came +in sight of the high land of Acapulco, a port easy to be distinguished +from all others, by means of three hills, the middlemost of which rises +like a sugar loaf, and the westermost of the other two has on its summit +two hillocks which shew in appearance like two paps. When the ships came +to the distance of about 12 leagues they brought to, and Captain Townley +with 140 men embarked on board canoes with a view to seize the Lima ship +by surprize, before his own ships should come in sight. + +They had hardly sailed four leagues before there arose so dreadful a +tornado that those on board the ships thought themselves in the utmost +peril of their lives, and everyone concluded that the boats must perish. +Happily, however, they weathered the storm; but were driven in great +distress into Port Marquis, a tolerable harbour about a league to the +eastward of Acapulco. Here they staid to dry their cloaths, and refit +their furniture, and in the night of the following day they rowed softly +into Acapulco harbour; “and, because they would not be heard,” says +Dampier, “they hauled in their oars, and paddled as softly as if they +had been seeking manatee. They paddled close to the castle; then struck +over to the town, and found the ship riding between the breastwork and +the fort, about 100 yards from each. When they had well viewed her, and +considered the danger of the design, they thought it impossible to +accomplish it; therefore they paddled softly back again till they were +out of command of the forts, and then they attempted to land, but were +opposed by a company of Spanish soldiers, who fired at them and kept +them at a distance from the shore till day-light; when, taking a view of +the town and castle, and not liking their appearance, they returned on +board, tired, hungry, and heartily mortified at their disappointment.” + +Acapulco lies in 17 deg. N. on the west-side of the continent of +America, famous for its trade to the East Indies, and to Lima; in which +trade three ships are annually employed; two of them are so regulated, +that each has the advantage of the trade-winds that blow between the +Tropics, both in going and returning to their respective ports. The +third is employed in supplying the other two with Spanish goods from +Lima, and in bringing to Lima the Indian merchandize and money brought +from Manilla. + +On the 11th, the ships sailed from Acapulco, and continued coasting +along the shore to the westward. Near the sea-side the land is low, but +rises gradually till within land it appears to touch the clouds. Though +the ground is clean and the anchorage good at a mile from land, yet it +is defended by breakers that render the shore inaccessible, except at +the utmost hazard of men’s lives. In their passage, observing a cluster +of little round hills a little to the westward of the promontory of +Petaplan in 17 deg. 20 min N. they examined the coast narrowly, and +discovered a small river, at the entrance of which they landed 170 men, +who, after marching about 14 miles up the country, came to a wretched +Indian village, in which a Mulatto woman and four children were the only +living creatures left. These they brought to the ships; and, by the +intelligence they received from the old woman, they proceeded to the +harbour of Chequetan, from whence she conducted them, through a pathless +wood, to a farm-house, where they found a caravan of sixty mules laden +with flour, chocolate, and cheese; all which, together with some oxen, +they brought down to their canoes. The cargo of the caravan they +instantly conveyed on board the ships; but the oxen, with eighteen cows +which they afterwards seized without opposition, they first killed and +cured, and, having divided the whole into lots, every ship’s crew took +their own share on board. + + [Illustration: _Dampier’s Comrades seizing the Oxen & Mules laden with + Flour, Cheese &c. at a Farm House._] + +On the 21st they quitted this fortunate harbour, leaving the Mulatto and +her four children to their fate. On the 25th they passed a lofty hill +divided into peaks, in lat. 18 deg. 8 min. N. near which the Spanish +maps place a town called Cupan, which however they could not find; after +a short stay in search of it, they proceeded along the coast, till on +the 28th they came in sight of the volcano of Colima, in lat. 18 deg. 36 +min. N. at the foot of which is situated the rich town of Colima, from +whence it takes its name. Of the valley by which this burning mountain +is surrounded, the Spaniards give a most luxuriant description; but our +navigators found it absolutely inaccessible from the sea; for the surf +ran so high, and the breakers appeared so formidable, that the boldest +of them durst not attempt it: they therefore very reluctantly quitted +the neighbourhood, and proceeded in quest of Sallagua, the bay of which +they discovered in lat. 18 deg. 52 min. N. Here they landed 200 of their +best men, who were opposed by a body of Spanish foot, supported by a +party of horse; but, on the first charge, the foot gave way, and the +horse soon followed. In the pursuit the English were led into a broad +road, and followed it, through a woody and rocky country, to the +distance of four or five leagues, without seeing house or inhabitant. In +their way back they met with two straggling Mulattoes, who told them the +road led to the city of Oarrah four days journey off, and the soldiers +whom they had defeated were sent from thence to escort the passengers +from India that were expected to land in Sallagua bay, from on board the +Manilla ship that every year touched upon that coast. + +Encouraged by this intelligence, they hastened to embark; and, setting +sail on the 6th of December, steered directly for Cape Corientes, at the +height of which they expected to meet their prize. In this passage, +Dampier, who had hitherto by temperance preserved his health, was seized +with a fever and ague, which at length terminated in a dropsical +disorder that was very near carrying him off, and which carried off many +of the men. The dropsy, Dampier says, is a general disorder on this +coast, and the natives pretend that the stone of the alligator dried and +powdered, and drank in water, is an infallible remedy. The same receipt +he found mentioned in a Mexican almanac; but could find no alligator to +give it a trial. + +On the 11th of December they came in sight of Cape Corientes. It is of a +moderate height, flat and even a-top, cloathed with woods, and +projecting into the sea in steep cliffs. It is laid down in the Spanish +maps in latitude 20 deg. 28 min. N. and longitude 230 deg. 56 min. W. +from Teneriff, or in 121 deg. 41 min. W. from the Lizard-point in +England. + +They were now four ships in company; Captain Swan and his tender, and +Captain Townley and his tender. These were all properly stationed to +gain intelligence; but, provisions growing short, Captain Townley’s bark +was dispatched with 60 men to traverse the coast to the westward of the +Cape, in search of some town or village where their wants might be +supplied. On the 17th the bark returned, being unable to weather the +cape, or make any useful discovery. She had left, however, four canoes +with 46 men, who determined to double the cape, or perish in the +attempt. + +On the 18th, all the ships quitted their stations, and sailed for the +island of Chametley, about 16 or 18 leagues to the eastward of the cape, +to take in wood and water. On these islands live the fishermen, who, as +the Spaniards say, fish for the inhabitants of the city of Purification. +On the 20th, they anchored between the islands and the main in five +fathom water, clear sand. Here they caught plenty of rock-fish, but saw +no inhabitants. On the 21st Captain Townley with about 60 men went to an +Indian village about seven or eight leagues to the westward, to +endeavour to procure provisions; and next day Captain Swan returned to +his station off the cape. On the 24th, the four canoes who had doubled +the cape, returned to the cruisers, and reported, that they had rowed to +the bay of the valley of Valderas, or Val d’ Iris, and had landed in the +garden of the world, where they found fruits of the most delicious +flavour growing wild in the plains, and where the cattle were feeding at +large among the streams of water that flowed meandering in the savannas, +and lost their waters among the finest groves of trees they ever beheld; +but when they marched in pursuit of the beeves that were every where +straying in the vallies, they were suddenly surrounded by a body of +Spaniards, who briskly attacked them, some on foot, and some on +horseback. They made a gallant defence, and suddenly retreated into an +adjoining wood, where they were followed by the Spanish horse. These +were armed each with a case of pistols, and some of them, besides their +pistols, had short guns. The English, being covered by the trees, made +use of their fire-arms with advantage; and, after killing about 17 of +the assailants, and wounding several others, the rest being unsupported +by the foot, fled with precipitation. In this skirmish four English were +shot dead, besides two desperately wounded; and, not daring again to +attempt the valley, they killed a horse, and, having satisfied their +hunger, they returned to their canoes. + +On the 25th, being Christmas-day, they cruised close to the cape, and +sent in three of their strikers to kill fish. In the afternoon they +returned with three great jew-fish, which afforded them all a +Christmas-dinner. Captain Townley on the 28th came to his station, and +brought with him 40 bushels of maize, which he had seized at an Indian +village four or five leagues up the country, and which his men were +obliged to carry all that way on their backs. + +They cruised till the 1st of January, 1686, off Corientes, and then +steered towards the valley of Valderas, in order to furnish themselves +with beef; and before night they anchored in 60 fathom water a mile from +the shore. The next day they landed, dividing themselves into two +parties; one party posted themselves on the hills to watch the motions +of the Spaniards, while the other party traversed the vallies to kill +the cattle. The Spaniards frequently presented themselves in companies, +but did not dare to come near enough to engage. They continued here till +the 7th, in which time they had killed and salted beef enough for two +months allowance for their whole company, and, had not their salt failed +them they might have stored themselves with much more. + +They now gave over all farther expectation of the Manilla ship, it being +the general opinion that she had escaped (as they were afterwards +assured she had) while the ships were employed in seeking provisions. +“So this design failed,” says Dampier, “through Captain Townley’s +eagerness after the Lima ship, which he attempted in Acapulco harbour. +For though,” adds he, “we took a little flour hard by, yet the same +guide who told us of the Lima ship, would have conducted us where we +might have had store of beef and maize; but instead thereof we lost both +our time and the opportunity of providing ourselves, and so were forced +to be victualling when we should have been cruizing, to the total ruin +of the enterprize.” + +Being now provided with beef in abundance, and having taken in wood and +water in proportionable quantities, the two commanders, Swan and +Townley, having separate views, though united in this one grand object +of intercepting the Manilla ship, thought proper to part company, +Captain Swan intending to steer westward, and Captain Townley to return +eastward. Hitherto a Moskito chief with three of his men had sailed with +Captain Swan, but being now about to depart never more to return to +their country, he was desirous of recommending them to the care of +Captain Townley, who being bound to the coast of Peru, might there put +them on shore at some convenient place, from whence they might travel +over land to the North Sea. This Captain Townley undertook to perform; +and the ships being now under sail, they saluted each other, and parted. + +Our navigator continued to sail with Captain Swan. Before night they +passed Point Pontique, which forms the westernmost point of the bay, +distant from Cape Corientes about twenty leagues. This point is in lat. +20 deg. 50 min. N. a league to the westward of which are two barren +islands, called the islands of Pontique. Beyond these islands the land +trends to the northward, presenting a very rugged unpleasant appearance +as far as the eye can extend the prospect. On the 14th, they came in +sight of a small white rock in lat. 21 deg. 15 min. N. which at a +distance seemed like a ship under sail. From this island the land runs +full more northerly, and the sea tumbles in with such violence upon the +shore, that for many leagues together there is no landing; there is, +however, every where good anchoring as far as the islands of Chametley. +These islands are six in number, and different from those of the same +name on the east of Cape Corientes, being a little within the Tropic of +Cancer, and not above three leagues from the main. On these islands +grows a fruit called the penguin, of which there are two sorts, the +yellow and the red. The yellow grows on a thick stem about a foot high, +the leaves narrow and about half the length of the stem edged with +prickles. The fruit grows out from the top of the stem in two or three +large clusters, 16 or 20 in a cluster. It is round and in size like a +small pullet’s egg; the outer coat is thick and tough, and the pulp in +the inside is full of little black seeds. The red penguin is in shape +like a little nine-pin; grows up on stools from the ground in clusters +of 60 or 70 on a stool, standing upright like the leaves of houseleek, +and are smaller than the yellow: they are surrounded by leaves a foot +and a half long, edged with prickles like the former. They have a sharp +pungent taste, are very wholesome; but those who eat of them +immoderately find them heating. They grow wild, and in the bay of +Campeachy Dampier says they are so plentiful, that one can hardly range +the plains for their prickly leaves. + +From these islands Captain Swan embarked 100 men in canoes, and went +himself in search of Coolican, a river in the province of Cullacan, with +a town of considerable trade (probably that marked Pastla in the Spanish +maps) upon its banks, the inhabitants whereof pass in boats to the +island of California and fish for pearls. They coasted along the shore +as far as lat. 24 deg. N. but found no river; and after three or four +days absence returned without making any discovery. + +A few leagues to the N.N.W. of Chametley is a narrow entrance into a +lake, called by the Spaniards Rio de Sal, which runs about 12 leagues +easterly, parallel with the shore, forming many low mangrove islands, +and having depth of water every where for boats to row along its banks. +In this lake Captain Swan entered, accompanied by 150 of his men in 12 +canoes. In his progress he observed a grazing farm, and landing some of +his men, they found the house deserted, and the cattle driven away. On +proceeding further along the lake, two Indians were seen running at some +distance, whom they took for spies, and having discharged a volley of +small arms, one of them was wounded in the thigh, and not being able to +continue his race, was seized by a party landed for that purpose who +brought him on board. He informed them, that, about four leagues from +the place where they there were, an Indian town was situated in a +savanna, abounding with cattle. The company were scarcely landed to go +in search of this town before they were attacked by a body of Spanish +horse, who not being properly armed, made but a faint opposition, and +suddenly retired. While the English were in pursuit, the enemy played +off a stratagem that greatly annoyed them. We have already mentioned, in +the voyages of Captain Sir Francis Drake, the nature of the grass that +covers the savannas on the isthmus of Darien between the North and the +South Seas. Such was the grass with which the pursuers were surrounded, +when the Spaniards set it on fire, and, being dry as stubble, it burnt +with astonishing fury, and spread with such rapidity, that it was with +the utmost difficulty the whole party escaped being involved in the +flames. This disaster not only made them more cautious, but occasioned a +delay, which gave the Spaniards time to collect their force and to make +a more formidable opposition. When the English arrived the next day at +the village of which they had intelligence, they found it occupied by an +armed garrison, whom it was necessary to overcome before they could +enter; but as the Spaniards were, for the most part, destitute of +fire-arms, and the Indians wholly unexperienced in their use, the +advantage the English derived from that circumstance soon decided the +contest in their favour. The enemy fled after the loss of some of their +leaders, and left the conquerors master of the place, having only one +man killed with an arrow, and their surgeon sorely wounded. + +They were told by their prisoners, that, about five leagues from the +town of which they were now in possession, two rich gold mines were +wrought by Indian slaves belonging to the Spaniards of Compostella, the +most considerable Spanish city in that district. It was not now a time +to search for gold, when they were in want of every kind of food, except +the beef they had cured at Valderas. Their chief search was now for +maize, and having plundered the village of all they could find, they +conveyed it to their boats with great labour; and next day quitted the +lake, and returned on board the ships. This lake is laid down in +latitude 23 deg. 30 min. N. + +On the 2d of February, Captain Swan made another excursion with 80 men +in search of the river Rosario, at the entrance of which they landed, +and marched to an Indian town of the same name. Here they were told, +that the gold mines were not above two leagues from the town; but, like +the cock in the fable, they rejected the pearl and chose the +barley-corn; about 90 bushels of maize, and the other provisions they +found in the place, though insufficient for the purpose of their +intended voyage, were yet of more value in their present necessity than +all the gold of Compostella. + +On the 3d the ships came to an anchor off the river’s mouth of Rosario, +in seven fathom water, oozy ground, in lat. 22 deg. 51 min. N. + +On the 7th, the Captain with his company came on board. The quantity of +provisions which he had procured was but trifling for so many men; he +therefore sent the next day a party in search of the river Oleta, but +they returned without having found it. The river St. Jago was next +attempted, and on the 11th they anchored in seven fathom water near the +mouth of it, three leagues E. S. E. of the white rock of Maxentelbo, the +high hill of Zelisco bearing S. E. This is one of the principal rivers +upon the coast, and lies in latitude 22 deg. 15 min. N. + +On the 11th, 70 men were sent up the river to make discoveries; they +spent two days in examining the creeks and inlets, and at length came to +a large field of maize which they had begun to gather, when they spied +an Indian who had been sent to watch the corn, whom they seized and +carried on board, in hopes of gaining from him some intelligence, by +which they might obtain a more effectual and speedy supply. He told +them, there was a town called Santa Pecaque, about four leagues from the +place where he was taken, in which there was great store of provisions, +and to which he undertook to be their guide. Captain Swan, overjoyed at +the news, ordered 140 men to be instantly embarked on board the canoes, +and to proceed with the Indian as he should direct. After rowing five +leagues up the river, they came in sight of the town, when they landed +in the night, and next morning set out on their march by land. About 10, +they had advanced within musket-shot; and, having dispatched a party to +reconnoitre, they found the town deserted, and entered it without +opposition. + +The town of Santa Pecaque is seated near the side of a wood in a +spacious plain, neatly built, with a square in the middle, on each side +of which the houses are furnished with balconies, from whence the +inhabitants, in general, are spectators of the frequent processions +exhibited by the Spanish priests, in order to convert the Indians, who +are now almost all become christians in the Spanish settlements. The +town, though small, has two churches; and they were told, that about 70 +white families constantly resided in it, besides those who occasionally +came there as carriers from the mines, and as merchants from +Compostella. These carriers furnish the adjacent miners with maize, +sugar, salt, and salt-fish, of all which there was great plenty in Santa +Pecaque. + +Captain Swan being acquainted by an express with the success of this +expedition, and with the opportunity that now offered to supply his +wants, hastened to the town to give the necessary orders. When he +arrived, he divided his men into two parties; one party he employed in +conveying the provisions to the boats; the other in plundering and +packing up. These he relieved alternately; and when both parties were +wearied out with this laborious service, they caught horses, and, having +laden them with maize, dispatched them under a strong escort down to the +canoes. + +On the 17th, when they arrived, they found the men who guarded the +canoes in high spirits, though they had been attacked by the Spaniards, +and had one man desperately wounded. The party that escorted the horses +thought it adviseable, however, to reinforce the canoe-guard, lest the +Spaniards should renew the attack. Next day they returned to the town, +and the party left therein were preparing to convoy more maize to the +canoes; but, before they set out, Captain Swan understood by an Indian +whom they had made prisoner, that 1000 men were in arms in order to +attack them, and that they were already advanced within three leagues of +the place. Upon this intelligence, the Captain advised all his men to +load as much maize as they could altogether bear away, and instantly to +depart in a body. With this advice they absolutely refused to comply, +being determined not to leave Santa Pecaque while a load of provisions +remained within it. It was in vain to endeavour to persuade those whom +he could not punish for disobeying orders; and, therefore, on the 19th, +he suffered 50 of them to depart with as many loaded horses; exhorting +them, however, to march in a body, that they might be the better able to +defend themselves against any sudden surprize. They were equally deaf to +advice and instruction; they pursued their old course, marching in a +line, and every one leading a single horse. The Spaniards had remarked +their manner of marching, and had placed themselves in ambush the +preceding night. They had scarce travelled half a league before they +were suddenly set upon, and every man cut to pieces before they could +assemble to prepare for their defence. Captain Swan, who had heard the +firing, hastened with his party to the place of action; but on his +approach he was struck with horror at the sight of such a number of his +followers weltering in their blood, stript of their arms, and divested +of their charge. The Spaniards, after the slaughter, having possest +themselves of their musquets, &c. seized also the loaded horses, and +instantly fled. Though the party commanded by Captain Swan did not +exceed the number of those already slain, yet they were suffered to pass +unmolested to the canoes, on board of which they embarked, and, with the +provisions they had already secured, returned to the ships. Among the +slain on this occasion was Mr. Ringrose, who wrote that part of the +history of the buccaneers that relates to Captain Sharpe. + +The slaughter of this unfortunate party dampt the spirits of the +survivors, and discouraged them from attempting any farther descents +upon this coast. It was therefore determined to steer directly for Cape +St. Lucas on the island of California, where they might lie secure from +the attacks of the Spaniards, till the men were refreshed, and the ships +put in a condition to undertake a new voyage. + +The lake of California (for so it is called in the Spanish charts) is +either very little known to the Spaniards, or very carefully concealed. +Though they have mines open already more than they can work, in Mexico, +Chili, and Peru, yet they are very unwilling to allow other European +powers to share the treasures of those countries, though they themselves +cannot exhaust them; nor is it at all likely that any considerable +advantages will ever be made by others, till by some lucky chance a +nearer passage into those seas is discovered. “Were I,” says Dampier, +“to attempt a North-west passage, I would go first to the South Seas, +bend my course from thence along by California, and that way seek a +passage into the Western Seas. If I succeeded in my attempt, I should +then be without that dread which others must have had of passing from a +known to an unknown region; and which, it is not improbable, obliged +them to relinquish the pursuit just as they were on the point of +accomplishing their designs. In like manner,” he adds, “were I to be +employed in search of a North-east passage, I would winter about Japan, +Conca, or the North-east part of China; and taking the spring and summer +before me, I would make my first trial on the coast of Tartary, wherein +if I succeeded I should come into some known part, and have a great deal +of time before me to reach Archangel or some other European harbour.” + +On the 21st they set sail, directing their course for California; but, +being opposed by contrary winds, were unable to reach their destined +port, and obliged to put in at the Maria islands, in latitude 21 deg. 40 +min. N. distant about 40 leagues from Cape St. Lucas, and 20 from Cape +Corientes. These islands are three in number, and they came to an anchor +at the east end of the middlemost in five fathom water, clear sand; +where, as soon as they moored their ships, they instantly began to unrig +them, in order to careen. + +Here Captain Swan proposed to his company to return home by way of the +East Indies, which was highly approved by some, and as violently opposed +by others, who, being ignorant, imagined, as Dampier says, that he would +carry them out of the world. At first coming they lived upon nothing but +seal; but in two or three days their strikers furnished them plentifully +with turtle; and they likewise killed guanicoes, conies, and large +pigeons; so that they consumed none of their ship provisions during +their stay. While the sailors were working upon the ships, the officers +employed themselves in surveying the stores and measuring the maize; +which they divided into three parts, and allotted two parts to the ship, +and one part to the bark, the ship carrying one hundred men, the bark +only fifty. + +Here Dampier, who had been long ill of the dropsy, tried a very uncommon +remedy. He stripped himself stark naked, laid himself down upon the hot +sand, and caused the surgeon to cover him all but his head; in this +manner he lay near half an hour; but being unable to endure it any +longer, he was carried to his tent and put to bed. While he was in the +sand he sweat immoderately, and to that operation he ascribes the +recovery of his health. + +They staid till the 26th, when their ships being clean, they sailed to +the valley of Valderas, in order to take in fresh water. Here they came +to an anchor at the mouth of the river where they had anchored before; +but, now that the dry season prevailed, they found the water brackish, +and unfit for use. They then weighed, and, coming to a fine fresh-water +brook at the foot of a little round hill about four leagues from Cape +Corientes, they filled on the 29th 32 tons of excellent water, a +quantity sufficient to serve their voyage. + +Being provided with every thing they had reason to expect in this +country, they now began seriously to consider of the possibility of +performing their intended voyage. Upon a nice calculation, they found +they had only 60 days provisions on board, at a little more than half a +pint of maize a-day for each man; they had a great many rats on board, +which they could not prevent from consuming a part of the maize; they +had, according to the Spanish account, more than 7000 miles to run from +Cape Corientes to Guam, the nearest land; and, that island being subject +to the Spaniards, they had no certainty of a supply when they came +there. All these discouragements staggered the most forward of them; and +nothing could prevail with the majority but a promise from Captain Swan +to cruise off Manilla, to intercept the register ship, as soon as they +should arrive in the proper station. To this condition Captain Swan was +forced to submit, though much against his inclination; for he had no +mind to commence plunderer at first; and now he was heartily tired of +the trade. + +On the 31st of March, 1686, they took their departure from Cape +Corientes, the Cygnet, Captain Swan, with 100 men; and the bark, Captain +Teat, with 50. At first they steered with a small land breeze at +E. N. E. which carried them three or four leagues; then the sea-wind +came on at W. N. W. and changed their course S. W. By six o’clock in the +evening they were nine leagues S. W. from the cape. About 10 the next +morning they had the sea-breeze at N. N. E. so that at noon they were 30 +leagues from the cape. It then blew a fresh gale, which carried them +into the true trade-wind. At first they had it at N. N. E. and then +northerly. At 250 leagues from the shore it settled at E. N. E., and +there stood till they came within 40 leagues of Guam. + +After the second day of their departure, having fine clear weather, and +a fresh trade-wind, they crouded all the sail they could spread, and had +frequently observations of the sun, moon, and stars; so that they could +calculate their longitudinal distance by way of amusement almost every +day. At their first setting out they steered into the latitude of 13 +deg. N. and it is remarkable, that in a run of more than 6700 miles in +this latitude they saw none of those small islands that are so +plentifully interspersed in the same latitude on the opposite side of +the Line; nor did Commodore Anson, who afterwards pursued the same track +from Acapulco, see land till he arrived at the island of Tinian. As they +run at a great rate, and the wind had every appearance of continuing, +after being at sea about 20 days, the men began to grow clamorous to +have their allowance enlarged; with which the Captain was forced to +comply, though he endeavoured to persuade them to patience, and +represented to them the danger of being becalmed, of missing their +intended port, or of being refused a supply when they arrived. But none +of these could prevail. The cry was for an augmentation, and an +augmentation they had. Till the 20th of April their allowance was eight +spoonfuls of boiled maize a man; but after that it was enlarged to ten. +Dampier, who, as has been before noticed, had long been troubled with a +dropsical disorder, gathered strength by this spare regimen; but those +who were in full health it very much weakened. He says, he constantly +drank three times a-day; but there were many on board who did not drink +once in nine or ten days, and some not in twelve; one in particular did +not drink in 17 days, and then said he was not a-dry, though he made +water every day. Amidst these hardships one poor fellow was found guilty +of theft, and sentenced to receive three stripes with a two-inch rope on +his bare back from every man in the ship. Captain Swan, Dampier says, +began first, and struck with a hearty good will, and his example was +followed by all the rest; a punishment that must make every feeling mind +shudder. + +Though by the Spanish account the distance from Cape Corientes to Guam +is said to be 2400 leagues, or 7200 English miles, yet Captain Swan had +persuaded his men, that, by the English account the distance was only +1900 leagues; and that, as Drake and Cavendish had run it in less than +50 days each, they with better built ships might run it even in less +than either of them: when, therefore, they had run the 1900 leagues, and +the 50 days were nearly expired, they began to grow very mutinous and +those who had declared against the voyage from the beginning, exclaimed +bitterly against the Captain, and against all those who had persuaded +them to undertake it. They had, during this long run of 6000 miles, seen +neither fish, fowl, bird, or insect, except once when, at the distance +of 4975 miles from Cape Corientes, they spied some ruabies, which they +apprehended had come from islands or cliffs at no great distance, though +they never came in sight of any. The Captain in the midst of these +tumults gave them fair words; told them, that it was probable, the +Spanish accounts might be the best, and encouraged them by giving them +hopes, that, as the breeze continued, a few days patience would put an +end to their troubles. On the 18th of May they met with some rain, and +the clouds settling in the west foretold their near approach to land. On +the 20th, the bark being near three leagues a-head, ran over a rocky +shoal, on which there was only four fathom water. On the shoal they +observed abundance of fish swimming every where about; and Captain Teat +imagining that land was near, clapt upon a wind with the bark’s head to +the north, and lay by to speak with the ship. When the ship came up, +Captain Teat went on board, and related what he had seen; on which, +being then in lat. 12 deg. 55 min. N. and Guam being laid down in 13 +deg. N. they clapt on a wind, and steered to the northward, very +doubtful, however, of being right, as no shoals near Guam are noticed in +the Spanish charts. They pursued this course, however, till four in the +afternoon; when, to their unspeakable joy, they saw the island of Guam +at eight leagues distance. “And happy it was, says Dampier, that we got +sight of it before our provisions were gone, of which we had but enough +for three days more; for, as I was afterwards informed, the crew had +combined first to kill Captain Swan, and eat him, when the victuals were +gone; and, after him, all of us who were accessary in promoting the +voyage.” + +Nothing can exhibit a more striking indication of the ferocity of man’s +nature, than the resolution formed by this abandoned crew. After a long +series of enormities, robberies, murders, burning of houses and towns, +exposing their fellow-creatures to want of food and shelter, and +spreading terror and devastation wherever they set their feet, they at +length, distressed and half-famished themselves, begin to murmur against +their leaders, and the greater number combine to murder the lesser +number, and to make food of their flesh. Need we, after reading this, +have recourse to those we call barbarous nations for instances of the +savage nature of man! The most uncultivated of those eat only the flesh +of enemies killed in war; but these wretches, who called themselves +christians, exceeded in their intention every horrid example we read of; +they conspired to kill and eat their own Chiefs! + +On the 21st of May they came to an anchor about the middle of the island +of Guam on the west side. This is one of the Ladrone islands. Dampier +places it in 13 deg. 21 min. N. and computes the meridian distance of +Guam from Cape Corientes to be about 7302 miles; and supposes the South +Sea to be of greater breadth by 25 degrees than is commonly allowed by +hydrographers. It is about twelve leagues in length and four in breadth; +on it the Spaniards have a small fort of six guns, garrisoned by 20 or +30 soldiers, and commanded by a Governor, and one or two subordinate +Officers. The climate is healthy, and the natives active, docile, and +ingenious, and are the best boat-builders throughout the Indian seas. +Dampier believes their boats sail the best of any in the world. He tried +one of them by the log; and, by the rate she ran in half a minute, +computes her course at 24 miles within the hour. These Indians are no +less dexterous in navigating than in building their boats. By report +they will pass to other islands at 30 leagues distance, do business, and +return again in 12 hours. + +They had no sooner cast anchor than a Spanish friar came on board, with +three Indians: Captain Swan received the priest with great civility told +him they came with no hostile intention, but as friends to purchase with +their money provisions to continue their voyage. The priest replied, +that provisions were now scarce upon the island, but would engage the +Governor to do his utmost to supply their wants. They thought proper, +however, to detain the padre till his promise was fulfilled. + +Next day a messenger was sent with letters and a present to the +Governor, and in the mean time two boats were manned, one to fish, and +another to purchase cocoa-nuts; the former returned empty, but the +latter came back laden. The Governor, on the receipt of the letters and +present, in token of friendship complimented the Captain with six hogs, +12 musk-melons, and as many water melons; and at the same time sent an +order to the Indians in the nearest town to bake every day as much +bread-fruit as the ships should require, and to assist the mariners in +gathering cocoa-nuts and other fruits; with which order the Indians very +readily complied. During this friendly intercourse the Manilla ship came +in sight; but, being first seen from the fort, the Governor found means +to apprize her of her danger, and she stood off, and escaped without +being discerned by the ships. But in steering to the southward to avoid +them, she was very near sharing a worse fate; for she struck upon the +shoal already mentioned, and, after three days incessant labour, floated +off with the loss of her rudder. During her distress the men got +intelligence of her situation; but Captain Swan, who had determined no +longer to follow the infamous employment of plundering, found means to +divert them from their purpose of attacking her. + +On the 30th of May the Governor sent his last present to Captain Swan, +consisting of some hogs, a jar of pickled mangoes, a jar of excellent +pickled fish, a jar of rusk or bread made of fine flour, and six or +seven packs of rice. In return, at his own request, he was furnished +with powder and shot of which he was in want; but what he coveted most +was a fine English dog which they had on board, with which he was +likewise gratified. The friar’s civility was rewarded with a brass +clock, an astrolabe, and a large telescope; in return for which he sent +the Captain six hogs, some bushels of potatoes, a roasting pig, and half +a hundred weight of fine Manilla tobacco. The ships were plentifully +supplied, besides, with every thing the island afforded; cocoa-nuts and +bread-fruit as many as the ships could stow, and upwards of 50 hogs in +pickle. Captain Swan was desirous of the Governor’s letter to the +merchants of Manilla, having a private view to trade, which he concealed +from his villainous crew. + +On the 2d of June, they departed from Guam, directing their course to +Mindanao, one of the Philippines; a range of islands extending in length +from the 5th to the 19th degree of North latitude, and occupying in +breadth about six degrees of longitude. The principal island in this +range is Luconia on the north, where Magellan, in his voyage round the +world, was slain with a poisoned arrow, and where the Spaniards made +their first settlement, and established at Manilla a mart of traffic +with the richest kingdoms of the east. + +On the south, Mindanao is the principal island. It is in length about 60 +leagues, and in breadth fifty. It is diversified with hills and vallies. +The hills abound with gold, and the vallies are covered with perpetual +verdure. It is finely watered with rivers and springs; and the plains +and lawns are interspersed with groves of lofty trees, some of which are +formed for shade, and some afford food for the inhabitants. + +Of the pith of one they make their bread, and of the sap of others they +make a pleasant drink. The marshy grounds abound with rice, and on the +dry hilly land they cultivate yams, potatoes, melons, and a variety of +vegetables unknown to Europeans. Their chief fruits are plantains, +bonanoes, nutmegs, cloves, beetel-nuts, durians, jaccas, cocoa-nuts, +bread-fruit, and oranges. + +The plantain Dampier calls the king of fruit, and prefers it to every +other. The tree that bears it is between three and four feet in +circumference, and rises about ten or twelve feet high. When at its +height, there springs from the top a stem about the size of a man’s arm, +round which the fruit grows in clusters, in shape not unlike the Turkey +cucumber, the coat of which is of a yellow colour when ripe. The +inclosed fruit is of a delicate flavour, and melts in the mouth like +mamalet. It is highly esteemed by all Europeans, and all their +settlements are furnished with plantain walks, some families subsisting +wholly upon that fruit. + +The bonanoe differs but little from the plantain, except in size, being +small and less luscious. + +The nutmeg and clove trees are rare in this island, but those that grow +are large and fine. The natives discourage their growth for fear of +exciting the jealousy of the Dutch, who have monopolized the whole trade +for spices, and who keep in pay a company of armed soldiers to cut down +the spice-trees in the uninhabited islands, lest other European nations +should avail themselves of their plenty. Dampier says, that he has been +assured that, in some of the eastern islands, it is usual to see, at the +shedding time, cloves three or four inches deep under the trees. + +Of the beetel-nut all the Eastern people are immoderately fond. It is +the fruit of a tree that grows like the cabbage-tree to the height of +ten or twelve feet, without either leaf or branch, and then sends forth +shoots on every side, among which the fruit is found in clusters, on +tough stalks about the bigness of a man’s finger. It is larger than a +nutmeg, and rounder; they cut it, when green, in quarters, wrapping each +quarter up in an arek-leaf, and chewing both together. It tastes rough, +dyes the lips red, and makes the teeth black. + +The durian grows on trees like apple-trees, and are in size as large as +pumpkins, covered with a thick rind, which, when ripe, opens and sends +forth a strong scent, not unlike that of roasted onions. It divides into +chives, each about the size of a pullet’s egg, the inside of which is of +the consistence of cream, and must be eaten in its prime, or there is no +enduring its rankness. + +The jacca differs very little from the durian; only the inside of the +former is yellow, and that of the latter white. + +The island of Mindanao abounds likewise with animals of various kinds; +and, according to Dampier, is one of the most plentiful islands in the +world; and, though so near the Equator, being in 7 deg. N. the air is +temperate, enjoying gentle sea breezes in the day, and cooling +land-winds in the night. + +Though they arrived on this coast about the middle of June, yet it was +the middle of July before they could come to an anchor. They were +ignorant of the situation of the chief town; and, arriving first on the +opposite side, had been all that time plying about the island in search +of it. At length they cast anchor near the river that bears the name of +the island, and leads to the chief city. They fired seven guns, and were +answered from the shore by three. They were presently after invited by a +Raja and one of the Emperor’s sons, who demanded in Spanish, who they +were, and from whence they came? They were answered by Mr. Smith (the +gentleman made prisoner at Leon), that they were English, and had been +long from their country. They were told, they were welcome; and asked if +they were come to settle a factory, and to open trade? They said, they +came only to purchase provisions. At which the Mindaneians appeared +disconcerted. Captain Swan was some time at a loss to account for this +circumstance; but he afterwards understood, that a Captain Goodluck had +been there some time before, with some proposals from the East-India +Company; and that, when he went away, he had given them some reason +shortly to expect an Ambassador from England, to complete the treaty. + +The Raja and Prince sat in their canoes; and, after half an hour’s +conversation, took their leave, having invited Captain Swan ashore, and +promised to assist him in procuring provisions. + +There are three small islands called Meangis, within 20 leagues of +Mindanao, that abound with gold and cloves; and, while Captain Swan was +beating along the coast, in his passage from Guam to the river where the +ships now were at anchor, they were observed by the Princes of that +country, and known to be English. The Prince of those islands, having +heard a good report of the English, and fearing a visit from the Dutch, +sent secretly his nephew to Captain Swan, to invite him and his company +to come and settle in his territories, offering every advantage in point +of trade and security that he should require. Nothing could have been +more advantageous, both to the nation and the settlers than this offer; +but Captain Swan paid no regard to it. + +As the season was now approaching when the westerly monsoon was about to +set in, which would necessarily oblige the ships to stay a considerable +time in the port of Mindanao, Captain Swan judged it his interest to +cultivate a good understanding with the reigning Sultan. With this view +he caused a magnificent present to be prepared for the Sovereign, +consisting of scarlet-cloth, gold lace, a Turkish scymetar enriched with +jewels, and a case of pistols, together with presents of less value to +his chief Ministers; and, being in readiness, he sent them on shore by +Mr. More, who sailed with him from London as chief supercargo, when his +design was to trade in the South Seas. These presents were graciously +received. The Sultan made Mr. More sit down by him, and asked him many +questions concerning England, by means of a Spanish interpreter; and, +after an hour’s conversation, dismissed him with marks of the highest +esteem. Next day Captain Swan was invited on shore, and admitted to an +audience in form; when the Sultan shewed him letters from the East-India +Company, and desired to know if he came to settle in consequence of +those letters? He talked with him much concerning the produce of his +country, and the nature of carrying on commerce; and seemed highly +entertained with the accounts he gave of it, and of the countries +through which he had passed, and the novelties he had seen. He was three +hours in close conversation; and, when he was dismissed, was entertained +by Raja Laut, the King’s uncle, with a sumptuous banquet, after their +manner, consisting of boiled rice, fish, and fowls. + + [Illustration: _Captain Swan Entertaind by the Raja Lout; Uncle to the + King of Mandanao._] + +On this occasion, Captain Swan was given to understand, that, while Mr. +Goodluck resided in that city, he had been robbed by a servant belonging +to Raja Laut, and that the fellow absconded till Mr. Goodluck took his +leave; but that he was now returned, and was ready to be delivered up to +be punished, in such manner and with such severity as crimes of the like +nature are punished by the laws of England. But Captain Swan told him, +that in his country none but the injured party could prosecute the +criminal; and, as the man had committed no offence against him, he could +take no cognisance of his crime. The Raja heard him with astonishment; +and, to shew that the Princes of Mindanao were far from countenancing +such practices, he caused the fellow to be stript naked, tied to a post, +and exposed a whole day with his face to the burning sun; while at the +same time the Moskitos continually tormented him without a possibility +of being able to brush them off; a kind of torture that few have +hardiness enough to survive. This condescension, in offering to deliver +up the criminal to be punished by the Captain, was followed by a like +offer from the Captain, with respect to any of his men who should offend +against the laws of the Mindaneians; but the Minister returned the +compliment, and left the punishment to the Captain himself, who, upon +the least complaint, punished his men with a severity that shewed more +of revenge than of justice, and which they afterwards look occasion to +resent. Among those who felt the effects of his indignation was Captain +Teat, his chief mate, who commanded the bark that accompanied him in his +run across the Southern Ocean; and others, who had offended him on +board, he remembered, now he had the countenance of the court on shore. + +Captain Swan was highly caressed by the Chiefs of Mindanao, and pressed +to stay and secure his ships from the approaching tempests, which always +attend the change of the monsoons; and, as the river before the rainy +season generally runs low, finding it difficult to float his ship over +the bar, fifty or sixty Mindaneian fishermen were immediately sent with +their canoes, to assist him in lightening his ship, and floating her up +the river. She was no sooner moored than a free intercourse with the +natives commenced. They expressed their regard for the English by signs +that were easily understood. When the Dutch were mentioned to them, they +would spread their fore-fingers half a foot apart, saying _Bujeto_, they +are so far distant in friendship: when speaking of the Spaniards, they +would spread their fingers still wider; but when the English were spoken +of, they would bring their fingers quite close, saying _Samo_, we are +all one. They were very fond of getting the men to their houses, where +they kindly entertained them, after their manner, with tobacco, and +beetel-nut; and where those who had money, and were decently dressed, +were pressed to connections with the best families, and courted by the +young females to the most familiar intimacy. To men who have long been +at sea, such inducements are irresistible; and many of them made +themselves poor by being too easily drawn in by these allurements to +spend their money lavishly. Some who accompanied Harris from the North +Seas had gold in abundance; and the Mindaneian misses, when they knew +their power, very soon found the way to ease them of it. In Mindanao +they had goldsmiths and other artificers, who charged double their value +for such baubles as these prodigals were for ever bespeaking to present +to their favourites; besides, some of them bought houses, and hired +servants, and lived as profusely as the Raja himself, imitating the +custom of the country, and having a pagelly or principal companion, and +half a dozen mistresses. It was not long before the town’s-people +discovered the true humour of English sailors, and they likewise took +care to make their advantage of it. As they had no other but gold in +lumps, when they wanted change, they gave them at the rate of 11 or 12 +dollars an ounce. To others the same gold was exchanged for 18 dollars. +The price of provisions and common necessaries was in like manner +enhanced by those spendthrifts; and thus, says Dampier, the poor were +made to suffer by the folly of the rich, and a foundation was laid for +imposing upon all Englishmen who should hereafter have occasion to take +up their residence in that port. + +Captain Swan himself was seldom seen at any other house but Raja Laut’s +or the royal palace. At the latter he made frequent visits, and at the +former dined every day, attended by such of his men as had no money to +spend, who had rice in plenty provided for them, and sometimes the +remains of fowls or pieces of buffalo, drest in a course, and served in +a hoggish manner. The Mindaneians use neither knives nor forks in +eating, and they cram their mouths with lumps as large as they can take +in, those being accounted the genteelest who can open their mouths the +widest. + +The religion of Mindanao is the Mahometan, and when the ships first cast +anchor, it was their _Ramadam_, which answers to our Lent, when all +sports and pastimes are suspended; on this account the Raja made an +apology for not entertaining the Captain with the usual diversions of +the country. The wet season too came on, which caused a general +suspension of all out-door business. + +During the month of August the weather became tempestuous, and the rains +excessive. The river swelled and overflowed its banks; and it was with +the utmost difficulty the ships were prevented from driving on the main +land, or into the open sea; for trees of vast magnitude came floating +down with the torrent, and frequently pressed against their bows with +such weight, that they were in continual fear lest their cables should +give way. During the time of these inundations the city stands, as it +were, in a pond, and there is no communication between house and house +till the floods abate. It was probably this circumstance that suggested +to them the manner of constructing their houses. They are all built upon +posts from 12 to 20 feet high. These posts are larger or smaller +according to the height or magnitude of the superstructure. The Sultan’s +palace has but one floor, on which, however, there are many rooms, to +which they ascend by stairs from the street. It stands upon 180 posts, +and is twenty feet above the level of the ground. The ordinary houses +are also of one floor, and ascended by ladders. The roofs are all +covered with palmeto leaves. The area beneath their houses is usually +fenced in, and there the poorer sort keep their poultry; and there also +is received the common draught of their sculleries; and, were it not for +the frequent inundations that carry off the soil, the nastiness of the +meaner people would render living in Mindanao impossible: but every +crevice is scoured clean by the violence of the currents, which +frequently overset the houses; though the posts on which they stand are +sunk deep in the ground. + +The inhabitants of Mindanao are, like all the Eastern people, very clean +in their persons; they constantly bathe every day once, and sometimes +oftener; they wash after every meal: and, if they happen to touch by +accident any unclean thing, they have their times of purification +allotted, before the expiration of which they are not permitted to leave +their chambers. Swine are held with them in abomination, and though they +run wild in the woods, yet they are never eaten. The chief food of the +people is rice, sago, plantains, bread-fruit, cocoa-nuts, and other +nutritious fruits; among the better sort, fowls and beef are used rather +by way of relish, than as solid subsistance; for they are boiled to rags +in their strange messes. + +The Mindaneians are of low stature, small limbs, straight bodies, little +heads, and are of a brown copper-colour. The women are fairer than the +men, and their hair is black and long, and generally well dressed. Their +visage too is rounder, and better featured than that of the men; only +their noses are small, and so flat between their eyes that the rising is +scarce discernible. At a distance they look tolerable, but on a nearer +approach these imperfections are rather disgusting. Their dress consists +of a petticoat and a loose jacket. The sleeves of the jacket are long +and wide at the shoulders, but sloping down to their wrists, where they +are so tight that it is with difficulty they get their hands through in +putting them on. They then rise in folds about the arm, and in that lies +their pride. The better sort of people wear fine callico or silks; the +meaner sort, an ordinary cloth made of the plantain-tree, which they +call saggen. The women, in general, (as has been noted) love the company +of strangers, especially of white men; and Dampier adds, that the men +belonging to the ships could scarce walk the streets without being +pulled into their houses. + +The chief artists among them are goldsmiths, ship-builders, carpenters, +and smiths; all of whom are excellent in their way, allowing for the +badness of their tools. Dampier gives a description of their smith’s +bellows, which is simple and ingenious. It is composed of two hollow +cylinders, like the large wooden pipes used by us for the conveyance of +water; they are cut flat at both ends, in length about four feet, and +placed upright at the distance of two feet from each other upon a stone +hearth before the fire. Within two inches of the bottom of each a pipe +is placed, projecting like a cock towards the fire, but bending so as +that the pipes from both cylinders meet and terminate in one before they +reach it. Thus constructed, and fixed firm, a man with two light brushes +made of feathers, which he works alternately like two pistons, keeps up +a continual blast; and with this simple contrivance, without either vice +or anvil, other than a large stone or the butt-end of an old cannon, +they fabricate their work to admiration. Their carpenters have neither +saws nor planes, and yet they split and smooth their boards with great +neatness. This requires time, but their work is the more durable for it, +because the grain being unbroken the timber remains the tougher. + +In Mindanao there is only one mosque, or place of worship, and that but +little frequented by the meaner people. In this mosque they have a +contrivance for striking the time. A drum of vast dimensions, shaped in +form of a bell, is placed over a large hollow cavity, the head of which +drum is covered with brass, and called a gong. A certain number of men +are appointed to attend this gong, who relieve each other alternately +night and day, and with a stick as large as a man’s arm, with a ball at +the end of it, at certain intervals, they strike the gong, the sound of +which is heard from one extremity of the town to the other, and supplies +the place of a clock. + +The Mindaneians use circumcision, and that operation is performed with +great ceremony. The usual time among the common people is about the age +of twelve; but the Princes of the blood are circumcised, like the Jews, +at the end of eight days. On this occasion, the warriors all appear in +arms, and, like Europeans at a review, make a sham-fight, for the +diversion of the spectators, in which both the Sultan and his General +are principal performers. + +When the waters were subsided, and the Ramadam over, Raja Laut, the +Sultan’s brother, and General of his forces, to entertain Captain Swan, +assembled the dancers, who are women bred from their infancy, like those +in Europe, to that art. On this occasion, more than 50 of them were +assembled, who, being ranged in a ring, danced to their own music. In +these dances their feet and legs are but little employed. Having no +other than vocal music, they sing at first solo parts in slow time; but +their chorusses are brisk; and then their hands, arms, heads, and +bodies, are all employed in such contortions, that one would think they +were made without bones. + +Dancing and processions were the favourite diversions among the Chiefs +of this island; and, Captain Swan, in conformity to the prevailing +taste, resolving to give an English entertainment, ordered his music +ashore, and such of his men as could dance were likewise ordered to +attend. Accordingly, having hired a convenient house, he invited the +Sultan, and Chiefs of the place, with their women, to be spectators of +the splendor of the European dances. He had caused the house to be hung +round with the richest silks, of which he had store on board and +decorated it with gold and silver-lace, which, when illuminated with a +profusion of wax-candles, made a most brilliant appearance. When the +company assembled, they were struck with amazement, and thought all they +beheld was the effect of enchantment. Among the dancers, there was one +Jack Thacker, a common sailor, who at the music-houses at Wapping had +learned to dance a horn-pipe. This man attracted the notice of the +Mindaneians more than all the rest, because more in the antic manner to +which they were accustomed. Him, therefore, they fixed their eyes upon, +and considered as a man of consequence. When they had spent the best +part of the night in feasting their eyes and their appetites (for +Captain Swan had ordered his cook to prepare a cold collation of +sweet-meats, and other savoury dishes), they were still unwilling to +retire; and it was almost day-break before the Sultan retired, and, very +unwillingly, was accompanied by his female train. Raja Laut and his +women staid longer; and, it is said, notwithstanding his devotion to his +prophet, drank plentifully of wine. + +Nothing was talked of so much among the Mindaneians, during the stay of +the ships, as the comic English dancer, of whom Raja Laut was willing to +know the history; and, having enquired, was told by one of his +companions, that he was an English nobleman who travelled for his +diversion, and that all those who wore fine cloaths were gentlemen of +inferior quality, who left their own country out of curiosity to see the +countries abroad. + +This harmless imposition, being told by the General to Captain Swan, who +was of a morose unsociable disposition, cost the poor fellow a hearty +drubbing, though he was wholly ignorant of what had been told. He was +first stript of his fine cloaths, in the presence of the Raja, by his +Captain’s orders, and then stript of his nobility by flogging his back. +It was not long, however, before the man was revenged. + +About the middle of November they began to prepare for their departure, +and for that purpose their first business was to examine the ships +bottoms, the sheathing of which they found eaten by the worm like a +honey-comb; and the bottom of the bark not being sheathed, was eaten to +the timbers, and the vessel thereby rendered unserviceable: application +was therefore made to the Raja for planks to new sheathe the ship. The +Raja’s sincerity was never suspected, till this incident gave reason for +jealousy. When he came down to the river, and saw the carpenters ripping +off the sheathing, he shook his head, and seemed much disconcerted, +declaring he had never before seen a ship with two bottoms. His hope +was, that the ship, like the bark, would have been eaten through, and +that he should have had all her guns. A like accident had formerly +entitled him to a like advantage, when a Dutch ship, by anchoring in the +same river during the westerly monsoon, was entirely disabled, and never +again put to sea. He was sensible enough of the mischief that would +infallibly ensue to the ships by lying so long among those destructive +vermin; for, whenever the natives disuse their vessels, they haul them +up on the dry beach, burn their bottoms, and there let them lie, till +they want again to use them. + +While some were employed in ripping off the old worm-eaten planks, +others were busy in preparing new and, by the beginning of December, the +sheathing was repaired and tallowed. The latter part of the month was +taken up in putting the ballast, stores, and guns aboard: this was a +work of the greater labour, as it was first necessary to carry the ship +out to sea before it was undertaken. About the beginning of January they +began to fill water, and to take in rice; and application was made to +Raja Laut to furnish buffaloes, as he had all along promised to do. He +now began to form excuses, and pretended to take men out every day +a-hunting (for those creatures always run wild); but always came home +empty, and pleaded ill success. The Captain too began to act very +mysteriously. By the help of the government on shore, he had got the +absolute ascendancy over his men, and was as implicitly obeyed as if he +had been Captain of a king’s ship. When he was importuned to declare +when he intended to sail, he chose to be silent; and when the men wanted +to know upon what enterprize they were next to be employed, he +reproached them with their eagerness for piracy. He had sold Raja Laut +some tons of iron and lead, and was to have had in return rice and beef; +as to the first, the Raja had failed in furnishing the stipulated +quantity, and the latter he had hitherto in no shape fulfilled. The Raja +had besides borrowed of him 20 ounces of gold; and, when he required +payment, the Raja demanded a much larger sum for his own board, and the +board of his men. This treatment, and these disappointments, served to +discompose a mind naturally sour, and to put him out of humour with +every body about him. + +All this while the westerly monsoon was wasting that was to carry them +on to India. The men began again to murmur, and grow unruly: some, weary +of rambling about, and who had formed connections with the natives, were +for staying at Mindanao: some, who had husbanded their money, of whom +indeed there were but few, were eager to get home; and others, who were +poor (by far the majority), were for continuing their ravages, and were +impatient to be in action. + +While matters were in this situation, strong representations were made +to the Captain to come on board, and to declare himself; and, after many +delays, a day was at length fixed for a determination. + +In the mean time, those who were bent on returning home, foreseeing that +continued extravagancies would necessarily create new wants, and that +new wants would require new means of supply, took occasion secretly to +purchase a canoe, and formed a design to depart in the night for Borneo, +where, by a letter just received from thence by a Mindaneian vessel, +they hoped to meet with an English factory, and from thence find a +passage home; but Captain Swan getting intelligence of their design, +seized their canoe, and threatened to punish for deserters all those +concerned in the plot. + +Another party about the same time, hearing that the ship was about to +sail, retired into the country, to conceal themselves till after her +departure. + +The party on board, who had nothing but the ship’s allowance to subsist +on, became unruly, and sent ashore to the merchants iron to sell for +arrack and honey, with which they made themselves drunk, and grew +quarrelsome. All these disorders, Dampier says, might easily have been +redressed, had Captain Swan exerted his authority in time, and +established proper discipline on board the ship; but he living with his +merchants constantly on shore, and leaving every one to do as he pleased +on board, they encouraged one another in their villainies, and at length +grew mutinous. + +When these things were come to extremity, he gave orders that the whole +crew should attend him on board the ship, on the 13th of January [1687]; +but, unluckily for him, two days before this meeting was to take place, +Captain Swan sent his gunner to fetch something he had occasion for out +of the locker of his cabin. This man, in rummaging for what he wanted, +among other things happened to take out the Captain’s journal, which, +being laid carelesly by, was taken up by one John Read, (an ingenious +young man, who likewise kept a journal) out of mere curiosity to peep in +it, to see how nearly his and the other agreed. + +At the first opening of the book he cast his eye on a part in which the +Captain had made a memorandum of the mutinous behaviour of his men in +their passage from Cape Corientes to Guam, and had particularly noted +that of one John Read, a Jamaica-man, a namesake of the Read who took +the journal, but no relation. This naturally excited his curiosity to +look farther, and he found means, while the gunner was busy, to convey +the journal away to examine it at his leisure. As soon as the gunner was +gone ashore, John Read, the artist, shewed the book to John Read, the +Jamaica-man, and both of them held a consultation with their comrades on +the contents. These men, who were before ripe for mischief, now grew +outrageous, and it was unanimously agreed to consult Captain Teat, who, +as has been before noted, had received unworthy treatment from Captain +Swan on shore, which, they knew, he only wanted an opportunity to +resent. Teat left nothing unsaid to aggravate the failings of his +superior, and to incense the company against him. He represented him as +proud, ignorant, avaricious, cruel, and vindictive, and withal cowardly +and unfit to command upon any bold and manly enterprize; called to their +minds the opposition he made to the attacking the Manilla ship off Guam, +by the conquest of which they would all have been enriched; and which, +he said, Swan did not oppose out of a principle of honesty or gratitude, +but from the fear of engaging a ship so much superior to his own in +weight of metal and in numbers, though he, Teat, would have pawned his +head to have been master of her in a few hours close attack. Men whose +expectations have been raised to an unreasonable pitch, give easy credit +to unfavourable suggestions against the authors of their disappointment. +The crew took fire, and instantly bound themselves by an oath to deprive +Captain Swan of the command, without naming any officer to substitute in +his room; nay, so precipitate was their resolution, that the majority +were for setting sail immediately, and leaving all that were on shore +behind: and this hasty resolve would certainly have taken place, had +either of the surgeons been on board; but, as their cry was for war, it +was judged too desperate to go to sea without one skilful person on +board to assist the wounded. + +As all this passed in the night, it was agreed to stay till morning, and +then to send a trusty messenger on shore, speedily to request the +surgeons to come to the assistance of a man who had broken his leg. The +chief surgeon said he should see the man the next day, and in the mean +time sent his mate, Mr. Herman Coppinger, to his immediate relief. This +man, a few days before, was sleeping at his mistress’s, when a snake +twisted itself round his neck, but quietly went away upon his waking +without hurting him. Coppinger, supposing the accident real, made haste +to pack up his moveables to go on board; and, as the Captain was to have +his general rendezvous the next day, Dampier took the opportunity of +going with him. They scarce had mounted the ship’s side before they +discovered the trick. But when the mutineers were thus in possession of +the surgeon, they presently dispatched the canoe to shore again to +invite all the men who chose it to come on board, but with a strict +caution not to tell the reason, lest their design should reach the ears +of their captain. + +The 13th in the morning they weighed, and fired a gun. The Captain, much +alarmed, immediately dispatched Mr. Nelly, his mate, to know the cause. +To him they told their grievances, and shewed the journal; he persuaded +them to stay till next day to hear what the Captain and merchants had to +say. They did so, and Mr. Harthop came on board in the morning. He +advised them to a reconciliation, and to take more rice on board. They +were deaf to his persuasion; yet at his entreaty they staid till two in +the afternoon to wait for the Captain and such gentlemen or seamen as +chose to accompany them, but suffered none to go ashore, except Mr. +Harthop and a man with a wooden leg. Dampier remarks, that, if Captain +Swan had then come on board, as a man of sense and spirit ought to have +done, he might at the very last have crusht their designs, and reduced +the mutineers to order and discipline; but being of a sullen, +suspicious, vindictive temper himself, he dreaded the resentment of +those he had marked for vengeance; and therefore suffered the time to +elapse, and was with 36 others left behind in the town. Besides these, +six or eight had deserted and were up the country; and sixteen had died +of poison, given them, as was supposed, by the husbands of those women +whom they had seduced; and there were others on board, who had received +the poison, and died of it some months after. In this manner their +numbers were considerably diminished, and of 150 who sailed from Cape +Corientes, not above 80 were now on board. + +It has been more than once hinted, that Captain Swan sailed from London +with no design of privateering, but of carrying on trade with the +Spaniards on the western coasts of America. He had therefore a great +quantity of heavy goods, such as iron and lead, not yet disposed of, +some of which he had sold to Raja Laut, and no doubt was willing to have +received the payment before he departed. This may, in some measure, +account for his delay. His crew was composed of men, who, most of them, +had forced themselves upon him for purposes which he abhorred; and, +perhaps, he wanted to have rid himself of the greatest part of them, if +he could have found a proper opportunity. Those marked in his journal +were, no doubt, the men most obnoxious to him, and the most averse to +trade, which he was determined to follow in his way home, having already +5000l. of his owners money, which he had received for the goods put up +by auction at his first commencing buccaneer; with this he purposed to +have purchased a cargo to take with him from the East-Indies. Hence +arose his mysterious conduct, and his want of resolution. The loss of +his bark was his embarrassment. Could that have been rendered +serviceable, his design could more easily have been carried into +execution. The suspicious part of the crew might have been shipped on +board the bark; and by giving them a wrong track, they might have been +deserted in the night, and left to their own course. But a discovery +being made before the Captain’s designs were ripe for execution, he was +entangled in his own net. + +But to return: On the 14th of January, 1687, at three o’clock in the +afternoon, they set sail from the river Mindanao, and next day came +a-breast of Chambango, where formerly the Spaniards had a settlement, +and where, it is said, there were plenty of swine and buffaloes. On the +17th, they anchored in a good bay on the west side of a small island, +where they chose their Officers, constituting John Read the Jamaica-man +Captain, Thomas Teat Master, and Henry More Quarter-master; and, having +cut some curious short-jointed canes, and plentifully supplied the ship +with water from a clear spring, they pursued their course; but on their +passage they struck on a rock, where after lying two hours, they were +heaved off by the rising of the tide, and escaped with the loss only of +a large piece of their rudder, though in more danger than ever they had +experienced in the whole voyage. + +On the 18th, they anchored at the north-west end of the island of +Mindera, in 10 fathom water. While they lay there a canoe with four +Indians from Manilla came along side, who informed them, that at Manilla +there was seldom less than 20 or 30 sail of ships of different nations, +who came to traffic with the Spanish merchants; and that, if they meant +to trade, they might for a trifle have a letter of recommendation from a +friar to whom they were carrying dispatches, and would in a few days +return with his answer. Trade, however, was no part of their employment; +and the Indians were suffered to pass without molestation. + +On the 23d, they reached Luconia, the island so ardently wished for by +this piratical crew, and presently descried a sail, which they instantly +pursued and took. She proved a Spanish bark from Pangassanam, laden with +rice and cotton-cloth, and bound for Manilla. The master of this prize +was boatswain to the Acapulco ship that passed by Guam; this man gave +Dampier an account of all that happened on that occasion. The time of +the year being too far spent to effect any thing of consequence on this +coast, they concluded to sail for Pulo Condore, and there wait till the +latter end of May, about which time the Acapulco ship generally arrives +at Manilla. With this resolution they quitted Luconia on the 26th of +February; and, on the 14th of March, cast anchor at the island of +Condore, on the coast of Cambodia. Among the productions of these +islands (for there is a cluster of them), there is a lofty tree, the +body of which is in diameter three or four feet, from which the +inhabitants extract a clammy juice, which being boiled becomes a perfect +tar, and answers all the purposes of that balsam. On the 16th, they +entered a convenient harbour, and employed themselves in careening their +ships, in which they were assisted by the natives of the island, who +brought them hogs and turtle in exchange for rice, of which they had now +great plenty. + +While they lay in this harbour, two of the men died who had been +poisoned in Mindanao; they were opened by the surgeon, and their livers +were found black, light, and dry, like pieces of cork. + +Before they departed, they engaged an old native who could speak the +Malayan language, to pilot them to Siam, where they expected to purchase +dried fish, having nothing now but rice to eat at sea. + +On the 21st of April they sailed from Condore, and, on the 24th, +anchored in the bay of Siam, where, however, they could get no fish. On +the 21st of May they left Siam and, in their return to Pulo Condore, +overtook a Chinese junk, laden with pepper, who told them that the +English were settled on the island of Sumatra, at a place called +Sillebar, which was the first intelligence they received of that +factory. This junk accompanied them to Pulo Condore, where Captain Read, +observing a Malayan vessel at anchor within shore, sent a canoe to learn +from whence they came; but, knowing the Malayans to be desperate +fellows, cautioned his men not to trust themselves on board, but to hail +them from the boat: but the men, not regarding the Captain’s +instructions, went on board armed; which the Malayans observing, fell +upon them unawares with their short daggers, and stabbed five or six of +them dead upon the spot; the rest jumped into the sea, and saved +themselves by swimming, among whom was one Daniel Wallis, who never +could swim before or since, but in his fright made shift to reach the +boat, and made his escape with the rest. Here Herman Coppinger, the +surgeon, went on shore, on purpose to leave this diabolical company; but +Read sent an armed force, and pressed him on board again. Dampier +intended following his example, but waited a more convenient place. + +They were now confined at this island by stormy weather till the 4th of +June; and in the mean time a Malayan Portuguese from the junk entered on +board, whom they entertained as an interpreter, to facilitate an +intercourse with the natives. When they weighed anchor, the wind was +contrary; yet they kept plying to the westward in hopes of its shifting +to carry them to Manilla, before their much longed-for prize should +arrive. In this hope they continued labouring incessantly for 10 days; +when, being almost worn out with fatigue, and finding no probability of +accomplishing their desires, they relinquished that project in despair, +and, instead of it, stood away for Prata, in lat. 20 deg. 40 min. N. +where they flattered themselves with fishing up much treasure from the +China ships that had been cast away on that island, some of which were +said to contain immense riches. But in this too they were disappointed +by adverse winds; and, notwithstanding the utmost exertion of their +skill in seamanship, they were driven by the violence of the gale to the +island of St. John, on the coast of China. While they lay at this island +they visited the shore every day, and purchased hogs, fowls, and +buffaloes. Some of the men visited the continent, but found nothing +there that answered their purpose. + +On the 3d of July they weighed anchor with a gentle breeze, but on the +4th there came on a violent gale from the north-east, which increased +till the dead of the night, when the rain began to pour down in such +torrents that the fountains of heaven seemed to be opened, and a second +deluge threatened; at the same time the thunder began to crack, and the +flashes of lightning that pierced through the torrents of rain, appeared +upon the face of the deep as if the sea was overspread with a blue +flame. The darkness that succeeded between the flashes presented the +most horrid gloom that ever covered the deep. The sea was raised to an +astonishing height, and the waves broke short upon the ship with such +violence, that it was thought every succeeding billow must have dashed +her to the bottom. One sea struck away the rails of the head, and at the +same time dislodged the sheet-anchor that was lashed with its fluke over +the bend of the ship in the strongest manner, and it was every moment +expected to beat a hole through the ship, by striking against her bows. +It then became necessary to steer right before the wind, to endeavour to +secure the anchor; and it was impossible afterwards to change the course +till the storm abated. The fury of the storm abated about four in the +morning, about which time they observed what the sailors call a _Corpus +Sant_ at the mast-head. This meteor is seen at sea, sometimes at the +mast-head, sometimes at the yard-arm, and sometimes upon the deck. When +it appears aloft it is like a star, and is taken for a good omen; but +when below, it resembles a glow-worm, and always dreaded as a bad sign. +The crew was overjoyed on seeing it at the very pinnacle of the ship’s +fane. + +From two in the morning till seven they kept scudding before the wind; +but the wind gradually dying away, and the sea subsiding, they set their +mizzen, brought the ship up upon a wind, and lay to under their mizzen +till eleven, when for two hours there ensued a perfect calm, yet the sky +looked black and lowring. About one the wind shifted to the south-west, +and began again to blow hard, with violent rain. They furled up their +mizzen, wore ship, and suffered her to scud before the wind, as before, +till ten at night, when the wind ceased, and before morning the sea was +calm, and the sky perfectly serene. This storm, however, dispirited the +crew, who were now driven out of their knowledge, and were anxious for +nothing but a place of shelter to preserve them from the fury of a +second hurricane, which they had reason to expect towards the full of +the moon. + +They consulted their sea-charts, and concluded to steer for the +Piscadores, islands situated in lat. 23 deg. N. of which, however, they +knew nothing but the name. On the 20th of July they came in sight of +them; and when they arrived were astonished to see so many junks passing +and re-passing as were continually in sight. They followed some of the +largest into a spacious harbour, which brought them to a considerable +town, such as they did not expect to have found among islands so little +known. On their attempting to land, they were met by a Tartarian +Officer, who demanded, whence they came, of what nation they were, and +whither they were bound? And being told they were English, and driven +there in distress, they were kindly entertained; but were told, they +must not come on shore; but whatever necessaries they wanted should be +sent them on board without delay. Mutual civilities were exchanged. The +ship was supplied with the best provisions they had ever tasted and the +Captain in return sent a curious Spanish silver-hilted rapier, an +English carbine, and a gold chain, as a present to the Governor. They +staid till the 29th, and then directed their course to a cluster of +islands that lie between Formosa and Luconia, the place they still set +their hearts upon. On the 6th of August they came in sight of the +islands they were in pursuit of, and, contrary to expectation, found +them well inhabited. + +On these islands were plenty of goats and swine, but very few birds or +poultry. It is an observation of Dampier, founded on reason and +confirmed by experience, that, in countries abounding in corn and maize, +birds and all manner of fowls are bred in abundance; but in those +islands where the inhabitants subsist chiefly on fruits, roots, and +fish, birds wild and tame are more rare. + +As these islands were without names in the sea-charts, Captain Read +called them all by one general name of Bashee Islands. The situation of +their towns was remarkable. They were built on precipices inaccessible +on every side, except by ladders placed at the ends of the streets, +which all ran in lines parallel to each other, and on which the houses +rise in ranges one above another, till they terminate in a single row. +The inhabitants of these islands were acquainted with the use of iron, +and they had amongst them a yellow metal that very much resembled gold, +for some of which Captain Read exchanged iron; and Dampier laments that +he could purchase none of it, because he had nothing to bestow in +return. They were very ingenious, had large fishing-boats, and lived in +a peculiar manner different from any people they had yet visited. They +were not very delicate in their food; for they would gather up the +goats-skins and goats-paunches which the men threw away; and would +singe, broil, and eat the former; the latter they would stew (not over +nicely cleansed), and, mincing raw fish very small, would mix the mess +together, and with a little salt over it, make a very savoury meal. The +paunches of the swine they never touched. They appeared to be very +cleanly in their persons, and withal so honest and good natured, that +they would take nothing but what was given them; nor were they ever out +of humour with the strangers, though they had often cause enough, nor +with one another. No provocation could incense them to anger; nor any +opportunity induce them to theft. They brought constantly every morning +goats, hogs, potatoes, and fruits, to the ship, which they exchanged for +iron, nails, old hoops, or bullets. Thus the crew of the ship fared +sumptuously every day, and salted 70 or 80 hogs for future use. These +islands lie in lat. 20 deg. 21 min. N. + +Being now sufficiently stored with provisions, and having filled their +casks with water, after staying from the 13th of August till the 24th of +September, and after having mended their sails, and scrubbed the ships +bottom, they were preparing to sail, when a violent storm came on, which +forced them to cut their cables and put to sea, leaving six of their +best men on shore. + +They put before the wind with their bare poles; but it was the 1st of +October before they could recover to their former station. On the +following day their six men were brought on board by the natives, whom +they rewarded with three bars of iron, a present to them more valuable +than so many bars of solid gold. The men reported, that, as soon as the +ship was out of sight, the natives were more kind to them than ever; +that they endeavoured to prevail upon them to cut their hair short, like +theirs; and that they offered to each the choice of a wife, with a small +hatchet, a set of planter’s tools, and a portion of land for each of +them to cultivate by way of dowry; and, when the ship came in sight +again, they then importuned them for iron, which was the only recompense +they required. + +This second storm quite disconcerted all their measures. They began to +think that the winds and the waves were employed against them, and were +terrified with the thoughts of their unhappy situation. Most of them +were heartily weary of being tost to and fro to no manner of purpose, +and were very desirous of getting home: only Read and Teat were +determined to make their fortunes at whatever risque; they therefore, +finding the crew resolute to leave this dangerous coast, persuaded them +to accompany them to Cape Comorin, where, if they disapproved of their +proceedings, every one should be at liberty to follow his own course. To +this they all agreed; but these freebooters, fearing to meet English or +Dutch ships in the direct road, proposed to coast along the east side of +the Philippines, and so, keeping south towards the spice islands, to +pass into the Indian ocean near the island of Timor. With this view they +let sail on the 3d of October, 1687; and leaving the island of Luconia +on the west, “with all our golden projects,” says Dampier, “along with +it, we stood to the southward till we came in sight of the island St. +John on the coast of Mindanao, and on the 16th came to an anchor on the +south-east side of that island.” While they lay in this bay, the young +prince of Meangis, formerly mentioned, came on board, and importuned +Captain Read to transport him and his men back to his own island, +promising to reward him handsomely for his trouble. He said, that a few +days before he had seen Captain Swan and some of his people all well at +the city of Mindanao; that they had accompanied Raja Laut in a military +expedition against his enemies, and had acquired great honour and were +in high favour with the Sultan; that Captain Swan was preparing to leave +the island; and that he had offered 40 ounces of gold for a ship to +carry him off, but did not think the Raja would suffer him to depart. +Captain Read promised to stay for the prince three days, and in that +time he engaged to return with his men. In the mean time Dampier took +occasion to sound how the crew stood affected towards their old Captain, +and found one party, who happened to be filling water ashore, very well +inclined; and he desired them to be silent till he had consulted the +other party whose turn it was next day to fill water at the same place; +but one of the company, who appeared to be the most zealous in Swan’s +favour, as soon as he got aboard discovered the secret; on which Read +and Teat ordered all hands on board and weighed directly. + +Dampier says he was afterwards informed, that Captain Swan and his men +continued long at Mindanao; that Messieurs Harthop and Smith, merchants, +both died there; that Rofy and Nelly, his mates, got passage in a Dutch +ship to Batavia, and from thence, after various adventures, to Europe; +and that Swan himself, with his surgeon, endeavouring to get on board +another Dutch ship, were run down and drowned by the natives by order of +Raja Laut, who seized their gold. Among other reasons assigned for this +treachery, Dampier mentions Swan’s threatening, on some provocation, to +raise a band of men to destroy the town, and seize upon the country. Be +this as it may, the poor Captain lost his life, and the Raja kept his +money. Part of his journal, as far as Cape Corientes, was recovered and +preserved by a Mr. Moody, of whom mention will be made hereafter. + +On November the 2d, the day the prince was to have come on board, +Captain Read set sail, and stood to the west, till on the 9th, the wind +changing, they came up with the north-east end of the island of Celebes, +in lat. 3 deg. N. 30 leagues to the southward of Gilolo, on the western +side of which lie the clove islands of Tidore and Ternate, the finest in +the world. At the southermost end of Celebes the town of Macasser is +seated, the chief place of trade in those parts belonging to the Dutch. + +They anchored in a sandy bay on the south-east side of Celebes, where +they found a creeping kind of vine, the leaves of which pounded and +boiled with hog’s-lard is an infallible cure for old ulcers. The men, +knowing its virtues, crammed their chests with it; and one man, whose +legs were ulcerated, was perfectly cured by the use of it. + +Here they cut down a tree 18 feet in circumference, and 44 feet in clean +body. It proved unsound, and therefore unfit for the purpose they +intended it, which was that of a canoe; they therefore left it, and set +sail. + +On the 30th, they sailed south; and in the afternoon they had a violent +tornado, and saw a spout. This phenomenon appears at first like a small +ragged cloud, hanging sloping from a black heavy cloud above, small at +the bottom, seemingly no bigger than a man’s arm. Underneath this the +sea begins to be in gentle agitation, and gradually proceeds to foam and +froth till a violent whirling ensues, and then it flies upwards in a +pillar, the base of which may be about one hundred paces in compass, but +lessening gradually till it decreases to the size of the spout, with +which it meets, and through which the rising sea-water seems to be +conveyed to increase the cloud. As soon as the water reaches the spout, +you then see the cloud, that was at rest before, drive along with +incredible swiftness, sucking up the water in its course, and causing a +furious wind to fly before it. Thus it will continue sometimes half an +hour, sometimes longer, till breaking off, all the water that remains +below the spout falls down again into the sea, with a dreadful noise and +violent agitation of the waves. Dampier relates, that one Captain +Records, of London, being on the coast of Guinea, in the year 1674, in a +ship of 300 tons, was overtaken by one of these spouts, which broke +before he could well furl his sails to receive it. On its breaking, it +made the same kind of noise as if a castle or some immense building had +been plunged from a great height into the sea, and raised the billows in +proportion to its height. The fury of the wind, at the same time, took +the ship on the starboard bow, and snapt off the boltsprit and foremast +both at once like rotten sticks, and drove the ship along ready to +overset her; but the ship presently righting, and the wind whirling +round, took her again on the opposite quarter, and snapt the mizzen-mast +as the fore-mast and boltsprit had been snapt before. Three men were in +the fore-top when the fore-mast broke, and one on the boltsprit, when +they fell into the sea; but all were saved, and the ship with difficulty +carried into port. + +December 1st, they continued to move slowly along, and on the 4th they +came up with the north-west end of the island of Bouton, where their +strikers killed some turtle, and brought with them an Indian who +conducted them to a harbour, where they had an interview with the +Sultan, and where they were permitted to purchase whatever they wanted, +and where Captain Read was presented by the Sovereign with a little boy +who had a double set of teeth, one set within another, on each jaw. + +On the 12th, they took leave of the Sultan, and were about weighing +anchor; but when they expected it to rise, being hooked to a rock, the +cable came home without it. As soon as they were loose, finding the +anchor irrecoverable, they steered to the south-east, and fell in with +some islands five or six leagues from Callasusung harbour. They appeared +very green; and as they passed them in the night they heard drums +beating, but whether for mirth, or spreading an alarm, they knew not. + +On the 20th, they passed the island of Omba, and saw in it many smoaks +by day, and fires by night, but observed no inhabitants. From Omba they +passed by Timor, where, meeting with tornados and strong gales of wind, +they endeavoured to get clear of the shoals, and stood off south, +intending to touch at New Holland to try what that country would afford. + +On the 4th of January, 1688, they fell in with the coast of New Holland +in lat. 16 deg. 50 min. S. and, steering close in, came to a point from +whence the land trends east and southerly for 10 or 12 leagues, but how +far southerly Dampier says he does not know. That able navigator, +however, pronounced, that, if it was not a continent, it neither joined +to Asia, Africa, nor America. They fell in upon the west side, and +examined but a small part of this vast tract of land, of which Captain +Cook, in his late voyage round the world in the Endeavour, traversed the +eastern coast for near 2000 miles, and has left it still doubtful +whether it is island or continent. There is a remarkable difference +between Dampier’s description of the part he visited on the west, and +that described by Captain Cook in the same latitude on the east side. +“The land,” says Dampier, “is of a dry sandy soil, destitute of water, +except you make wells. There are divers sorts of trees; but the woods +are not thick, nor the trees large. Most of them were dragon-trees, of +the size of apple-trees--we compared the gum with the gum-dragon we had +aboard, and found it the same--we saw no trees that bore fruit. We saw +no animal, nor any track of animal but one, and that was of a beast of +the size of a mastiff-dog--few land-birds, and none bigger than a +blackbird--few sea-fowls--few fish, turtle and manatee excepted. The +inhabitants are the most miserable people in the world--without +houses--without cloathing--without conveniences of any kind--and, +setting aside their human shape, very little different from brutes. They +are tall, straight bodied, thin, and small limbs; they have great heads, +round fore-heads, and large brows. Their eyelids are always half-closed; +they have great bottle-noses, full lips, wide mouths, and the two +fore-teeth in the upper jaw wanting in all of them; but whether they +draw them out or not, I know not. [Captain Cook says, those on the +opposite side have their teeth entire.] They are long-visaged--without +beards--of an unpleasing aspect, with no one graceful feature in their +faces--their hair black, short, and curled like negroes--and their +colour coal-black. They live in companies, 20 or 30 men, women, and +children, together--their food is fish, and their manner of catching +them is in weirs across little inlets of the sea, in which every tide +leaves some--they have no instruments to take great fish--in other +places they fish for cockles, muscles, periwinkles, but of these there +are but few--of what they catch all partake alike--all watch the +tides--for all depend upon the sea for their support; the earth +producing neither herb, root, pulse, or any sort of grain. These poor +creatures, adds Dampier, have a sort of weapons, consisting of a piece +of wood shaped somewhat like a cutlass, and a long straight pole with a +sharp end hardened in the fire: with these they made a shew of +frightening us; but on firing one gun, they all ran away frighted.” + +Such is the description given by Dampier of the people of the north part +of New Holland; and it is not a little astonishing, that a man, by once +touching upon their coast, could so minutely describe a people with whom +he could no otherwise converse but by signs and gestures. The crew made +an acquaintance with some of them, and gave them meat, which they +readily devoured, but paid no regard to the ship, nor did they seem to +admire any thing that was shewn or offered to them. While the ship +remained here, where nothing was to be gotten, Dampier endeavoured to +persuade the men to carry her to some English factory; but that too +being told the Commanders, he was threatened to be set ashore, and left +among these miserable beings. + +On the 12th of March they quitted New Holland, with a view to sail to +the isle of Cocos, in lat. 12 deg. 12 min. S. but the wind being +contrary, they chose to bear away to the islands on the west of Sumatra, +with which Dampier says he was well pleased, as he then might have an +opportunity of making his escape from them. They met with nothing worth +notice till the 28th, when they fell in with a woody island, where they +killed boobies and men-of-war birds as many as the ship’s company could +eat, and where they found a land animal resembling a large crab without +its great claws, such as Sir Francis Drake met with in the island of +Ternate, and which being dressed was excellent meat. These creatures +burrow in the ground like rabbits, and two of them were as much as a man +could eat. + +They made but a short stay at this island; and, proceeding on their +course, on the 7th of April they came in sight of the high land of +Sumatra; and on the 13th they came to a small island called Triste, 14 +or 15 leagues to the west of Sumatra, where they loaded their boats with +cocoa-nuts, and struck some turtle to supply their table, having now +nothing but rice to live upon. + +They continued cruising among the islands to the west of Sumatra; and, +on the 29th, they came in sight of a sail, to which they gave chace, and +on the 30th they took her. She proved a proa, with four men belonging to +Achin, laden with cocoa-nuts and cocoa-nut oil. They took out of her as +much as they thought fit, bored a hole in her bottom, and sunk her, +keeping the four men prisoners. All this coast is known to the English +by the name of the West-coast, without adding the name of Sumatra; and +the prisoners shewed the channels and openings to the island of Achin, +where the English had a factory, to which many on board wished to find a +passage. + +The 4th of May they came in sight of one of the Nicobar islands, the +southernmost of which lies about 40 leagues to the N. N. W. of Sumatra. +The inhabitants of these islands are independent of every other people, +and trade with the ships of every nation indifferently that happen to +touch upon their coast. Their chief commodities are ambergrease and +fruits, the former of which they adulterate abominably; and Captain +Welden, who touched at these islands a few weeks before their arrival, +purchased some at a low price that was worth nothing. + +On the 5th of May they anchored at the N. W. end of the island of +Nicobar, properly so called, in lat. 7 deg. 30 min. N. Here Dampier +quitted the free-booters, but not without some difficulty. He knew it +was impossible to do it by stealth; and therefore asked Captain Read, as +soon as he learned that the ship was about to sail, to set him on shore +on this island. He says, he had another motive for staying at this +particular place, besides that of leaving Captain Read, which he always +intended, and that was, that he had here a prospect of commencing a +profitable trade for ambergrease with these people, and of gaining a +considerable fortune to himself; for, by rowing with the natives, and +conforming to their customs and manner of living, he imagined he should +be able to learn how they got their ambergrease, and likewise the whole +secret of preparing it. Captain Read, thinking this as obscure a place +as any, and being willing, no doubt, to be rid of a man who was for ever +exciting the company to oppose him, very readily consented; and Dampier +as readily took him at his word. In an instant he got all his moveables +together, and stowing them in the ship’s canoe, he prevailed upon some +of the people to row him ashore, and to land him on a sandy bay, near to +which were two houses, but without inhabitants. He had not been landed +an hour before Captain Teat and three or four armed men came to fetch +him on board again. He tells us, that if a cabbin-boy had been sent for +him he should have returned; but he no sooner entered the ship than he +found the whole crew in an uproar, several others, encouraged by his +example, insisting to be set ashore likewise, among whom was Herman +Coppinger, the surgeon, who having jumped into the boat with a gun in +his hand, swore he would shoot dead the first man that opposed him; yet +John Oliver, the quarter-master, leapt into the canoe to him, and +wrenched the gun from him: he was presently followed by others, who +forced Coppinger again on board. When this tumult was appeased, and the +surgeon again in their possession, they suffered Dampier, with two other +malcontents (a Mr. Hall, and a sailor named Ambrose), to depart quietly; +and the man who rowed them on shore, having concealed an ax, gave it +them at parting, well knowing what a valuable present it would be to +conciliate them to the Indians. These three Englishmen were soon joined +by the four prisoners taken from the Achinese proa, and the mongrel +Portuguese, formerly taken from the Chinese junk, all of whom Captain +Read set on shore before he departed. They were now eight in number; +and, having concluded to leave the island, and row to Sumatra, at 40 +leagues distance, they purchased a canoe of the natives for an ax; and, +having provided a sufficient quantity of provisions for their +subsistence, they all embarked on the 20th of May, in order to proceed; +but they had no sooner put to sea than the canoe overset, and turned +bottom upwards. Being near the shore they preserved their lives by +swimming; but, though the English recovered their chests and fire-arms, +yet their books and papers were miserably defaced by the sea-water; +their powder escaped without injury, being sealed up. Though this +accident seemed an unfortunate outset, yet it proved the means of their +future safety; for while the English were drying their books, and +cleaning their arms, the Achinese employed themselves in fitting up +their boat with out-leaguers, which are beams placed across the body of +the boat, projecting a yard or two over the sides, and united at the +extremities by transverse boards jointed to the ends; while these remain +entire, the vessel can never over-set. Besides the out-leaguers the +Achinesemen had provided a good stout mast, and had contrived a sail. +And thus fitted out, on the 15th of May they again embarked; but their +provisions being exhausted, it was necessary for them to repair to a +distant part of the island, to procure a supply. Here a misunderstanding +arose between them and the natives, which by the prudent management of +Dampier was soon accommodated. He observes, that there is not a people +upon earth that he should be afraid to approach unarmed and alone, +provided no previous injury had been done them by any of his company +unprovoked. An European has it always in his power to insinuate himself +into the favour of the most savage people by some slight, by shewing +them some toy, by smiles and submission, and even by shewing them the +simple knack of lighting a match with a flint and steel. The only +danger, he adds, is from their first onset, because their way is to +abscond, and kill by surprize; if therefore their first fury can be +avoided, the fiercest of them becomes gentle as a lamb. + +The natives being again brought to good humour, they were presently +furnished with such provisions as they wanted; and they again embarked +on their former project. At their first setting out, the wind was fair, +and the weather hot; and they proceeded rowing and sailing as occasion +required, Mr. Hall and Dampier taking it by turns to manage the helm. +However, after two days labour, they found that they had steered a wrong +course; and, instead of approaching Sumatra, they were but eight leagues +from Nicobar. They then changed their course, but were still so +violently opposed by a contrary current, that on the third day they had +made but little way. + +On the 18th the wind freshened, and the sky began to be clouded. About +nine in the morning they had an alarming presage by a circle round the +sun, which in that climate is an infallible sign of an approaching +storm. They therefore, after some consultation, concluded to stand +before the wind to whatever land was right a-head; and for that purpose +they furled their sail, settled the yard about three feet above the +boat’s sides, and in this manner prepared to receive the storm. About 12 +at noon the gale came on, and the wind continued increasing all the +afternoon. The sea swelled to an incredible height, and often broke over +the little skiff (hardly so big as a below-bridge wherry, only a small +matter deeper, but not so wide), which, had it not been for her +out-leaguers, could not have survived a single moment; but the thinness +of her body, and the firmness of her out-leaguers, were her security; +for the stern being high and narrow, cut the rolling waves like the edge +of a knife, and divided their force; so that what fell in the skiff came +down like a shower, and was easily baled out by the Achinese. The +evening of this day shewed very dreadful. Dampier’s own words will best +describe his feelings: “The sky looked very black, says he, being +covered with dark clouds; the wind blew hard, and the sea was already +roaring in a white foam about us; a dark night coming on, and no land in +sight to shelter us; and our little ark in danger to be swallowed by +every wave; and, what was worst of all, none of us thought ourselves +prepared for another world. I had been in many imminent dangers before +now, but the worst of them all was but a play-game in comparison with +this. I must confess that I was in great conflicts of mind at this time. +Other dangers came not upon me with such a leisurely and dreadful +solemnity; a sudden skirmish or engagement was nothing when the blood +was warm, and pushed forwards with eager expectations; but here I had a +lingering view of approaching death, and little or no hopes of escaping +it; and, I must confess, that my courage, that had hitherto kept up, +failed me here; and I made very sad reflections on my former life, and +looked backward with horror and detestation upon actions which before I +disliked, but now I trembled at the remembrance of them. I had long +before this repented me of that roving course of life, but never with +such concern as now. In this temper of mind, submitting ourselves to +God’s good providence, and taking all the care we could to preserve our +lives, Mr. Hall and I took turns to steer, and the rest took turns to +heave out the water; and thus we provided to spend the most doleful +night I ever was in. About 10 o’clock it began to thunder, lighten, and +rain; but the rain was welcome to us, having drank up all the water we +brought from the island. The wind at first blew harder than before; but +within half an hour it became more moderate, and the sea assuaged of its +fury. And then by a lighted match, of which we kept a piece burning on +purpose, we looked on our compass, to see how we steered, and found, we +varied but little from our intended course: and, finding our vessel +lively enough with that small sail which was abroad, we began to bear up +to the true point to which our views were directed. But about two in the +morning we had another gust of wind, with thunder, lightning, and rain, +which obliged us again to put before the wind. The hard rain soaked us +so thoroughly that we had not one dry thread about us, and the cold rain +chilled us extremely; for any fresh-water is much colder than the +sea-water, and much more unwholesome for man’s body. In this wet, +starving condition, we spent the tedious night. Never did poor mariners +on a lee-shore more earnestly long for the dawning light than we did. At +length the day appeared; but with such dark black clouds near the +horizon, that the first glimpse of the dawn appeared dreadful. We +continued our course before the wind till eight in the morning of the +19th, and then one of our Achinesian friends cried out, _Pulo Way_. We, +thinking the fellow had said _Pull away_, were at a loss to conceive his +reason; but presently observing his motions, we found he pointed to his +companions to shew them land. We, dropping with wet, cold, and hungry, +were overjoyed at this sight. It bore south, and the wind was still at +west, a strong gale; yet with our small sail, no bigger than an apron, +we changed our course, and bore up to it. Here our out-leaguers did us +great service; and, though our boat’s side was pressed down very much, +we could brook it well enough, and next day we ran to the mouth of a +river in the island of Sumatra, called Passange Jonca, where all fell +ill of fevers, of which some died; and I that survived was a whole year +before I recovered my strength.” + + [Illustration: _Dampier & his Companions in their Canoe, overtaken by a + dreadfull Storm._] + +Here they staid ten or twelve days, and were kindly entertained, because +the Achinese told the natives, that they were prisoners on board the +pirate as well as themselves, and that they were all set ashore +together. Hall and Dampier were strongly importuned to stay, to assist +in improving their navigation; but, longing to get home, they chose to +be conveyed to the English factory at Achin: a vessel was therefore +provided for them, and in three days they arrived safe. Three days after +their arrival, the Portuguese died, and Ambrose lived but a short time +after him. Dampier and Mr. Hall, after passing examination, were kindly +entertained by Mr. Driscal, an Irish gentleman, interpreter to the +factory; and the four Achinese were restored to their families and +friends. + +Dampier was so drenched by a Malayan doctor, that he never expected to +survive the effects of the potions he prescribed; yet after more than +sixty evacuations from one dose, he gathered strength daily; and, after +his health was a little restored, both Hall and he undertook to sail +with Captain Bowry to Nicobar. This Captain Bowry was the gentleman who +sent the letter from Sumatra to Mindanao, already spoken of, which +involved a double mistake. Bowry imagined an English factory to subsist +at Mindanao, and the English at Mindanao, from Bowry’s letter, imagined +there had been an English factory at Sumatra. They sailed from +Achin-road the beginning of June; but, a storm coming on, they presently +returned. About this time Captain Welden arrived from Fort St. George; +and Dampier engaged to sail with him to Tonqueen, in China, and +afterwards made a voyage to Malacca. His next ramble was to Fort St. +George, and, after his return from thence, he came to Bencouli, an +English factory on the west coast of Sumatra; from whence, about the +beginning of 1691, he set out on his return to England. + +After his return to Achin from his voyage to Malacca, he found there one +Mr. Morgan, formerly belonging to the Cygnet, who was then mate of a +Danish ship belonging to Tranquebar: and being curious to know the +sequel of the adventures of his old companions, was told by Morgan, +that, when they left Nicobar, they directed their course to Ceylon; but, +not being able to weather that island, they were forced to seek +refreshment on the coast of Coromandel, where they began to form new +projects; but their schemes not succeeding, about half their number left +them, among whom were Morgan and Coppinger, who both were entertained in +the Danish service, and two or three others repaired to Fort St. George +but the main body went up the country, and listed in the army of the +Great Mogul, where a few of them continued orderly for some time; but +Oliver, the quarter-master, and a party with him, soon left the camp, +and rambled about, plundering and robbing the villages, and flying +whenever they were pursued. + +Captain Read, having thus lost the better half of his men, after having +filled his water and got rice, sailed again, still intending for the Red +Sea. He had taken off Ceylon a rich Portuguese ship, and had plundered +her of what he liked; but not being able to bear up against the westerly +winds, he stood for the island of Madagascar. There, after various +adventures, Captain Read, with half a dozen of his followers, slipt away +from the rest of the company, and embarked in a ship for New York. +Captain Teat succeeded Captain Read in the command; and, having joined +Captain Knight, of whom mention has been made before, they sailed some +time in company; but the Cygnet proving leaky, Knight gave her the slip, +on which she returned again to Madagascar, and finally sunk in St. +Augustin bay. + +While Dampier was at Fort St. George, there arrived a ship from +Mindanao, laden with clove-bark, on board of which came Mr. Moody, as +supercargo. This gentleman, while at Mindanao, purchased the Prince of +Meangis, of whose country mention has already been made in the former +part of this relation. This unfortunate Prince, with his mother, and +some attendants, had been driven off their own coast by a storm, and had +been seized at sea by some Mindaneian fishermen, who brought them to +Mindanao, and sold them for slaves; a common practice among savage +islanders. The Prince attracted the notice of Mr. Moody by the curious +manner in which he was painted, and which, by Dampier’s description, +exactly corresponds with that of tataowing among the New Zealanders. His +design was to have brought him over with him to England; but Mr. Moody +speaking the Malayan language, and being otherwise well qualified to +manage the company’s affairs at a new factory, he was persuaded by the +Governor of Fort St. George to accept of the Chiefship of Indrapore, in +the room of Mr. Gibbons, who had just resigned in order to return home. +Upon this unexpected promotion, Mr. Moody importuned Dampier to go with +him to be his gunner, and, in order to encourage him thereto, promised +to purchase a small vessel to carry the Prince and his mother to their +own country, and to send him as Commander, with full power to establish +a commerce with Meangis, which could not fail of turning greatly to the +advantage of all concerned. This was a generous and friendly offer which +Dampier could not refuse; and accordingly he embarked in a company’s +coasting ship, in which there were seven or eight officers passengers, +and about 60 soldiers for the new factories. They had a pleasant passage +till they came upon the west coast of Sumatra, when a storm arose, by +which they were driven from their intended port, and forced to make the +harbour of Bencouli. At Bencouli they were all very kindly received, and +the gunner of that fort being just dead, Dampier was offered the post, +with a more ample salary than Mr. Moody, in a newly-established factory, +could venture to allow. Dampier consented to accept of this appointment, +provided Mr. Moody approved of it; and Mr. Moody, not being certain of +being able to fulfil his engagement, so far as the same related to the +Prince of Meangis, very readily gave Dampier leave to contract with the +Governor of Bencouli; and, at the same time, assigned to him a +half-share in the two slaves, the Prince and his mother, that he might +not be a sufferer by leaving Fort St. George to follow him. + +Matters being thus accommodated, Mr. Moody repaired to his station at +Indrapore, and Dampier with the two slaves continued at Bencouli. They +lived at a house in the town, and Dampier was accommodated in the fort. +All this passed in 1690; but, before the year was expired, Dampier grew +tired of his office, and, wanting to get home, applied to the Governor +and Council for his discharge. The Council thought it highly reasonable +that his request should be granted; and the Governor made no opposition, +there being at that time no ship in readiness to carry him off: but, as +he had foreseen, when the _Defence_, Captain Heath, bound for England, +came into harbour, he then made many excuses, and at length absolutely +refused to permit him to go. In vain did Captain Heath remonstrate; and +in vain also did Mr. Goddard, the chief mate, interest himself in +Dampier’s release,--the Governor was inflexible. The _Defence_ had +touched at Indrapore before she put into Bencouli; and Mr. Moody had +consigned the other half-share of the slaves to Mr. Goddard, on having +been previously acquainted by letter from Dampier of his intention to +sail for England. In consequence of this assignment, the Prince who some +time before had been attacked with an infectious distemper, of which his +mother died, and of which he was but just recovered, was put on board +the _Defence_; and it was privately agreed between Captain Heath and +Dampier, that, if the latter could make his escape, the former would +undertake to carry him safe off. Accordingly, when all the company’s +business was completed, and the letters put on board, notice was given +to Dampier of the precise time when the ship was to sail; “and, says he, +after several assays, I slipt away at midnight; and, creeping through +one of the port-holes of the fort, I got to the shore, where the ship’s +boat waited for me, and carried me on board.” + +On the 25th of January, 1691, they set sail for the Cape of Good Hope; +and, the wind being fair, they proceeded at first very successfully: but +they had not been long at sea before the men began to droop, being +attacked with a distemper that stole insensibly upon them, and before +they thought themselves ill were ready to die. Dampier attributes this +fatal disorder to the badness of their water, which was filled from a +river fed by many noxious streams from the low swampy lands that in the +dry season, as it were, drained their dregs into it, which at times were +as black as ink. Besides, it was stowed among the pepper in the hold, +which heated it to that degree, that every morning when the men went to +take their allowance, it was so hot, they could hardly bear to hold a +bottleful of it in their hands; “a thing scarce to be credited, says +Dampier, that water should be ready to boil in a ship’s hold.” This +distemper was so universal, that not a man in the ship was wholly +unaffected by it; so that when the wind blew a hard gale, there wanted +hands to work the ship. + +Captain Heath, pitying the condition of his men, distributed every day +among them a quantity of tamerinds, some jars of which he had brought +with him from India; and this was a very seasonable relief: but the wind +coming south, and the passage being already protracted to an unusual +length, the Captain called the whole ship’s crew together, to consult +what was best to be done in the present extremity, and desired every +man, from the highest to the lowest, to deliver his opinion freely. Thus +all circumstances being duly considered, it was unanimously agreed at +last, notwithstanding the wind was then contrary, to prosecute their +voyage to the cape. But as that determination would infallibly require a +more than ordinary exertion of labour from those that were well, to +supply the place of those that were sick, the Captain promised a month’s +extra pay to every man who should assist on all occasions that should +require help, whether it was his watch or not and this premium he +engaged to pay at the cape. This offer was first accepted by the +Officers, and then as many men as were capable of duty entered +themselves upon the roll. In a short time, it pleased God, says Dampier, +to favour us with a fair wind, which being improved to the best +advantage by the incessant labour of those new-listed men, wafted us in +a short time to the cape; and, being brought safe to an anchor by the +assistance of 100 Dutch sailors, who unbent the sails, and did every +thing for us they were required to do, the sick were presently sent on +shore, where they remained about six weeks, and all but three or four +recovered. + +On the 23d of May they sailed from the cape in company with the James +and Mary, and the Josiah Indiamen. They directed their course towards +the island of St. Helena, and met with nothing remarkable, except a +swelling sea, which taking them on the broad side, rolled every thing +about that was loose between the decks and in the hold. This great +tumbling sea took them soon after doubling the cape; “an eminent token, +says Dampier, that the south-west winds were now violent in the higher +latitudes towards the South Pole, we having fine clear weather all the +while.” + +On the 20th of June they arrived at Santa Helena, where they staid four +or five days, and afterwards continued their voyage to England without +any remarkable incident; and arrived safe in the Downs, Sept. 16, 1691. + +What advantage Dampier and his partner Mr. Goddard made of their painted +prince is not related; but they certainly sold him to be carried about +the country to be shewn for money. He was painted all down his breast, +between his shoulders, on his thighs, and round his legs and arms like +bracelets. “I cannot, says Dampier, liken the drawings to any figure of +animals, or the like; but they were very curious, full of great variety +of lines, flourishes, chequered work, and innumerable convolutions, +keeping a very graceful proportion, and appearing very artificial, even +to the wonder of all that beheld him.” It has already been remembered, +that the mother of the Prince died in India of the infectious disorder +of which he was but just recovered when he embarked for Europe. On that +occasion Dampier did what he could to comfort Jeoly, for that was the +name they gave him; but he took on extremely, insomuch that it was +feared he could not have long survived; on which account a grave was +immediately dug to hide the dead body out of his sight; and being +shrouded decently with a piece of fine new calico, the corpse was about +to be interred; but Jeoly was not satisfied till he wrapped all his +mother’s cloaths about her, and two new pieces of chintz that Mr. Moody +gave her, saying they were her’s, and she must have them. After this he +suffered her to be interred, which was done with great solemnity; but he +continued to pine after her during the whole time he continued in India. + +In the printed relation that was given of him when he was shewn for a +sight, the showmen heightened their account with a romantic story of a +beautiful sister of his being a slave with him at Mindanao, and of the +Sultan’s falling in love with her, and taking her to his bed; but these +were stories indeed! They reported also, that the paint with which he +was ornamented was of such virtue, that serpents and all venomous +creatures would fly from him: but poor Jeoly was as much afraid of +serpents, scorpions, and centipedes, as a little child, for he was +exceedingly timorous. He died at Oxford, but Dampier does not tell the +year. + +The publication of the above voyage round the world having recommended +Dampier to the notice of persons of the first eminence, he was +afterwards employed by government in discoveries, both in the Eastern +and Southern Seas. His first expedition was to the coast of New Holland, +which could have no other object but discovery in view. He sailed from +the Downs, on Jan. 14, 1698, in his Majesty’s ship the Roebuck, carrying +only 12 guns, and 50 men, and having 20 months provisions on board. On +the 1st of August they fell in with the western coast of New Holland, in +lat. 26 deg. S. where, however, they found nothing very different from +what Dampier had before described. The only land animals they saw, were +a small sort of racoons, different from those of the West-Indies chiefly +in their legs, which are short before, and on which they run jumping; +and a sort of guano’s, or lizards, peculiar to the country, which appear +to have two heads, but in reality have but one, and no tail; and, what +is no less remarkable, their four legs seem to be all forelegs, so +formed as that the creature may walk either way. To these may now be +added the kanguroo, a quadrupede of a particular shape, as large as a +sheep, and a creature of the oppossum kind, discovered by Mr. Banks; +with dogs and wolves seen by the Endeavour’s crew; of the latter sort +some were seen by Dampier’s men, but so lean that they were nothing but +skin and bone. In latitude 23 deg. S. they saw dolphins, and small +whales, and abundance of scuttle-shells, swimming in the sea. + +Captain Cook found plenty of water on the east side of this island; but +Dampier was much distressed for want of it on the west side. Being +ashore employed in digging a well, he was assaulted by ten or twelve of +the natives, with whom he had a skirmish, and was forced to shoot one of +them dead, to disengage a young man who was surrounded by three of them, +and wounded in the check with a lance. On a gun’s being fired over the +heads of the assailants, though it startled them at first, they soon +recovered their surprize, and continued their hostilities; but as soon +as they saw a man fall, they were terribly frightened, and fled with +precipitation. Dampier very humanely adds, that he attempted the natives +no farther, being very sorry for what had happened. + +Among the natives engaged on this occasion, there was one who by his +appearance and carriage seemed to be the chief of them. He was a young +brisk man, not very tall, nor so personable as some of the rest, though +more active and courageous. He was painted with a circle of white +pigment about his eyes, and a white streak down his nose from his +forehead to the tip of it; his breast and some part of his arms were +also made white with the same paint; not for beauty or ornament as it +should seem, but, as some wild Indian warriors are said to do, to make +themselves look more terrible in war. He was indeed a very frightful +being; for the manner in which he was painted, adding to his natural +deformity, gave him more the appearance of a monster of the woods, than +of a man born of a woman. Dampier in this second voyage to New Holland, +confirms what he said of the natives in his first, that they are the +worst-featured savages he ever beheld. Captain Cook, on the contrary, or +his editor, assures us, that their features are not disagreeable, their +noses are not flat, nor are their lips thick; their teeth are white and +even, and their hair naturally long and black, but universally cropt +short: in general it is straight, but sometimes has a small curl; their +beards are of the same colour with their hair, bushy and thick, which +they shorten by singeing: they are of the middle stature, in general +well made, clean limbed, remarkably vigorous, active, and nimble; their +countenances not altogether void of expression, and their voices +remarkably soft and effeminate. Such are the different descriptions +given by voyagers of the same people; or, to speak more precisely of +people on the east and west side of the same continent; for which it is +not easy to account. + +Our voyager, however, not being able either to find fresh water, or a +harbour to careen his ship, set sail from this miserable country about +the beginning of September, 1699; and, directing his course to the +island of Timor, arrived there September 15, and received a supply of +water and provisions from the Chief of the Dutch factory there. He was +likewise hospitably entertained by the gentlemen of the Portuguese +factory on the same island. From thence he sailed to the coast of New +Guinea, traded with the inhabitants, and ranging along the coast, found +the main land divided into two parts. To the easternmost division he +gave the name of New Britain. + +In his return back he touched again at Timor, and from thence sailed to +Batavia; where having careened his ship, and supplied himself with +necessaries of every kind, on the 17th of October, 1700, he set sail for +the Cape of Good Hope; from thence continuing his voyage to St. Helena, +he arrived at that island January 31, 1701; but in his course home his +ship sprung a leak at sea, and, after endeavouring in vain to stop it, +he was obliged to run her a-ground on the island of Ascension; where +having landed his men, and taken from on board all necessary provisions, +they in a short time discovered a fine spring of water, and lived +tolerably, till they were at last relieved by some English men-of-war, +who were convoying home the Canterbury Indiaman, and brought them all +safe to England. + +In 1703, notwithstanding the bad success of the voyage just mentioned, +Dampier was again employed in an expedition to the South Sea, in +conjunction with Captain Pulling, who had each a ship of 26 guns, and +120 men under his command. That commanded by Captain Dampier was called +the St. George; and that by Captain Pulling, the Fame. They were +victualled for nine months, and had commissions from his Royal Highness +Prince George of Denmark, then Lord High Admiral, to proceed in a +warlike manner against the French and Spaniards; and both were upon the +same terms of _No purchase no pay_. But while they were in the Downs, +some difference having arisen between the two Captains, Captain Pulling +set sail alone, and left Dampier to take his own course; who, stopping +some time in Ireland, was joined by the Cinque Ports galley of 90 tons, +16 guns, and 63 men, Captain Charles Pickering Commander. In this +expedition, Dampier had three grand objects in view: the _first_ was, to +sail to Buenos Ayres, in order to surprize the Spanish galleons that +usually take in their lading at that port; the _second_ depended on +missing the first, in which case they were to pass through the straits +of Magellan to cruise upon the coasts of Peru, for the Baldivia ships +that carry gold to Lima; and the _third_ was only to take place, if both +the former miscarried; and was, to proceed to the coast of Mexico, to +intercept the Manilla ship that annually arrives at Acapulco, and is +said to be worth eight or nine millions of pieces of eight, equal to a +million and a half of our money. + +Full of these projects, they set sail from Kinsale, in Ireland, on the +11th of September, 1703, and on the 25th arrived off Madeira, where they +learned that the galleons were sailed from Buenos Ayres, and then lay at +Teneriff. The first project being thus defeated, they proceeded to put +the second in execution with all possible dispatch. On the 24th of +November they anchored on the island Le Grand, on the coast of Brazil, +where they buried Captain Pickering, and chose Lieutenant Stradling in +his room. + +From this island they sailed the 8th of December; and, doubling Cape +Horn on the 20th of January, they changed their direction, sailed to the +northward, and on the 10th of February came to an anchor in the great +bay of Juan Fernandez, where they met their consort Captain Stradling, +with whom they had parted in passing Cape Horn in a violent storm, which +happened on the 26th of January. + +At Juan Fernandez they continued refitting their ships till the 29th, +when seeing a sail, they slipt their cables, and put to sea. She proved +to be a French ship of 400 tons, 30 guns, and full of men. The St. +George fought her about seven hours, when a gale springing up, she +sheered off. On this occasion, the Cinque Ports behaved but +indifferently, firing only a few guns, and lying by. + +Next day, in returning to Juan Fernandez, they fell in with two French +men-of-war of 36 guns each; from whom they narrowly escaped, leaving +their cables, anchors, and five or six of their men belonging to the +Cinque Ports on that island, with a new suit of sails, and several other +necessaries which they could ill spare. + +They now proceeded upon their second enterprize; but they were equally +unfortunate in that as in the former. The Baldivian ships were sailed, +and the gold secured. They then meditated a surprize against the town of +Santa Maria, in the gulph of Panama, where the Spaniards getting +intelligence of their designs, laid ambuscades, and after killing and +wounding several of them, put the rest to flight. + +In this manner, disappointments succeeding disappointments, differences +began to arise between the Commanders and they concluded to part +company. But about this time, a large ship, fortunately for them, coming +to an anchor in the night close by them, they instantly boarded and made +prize of her. She was deeply laden with flour, sugar, brandy, wine, +about thirty tons of malmalade of quinces, a considerable quantity of +salt, with some tons of linnen and woolen-cloth. This proved a +seasonable supply; and provisions that were before so scarce, that only +five green plantains were the daily allowance for six men, were now so +abundant on board the prize, that they might have laid in a stock for +several years; yet in less than six months we find them starving. + +After rummaging the prize and dividing the spoil, the Captains parted; +and in two or three days, Dampier fell in with a Spanish man-of-war, +fitted out on purpose to take him. The two ships had a smart engagement, +and parted in the night by consent. + +Soon after this engagement, Dampier and Clippinton, his first +Lieutenant, having some difference, Clippinton seized upon the ship’s +tender, in which were the stores and ammunition, and with 21 of the best +men weighed anchor, and set sail. When he had cleared the islands, he +sent to invite all those who were willing to sail with him to come on +board; but Dampier’s last project being now on the point of being +carried into execution, the men who remained with him resolved to abide +the issue. Clippinton, though he had quarrelled with the Captain, had no +mind to distress the men; he therefore thought fit to restore the powder +and ammunition, reserving only enough for his own use. In the bay of +Tacames, Dampier had taken a small bark of 60 tons, laden with +plantains. This bark they intended to keep as a tender. She had two +masts, with two square sails; and they named her the Dragon. + +The Master of this bark, Christian Martin by name, was a Spaniard by +birth, but taken prisoner while he was a boy, and bred up in England. +This man they kept prisoner on board and now proceeded to intercept the +Manilla ship. + +On the 6th of December in the morning, they saw a sail, and soon came up +with her. She proved their last hope, the great Manilla ship, from the +East-Indies. They instantly bore down upon her, and before she could +bring her guns to bear gave her several broadsides; and, taking her +unprepared, put the company on board in the utmost disorder. Captain +Martin, though a Spaniard, advised to lay her aboard immediately, before +the Spaniards had recovered their surprize; but that advice was +disregarded till it was too late; for while two parties were quarrelling +on board the St. George, the one for laying the enemy aboard, the other +not, the Spaniards got out a tier of 24-pounders, every one of which +that took place was ready to send the St. George to the bottom. The +assailants were therefore soon beaten off with disgrace, after having +received a shot between wind and water in the powder-room, by which two +feet of planking was driven in on each side the stern. And now, being +disappointed of this their last expectation, all the men grew +discontented, and impatient to return home. However, they were prevailed +upon to cruise a few weeks longer on the coast of Mexico; and with that +view passed the ports of Acapulco, Port Angels, Port Guatulco, and +several others; but without meeting with any prize worth waiting for. + +Ill success is generally succeeded by discontent; the men who were +before impatient of fatigue without reward, grew now ungovernable. A +party, therefore, formed the design of returning home by way of the +East-Indies; and these were encouraged by Mr. Funnel, the chief mate, +who, having the command of the small Spanish prize already mentioned, +determined to hazard every thing to regain his native country, rather +than continue under the direction of a man with whom there was no +keeping terms. He therefore embraced the first opportunity to reach the +gulph of Amapalla, to new-water his bark, and prepare for his voyage +home. + +It should seem, that this voyage of Dampier, though countenanced with a +government commission, was notwithstanding fitted out by private +adventurers; for, on this occasion, the owners agent is said to have +divided the provisions and stores between those who chose to remain with +Dampier, and those who determined to follow the fortune of Mr. Funnel. +Their whole number was already reduced to 60 effective men, 33 of whom +chose to accompany Funnel, and 27 only remained with Dampier, but upon +what terms they engaged, or what course they pursued afterwards, we are +not told; for Dampier, though he returned home, never published any +account of this voyage. What we have related concerning it, in order to +complete his adventures, as far as our materials extend, we have +extracted from the account published by Funnel; who, having left Dampier +in the gulph of Amapalla, on the 1st of February, 1705, takes no farther +notice of his Captain; but goes on with the story of his own voyage, +which was indeed unfortunate enough; for his ship was seized by the +Dutch at Amboyna, the goods on board confiscated, and most of the men +cruelly used, being confined and half-starved by our good friends the +Dutch, who were jealous lest they should make discoveries prejudicial to +their commerce. Funnel himself, however, soon got released; and, having +made strong representations against the authors of his sufferings at +Amboyna, he at length obtained some shew of redress; with which, though +not a compensation for his losses, he was forced to be contented. On the +2d of Nov. he, with two of his company, got passage to Europe in the +Dutch East-India fleet; and, on the 15th of July following, arrived safe +in the Texel, from whence, after visiting the principal towns in +Holland, he came to England, and published the account just mentioned, +in which he followed the example of Dampier, by giving a description of +the natural productions of the islands at which he touched, their +inhabitants, arts, and commerce. + +We can find no traces of the latter part of the life of Dampier, who +seems to have been an able navigator, but of a restless turbulent +spirit, like the ocean on which he was bred. He certainly possessed the +art of sailing in a very eminent degree; but he wanted that happier art +of conciliating the wavering discordant passions of his followers and +associates. He seems, too, to have been more cautious than brave, more +subtle than wise, and more enterprizing than fortunate. In all his +engagements, both as an inferior officer and as a commander, he seems +neither to have braved danger nor to have feared it. It is not easy to +determine, whether his thirst for gold, or desire of knowledge, was the +governing principle that led him to range the world for new discoveries. +If the former, he seems totally to have failed in the pursuit; if the +latter, he was more successful. At Mindanao, we find him poor; at the +Bashee islands he laments the want of every article that could purchase +from the natives a small specimen of the yellow metal that bore the +resemblance of gold; but withal so honest, that he would neither take +the iron belonging to the owners of the ship to give in exchange, nor +would he take the metal from the inhabitants without an equivalent. In +short, I think, we may conclude, from what he himself has written, that +Dampier was a man of strong natural parts, of blunt manners, of quick +discernment, inflexible in his resolutions, but deficient in natural +qualities to command respect, and in acquired abilities to maintain it. + + + + + THE + VOYAGE + OF + MASTER COWLEY + ROUND THE WORLD. + + +Of Master Cowley we can find no other account than what is contained in +the voyage written by himself; therefore, we shall, in his own words, +preserve such parts of that voyage as have not already been related in +the voyage of Dampier; premising only, that his first setting out among +the buccaneers was in the same prize, in which Dampier set sail from +Virginia, under the command of Captain Cook; that he continued to serve +that Commander, as Master, during his life; and that, after sailing +sometime in consort with Captain Eaton in the South Seas, he chose +rather to serve that gentleman than to continue with his own Captain’s +successor. One remark more, and then to proceed. We find him, in every +collection of voyages in which he is introduced, distinguished by the +appellation of CAPTAIN Cowley, though the highest employment to which he +ever seems to have arrived, was Master on board the buccaneers +before-mentioned; who, during the time they were suffered to commit +their ravages, traversed the globe as wolves the forest, merely for the +sake of whom they might devour. We find, however, but few of them +successful; by far the greatest part, like other robbers, died +miserably; and such of them as escaped with life, were, at certain +times, exposed to sufferings not less shocking to human nature, than the +distresses to which they reduced innocent people by their cruelty and +lust for gold. But now to proceed: + +In August, 1683, I departed, says Cowley, from Cape Charles in Virginia, +lying in latitude 36 deg. N. and in longitude 305 deg. in the good ship +called the Revenge, Captain John Cook Commander, pretending to me, that +I should navigate the ship to Petitguavaz, where a Frenchman was the +Governor, and to which port I began to shape my course; but was told, as +soon as we had left the shore, that they were now bound for the coast of +Guinea, to provide a better ship; and that then their design was to sail +to the Great South Sea. I was thereupon obliged to alter my course, and +to steer E. S. E. for the Cape de Verd islands in lat. 16 deg. N. + +In the month of September, we made the island of Salt, where we came to +an anchor, careened our ship, and afterwards sailed to St. Nicholas, +where was held a consultation of officers, whether to sail directly for +the South Seas in their present ship, or pursue their former resolution +and proceed to the coast of Guinea to seek a better. After much debate, +it was at length concluded to try St. Jago, another of the Cape de Verd +islands, and, if any ship was found in that road fit for their purpose, +to lay her on board, and make her their prize. + +On our approach to this island on the eastern side, we descried a large +ship from the mast-head, which proved to be a Dutch East Indiaman of 50 +guns, and, as we afterwards learnt, of 400 men, most of whom were on +shore; but on seeing us stand towards the road, they instantly repaired +to their posts, clapt a spring upon their cable, heaved their broad side +to us, struck out their ports below, and running out their lower tier of +guns, made themselves ready to receive us. We had now advanced too near; +but marking their force, and that it was in vain to attempt a conquest, +we put before the wind, and steered directly to the coast of Guinea, +where we had no sooner arrived, than we fell in with a new ship of 40 +guns, which we boarded, and carried away. Upon examination, we found her +well stored with brandy, water, and provisions; and in order to furnish +her with other necessaries from our old ship, we put into Sherborough, +resolving to touch at no other port till we should come to Juan +Fernandez, in lat. 33 deg. 40. min. S. + +About the beginning of December, we sailed from latitude 8 deg. N. +steering S. W. till we arrived in 12 deg. S. when we steered away S. W. +by W. till we came into soundings on the coast of Brazil; and finding 80 +fathom water in a sandy bank, we altered our course to the S. W. and +about the latitude of 40 deg. S. found the sea as red as blood, +occasioned by great shoals of shrimps, which coloured the ocean, for +many leagues together. We found also a multitude of seals, and such +abundance of small whales as to exceed the number found in the North +Seas in the proportion of one hundred to ten. We held, on our course +till we came into lat. 47 deg. where we saw land, never before +discovered. It proved an uninhabited island, to which I gave the name of +Pepy’s island, and at which ships may conveniently wood and water, +having a harbour where 1000 sail may ride in safety. In this island we +saw plenty of fowls, and round it there is no doubt abundance of fish; +but, it blowing a storm, we could neither dare to approach it, nor to +examine its coasts. We therefore stood to the southward, shaping our +course S. S. W. till we came into the latitude of 50 deg. S. and then +steering S. W. by W. resolving not to attempt the straits of Magellan, +but to make the land of Ter del Fuego; and there, finding great +riplings, and apprehending danger, we resolved to attempt the passage +discovered by Bartholomew Sharpe, in 1681, and to sail round all, +leaving Staten land to the N. With this view, hauling away S. W. we came +a-breast of Cape Horn on the 14th of February, where, chusing +valentines, and discoursing of the witchcraft of women, there arose a +prodigious storm, which continued till the last day of the month, +driving us into latitude 60 deg. 30 min. which is farther than any ship +ever yet sailed to the south; so that we concluded that talking of the +wiles of women at sea was very unlucky discourse. + +About the beginning of March, the wind coming to the south, we were soon +wafted into a warmer climate; for in the 60th deg. the weather was so +extremely cold, that we could bear drinking three quarts of burnt brandy +a man in four-and-twenty hours, without being the least intoxicated. We +steered north-by-east till we came into lat. 40 deg. S. where we fell in +with the Nicholas of London, Captain John Eaton Commander; and, being +glad of each others company, we sailed in consortship to the island of +Juan Fernandez, where we found plenty of good fat goats, good fish, +wood, and water. [Here Cowley relates the story of the Moskito-man, the +account of which has already been given by Dampier.] This island is +naturally fortified; so that with 100 men, and at 100 l. expence, it may +be defended from the attacks of 2000 men, in case of an invasion. +[Accordingly the Spaniards have taken the hint; for when the last ships +sailed upon discoveries, they found it fortified.] It lies 110 leagues +due west from the port of Valparayso. + + [Illustration: _Cowley & his Men taking in Provisions at the Island of + Iuan Fernandez._] + +We steered from this island north-north-east, till we made the high land +of Arica, in latitude 18 deg. S. Being before the bay, the officers of +both ships held a consultation whether best to go into Arica-bay, or +proceed farther on the coast; when it was resolved to sail as low down +at Cape Blanco, and there wait for the Spanish plate-fleet coming to the +bay of Panama. This was an unfortunate resolution; for in Arica-bay rode +at that time a ship with 300 tons of silver on board, which we missed, +and in the room of her took a timber-ship bound to Lima, with 30 hands +on board, which at that time stockt us with more mouths than we could +well spare meat to fill. With this ship we sailed away north to the +island of Lobos, in lat. 7 deg. S. where we set our sick men on shore, +though we could neither find wood or water upon it. Here having heeled +our ships, at a general council it was resolved, to attack the town of +Truxillo, in lat. 8 deg. N. ten miles within land; and with this view +just as we were weighing anchor to proceed, some of our people from the +mast-head espied three sail of ships passing by, which we instantly ran +out and took. These ships were all laden with flour, fruit, and +sweet-meats; but having had intelligence that we were upon the coast, +they had left all their silver (their silver-service plate not excepted) +on shore. Their provisions, however, were very acceptable; and we now +thought only of seeking a proper place to lay up our stores in security, +and where we might conceal ourselves for five or six months, to make the +enemy believe that we had forsaken their seas, and that they had nothing +to fear from fresh attacks. On this occasion, the islands called by the +Spaniards Gallapagoes, or Enchanted Islands, were proposed, and the only +objection made was, the uncertainty of finding them; but that being +overcome, we weighed anchor, and after three weeks sail came in sight of +them, being seventeen in number, to all which I gave distinct names. We +came to an anchor in a very good harbour, lying towards the northernmost +end of a fine island under the Equinoctial Line, in which we found +plenty of fish, sea and land-tortoises, fowls of various sorts, among +which were turtle-doves, so tame at first that they would often light +upon the hats and shoulders of our men as they walked abroad; but not +being able to satisfy their hungry appetite by catching them alive, the +sailors so scared them at last, by frequently firing upon them, that +they became, like other birds, very shy. + +This island I called the Duke of York’s Island, near to which lies a +small island, which being viewed in several directions, always assumed a +different shape. This I called Cowley’s Enchanted Island. I examined +several others; but upon none of them found fresh-water, save only upon +the Duke of York’s Island. The bay in which we anchored I called +Albany-bay, and the harbour York-road; and, after having laid up 1500 +bags of flour, with a quantity of sweet-meats, and other provisions, in +a convenient store-room, we sailed to the northward, to try for fresh +water a second time; lest, being distressed, we should be forced, upon +some future occasion, to seek relief in other harbours, when it might +not be possible for us to reach the present; but we found good water in +none of them; and, to our great surprize, we met with such a violent +current, that when we would have returned to the Duke of York’s Island, +we could not stem it; and we were obliged to bear away N. N. E. when the +first land we made upon the main was Cape Trespontas, upon the +easternmost shore of which we watered our ship. The first day after our +arrival, we buried our Captain; the second day, three Spanish Indians +came down, whom our men brought on board. Being strictly examined +concerning the strength and opulence of the town of Ria Lexa, they gave +very satisfactory answers: but, while they were under examination, our +long-boat being sent on shore to get beef, a party of Spanish Indians +came down, and set their boat on fire, and drove the crew for shelter +upon a rock, where they were forced to remain till we sent another boat +with 20 men to rescue them. + +We retained the three Indians, and led them with ropes about their necks +as guides to conduct us afterwards to Rio Lexa; but one of them having +got his neck out of the collar, made his escape, and alarmed the town; +so that our men returned very much discouraged at this second +disappointment. We now found it necessary to turn all our prisoners away +to shift for themselves; and then directed our course to the gulph of +St. Miguel, where we took two islands, one inhabited by Indians, the +other plentifully stocked with cattle; but for gold and silver, we got +but little. Here we staid and careened our ships; and here Captain +Cook’s ship and Captain Eaton’s broke consortship; and, both ships being +refitted, I got on board Captain Eaton, where I was entertained as his +master, to navigate his ship to any place or port where he should +direct. + +[It is now that the voyage of Master Cowley may be said to commence. +Hitherto he has gone hand-in-hand with Dampier; but now Cowley pursues +one course with Captain Eaton, and Dampier another with Captain Davis, +the successor of Captain Cook.] + +We in our ship, continues Cowley, towards the middle of August, set sail +from the gulph of Miguel [in the bay of Amapalla], steering for Cape St. +Francisco, where we chaced a ship that escaped from us; and then we bore +up to latitude 7 deg. S. where finding the country alarmed, we stood for +Payta, in lat. 5 deg. S. where we took two ships lying at anchor; which +the Spaniards refusing to ransom, we, by way of farewel, set them on +fire. From hence we sailed to Gorgona, at which island we watered our +ship for the East-Indies. + +This island lies in lat. 3 deg. 15 min. N. and in long. 305 deg. E. and +as soon as we had supplied ourselves with wood and water, we took our +departure, steering W. N. W. till we came as low almost as the rocks of +St. Bartholomew, in long. 240 deg. then we sailed into lat. 15 deg. N. +till we judged we were past those rocks; and then returned into 13 deg. +N. which latitude we held till we made the island of Guam, in lat. 13 +deg. N. and in long. 150 deg. E. according to our reckoning; at which +island, when we arrived, we had a very sickly ship, no man being free +from the scurvy, and most of us in a consuming condition. It was on the +14th of March about seven in the morning that we saw land. At 12 o’clock +we were in lat. 13 deg. 2 min. N. by observation, having made out on our +sailing, by judgment, 7646 miles, that is to say, departed so many miles +from Gorgona by loss made out in longitude, which is about 2549 leagues. +The next day we sailed about the south-west part of the island, and came +to an anchor in a fair bay, from whence we sent a boat on shore, with a +flag of truce; but, on landing, our people found that the natives had +burnt their houses, and had fled; however, our men felled some cocoa-nut +trees, and brought a hundred or two of them on board to refresh the +crew. In the mean time a party of Indians rushed from behind the bushes, +and in a hostile manner threatened to attack us; but we made signs of +friendship, and one of the Indians returned to the wood, and having +peeled a stick so as to make it appear white, he came forward, when one +of his companions perceiving that he had no cap to compliment our +people, called him back, and presented him with one for that purpose. + +From Sunday the 15th till Tuesday the 17th, we continued a free trade +with the Indians; but on that day our men going over to a small island +on the west side of Guam, the Indians fell upon them with stones and +lances, which occasioned a fray, in which some of the Indians were +killed upon the spot. + +Two days after, the Governor, who happened to be a Spaniard, came to a +point of land near the ship, and sent a letter written in Spanish, +French, and Dutch, demanding in the name of the King his Master, who we +were, whither we were bound, and from whence we came? Our answer was +written in French, that we were employed by some gentlemen in France +upon the discovery of the unknown parts of the world. On the return of +the messenger, the Governor sent a letter of invitation to the Captain +to come on shore, with which he instantly complied, and was received +under a triple discharge of cannon from the fort, which was answered by +the same number of guns from the ship. They soon came to a good +understanding. Our Captain made an apology for killing some of the +Indians in his own defence; and the Governor gave for answer, that, if +he had killed them all, he should have esteemed the favour the greater. +We were afterwards told, that the Indians on the small island were in +rebellion. + +On Wednesday, about 12 o’clock, a Spanish Captain came on board, and +continued with us till 12 the next day. He brought as a present from the +Governor 10 hogs, a large quantity of potatoes, plantains, oranges, +papas, and red pepper; in return for which our Commander sent the +Governor a diamond-ring, and presented the Officer with a rich sword. + +The next day the Governor sent on board a captain, a jesuit, and a +friar, with a request to our Commander to spare him some powder, of +which he was in want. This request was readily complied with; we sent +him four barrels, and offered him four great guns. The first he +thankfully received, and sent a box in which were 1600 pieces of eight +in gold and silver for the Captain to pay himself for the powder; but +the guns he politely declined accepting. Our Captain returned the box +with the money untouched, and afterwards received from the Governor a +valuable present. + +While mutual civilities were passing between the Governor and our +Captain, our people went out every day chasing the Indians, whom they +had full license to kill and destroy wherever they met with them; but +they, finding us not to be Spaniards, became very tractable, and offered +to assist in supplying us with fish and fruit, which they exchanged with +us for old nails and old iron. After having tarried here sometime, and a +free intercourse had been established between the Indians on shore and +our people on board the ship, the Indians made signs for as many of our +men as chose it, to come and see them haul the seine. Our men, not +suspecting any design, manned the boat, and went to look at them; but, +while the men were amusing themselves with the sport, the Indians had +very artfully brought their seine round the boat, with a design to draw +it on shore, and thereby entangle both boat and crew; but the sailors, +discovering the plot, gave the Indians no time to carry it into +execution; for, being provided with fire-arms, which they never went +ashore without, they fired amongst the thickest of them, killed a great +many, and drove the rest away. + +These Indians are large in stature, some of them being seven feet and a +half high; they go stark-naked; never bury their dead, but let them lie +in the sun to rot. They have no arms but slings and lances; the sharp +ends of the latter are pointed with dead mens bones, which, being cut +like scoops, and jagged at the edges like unto saws, if a man happens to +be wounded by them, and is not cured in nine days, he certainly dies. +Our people took four of these treacherous savages prisoners, bound them, +and brought them on board; but they had not been long among us, before +three of them leapt into the sea, and with their hands tied behind them +swam away like fishes. However, we sent the boat after them, and found +that a strong man at the first blow could not penetrate their skins with +a cutlass. One of them, in my judgment, had received 40 bullets in his +body before he died; and the last of the three that was killed, swam a +good English mile, not only with his hands tied behind him, but with his +arms pinioned, before he expired. + +The Spanish Governor’s kindness increased in proportion to the mischief +done to the Indians. He sent us, the succeeding day, by one of his +captains, thirty hogs, some melons, pumpkins, potatoes, fruits, and +rice; and received in return six small patararoes. + +Having now new rigged our ship, and supplied ourselves with wood and +water, we began to prepare for our departure. On the first of April, we +weighed anchor, and next day came a-breast of the fort, which we saluted +with three guns, and were complimented with the same number; and on the +3d the Governor sent his last present to our Captain. On the 4th we set +sail, and steered W. by S. till we arrived at the height of St. +Bartholomew, when we shaped our course W. N. W. till we came into the +latitude of 20 deg. 30 min. N. where we fell in with a cluster of +islands lying to the north of Luconia, distant from Guam 560 leagues. +They seemed to be uninhabited; but the men who went ashore in the boat, +found abundance of nutmegs on one of them, and saw some goats. + +From these islands we steered S. W. for the island of Luconia, and on +the 26th of April Cape Bajadore bore from us east; after which we came +up with Cape Mindato, where the S. W. monsoon overtaking us, we were +obliged to bear away for Canton, in China, where we lay and refitted our +ship, and where we might have laden ourselves with plunder from thirteen +Tartar ships, who came thither full of the richest goods of China: but +our men, being under no government, refused to attack them; saying, They +came for gold and silver, not to be made pedlars to carry packs. But, +alas! had reason prevailed, we might have all made our fortunes, without +injuring any prince or subject in christendom; for these goods the +Tartars had taken from the Chinese about two years before, and had +stored them at Macao, an island near Canton, to be taken away when they +judged it convenient. + +From Canton we sailed for Manilla, to wait for the Tartar ship that +annually goes thither, and which, we were informed, was laden one half +with silver; but, though we were fortunate enough to come in sight of +her, yet she out-sailed us, and escaped. We then bore away for an island +that lies to the north of Luconia, intending there to stay till the wind +came fair to carry us to Bantam, not then knowing that Bantam had been +taken from the English by the Dutch. + +At this island we stored ourselves with fruit, goats, and guanos; which +last are here good meat: and here we found an Indian who directed us to +an island, where there was plenty of great cattle; but the wind soon +coming fair, we made sail to the southward, steering our course S. S. W. +till we came into lat. 10 deg. N. where we were so entangled among the +islands of Paragoa, that none of us ever expected to escape with life. +After three days, however, we very providentially got clear; and stood +in for an island at the north end of Borneo, where we hauled our ship +ashore, and erected a tent, planting a battery of ten guns for our +defence, in case of an attack from the natives. Here we unloaded our +ship, and, having provided sufficiently for our security, we ranged the +country for natives to trade with us; but they, having never seen any +white men before, were very shy; and when, by chance, our men fell in +with one of their canoes that was full of women, (among whom was the +queen of the country and her retinue) on the approach of our ship’s +boat, they all leapt over-board; but, after taking them up, and treating +them kindly, they laid aside their fears, and grew familiar; and, upon +our offering them civility, instead of avoiding, they soon became fond +of us. They brought us fish in great plenty, with oranges, lemons, +mangoes, plantains, and pine-apples; and, besides these, we exchanged +some trifles for bezoar, musk, and civet, with which the island is well +stored. + +The year was now drawing to a close, when we set sail from this little +island, directing our course for Timor, where, finding the ship’s +company begin to grow mutinous, and not under command of their Captain, +myself, Mr. Hill, and eighteen more, joined our forces together, and +purchased a large boat, in which we sailed to the island of Java, +distant from Timor 300 leagues. The wind being contrary to carry us to +Batavia, we bore away for Cheribon, a factory belonging to the Dutch, +lying eastward of Batavia, where we were kindly received by the +Governor. There we heard that King Charles was dead, and that his +brother James was proclaimed king; we heard also that Bantam had been +taken from the English; and that the Dutch had erected a new factory in +that island. + +After refreshing at Cheribon, we agreed to divide our twenty men into +three parties; two of which chose to sail for the bay of Bengal, and the +third to stay with me; but knowing that Batavia was the Hollander’s +magazine for India, we proposed first to sail thither, and there to +provide for ourselves as well as we could. Being all arrived, we were +courteously received by the General; and I, with Mr. Hill and another +friend, who were all my party, were promised our passage to Europe in +their East-India fleet. About this time the General was sending four or +five ships of war, with soldiers, to procure satisfaction from the King +of the island for an outrage that had been committed on a party of +Hollanders, who, to the number of 80, had been slaughtered by the +Javanese. These ships, it seems, were originally designed against +Sillebar, an English settlement on the west coast of Sumatra; but this +act of hostility happening to intervene, it had diverted their purpose, +and saved the factory for this time. There were now in Batavia twenty of +us, who, on hearing this news, would willingly have repaired to +Sillebar; but the Dutch would by no means permit us, though we had +bought a sloop for that purpose. When we were just ready to sail, the +General ordered our sloop to be seized; and when we remonstrated against +this incivility, they produced an old law, by which the subjects of the +republic in India are forbidden to sell any vessel to any foreigner; and +they even went so far as to imprison those who had transgressed it. To +us, indeed, they gave the prime cost of the sloop, but paid us nothing +for fitting her up. + +This project failing, Mr. Hill, another friend, and I, embarked on board +the _Solida_ Indiaman, bound to Holland; and, as we were putting out of +the road, we saw our ship Captain John Eaton coming in; however, we held +our course; but, finding the wind unfavourable, we turned down to Bantam +to take in provisions, and from thence steered to Prince’s Island, where +we lay for a fair wind three weeks. About the end of March, we set sail +from thence, with the wind at N. W. and shaped our course to the Cape of +Good Hope. On the 11th of May, after a pleasant passage, we made the +land called Point Primicra, bearing from us N. W. distant 12 leagues. We +had the wind at N. E. being distant from the cape 560 miles, the land +trending away S. W. by W. The fish which came about the ship near the +island of Mona, the 30th of March, left us now, when we judged ourselves +in latitude 32 deg. 47 min. S. From the 15th of May to the 29th we had +sailed only 96 miles; but observing next day, we found by our latitude +that we had a very strong current, that had driven our ship to the +southward 34 miles farther than we judged ourselves to be; for we +thought we had been in the latitude of 33 deg. 41 min. S. whereas we +found ourselves in lat. 34 deg. 15 min. S. our course having been S. W. +40 miles. I argued the reason with the chief mate of the ship, and he +told me it once happened in this place, that they lay a-trie with three +main-sails, and the wind at W. S. W. three days; and when they took +their observation, they found the ship driven to windward 200 English +miles; and likewise in lat. 36 deg. 37 min. they say, they often find +the like. + +From hence to the 27th nothing remarkable happened; but on that day we +had the wind very furious, blowing a storm from W. S. W. We lay a-trie +with our main-sails, and found we were in lat. 30 deg. 2 min. S. coming +in with the land; and now the current went to the eastward, and we began +to fear lest we should lose our passage by the cape. Our Captain, who +had long been sick, was now judged to be past recovery, and in the +middle of the night died: this occasioned a great deal of confusion; +and, to add to our difficulties, our water began to fail, and we were +reduced to a pint a day per man. Next day we heaved our Dutch Captain’s +corpse overboard, when a council-of-war was called, wherein it was +resolved, that Captain Tominall, Commander of the Critsman, should +command the Solida, and that Captain Tominall’s chief-mate should +command the Critsman. The pilot also of the Solida, whose name was +Houdin, was ordered on board the Critsman; but he refused to go, and the +men assembled tumultuously, and declared, they would not part with him. +The Lord Van Heldine was in a great rage with the steersman; but the +crew were resolute, and he was obliged to yield. + +On the 1st of June we again came in sight of land. It appeared like a +round hill flat at top, and bore from us N. N. E. with a smaller hill to +the eastward of it. Next day we were before the harbour of the cape, +with the wind at north, and fine fair weather. On the 3d, at night, we +came to an anchor in the bay before the castle, in nine fathom water. +Three days before we lost sight of the Critsman in the hard gale; but +this day we saw a sail at sea, and concluded that it must be the +Critsman. Here we heard, that the Francis Maria was lost, with 400 men +on board; and here likewise we were told, that the King of England had +taken the Duke of Monmouth, and that he was beheaded. Another piece of +news we learned was, that a Portuguese carrack was cast away upon the +reef, having on board four millions of guelders in gold, sent as a +present from the King of Siam to the King of Portugal; and that four +Dutch ships had likewise struck upon the same reef, but that they had +fortunately escaped with very little damage. + +This day four of the natives came down to the city, dancing naked, and +offering their wives to the Hollanders for little bits of tobacco. They +were the filthiest men I ever saw. Next day my two friends and I walked +about the town, in which are about 100 houses, built very low to save +them from the boisterous gales of wind that blow here in the months of +December, January, and February: but the Dutch have here a strong +castle, with 80 guns well mounted, and a spacious garden with pleasant +walks, and planted with almost every kind of fruit, flowers, and herbs. +This is the greatest rarity that we saw at the cape. We walked, +moreover, without the town to the village inhabited by the Hodmandods +(so called by the Hollanders), who are the natives of the country. These +people are said to be born white, but make themselves black by anointing +their bodies, and exposing their infants to the sun and smoke. Their +houses, or huts, are built round, like the cabbins in Ireland of the +wild Irish, with the fire-place in the middle, round which they all lie +in common, covered only with the skins of some beast, and without any +other bed than the ashes of the wood on which they dress their meat. +They eat any thing that is foul, and will gather from the dunghills the +offal that is thrown out by the Dutch to feed their dogs. Their men are +not at all jealous of foreigners; but will beat their wives unmercifully +for lying with their neighbours. When the women marry, they cut off a +joint of the middle-finger; and if the husband dies, and the widow +marries again, she cuts off another joint; and so many men as they +marry, so many joints of their fingers they lose. They are supposed to +worship the moon, because at the full and change they assemble in great +numbers, dancing and rejoicing when she shines, but howling and +lamenting when they are deprived of her light. + +It happened while we were at the cape, that one of the Hodmandods drank +himself dead at the fort; of which his countrymen getting intelligence, +they assembled about him, and with oil and milk endeavoured to recover +him; but, finding all their efforts vain, and that they could perceive +no spark of life remaining, they began to make preparations for his +funeral, which they performed in the following manner. They first +brought knives, and shaved him from head to foot; then, digging a hole +in the ground, they carefully placed him in a sitting posture, with his +body and head erect, and his legs and thighs stretched out horizontally, +and pressed down streight; this being performed, they propt him up in +this attitude with stones and then came a company of their women to howl +over him, who accompanied their lamentations with a hideous shrieking, +as if death appeared before them in the shape of a monster, and was +ready to devour them. After their time of mourning was over, they filled +up the hole with earth, and covered it over with the green turf. + +During the time of our stay at the cape, our people were chiefly +employed in cleansing and scouring the ship, in fishing her masts, and +in fitting and trimming her rigging. We also took in wood and water, +supplied ourselves with fresh provisions; and, on the 15th of June, when +the wind came fair, we were ready to sail. + +We were now three ships in company, the Solida and Critsman, who came +together from Batavia, and the Emeland who came from Bengal. On Tuesday +the 16th, we pursued our course to the N. W. and N. W. by W. till +Tuesday the 29th, without any material incident intervening. We had no +observation; but I judged we were in lat. 19 deg. 54 min. S. This day it +was that I spoke with an Englishman on board the Emeland, that had been +some time in the Dutch service, who told me, that they came out in +company with two English ships, one named the Resolution, the other the +Defence, with both of whom they had parted in a storm on the coast of +Coromandel; that the Resolution was leaky, and that there were little +hopes of her crew’s being able to keep her above water. He told me +likewise, that there were several Englishmen in the King of Siam’s +service; that the English East-India Company was but little regarded by +the Moors; but that the interlopers were very much encouraged; and that +one Mr. Deane, being their Chief, lived in great splendor, never going +out without 70 or 80 Moors to attend him. + +We had, moreover, this day great feasting on board us, the Commanders of +the other ships being invited to an entertainment. But while the men +were loading the guns to pay the usual salute, they were alarmed by a +strange voice from the sea, crying out, _Come help, come help, a man +over-board!_ on which they forthwith brought the ship to, thinking to +take him up; but they neither saw, nor heard any more of him. Enquiry +was then made through all the ships, if any of them had lost a man; but +upon the strictest examination, it appeared that every ship had her +proper complement; so that they concluded it was the spirit of some man +that had been drowned in that latitude by accident. + +On the 11th of July another very wonderful incident very much astonished +our company. When we left Batavia we took a she-goat on board, which had +then two young kids about three weeks old. This creature was observed to +grow bigger every day; and all that our people could conjecture was, +that it proceeded from the unwholesomness of the water that made her +swell; but, to the astonishment of all of us, she now brought forth four +young ones, although no male had been on board. + +On the 4th of July we threw one man overboard who died the night before, +though no one knew of his being ill. He was an old Dane, who, having no +body on board to take care of his effects, those who first perceived he +was dead fell to rummaging his chest, to secure to themselves what he +had saved; but, as in like cases, they could not agree about dividing +the plunder, the matter came to the knowledge of the Captain, who made +the thieves give up all they had stolen, which he took under his own +care for the benefit of his family. + +On the 12th of July we came up with the Island of Ascension, and next +day took a new departure from thence. On the 20th we found we were in +lat. 15 deg. N. And now a council-of-war was called upon our Captain. +His accusation was, that he had formed a conspiracy with five men more, +to murder a person of quality and his lady, with some other passengers +on board, and that, when the murders were accomplished, they were to +seize upon their riches, and run away with the ship. The purser was the +chief accuser; but, upon examination, the whole charge seemed so +improbable, and the man who broached the story denying upon the trial +what he had confidently affirmed before to the purser, the Captain was +honourably acquitted, and the villain punished. + +Wednesday the 22d, we made out in longitude from the cape 11 deg. 56 +min. judging ourselves to be in long. 355 deg. 56 min. And no wit was +that I cut the same Line which I did when I departed from Virginia in +the year 1683, having encompassed the globe; and cannot but note, that I +have been farther southward than any man that I ever heard or read of +before me in this voyage, having, as I have already said, reached as far +as lat. 60 deg. 30 min. S. and so it happened, that, being bound to go +north about Scotland to make Holland, I passed about 60 deg. north, +though I mention this as no extraordinary thing. + +We met with no extraordinary occurrence till the 2d of August, when our +Captain, after three days illness, died of a pain in his bowels. His +chief steersman was made Commander in his room; but, though his cause +was warmly espoused by the men on a former occasion, yet it was not till +after much opposition that they acquiesced in his present advancement. + +On the 5th of September, about 10 at night, we had a violent storm, and +we had like to have been on board the Critsman; and, by endeavouring to +avoid it, had well-nigh overset our own ship. + +On Sunday the 19th, when the weather began to clear up, I saw land, as +did also two men more. I supposed it to be the island of Shetland; but +our Captain would not believe it; however, about six in the evening, the +Critsman’s people saw land also, and let go the flag, which nettled our +Captain, who blamed his own incredulity. + +We came up with the Isle of Farley by the 22d, steered on, and on the +25th had the wind all round the compass. About this time we came up with +a Scotch ship, who steered so that we ran her on board on her quarter; +and, had we not slackened sail, should certainly have sunk her. Two +passengers leapt into our ship to save their lives; but they happened to +be more afraid than hurt. The ship was called the Lion of Leith; and the +crew told us, that the Turks lay at Plymouth and Dartmouth, where they +had victualled and careened, and from whence they had occasionally slipt +out, and had taken 100 sail of Hollanders, and among them a Dutch +frigate of 36 guns, which gave occasion to many hard speeches against +the English nation; though we found afterwards that the whole was an +idle story, framed only to amuse the Dutchmen, and to flatter their +humour by belying the English. + +On sailing next day with the wind at E. S. E. we found ourselves in +latitude 53 deg. 35 min. N. and I judged us to be on the West-bank. At +the same time we came up with two ships, one a Dane, the other an +Englishman from London, with whom I sent my quadrant, and with whom +myself and my two friends would willingly have gone, if our Dutch lord +would have given us leave; but he told us, he could not answer the +letting us go, to his Masters the States-General. + +On Tuesday the 28th, we came before the Maes, with the wind at E. N. E. +When it was day we saw the Brill Church, and came to an anchor in 10 +fathom water. On the 30th we got bread and beer on board. Next day we +entered the harbour at Helvoetsluys, after we had been seven months in +our passage from Batavia. Three days after our arrival, one of my two +mates died, and I made no great stay here but went to Rotterdam, where I +found the Anne yacht. In her I came passenger for England, and, through +the infinite mercy of God, arrived at London, October 12 following. + +Of Cowley’s history, as we can know nothing but from this relation of +his voyage, so it is not easy either to form a judgment of his capacity +or of his acquirements. He seems to have been an excellent navigator, as +we do not find, in the whole course of his pursuits, either that he was +ever at a loss in finding the ports he sought, or that the ships of +which he had the direction were ever in danger of being cast away. The +nature of his employment in a subordinate station, led him rather to a +habit of obedience than of opposition; and therefore his quitting the +ship in which it was his choice to sail, is more to be wondered at, than +that he should steal away from his company at Batavia with only two +friends. Perhaps his conduct on this occasion might be owing to +principle; for of the enormities committed by the buccaneers, with whom +he was engaged, Cowley must be acquitted, because he was drawn into +their service by stratagem; and a strong proof of his honesty is, his +embracing the first fair opportunity of deserting them. + +We know there are writers, and those of no mean credit, who have taken +pains to justify the practices of the buccaneers, and who have +attributed to their discoveries and to their exploits the advancement of +the art of navigation, and the emolument of their country: but it +neither appears to us, that their discoveries were of any consequence in +a national sense, or that the riches they brought home were a +counter-balance for the lives that were sacrificed in the acquisition. + +Their discoveries were chiefly of lurking-places to which they were +forced to retire to escape the pursuit of the enemy; and, as to the +treasures they acquired, they were generally purchased with the lives of +many brave men, who, had they been employed in honest commerce, would +have gained profit to themselves and honour to their country. + +It is not from the temporary excursions of a banditti that a nation can +hope to become rich; nor is it by a hasty race round the world that the +art of navigation is to be improved. The improvements of art are slow in +their progress; and the acquisition of national wealth can only be +obtained by a steady perseverance in industry and commerce. It is, +therefore, the true interest of every commercial nation to +discountenance plunderers, and to applaud those only who are employed in +cultivating the arts of peace. + + + + + *** Though the following relations may seem foreign to our design of + giving an account only of the discoveries of our English navigators, + yet we have judged them too curious to be here omitted. + + _Extract from a_ Dutch _Relation of_ ROGGEWEIGN’_s_ _Discovery of_ + Easter Island. + + +“Upon the 6th day of April, being in lat. 27 deg. S. and long. 268 deg. +we discovered an island, hitherto unknown to any European; for which +reason, according to the usual custom on the first discovery of any +unknown land, we christened it by the name of EASTER ISLAND, it being +the anniversary of our Saviour’s Resurrection on that very day that we +arrived there. As soon as the anchors were ready to drop, we observed at +a distance a neat boat, of a very remarkable construction, the whole +patched together out of pieces of wood, which could hardly make up the +largeness of half a foot. This boat was managed by a single man, a giant +of twelve feet high, who exerted all his strength to escape us, but in +vain, because he was surrounded and taken. His body was painted with a +dark-brown colour. We tried with such signs and words as are used here +and there among the islands in the South Sea, to get some intelligence +from him, but could not perceive that he understood any thing, wherefore +we permitted him to go into his boat again and depart. Two days +afterwards the whole sea was covered with the savage inhabitants of this +island, who came swimming round the ship in such multitudes, that we +neither could, nor did we think it adviseable to land. They clambered +like cats up the ship’s sides with the utmost assurance, and came +aboard, where they did not appear to be in the least afraid of us, but +they seemed very much surprized at the largeness and extent of our ships +and rigging, and could not conceive the meaning of all that they saw; +but their curiosity was chiefly engaged by the great guns, which they +could not enough admire, and which they frequently struck their hands +upon, to try if they could not lift them up, and carry them off; but +when they saw that such logs by such an attempt were too heavy for them, +and could not be moved, these overgrown fellows stood abashed, and were, +in appearance, very much out of humour. They no sooner came aboard, than +we immediately found that they were naturally as thievish and +nimble-fingered as the inhabitants of those islands to which voyagers +have affixed the name of the Islands of Thieves, from the great +propensity of the people to rob and steal, if they were not beaten from +it. Rusty nails, old iron, and whatever they could catch or lay hold on, +was equal to them, with which they jumped overboard immediately. They +attempted with their nails to scratch the bolts out of the ship, but +these were too fast for them. These huge fellows came at last aboard in +such numbers, that we were hardly capable to keep them in order, or keep +a watchful eye upon their motions, and the quickness of their hands; so +that fearing they would become too many for us, we used our best +endeavours to get rid of them in a friendly way; but they not seeming +inclinable to leave us, we were obliged to use harsher methods, and +drive these savages out of the ships by force. + +“On the 10th of April we made for the island in our boats, well armed, +in order to land, and take a view of this country, where an innumerable +company of savages stood on the sea side to guard the shore, and +obstruct our landing; they threatened us mightily by their gestures, and +shewed an inclination to await us, and turn us out of their country; but +as soon as we, through necessity, gave them a discharge of our muskets, +and here and there brought one of them to the ground, they lost their +courage. They made the most surprizing motions and gestures in the +world, and viewed their fallen companions with the utmost astonishment, +wondering at the wounds which the bullets had made in their bodies; +whereupon they hastily fled with a dreadful howling, dragging the dead +bodies along with them; so the shore was cleared, and we landed in +safety. + +“These people do not go naked, as many other savages do; every person is +cloathed in different colours of cotton and worsted, curiously woven, or +stitched; but nothing misbecomes them more than their ears, which are +abominably long, and in most of them hang upon the shoulders; so that, +though they themselves look upon this as the greatest ornament, they +appeared very uncouth to us, who were not accustomed to such; the more +so, as there were in them such extravagantly large holes and openings, +that we could easily put our hands through them. + +“Thus far my narrative will gain credit, because it contains nothing +uncommon, yet I must declare, that all these savages are of a more than +gigantic size, for the men are twice as tall and thick as the largest of +our people; they measured, one with another, the height of twelve feet, +so that we could easily, (who will not wonder at it!) without stooping, +have passed betwixt the legs of these sons of Goliah. According to their +height, so is their thickness, and are all, one with another, very well +proportioned, so that each could have passed for a Hercules; but none of +their wives came up to the height of the men, being commonly not above +ten or eleven feet. The men had their bodies painted with a red or dark +brown, and the women with a scarlet colour. + +“I doubt not but most people who read this voyage will give no credit to +what I now relate, and that this account of the height of these giants +will probably pass with them for a mere fable or fiction; but this I +declare, I have put down nothing but the real truth, and that this +people, upon the nicest inspection, were in fact of such a surpassing +height as I have here described. + +“After the inhabitants of Easter Island had made trial of the strength +of our weapons, as we have before related, they began to use us in a +more civil manner, and brought us from their huts all kinds of +vegetables, sugar canes, with yams, plantains, and a great quantity of +fowls, which came very a-propos, and tended to refresh us greatly. + +“What I have seen of the worship and idols of these savages is very +wonderful. Two stones, of a largeness almost beyond belief, served them +for gods; the one was broad beyond measure, and lay upon the ground; +upon this stood the other stone, which was of such extent and height +that seven of our people with outstretched arms would hardly have been +able to encircle it; so that it appeared to me, and all others, +impossible that this stone could have been lifted up and placed upon the +other by the inhabitants of these islands, how large and strong soever +they might be; for, besides the thickness, it was fully as high as three +men. About the top of this stone there was cut or carved the shape of a +man’s head, adorned with a garland, which was set together in the manner +of inlaid work, made of small stones, in a manner not very improper. The +name of the largest idol was called Taurico, and the other Dago; at +least these were the words they called to them by, and wherewith they +worshipped them. + +“These savages had great respect for the two idols Taurico and Dago, and +approached them with great reverence, namely, with dancing, shouting, +jumping, and clapping of hands, in the same manner as we read in holy +writ, that the children of Israel worshipped the golden-calf which Aaron +set up; and when the cannon (of which they seemed to be in great terror) +were discharged, and the heavy shot sounded in their ears, they made +surprizing and wonderful gestures and leaps, and pointed with their +finger, first to our people, and then to their gods, whom they appeared +to supplicate for help against us, and to call upon with a frightful +shout, and howling of Dago! Dago! + +“While we lay before this Easter Island, a heavy tempest surprized us, +which pressed so much on the ships, that I had no thought but that they +would drive from their anchors, and we with them come to a miserable end +on this coast, which God prevented, the storm being at last appeased, +without having done any damage to the ships. + +“On the 12th of April, leaving this island, we put to sea again, and +shaped our course to the westward. + +“On the 20th of May we came into the latitude of 14 deg. 41 min. S. +where we fell in with a great number of sunken rocks, rocks above water, +and small islands, all entangled together; so that we were of opinion, +they had been joined together in former times, and composed one solid +piece of land, but separated from one another afterwards by a pressure +of the waters. Among these an island appeared above the rest, the most +stately and eminent, intersected by many rivers and springs of water, +which therefore was christened Water Island by Schouten and Le Maire, +who discovered it in 1616, on their voyage to the Terra Australis. In +this labyrinth of islands and rocks, we had the woeful misfortune to +lose one of our ships, the African Galley, which struck upon the rocks, +and beat to pieces. It may be accounted, however, a happy circumstance, +that all the people aboard were saved and brought off; and being divided +among the two remaining ships, were a reinforcement to their crews. It +was impossible for the ships to approach very near the land, where no +anchoring ground was to be found. It is a low, sandy, and rocky island, +being in the inland parts almost all drowned land; but upon the borders +it is full of trees, among which neither palmetto or cocoa-nut trees +were to be found; which I believe is the reason of its not being +inhabited; nevertheless, five of our men who went ashore willingly +remained on the island, and would not return again to the ships, being +wearied out with the hardships they had already suffered, and fearing +many more unforeseen disasters were still awaiting them. The loss of the +above-mentioned ship would be a happy circumstance for them, since from +the wreck, and what would be drove ashore, they might be supplied with +arms, and all other necessaries. + +“On the 25th of May we passed by the island of Flies, also discovered by +the foresaid Schouten in his above-mentioned voyage. The inland parts of +it are likewise full of salt-water, and it abounds in great plenty of +wild green trees. It is inhabited by savages of a large stature, armed +with bows and arrows. The island was very properly named, from the +incredible quantity of nasty flies wherewith it is covered, which also +come aboard, and fall so thick on the face, and other parts of the body, +that one is at a loss to conceal himself from them, and every thing one +eats or drinks is full of them; they put us to great trouble for two or +three days, when these uninvited guests departed. + +“On the 29th of May we passed among a number of rocks, and islands, from +whence we sometimes saw a smoak ascend, a sign that they were inhabited; +but we had no opportunity of going ashore. This day we found ourselves +in lat. 15 deg. 17 min. S. and long. 224 deg. + +“On the 1st of June, in 15 deg. 47 min. and long. 224 deg. we came in +sight of an island hitherto unknown to, and unlooked for by, any +European. Thither we went in our boats, in order to take a view of it, +and to procure refreshments; when the inhabitants, who saw us approach +from afar, came down upon the shore to make us return back, and to +prevent our landing. They are people of an excellent shape, well +proportioned, and comely in person; and what is surprizing, their skin +is as _clear and white as that of a native of Holland_. They seemed to +shew a resolution to stay for us; for, as soon as we came near, they +jumped like madmen into the water to meet us, and pushed with great +cruelty with their weapons, which consisted of spears and lances, whose +points were armed with a very sharp wood as hard as iron: wherefore, +being obliged to free ourselves, and preserve our lives from this +hostile attack, we fired upon them with our muskets, which made these +savage warriors immediately take to their heels, and obliged them to +look out for a place of safety; for as soon as they had tasted the +deadly effects of these weapons, they turned their backs upon us, and +fled to a high steep rock, which they scrambled up like monkies, with +incredible swiftness. + +“From thence, being convinced of our superior force, they gave us to +understand, that all hostilities should cease on their part, and they +would treat with us as friends; and on our side we used every means to +allure them to us, being in the utmost want of all manner of +refreshments. Every thing succeeded according to our wishes; they +brought us their commodities, consisting of cocoa-nuts, and a certain +bitter herb of the taste of Dutch cresses, which is found here in great +plenty. For these we gave them in exchange several trifles and trinkets; +such as small looking-glasses, glass beads of all colours, combs, bells, +and a number of such toys of little value, with which they were as well, +and even better pleased, than we were with the cocoa-nuts and bitter +herbs, which, however, were much more agreeable and useful to us in our +present condition than gold and silver, as we thereby enjoyed a +remarkable benefit and amazing relief against the scurvy, which had +already brought us into a most deplorable situation. + +“Although it appeared by these mutual exchanges that these savages were +got into good understanding and friendship with us, we soon discovered +that this was no more than a feigned reconciliation, serving only to +deceive us and make us the more easily fall into their snares, with +which villainous inclination almost all the inhabitants of the islands +lying in those seas are infected; for as some of our people, ordered to +view and make a further discovery of the country, were passing betwixt +the rocks and cliffs, along a strait and narrow path, to see the form +and condition of the place, they were met by an old grey-headed man, +who, although he neither understood them or they him, endeavoured by +many signs and motions to make them sensible that they were not in +safety, and that it would be best for them to return back; he pointed to +the road that brought them thither; and the better to make them +understand the secret ambush and the approaching danger, he took up a +stone from the ground and threw it down before him. How well soever our +people ought to have understood from this, that those barbarians would +attack them from the tops of the rocks with stones, yet they paid no +regard to the signs and admonitions of the good old savage, but marched +forward, trusting to their arms. They had not gone far before a dreadful +shower of stones came pouring upon them from all quarters, when they +least thought of it, in such large quantities and with such violence, +that many of our people were thereby lamed and wounded, without being +able to make resistance in defending themselves or driving the savages +from above them, who had made their assault from too secure a place; so +that our people were constrained to slacken their pace, contrary to +their inclinations, and return back with their wounded heads, being very +well pleased however that they had escaped so well. + +“What further regards these villains and traitors, I have already +observed that they are comely and well-proportioned in their persons, +and wear as an ornament pearls of a large size in their ears. About +their necks and bodies they wear, as a singular ornament, the shells of +pearl oysters. As we received great benefit and relief from our sickness +by means of the bitter herb which is found here in great plenty, and was +given us by the savages in exchange for our toys, so this new-discovered +island was by us christened by the name of the Verkwikking’s island. + +“After this adventure with these roguish savages no delay was made +there, but we got again under sail; and because the provisions lessened +gradually from day to day, and the disorders, notwithstanding the relief +from the bitter herbs, continued to increase, to the great grief of us +all, it was resolved, in a council of the principal officers, to return +home by the East-Indies. We then lay up to lat. 15 deg. 47 min. S. and +according to our reckoning 224 deg. 18 min. long. being then about 1200 +leagues from the coast of Peru. + +“On the 12th of June we found ourselves in latitude 15 deg. 16 min. S. +and longitude 205 deg. 8 min. + +“On the 14th we discovered two islands, which we could not approach near +enough to take a proper view of, by reason of the rough and stormy sea; +but, on the other hand, we had this satisfaction, that the inhabitants +came to take a view of us, and kept hovering about the ships in a number +of boats of such neat and exquisite workmanship as is almost incredible +that any thing of the kind should have been found among such savages, +they being of such an artful construction, the furniture so pretty, and +the form so neat, adorned with a number of the most curious carved +figures, that it is impossible for the imagination to conceive any thing +more elegant; and really their carved image work (which was the greatest +ornament of these boats) was so exquisite, that I much doubt if there +are many engravers in Europe capable of producing more curious +workmanship. The people in these fine boats were armed with darts, and +had their heads adorned with green leaves, and their bodies cloathed +with reeds. This island got the name of Bowman’s island from a captain +of that name. It was very pleasant and delightful to behold, fruitful, +and surrounded with trees, among which the palmetto shewed itself. + +“On the 15th we came in sight of an island about seven miles in length, +lying in lat. 13 deg. 41 min. S. and 250 deg. long. Many of us felt a +longing desire to touch at this island, in hopes of procuring some +refreshment; but it was deferred, and we pursued our voyage without +landing, in order to save time, because our miseries and inconveniences +daily increased, and the disorders from many causes increased also. + +“On the 18th of July we perceived many different islands, and among +others New Zealand, computed to be in extent about 300 leagues, lying +under 6 deg. of S. lat. and 166 deg. long.” + + +This relation is copied verbatim from Mr. Dalrymple’s valuable +Collection of Spanish and Dutch Discoveries in the South Seas, as is +likewise the following Relation of the Discovery of Davis’s Land; but +neither the one nor the other of these discoveries have since been fully +confirmed. + + + + + _An Account of the_ DISCOVERY _of the Land called_ DAVIS’S LAND. + + +“We went from Gallapagoes under the Line, for the southward; intending +to touch nowhere till we came to the island of Juan Fernandez. + +“In our way thither, about four o’clock in the morning, when we were in +the latitude of 12 deg. 30 min. S. and about 150 leagues from the main +of America, our ship and bark felt a terrible shock, which put our men +into such a consternation, that they could hardly tell where they were, +or what to think, but every one began to prepare for death. And, indeed, +the shock was so sudden and violent, that we took it for granted the +ship had struck upon a rock: but, when the amazement was a little over, +we cast the lead, and sounded, but found no ground; so that, after +consultation, we concluded it must certainly be some earthquake. The +suddenness of this shock made the guns of the ship leap in their +carriages, and several of the men were shaken out of their hammocks. +Captain Davis, who lay with his head over a gun, was thrown out of his +cabin. The sea, which ordinarily looks green, seemed then of a whitish +colour; and the water which we took up in our buckets for the ship’s +use, we found to be a little mixed with sand. This at first made us +think there was some spit of land; but when we had sounded, it confirmed +our opinion of the earthquake. Some time after, we heard news, that at +that very time there was an earthquake at Callao, which is the road for +Lima, and that the sea ebbed so far from the shore, that on a sudden +there was no water to be seen; and that after it had been away a +considerable time, it returned in rolling mountains of water, which +carried the ships in the road of Callao a league up into the country, +overflowed the city of Callao, though it stood upon a hill, together +with the fort, and drowned man and beast for 50 leagues along the shore, +doing mischief even at Lima, though six miles within land from the town +of Callao. + +Having recovered our fright, we kept on to the southward. We steered S. +and by E. half easterly, until we came to lat. of 27 deg. 20 min. S. +when, about two hours before day, we fell in with a small, low, sandy +island, and heard a great roaring noise, like that of the sea beating +upon the shore, right-a-head of the ship: whereupon the sailors, fearing +to fall foul upon the shore before day, desired the captain to put the +ship about, and to stand off till day appeared; to which the captain +gave his consent. So we plyed off till day, and then stood in again with +the land; which proved to be a small flat island, without the guard of +any rocks. We stood in within a quarter of a mile of the shore, and +could see it plainly, for it was a clear morning, not foggy nor hazy. To +the westward, about twelve leagues, by judgment, we saw a range of high +land, which we took to be islands, for there were several partitions in +the prospect. This land seemed to reach about fourteen or sixteen +leagues in a range; and there came hence great flocks of fowls. I, and +many more of our men, would have made this land, and have gone ashore at +it, but the captain would not permit us. The small island bears from +Copayapo almost due east 500 leagues, and from the Gallapagoes, under +the Line, 600 leagues. + +Dampier says, “Captain Davis told me lately, that after his departure +from Ria Lexa, he went, after several traverses, to the Gallapagoes; and +that standing thence southward for wind, to bring him about Terra del +Fuego, in the latitude of 27 deg. S. about 500 leagues from Copayapo, on +the coast of Chili, he saw a small sandy island just by him; and that +they saw to the westward of it a long track of pretty high land, +trending away to the N. W. out of sight.” + + + END OF THE FIRST VOLUME. + + + + + Transcriber’s notes + + +New original cover art included with this eBook is granted to the public +domain. + +The illustrations have been moved to appropriate paragraph breaks. + +The original text used the long s. This has been changed to the regular +s. + +Obvious typographical errors have been corrected. + +Archaic and inconsistent spelling and hyphenation have been retained. + +The opening square bracket on page 237 appears in the original, there is +no matching closing bracket. + +Marking of quotations in the original is inconsistent: where quotation +marks appear at the start of each line only those at the start of +paragraphs have been retained; in other cases quotation marks follow the +original even when they seem irregular. + +*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK 77886 *** |